Catalog 2003-4 by dfgh4bnmu

VIEWS: 52 PAGES: 120

									Graduate Catalog
       2 0 0 3 – 2 0 0 4

To discuss graduate opportunities at WPI              Worcester                                             MetroWest
in greater detail or to request application           100 Institute Road                                    225 Turnpike Road, Southborough
or registration materials, please contact the         All Programs
                                                                                                            Computer Science,
following at WPI:                                     Wednesday, May 7, 2003                                Electrical and Computer Engineering Programs
                                                      Campus Center, 6 p.m.                                 Tuesday, May 6, 2003
Graduate Studies & Enrollment Office
100 Institute Road                                                                                          Room 207, 6 p.m.
                                                      Wednesday, August 27, 2003
Worcester, MA 01609                                   Higgins House, 6 p.m.                                 Tuesday, August 26, 2003
508-831-5301 (V)
                                                      Wednesday, September 24, 2003*                        Room 207, 6 p.m.
508-831-5717 (F) (E)                                       Campus Center, 6 p.m.                                 Tuesday, January 6, 2004
                                                      Wednesday, January 7, 2004                            Room 207, 6 p.m.
Waltham Campus                                        Campus Center, 6 p.m.                                 Tuesday, May 11, 2004
Graduate Studies & Enrollment Office                  Wednesday, March 18, 2004*                            Room 207, 6 p.m.
60 Hickory Drive                                      Campus Center, 6 p.m.
Waltham, MA 02451-1012
800-WPI-9717 (V)                                      Wednesday, May 12, 2004
781-466-8499 (F)                                      Campus Center, 6 p.m. (E)                             *Management only
                                                      60 Hickory Drive
Courses in the following disciplines are              Computer Science,
available at these WPI locations this year.           Electrical and Computer Engineering, and
                                                      Management Programs
Worcester:                                            Thursday, May 8, 2003
All programs                                          Room 501, 6 p.m.
MetroWest:                                            Thursday, August 28, 2003
Computer Science,                                     Room 501, 6 p.m.
Electrical and Computer Engineering
                                                      Thursday, January 8, 2004
Waltham:                                              Room 501, 6 p.m.
Computer Science                                      Thursday, May 13, 2004
Electrical and Computer Engineering                   Room 501, 6 p.m.

                                                      To ensure that a representative is available to speak with you, you must register for
                                                      the information session and specify the areas of study in which you are interested—
                                                      call 800-WPI-9717, or fill out the online registration form to reserve your space.

Notice of Disclaimer
WPI reserves the right to make changes in policy, regulations, tuition and fees subsequent to the publication of this material. For a current
description of the WPI policies and procedures, tuition and fees, please contact the Graduate Studies & Enrollment Office.

Notice of Nondiscrimination
As a matter of practice and policy, and in accordance with the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972,
Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, and other state and federal laws, WPI does not discriminate on the basis of race, color, age,
sex, ancestry, religion, national origin, sexual orientation, family status, disability or membership in the armed services, in recruiting and
admitting students, awarding financial aid, recruiting and hiring faculty and staff, or in operating any of its programs and activities.

Notice of Accreditation
WPI is accredited as an institution by the New England Association of Schools and Colleges Inc., a nongovernmental, nationally recognized
organization whose affiliated institutions include elementary schools through collegiate institutions offering post-graduate instruction. In
addition, undergraduate programs leading to majors in chemical, civil, electrical, industrial, manufacturing and mechanical engineering are
accredited by the Engineering Accreditation Commission of the Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology (ABET). The
Chemistry and Biochemistry Department and its program are approved by the American Chemical Society for a major in chemistry. The
computer science program is accredited by the Computer Sciences Accreditation Board.
Welcome to WPI
WPI is a doctoral university offering graduate education and research
opportunities in engineering, management and science. Founded in 1865 as an
undergraduate school, WPI has become a leader in graduate research and
education, awarding its first graduate degree in 1893. As the third oldest private
technological university in the United States, WPI has much to offer by way of
scholarship, history and community leadership. The faculty and student body
comprise some of the world’s brightest and most talented individuals, who bring
diversity and excitement to the learning process.
With approximately 1,000 graduate students, WPI can offer individual attention
in its classrooms and laboratories; students and faculty have opportunities to work
collaboratively and interactively. Through its commitment to provide diverse and
global opportunities, WPI provides students with unique opportunities to study
with renowned educators, utilize state-of-the-art laboratories, and create new
knowledge and tools that will become part of the future.
For those who endeavor to pursue a life of scholarship in academia and whose
credentials are at the highest levels, WPI offers teaching assistantships, research
assistantships and many fully funded fellowships, which are provided through
endowed funds of our founders, alumni, corporations and community
philanthropists. Our master’s programs focus on working professionals who want
to advance their academic careers in technical or management fields. And our
doctoral programs focus on research at the frontiers of knowledge, and training for
teaching and research.
Flexibility and convenience are fundamental components of our programs.
Students have the option to design independent and interdisciplinary programs of
study, on a full- or part-time basis. For full-time working professionals, graduate
certificate and masters degree programs are available during twilight and evening
hours at one of three conveniently located campuses in the heart of New England
or in eastern Massachusetts: in Worcester, Southborough and Waltham. Finally,
through our Advanced Distance Learning Network (ADLN), many courses are
available in the virtual environment, either via videotapes, satellite or the Web,
providing the maximum in convenience.
WPI takes pride in offering first-rate graduate and research programs. I invite you
to read this catalog, talk with our admissions staff and faculty, and visit our
campuses. I am confident that you will find WPI to be a university at which you
will have every opportunity to achieve your goals for advanced study and career
                                       Dr. Edward Alton Parrish
                                       President, Worcester Polytechnic Institute

    About the University and the Community
                                                                                                    The current student body of 3,800
                                                                                                    includes more than 400 full-time and
                                                                                                    more than 600 part-time and nondegree
                                                                                                    graduate students. They are taught by
                                                                                                    about 220 tenure-track and 215 part-time
                                                                                                    and non-tenure-track faculty members.

                                                                                                    WPI’s main campus is set on an 80-acre
                                                                                                    hilltop campus situated in a residential sec-
                                                                                                    tion of Worcester, Massachusetts, New
                                                                                                    England’s third largest city. The University
                                                                                                    also maintains branch campuses in
                                                                                                    Waltham, a suburb of Boston, and
                                                                                                    Southborough, located about 20 miles
                                                                                                    west of Boston. The three campuses are
                                                                                                    within a region known for its concentra-
    Graduate Study at WPI                          The University                                   tion of high-technology, healthcare,
    WPI, the nation’s third oldest technologi-     WPI was founded in 1865 as the Worces-           biotechnology and biomedical engineering
    cal university, was also among the first to    ter County Free Institute of Industrial          research and industry.
    recognize the need to provide engineering,     Science, primarily through the efforts of        Worcester, a city of 170,000, is well
    technical and management professionals         John Boynton, a prosperous tinware man-          known for its many colleges and for such
    with graduate-level educational opportuni-     ufacturer from the nearby town of                cultural landmarks as the Worcester Art
    ties on a part- and full-time basis.           Templeton, Massachusetts. It was the             Museum, which houses one of the finest
    Opportunities for graduate study at the        merger of Boynton’s vision with that of          collections in the country, and the world-
    University range from formal graduate          Ichabod Washburn, the community’s lead-          renowned American Antiquarian Society,
    degree programs, to graduate certificates,     ing industrialist, that resulted in what was     both of which are adjacent to WPI. Also
    to advanced study for nondegree students,      then a unique educational program, one           nearby are the historic Higgins Armory
    to off-campus study through WPI’s              that combined scientific and technical           Museum and the Ecotarium, a museum
    Advanced Distance Learning Network,            studies with practical work in a model           dedicated to environmental exploration.
    which brings graduate education to the         industrial shop.
                                                                                                    Music is well represented by several excel-
    workplace or home. Part-time graduate          WPI awarded its first master of science          lent choruses, a symphony orchestra and
    students at WPI benefit from the same          degree, in electrical engineering, in 1893.      concerts performed by internationally rec-
    personalized faculty advising as our full-     Its first doctoral degree, in natural science,   ognized artists in Mechanics Hall, one of
    time students.                                 was granted in 1904. New programs have           the country’s finest concert halls. The city
    WPI addresses the requirements of full-        been added regularly in response to the          is also home to several professional and
    time students, technically oriented profes-    growing capabilities of the University and       amateur theater companies. The 15,500-
    sionals and secondary school educators         the changing needs of the professions.           seat Worcester Centrum Centre hosts a
    with a wide range of advanced courses and      Currently, WPI offers master’s degree            wide variety of entertainment and athletic
    programs with flexibility, quality and opti-   programs in 30 disciplines and doctoral          events.
    mal accessibility. For added convenience,      programs in 23 disciplines.                      In the heart of New England, the city is
    many programs are offered at one or more       More than 40 years ago, responding to the        within an easy drive of many historical
    of our three campuses in central and east-     demanding work schedules of profession-          sites, cultural centers and recreational facil-
    ern Massachusetts or through our Advance       als, WPI developed the first of what is          ities. These include Boston’s Freedom Trail,
    Distance Learning Network.                     today an extensive array of part-time            Fenway Park, the beaches of Cape Cod
                                                   graduate programs. Each is designed to           and Maine, the ski slopes of New
                                                   accommodate the professional develop-            Hampshire and Vermont, the Berkshires,
                                                   ment needs of those with significant career      and several major metropolitan areas fea-
                                                   and family commitments.                          turing world-class museums, concert halls
                                                                                                    and professional sports teams.

                                                   TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents
Campus Addresses, Contacts and Information Sessions .... Inside Front Cover
About WPI .................................................................................................. 2
Graduate Calendar ........................................................................................4
Academic Calendar ...................................................................................... 5
Graduate Degrees and Certificates ................................................................6
Grading System / Academic Standards ..........................................................9
Admission Information ..............................................................................13
        Application Requirements ..................................................................15
Financial Information ................................................................................16
        Tuition and Fees ................................................................................17
        Assistantships and Fellowships ............................................................18
Registration ................................................................................................19
Degree Requirements ..................................................................................20
Theses and Dissertations ............................................................................22
Advanced Distance Learning Network ........................................................23
Student Services ..........................................................................................24
Academic Departments ..............................................................................26
        Biology and Biotechnology ................................................................27
        Biomedical Engineering ......................................................................29
        Chemical Engineering ........................................................................35
        Chemistry and Biochemistry ..............................................................39
        Civil and Environmental Engineering ................................................41
        Computer and Communications Networks ........................................45
        Computer Science ..............................................................................47
        Electrical and Computer Engineering ................................................50
        Fire Protection Engineering ................................................................55
        Management ......................................................................................57
        Manufacturing Engineering ................................................................60
        Materials Science and Engineering ....................................................62
        Mathematical Sciences ........................................................................66
        Mechanical Engineering ....................................................................71
        Physics ................................................................................................78
Course Descriptions ....................................................................................80
Campus Map and Directions ..............................................Inside Back Cover
Index ........................................................................................................113


                            S M T W R F S                             S M T W R F S
                            27   28   29   30   31   1    2           8    9    10   11   12   13   14

                            3    4    5    6    7    8    9    FEB    15   16   17   18   19   20   21

                     AUG    10   11   12   13   14   15   16          22   23   24   25   26   27   28

                            17   18   19   20   21   22   23          29   1    2    3    4    5    6

                            24   25   26   27   28   29   30          7    8    9    10   11   12   13   SPRING
      SEPTEMBER 1           31   1    2    3    4    5    6           14   15   16   17   18   19   20
       LABOR DAY                                               MAR
                            7    8    9    10   11   12   13          21   22   23   24   25   26   27

                     SEPT   14   15   16   17   18   19   20          28   29   30   31   1    2    3

                            21   22   23   24   25   26   27          4    5    6    7    8    9    10

                            28   29   30   1    2    3    4    APR    11   12   13   14   15   16   17

                            5    6    7    8    9    10   11          18   19   20   21   22   23   24

                     OCT    12   13   14   15   16   17   18          25   26   27   28   29   30   1

       FALL                 19   20   21   22   23   24   25          2    3    4    5    6    7    8

                            26   27   28   29   30   31   1    MAY    9    10   11   12   13   14   15

                            2    3    4    5    6    7    8           16   17   18   19   20   21   22   Graduation

                     NOV    9    10   11   12   13   14   15          23   24   25   26   27   28   29

                            16   17   18   19   20   21   22          30   31   1    2    3    4    5       MAY 31
                                                                                                         MEMORIAL DAY

      NOVEMBER 27           23   24   25   26   27   28   29          6    7    8    9    10   11   12

                            30   1    2    3    4    5    6    JUNE   13   14   15   16   17   18   19

                     DEC    7    8    9    10   11   12   13          20   21   22   23   24   25   26   SUMMER
                            14   15   16   17   18   19   20          27   28   29   30   1    2    3

                            21   22   23   24   25   26   27          4    5    6    7    8    9    10      JULY 5
                                                                                                         DAY (OBSERVED)
                            28   29   30   31   1    2    3    JULY   11   12   13   14   15   16   17

                            4    5    6    7    8    9    10          18   19   20   21   22   23   24

                     JAN    11   12   13   14   15   16   17          25   26   27   28   29   30   31

                            18   19   20   21   22   23   24          1    2    3    4    5    6    7

                            25   26   27   28   29   30   31          8    9    10   11   12   13   14

                     FEB    1    2    3    4    5    6    7    AUG    15   16   17   18   19   20   21


                                                                               ACADEMIC CALENDAR

                                                                                    The graduate academic calendar is divided
                                                                                    into fall, spring and summer semesters.
                                                                                    The undergraduate academic calendar is
                                                                                    divided into seven-week terms: the fall
                                                                                    semester terms, A and B; the spring
                                                                                    semester terms, C and D. Term E is the
                                                                                    summer semester. Details of the WPI
                                                                                    academic calendar, including dates on
                                                                                    which graduate classes begin and end for
20 03                                    20 04                                      each semester, appear below.
August 15                                January 15, 16 and 19
Teaching assistants report to campus     Walk-in registration for spring semester
August 18, 19, 20                        courses
Graduate student orientation             January 15
August 28, 29, September 2               First day of classes, Term C
Walk-in registration for fall semester   (undergraduates)
courses                                  January 19
August 28                                Spring semester graduate classes begin
First day of classes, Term A             February 16
(undergraduates)                         Deadline for filing application for
September 2                              graduation for May 2004
Fall semester graduate classes begin     March 4
October 16                               Last day of classes, Term C
Last day of classes, Term A              (undergraduates)
                                         March 16
October 28                               First day of classes, Term D
First day of classes, Term B
                                         April 30
                                         Spring semester graduate classes end
October 31
Deadline for filing application          May 4
for graduation for February 2004         Last day of classes, Term D
November 25– 30
Thanksgiving recess                      May 22
                                         Spring 2004 commencement
December 18
Term B classes end                       June 1– 3 (tentative)
(undergraduates)                         Walk-in Registration for
                                         summer session classes
December 19
Fall semester ends                       June 3 (tentative)
                                         Summer session classes begin
                                         June 7
                                         Deadline for filing application for
                                         graduation for October 2004
                                         July 23 (tentative)
                                         Last day of classes, graduate summer
                                         short (7-week) courses
                                         August 13 (tentative)
                                         Last day of classes, graduate summer
                                         long (10-week) courses


    Graduate Degree                                Master of Engineering (M.E.)                    the Committee on Graduate Studies and
                                                                                                   Research (CGSR). At least one member of
    Programs                                       Offered in:                                     the group submitting the proposal must be
    WPI offers graduate study leading to the       • Biomedical Engineering                        from a department or program currently
    master of science, master of engineering,      • Civil and Environmental Engineering           authorized to award the master’s degree, and
    master of mathematics for educators,                                                           no more than half of the total academic
    master of business administration, and the
                                                   Master of Business                              credit may be taken in any one department
    doctor of philosophy degrees. Please see       Administration (M.B.A.)                         Application requirements include a gradu-
    chart on page 11 for details.                  Program                                         ate studies application, $70 application
                                                   Provides students with strategies for the       fee, official academic transcripts from all
    The number of courses offered each year
                                                   successful application of technology to         post-secondary institutions, three letters of
    may be limited in some disciplines; how-
                                                   complex business environments. The              reference, and a plan of study signed by
    ever, the schedule of courses over a period
                                                   degree requirements are described in this       advisors from the cooperating depart-
    of time generally allows a student taking
                                                   catalog and in a separate brochure available    ments. All documents are to be sent to the
    three or four courses per semester to com-
                                                   from the Department of Management at            Graduate Studies & Enrollment Office.
    plete the course requirements in about two
    years. Students taking two courses per
                                                                                                   The Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
    semester complete the course requirements      Master of Mathematics for
    for the master of science or engineering                                                       Program
                                                   Educators (M.M.E.) Program                      Available in biomedical science, mathemat-
    degrees in about three years, or the master
                                                   In response to the national need to prepare     ical sciences and all of the disciplines out-
    of business administration degree in about
                                                   junior and senior high school students with     lined previously except management
    four years.
                                                   imaginative mathematics teaching, WPI           programs, mathematics for educators,
    Questions relating to these programs           offers a specific part-time graduate program,   financial mathematics and industrial math-
    should be referred to the discipline depart-   the master of mathematics for educators,        ematics.
    ment heads or the Graduate Studies &           for teachers of mathematics. This program
    Enrollment Office.                             allows junior high, high school and com-        Interdisciplinary Doctoral
                                                   munity college teachers an opportunity to       Programs
    Master of Science (M.S.)                       obtain a master’s degree in a content-based     New fields of research and study that com-
    Degree Programs                                program at a time convenient to practicing      bine traditional fields in innovative ways
    Available, on a full-time and part-time        teachers. Taught by professors of mathemat-     are constantly evolving. In response to this,
    basis, in the following disciplines:           ics at WPI, the program is designed to per-     WPI encourages formation of interdiscipli-
    • Applied Mathematics                          mit the teachers to learn from professors’      nary doctoral programs to meet new
    • Applied Statistics                           research interests and includes an under-       professional needs or the special interests
    • Biomedical Engineering                       standing of current developments in the         of particular students. Such programs are
    • Chemical Engineering                         field. Scholarship aid, which covers approxi-   initiated by groups of at least three full-
    • Chemistry and Biochemistry                   mately 40% of the cost of tuition, is avail-    time faculty members who share a com-
    • Civil and Environmental Engineering          able to qualified participants.                 mon interest in a cross-disciplinary field. A
    • Computer Science                                                                             sponsoring group submits to the Com-
    • Construction Project Management              Interdisciplinary Master of                     mittee on Graduate Studies and Research
    • Electrical and Computer Engineering          Science (M.S.) Programs                         (CGSR) a proposal for an interdisciplinary
    • Financial Mathematics                        An interdisciplinary master of science          degree, together with the details of a pro-
    • Fire Protection Engineering                  degree is available to qualified applicants.    gram of study and the credentials of the
    • Industrial Mathematics                       New fields of research and study that com-      members of the group. At least one mem-
    • Interdisciplinary Studies                    bine traditional fields in innovative ways      ber of the group must be from a depart-
    • Marketing and Technological                  are constantly evolving. Because of this,       ment or program currently authorized
      Innovations                                  WPI encourages the formation of inter-          toward the doctorate.
    • Manufacturing Engineering                    disciplinary master’s programs to meet new
    • Materials Science and Engineering                                                            If the CGSR approves the proposal, the
                                                   professional needs or the special interests
    • Mathematical Sciences                                                                        sponsoring group serves in place of a
                                                   of particular students.
    • Mechanical Engineering                                                                       department in establishing specific degree
                                                   Interdisciplinary master’s programs may         requirements beyond those of the
    • Operations and Information Technology
                                                   include a thesis or project requirement and     Institute, in advising, in preparing and
    • Physics
                                                   require at least 30 credits beyond the bache-   conducting examinations, and in certifying
    Master’s Programs                              lor’s degree. Proposals for such programs are   fulfillment of degree requirements.
    Available only on a full-time basis in:        initiated by groups of at least two faculty
                                                                                                   WPI and the University of Massachusetts
      • Biology/Biotechnology                      members from different academic depart-
                                                                                                   Medical School have developed a graduate
      • Chemical Engineering                       ments who share a common interest in a
                                                                                                   biomedical engineering program, jointly
                                                   cross-disciplinary field and are submitted to
                                                                                                   administered by the two institutions.

                                       GRADUATE DEGREES AND CERTIFICATES

Graduate and                                    Computer Science
                                                (Undergraduate degree in computer sci-
                                                                                                Materials Science and Engineering
                                                                                                (Undergraduate degree in engineering,
Advanced Certificate                            ence or computer engineering preferred;         chemistry, physics or mathematics pre-
Programs                                        students with other backgrounds may need
                                                to take CS 507 or CS 501 as bridge cours-

Keeping pace with technological advance-        es into the program.)                           Additional concentrations may be
ment today is a never-ending task. At           • Artificial Intelligence                       developed in consultation with an
WPI, our innovative graduate level certifi-     • Computer and Communications                   academic advisor.
cate programs are strategically established        Networks                                     Advanced Certificate Programs
to help update a professional person’s          • Computer Systems                              The Advanced Certificate Programs (ACP)
understanding of advancing technology           • Database Design                               provide master’s degree holders with an
with insights and the study of new              • Graphics/Image Processing/Visualization
                                                                                                opportunity to continue their studies in
concepts, without necessitating a major         • Programming Languages
                                                                                                advanced topics in the disciplines in which
commitment of time and resources.               • Software Engineering and Interface
                                                                                                they hold their graduate degree or that are
WPI offers two certificate program options         Design
                                                                                                closely related to their master’s degree
for individuals wishing to pursue graduate      Electrical and Computer Engineering             fields. The programs consist of a set of five
course studies—the Graduate Certificate         (Undergraduate degree in electrical or          courses—none of which were included in
and the Advanced Certificate. Each offers       computer engineering preferred.)                the student’s formal master’s program of
the benefit of academic advising by WPI         • Computational Fields                          study. The courses may include either a
faculty, without the necessity to commit to     • Computer Systems                              depth or a breadth option. Each partici-
a full degree program. Upon completion of       • Computer and Communications                   pating department identifies one or more
the appropriate course series, the student is     Networks                                      guideline programs; however, each stu-
awarded the applicable certificate in the                                                       dent’s program of study may be cus-
area of specialization (e.g., Certificate of    Fire Protection Engineering
                                                                                                tomized to satisfy the student’s unique
Graduate Study in Management with a             (Undergraduate degree in science or engi-
                                                                                                interests. The program of study is reviewed
specialization in Information Technology).      neering preferred.)
                                                                                                and approved by an academic advisor who
Course credits may be applied to a WPI          • Computer Modeling
                                                                                                is assigned upon the student’s acceptance
graduate degree, if the student is admitted     • Industrial Applications
                                                                                                to the program.
to a degree program at a later date.            • Failure Analysis/Investigation
                                                • Performance-based design                      Individuals may also apply for program
Graduate Certificate Programs                   • Other mutually agreed theme                   admission to department programs closely
The Graduate Certificate Programs (GCP)                                                         related to their master’s degree fields. Each
                                                Mathematical Sciences                           department’s Graduate Committee will
provide an opportunity for students hold-       (Knowledge of differential equations
ing undergraduate degrees to continue                                                           review such applications on a case-by-case
                                                equivalent to that provided by an intro-        basis to determine the applicant’s eligibili-
their study in an advanced area. A B.S. or      ductory college course required for the
B.A. degree is the general prerequisite.                                                        ty. Individuals applying under this scenario
                                                Industrial Mathematics Certificate              would follow the same admission proce-
However, some departments look for relat-       Program; knowledge of statistics equivalent
ed background when making admission                                                             dures as individuals applying who do not
                                                to that provided by an introductory college     hold a WPI master’s degree. Advanced cer-
decisions. This program requires students       statistics course required for the Industrial
to complete four to six thematically related                                                    tificates, with just a few areas of possible
                                                Statistics Certificate Program.)                specialization listed, are available in:
courses in their area of interest. Each stu-    • Industrial Mathematics
dent’s program of study must be approved        • Industrial Statistics                         Civil and Environmental Engineering
by the Academic Advisor.                                                                        • Waste Minimization and Management
Biomedical Engineering                                                                          • Building Regulatory Integration in
                                                (Undergraduate degree in science, engi-
(Undergraduate degree in engineering or                                                           Construction Management
                                                neering or management preferred; individ-
science preferred.)                             uals holding bachelor’s degree in other dis-    • Computer Based Support Systems for
• Medical Instrumentation and Devices           ciplines with relevant work experience also       Construction Management
Civil and Environmental Engineering             considered.)                                    Computer Science
(Undergraduate degree in civil engineering      • E-Commerce                                    • Advanced Computer Systems
or another acceptable field preferred.)         • Management Information Security               • Advanced Computer Science
• Construction Project Management               • Information Technology                        • Artificial Intelligence Data and
• Environmental Engineering                     • Management of Technology                        Knowledge
• Master Builder                                • Customized Certificate of Management          • Data and Knowledge Based Systems
• Materials/Transportation                      Manufacturing Engineering                       • Compilers and Languages
• Structural Engineering                        (Undergraduate degree in engineering,           • Image Science
• Geotechnical Engineering                      mathematics or computer science pre-

    Electrical and Computer Engineering            lines as those established for degree-seeking
    • Computational Fields                         graduate students, with the following
                                                                                                   Combined Bachelor’s/
    • Computer and Communications                  exception: if after completing 9 credits, a     Master’s Program
      Networks                                     certificate program student’s grade point       The Combined Bachelor’s/Master’s
    • Advanced Computer Systems                    average falls below 2.5, he/she will be with-   Program is a unitary program leading a
                                                   drawn from the program unless the acade-        student to a bachelor of science degree and
    Fire Protection Engineering                    mic department intervenes.
    • Computer Modeling                                                                            to a master of business administration,
                                                                                                   master of engineering, or master of science
    • Industrial Applications                      Program Planning
    • Failure Analysis/Investigation                                                               degree. The purpose of the Combined
                                                   Students will be assigned faculty advisors
    • Performance-based design                                                                     Bachelor’s/Master’s Program is to give WPI
                                                   and will be required to complete a plan of
    • Other mutually agreed theme                                                                  undergraduates an opportunity to earn a
                                                   study. The plan of study must be approved
                                                                                                   bachelor’s and a master’s degree from WPI
    Mechanical Engineering                         and signed by the Academic Advisor before
                                                                                                   concurrently in less time than would be
    • Computational Mechanics                      the end of the student’s first semester in
                                                                                                   required if the student were to complete
    • Fluid Mechanics                              the program. Copies of the plan will be
                                                                                                   work on the bachelor’s degree before
    • Stress Analysis                              maintained by the student, the Academic
                                                                                                   beginning work on the master’s degree. To
    • Vibrations and Controls                      Advisor and the department. Students may
                                                                                                   gain the full benefit of this program, a stu-
    • Manufacturing Engineering                    initiate written requests to the advisor, via
                                                                                                   dent should apply for the Combined
    • Materials Science and Engineering            the program modification form, to modify
                                                                                                   Program well before the bachelor’s degree
                                                   the program of study. Copies of approved
                                                                                                   is completed. Application at the begin-
    Additional specializations may be              program modification(s) should be
                                                                                                   ning of the junior year is recommended.
    developed in consultation with an              retained by the student, the Academic
    academic advisor.                              Advisor and the department.                     For the master of science and master of
                                                                                                   engineering degrees, the Combined
    General Information                            Completion Time Limit                           Program typically allows a student to com-
                                                   Certificate program students will have four     plete requirements for both degrees in
    Application Process                            years from the date of matriculation to com-    about one more year of full-time study than
    The application to these programs requires     plete the program. International students       would be required to earn the bachelor’s
    submitting to the Graduate Studies &           may apply to these programs. However, for       degree. With careful planning, a student
    Enrollment Office an official application      WPI to issue the required student visa,         can obtain a similar reduction in the
    form, official copies of transcripts for all   international students must be registered       amount of time required to earn an M.B.A.
    college course work completed, and a $70       for a minimum of 9 credits during their         Undergraduate students may apply up to
    application fee (waived for WPI alumni).       first semester and must complete their pro-     four courses to the master’s degree, with
    Management certificate applicants must         gram within one academic year.                  prior written approval from professors and
    also submit three letters of recommenda-                                                       the academic department. The M.S. por-
    tion and GMAT/GRE scores. Inter-               Transfer of Credits                             tion of the program must be completed as a
    national students may apply to these pro-      Up to 6 credits of course work taken at         full-time student. See page 21 for more
    grams. However, for WPI to issue the           WPI may be transferred into the program.        details
    Form I-20 for a student visa, international    Students who wish to apply credits earned
                                                   in the GCP or the ACP to a subsequent
    students must be registered for a minimum
    of 9 credits during their first semester and   master’s or Ph.D. program at WPI must           Advanced Study for
    must complete their program within one         make formal application to the degree-          Nondegree Students
    academic year.                                 granting department. Admission to the           For those who do not want to commit
                                                   GCP or ACP does not guarantee admis-            themselves to a degree program but who
    Registration Procedures                        sion to any subsequent WPI degree-grant-        wish to enroll in a single course or a limit-
    Graduate and Advanced Certificate              ing program.                                    ed number of courses in a specialized
    Program students register at the same time,                                                    field, WPI provides the opportunity to
    follow the same registration procedures        Program Completion
                                                   Satisfactory completion requires a cumula-      participate in graduate level courses on an
    and participate in the same classes.                                                           ad hoc basis. When registering for courses
                                                   tive grade point average of 3.0 or better
                                                                                                   as a nondegree student, grading may be
    Tuition and Fees                               (A=4.0), with grades of C or better in all
                                                   courses completed in the program. Upon          either conventional (A,B,C) or Pass/Fail.
    Tuition and fees for GCP and ACP stu-
                                                   satisfactory completion of the program,         Pass/Fail grading must be elected at the
    dents are the same as for all other WPI
                                                   students will receive a certificate of gradu-   time of registration, and courses taken on
    graduate students on a per-credit-hour
                                                   ate study or advanced graduate study in         the Pass/ Fail basis are not transferable to
    basis. Tuition for 2003-2004 Academic
                                                   the chosen discipline. Should students later    any master’s degree program. The maxi-
    Year is $858 per credit hour.
                                                   apply to the M.S. degree or Ph.D. pro-          mum number of courses that may be
    Academic Policies                              gram and be accepted, the GCP and ACP           taken as a nondegree student is four, with
    Academic policies follow the same guide-       courses will be considered for transfer         the following exceptions: three-course
                                                   toward the degree requirements.
                                       GRADUATE DEGREES AND CERTIFICATES

maximum in biomedical engineering,              WPI’s continuing and professional educa-        ment is based on the following grading
computer science, and electrical and com-       tion programs are delivered on the              system:
puter engineering; two-course maximum           Worcester campus and at branch campuses         A      Excellent
in Management.                                  in Waltham and Southborough, Massachu-          B      Good
                                                setts; at selected public facilities through-   C      Pass
Intercollege Studies                            out Massachusetts; and at corporate sites.      D      Unacceptable for graduate credit
                                                Branch campuses are open over 70 hours a
and the Consortium                              week. These campuses provide full-service
                                                                                                F      Fail
The Colleges of Worcester Consortium            facilities including state-of-the-art comput-   AU Audit
was established in 1967. In the                 er labs with T-1 Internet access.               NC No credit (only for thesis work);
Consortium, 20,000 students of eight                                                                   will not be recorded on transcript
four-year colleges with graduate programs,      To learn more about WPI’s continuing and
                                                                                                P      Pass; unacceptable for graduate
two two-year schools, a medical school and      professional education, visit
a veterinary school have access to all the or call 508-831-5517.
                                                                                                I      Incomplete; transition grade only;
educational benefits of these institutions as                                                          becomes grade of F if not changed
well as nine other specialized institutions     School of Industrial                                   by instructor within 12 months
in the area. The Consortium members and
associates whose facilities and programs
                                                Management (SIM)                                W      Withdrawal
                                                The connection between technology and           SP     Satisfactory progress; continuing
have been particularly useful to WPI grad-
                                                business management has never been                     registration in
uate students are Assumption College,
                                                more powerful than it is today. Techno-                thesis/dissertation/directed research
Clark University, College of the Holy
Cross, Tufts School of Veterinary               logical advances have changed the very          CR Credit for work at another institu-
Medicine, University of Massachusetts           nature of business by creating and elimi-              tion
Medical School, Worcester Foundation for        nating markets, altering communication          UP Unsatisfactory progress; this grade
Biomedical Research and Worcester State         patterns and setting new rules about the               remains on the file transcript
College. Cross-registration in courses and      flow of information.
                                                                                                Academic Standards
the use of special laboratory facilities are    SIM has the unique ability to combine           Students must maintain high academic
encouraged. The Consortium operates a           technology-based courses with manage-           standards in all their program activities.
free bus service for transporting students      ment courses to offer customized certifi-       After completion of 12 credit hours, all
between the colleges. Schedule for services     cate programs for industry. Drawing from        students must maintain an overall grade
can be found in the Gordon Library.             more than 50 years of experience, SIM           point average (GPA) above 2.75 to be con-
                                                offers challenging, technology-oriented         sidered as making satisfactory progress.
Continuing and                                  business programs that give its graduates a
                                                                                                If a student’s overall GPA falls to 2.75 or
Professional Education                          distinct edge in the high-tech management
                                                marketplace.                                    below, the student and advisor are noti-
at WPI                                          SIM professors are experts in all aspects of
                                                                                                fied by the Registrar that the student is
                                                                                                not making satisfactory progress.
Through the Department of Continuing            technology management: running high-
and Professional Education, WPI delivers        tech firms; converting technological inno-      If the overall GPA of any student falls
over 300 noncredit, nondegree programs          vations into commercial products, services      below 2.65, the Registrar will inform the
annually to executives, managers and tech-      and organizations; and integrating technol-     student that all future registrations will be
nical professionals. More than 70,000 men       ogy into existing organizations.                given grades only on a pass/fail basis unless
and women have attended these programs                                                          the department Graduate Committee
during the past 24 years. Today’s programs      The school of industrial management,            intervenes.
focus on areas of critical importance to        designed for students who are sponsored
                                                by their employers, offers a four-year cur-     If the overall GPA of any student falls
business and industry: hands-on informa-                                                        below 2.5, the student is removed from
tion technology training programs, semi-        riculum that leads to a certificate of com-
                                                pletion and advanced certificate option.        the program unless the department
nars and workshops in such areas as man-                                                        Graduate Committee intervenes.
ufacturing, quality improvement, geomet-        Call 508-831-5208 for more information.
ric dimensioning and tolerancing, project                                                       Grade Point Average (GPA)
management and management develop-              Grading System/                                 Grades are assigned the following grade
ment; and customized corporate training                                                         points:
programs.                                       Academic Standards                              A = 4.0, B = 3.0, C = 2.0, D = 1.0 and F
Adult learners can enroll in just a single      Grading System                                  = 0.0. The grade point average is calculat-
program or participate in a professional        In order to assess progress throughout the      ed as the sum of the products of the grade
development certificate program in any of       graduate program, grades are assigned to        points and credit hours for each registered
the areas listed above.                         the student’s performance in course, pro-       activity (including courses, independent
                                                ject and thesis work. Academic achieve-         studies, directed research, thesis research


     and dissertation research) in the average,     Advising/Plan of Study
     divided by the total number of credit          Newly admitted students will be advised of
     hours for all registered activities in the     available courses that will be acceptable to
     average. If a student takes the same course    their program of study prior to registra-
     more than once, the course enters the GPA      tion, to encourage and facilitate preregis-
     only once, the most recent grade received      tration.
     for the course being used in the average.
                                                    Newly admitted full-time graduate stu-
     A student’s overall GPA is calculated on       dents will be assigned an academic advi-
     the basis of all registered activities taken   sor at the time they are accepted and
     while enrolled as a graduate student at        pay a tuition deposit. Part-time graduate
     WPI. WPI graduate courses taken before a       students will be assigned an advisor at
     student had status as a degree-seeking         the time of their admission to degree-
     graduate student are included in the over-     seeking status.
     all GPA. A student’s program GPA is cal-
     culated on the basis of those WPI courses      An Advisor of Record for M.S. thesis or
     listed by the student on the student’s         Ph.D. dissertation research must:
     Application for Graduation form. The           • be a tenured/tenure-track WPI fac-
     transcript will report the overall GPA.            ulty member and hold a dual or
                                                        collaborative appointment in the
     Courses transferred from elsewhere for             degree-granting department,
     graduate credit (for which a grade of CR is     or
     recorded on the WPI transcript), and           • be a Professor of Practice with an
     courses taken to satisfy undergraduate             appointment in the degree-granting
     degree requirements or to remove deficien-         department.
     cies in undergraduate preparation, are not
     included in either GPA. Registered activi-     In some cases, the Advisor of Record
     ties in which the student receives grades of   and the Thesis Advisor will be different
     AU, NC, P, I, W, SP or UP are not includ-      people. In these cases, a Thesis Advisor
     ed in either GPA.                              or Dissertation Advisor not from the
                                                    department granting the graduate degree
     Only registered activities in which a grade    MUST BE APPROVED BY A MAJOR-
     of A, B, C or CR was obtained may be           ITY OF THE FULL-TIME TENURED
     used to satisfy courses or credit require-     AND TENURE-TRACK DEPART-
     ments for a graduate degree.                   MENT FACULTY.
     Changing of Grades                             After consultation with and approval by
     Once a course is completed, a student          the advisor, each admitted student must
     wishing to change a grade to a withdrawal,     file a formal plan of study with the
     change an audit to a grade or change a         department within the first semester if
     grade to an audit must petition the            full-time, and within the first year if
     Committee on Graduate Studies and              part-time. Program changes are imple-
     Research (CGSR) to effect the change.          mented by advisor and student. Copies
     The petition must include the instructor’s     of the revised plan of study will be
     approval. Only under exceptional circum-       maintained in department files.
     stances will such requests be approved.        Three years after the initial filing of the
                                                    plan of study and in three-year intervals
                                                    thereafter, a revised plan of study must
                                                    be filed with the Registrar’s Office prior
                                                    to registration for additional academic
                                                    credit. The plan of study must reflect all
                                                    current courses that will be applicable
                                                    towards the student’s degree. Courses
                                                    that are no longer current must be
                                                    removed from the plan of study. The
                                                    department will determine which
                                                    courses are current.

                                    GRADUATE DEGREES AND CERTIFICATES

Index of Graduate Programs by Program Type
Master of Business Administration            Master of Science                          Graduate Certificate
Master of Engineering                        Ph.D. (Doctor of Philosophy)               Advanced Graduate Certificate
Master of Mathematics for Educators          Combined Bachelor’s / Master’s Program     Professional Master of Science

Index of Graduate Programs by Department
Biology and Biotechnology                                         Fire Protection Engineering
Master of Science in Biology/Biotechnology                        Master of Science in Fire Protection Engineering
Ph.D. in Biotechnology                                            Ph.D. in Fire Protection Engineering
                                                                  Graduate Certificate
Biomedical Engineering                                            Advanced Certificate
Master of Science in Biomedical Engineering
Master of Engineering in Biomedical Engineering                   Interdisciplinary Studies
Master of Engineering in Clinical Engineering                     Master of Science, Interdisciplinary Studies
Ph.D. in Biomedical Engineering                                     Impact Engineering
WPI/UMMS Joint Ph.D. in Biomedical Engineering                      Manufacturing Engineering Management
   and Medical Physics                                              Power Systems Management
Graduate Certificate                                              Ph.D., Interdisciplinary Studies
Biomedical Science                                                Management
Ph.D. in Biomedical Sciences                                      Master of Business Administration (M.B.A.)
                                                                  Master of Science in Marketing and Technological Innovation
Chemical Engineering                                              Master of Science in Operations and Information Technology
Master of Science in Chemical Engineering                         Graduate Certificate
Ph.D. in Chemical Engineering
                                                                  Manufacturing Engineering
Chemistry and Biochemistry                                        Master of Science in Manufacturing Engineering
Master of Science in Chemistry                                    Ph.D. in Manufacturing Engineering
Master of Science in Biochemistry                                 Graduate Certificate
Ph.D. in Chemistry
                                                                  Materials Science and Engineering
Civil and Environmental Engineering                               Master of Science in Materials Science and Engineering
Master of Science in Civil Engineering                            Ph.D. in Materials Science and Engineering
Master of Science in Environmental Engineering                    Graduate Certificate
Master of Science in Construction Project Management
Master of Engineering in Civil Engineering                        Mathematical Sciences
Ph.D. in Civil Engineering                                        Master of Mathematics for Educators
Graduate Certificate                                              Master of Science in Applied Mathematics
Advanced Certificate                                              Master of Science in Applied Statistics
                                                                  Professional Master of Science in Financial Mathematics
Computer Science                                                  Professional Master of Science in Industrial Mathematics
Master of Science in Computer Science                             Ph.D. in Mathematical Sciences
Master of Science in Computer Science                             Graduate Certificate
  Specializing in Computer and Communications Networks
  (CCN)                                                           Mechanical Engineering
Ph.D. in Computer Science                                         Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering
Graduate Certificate                                              Ph.D. in Mechanical Engineering
Advanced Certificate                                              Advanced Graduate Certificate

Electrical and Computer Engineering                               Physics
Master of Science in Electrical Engineering                       Master of Science in Physics
Master of Science in Electrical Engineering                       Ph.D. in Physics
  Specializing in Computer and Communications Networks
Ph.D. in Electrical Engineering
Graduate Certificate
Advanced Certificate


     Applying to WPI
     A complete chart of application require-          Chemistry and Biochemistry               • To learn more about admissions stan-
     ments for each program is on page 15.             GRE general and/or subject test            dards and policies, deadlines, fellow-
     Please direct questions to Graduate Studies       required                                   ships, teaching assistantships and
     & Enrollment 508-831-5301 or                      Chemical Engineering                       research assistantships, please contact the                                      Manufacturing Engineering                  Graduate Studies & Enrollment Office
                                                       Materials Science and Engineering          at 508-831-5301 or
     Requirements for admission include sub-
     mission of the following:                         GRE general test required for inter-     • For information on loan programs and
     • Application for admission to graduate           national applicants, recommended for       copies of the forms, contact WPI’s
       study (preference given to fall applicants      others                                     Financial Aid Office at 508-831-5469.
       with complete files before February 1)          Electrical and Computer
     • Nonrefundable $70 application fee               Engineering
       (waived for WPI alumni and current              GRE general test required for inter-
       WPI undergraduates)                             national applicants and those applying
     • Official college transcripts from all           for graduate fellowships
       accredited degree-granting institutions         Management
       attended                                        GMAT required for M.B.A.; M.S.
     • Three letters of recommendation                 applicants may substitute GRE for
       (and/or other references) from indi-            GMAT
       viduals who can comment on the
                                                       Mechanical Engineering Physics
       qualifications relevant to the applicant’s
                                                       GRE general test strongly
     • TOEFL (Test of English as a Foreign
       Language) scores must be submitted by           Civil and Environmental
       all applicants for whom English is not             Engineering
       the first language (waived for interna-         Fire Protection Engineering
       tional students who have attended a             Mathematical Sciences
       U.S. school full time for one year).            GRE not required. Submission of
       TOEFL scores are only valid for two             strong scores can improve an appli-
       years. Minimum score of 550 on the              cant’s success in competing for
       paper exam is required or 213 on the            financial aid
       computer-based exam.                         • Goddard Fellowship applicants are
     • Statement of purpose is required for           required to submit GRE or GMAT
       individuals applying to biology and            scores.
       biotechnology, biomedical/clinical engi-     • Incomplete applications are retained in
       neering, computer science, electrical and      the Graduate Studies & Enrollment
       computer engineering (Ph.D. only), fire        Office for one year.
       protection engineering (applicants with-     • To apply to WPI, write to the Graduate
       out FPE work experience only), manage-         Studies & Enrollment Office, WPI,
       ment, and mechanical engineering. This         100 Institute Road, Worcester, MA
       is a brief essay discussing back-ground,       01609-2280, call 508-831-5301 or e-
       interests, academic intent and the rea-        mail You may also apply
       sons the applicant feels he/she would          on-line through our Web site at
       benefit from the program.            
     • GRE (Graduate Record Examination)            • Applications for WPI’s graduate science
       and GMAT (Graduate Management                  and engineering programs may be
       Admissions Test) requirements:                 requested from the Graduate Studies &
         Biology and Biotechnology                    Enrollment Office at 508-831-5301 or
         Biomedical Engineering                       on-line at
         Computer Science                           • Graduate management applications
         GRE General Test required (for all           should be requested directly from
         applicants to the Biology and                the Management Department at
         Biotechnology Department)                    508-831-5218 or at

                                                                       ADMISSION INFORMATION

Admission to the graduate program of any
department is granted by that department
via the Graduate Studies & Enrollment
Office. Admission to graduate interdisci-
plinary programs is granted by the
Committee on Graduate Studies and
Admission to a program generally entitles
a student to work toward those degrees
offered by the admitting program. A
student who has not been admitted to a
program may not earn a degree from that
Some programs, in admitting a student,
determine the degree toward which the stu-
dent may work. In such a case, an admitted
student who wishes to work toward a differ-
ent degree in the same program should con-
sult the department head of the admitting
program as to procedures to be followed and
requirements. Typically, such cases involve
students who have been admitted to a pro-
gram leading to a master’s degree and who
wish to continue toward a doctorate.
An admitted student who wishes to work
toward a second degree offered by a differ-
ent department or program must apply to
that second program for admission.
Standard application procedures are fol-
lowed except that no application fee is
required for a second degree. Admission to
the second program is not automatic, and
is determined by the faculty of the second    Deferred Enrollment                            cates that the student will receive regular
program, based on customary admissions        An admitted student who wishes to defer        admission status only after overcoming the
standards.                                    enrollment must make such a request in         specific deficiencies as outlined in the con-
A minimum TOEFL score of 550 or 213           writing to the Graduate Studies &              ditional admission letter sent to these
(computer-based exam) is required of stu-     Enrollment Office, which will seek counsel     prospective students by the Graduate
dents admitted from non-English-speaking      from the department involved.                  Studies & Enrollment Office. The condi-
countries. This requirement may be waived                                                    tionally admitted student will be instruct-
in special cases by the departmental          Probational Admission                          ed in this letter as to specific course defi-
Graduate Committee.                           If an applicant’s undergraduate record is      ciencies, required minimum grades expect-
                                              below the usual standards for admission, but   ed to be attained in these classes, time over
Under some circumstances a student not        there are mitigating circumstances, admis-     which deficiencies are to be completed,
yet admitted to a program may earn grad-      sion on probation may be granted. Such         etc. Progress of the conditionally admitted
uate credit toward the requirements for a     admission usually means that the student’s     student will be monitored by the student’s
graduate degree. The fact that a student      performance will be reviewed at a specified    department/program of study. Please con-
has been allowed to register for courses      time and a decision will be made about con-    sult departmental descriptions for more
and earn graduate credit from a program       tinuation in the graduate program.             details.
does not guarantee that the student, at a
later date, will be admitted to that pro-     Conditional Admission                          Transfers and Waivers
gram. Students are therefore encouraged to    Under some circumstances (usually where        A student may petition for permission to
apply for admission to a program at the       the background of the student is consid-       use graduate courses taken at other institu-
earliest possible date.                       ered to be incomplete by the department        tions to satisfy WPI graduate degree
The procedure for applying as a part-time     or program), conditional admission may         requirements. A maximum of one-third of
degree-seeking student is the same as that    be granted. Conditional admission indi-        the credit requirements for a graduate
for a full-time student.
     degree may be satisfied by courses taken         Acceptability of Credit                         Admission to Interdisciplinary
     elsewhere. Petitions are subject to approval     Applicable to an Advanced                       Doctoral Programs
     by the student’s degree-granting program
     (which administratively may be a depart-
                                                      Degree                                          WPI encourages interdisciplinary research.
                                                      Graduate level credit, obtained from cours-     Students may apply for admission to inter-
     ment or a program), and are then filed                                                           disciplinary studies directly, but students
                                                      es, thesis and project work, may be gained
     with the Registrar. To ensure that work                                                          interested in such options should do so
     constitutes current practice in the field, the                                                   with the assistance of WPI faculty, as these
                                                      • Course work included in the approved
     program may set a latest date at which                                                           programs require internal sponsorship (see
                                                         plan of study completed at the graduate
     each course may be applied toward the                                                            Interdisciplinary Doctoral Programs, pages
                                                         level at WPI.
     degree. Such courses are recorded on the                                                         6 and 21).
     student’s WPI transcript with the grade          • Any course work completed at the grad-
                                                         uate level and successfully transferred to
     CR, and are not included in calculations                                                         Admission of Students
     of grade point averages. Grades earned in           WPI from other institutions (see Trans-
                                                         fers and Waivers). Grades of transferred     Who Have Not Completed
     Biomedical Consortium course work are
     recorded on the transcript as if the courses        credits are not added to the WPI             Their Baccalaureate Degrees
                                                         transcript.                                  In general, students must have earned a
     were taken on campus.
                                                      • Graduate course work completed at the         bachelor’s degree to be admitted, but WPI
     Applicants may file petitions with their                                                         undergraduate students may apply for the
                                                         undergraduate level at WPI and not
     application for admission to a WPI pro-                                                          Combined Bachelor’s/ Master’s Program.
                                                         applied toward another degree. Such
     gram. If the department admits the stu-                                                          Interested students should review the
                                                         requests must have the approval of the
     dent and approves the petition, notice of                                                        requirements listed under special pro-
     the approval may be included in the                                                              grams, and the requirements within the
     Institute’s letter of admission to the stu-      • With the degree department’s approval,
                                                                                                      desired graduate department.
     dent. This inclusion is known as admission          up to 9 credit hours applied toward a
     with advanced standing.                             previous master’s degree at WPI or else-     Matriculation
                                                         where may be used in partial fulfillment     Those who wish to pursue the master’s or
     A student with one or more WPI master’s             of the requirements for a second master’s
     degrees, who is seeking an additional mas-                                                       Ph.D. degree should formally apply for
                                                         degree at WPI.                               admission as early as possible. Non-admit-
     ter’s degree from WPI, may petition to           • Acceptable course work approved for the
     apply up to 9 credits used to obtain the                                                         ted students may take a maximum of four
                                                         Combined Bachelor’s/Master’s Program         courses and receive letter grades in most
     previous WPI degrees toward satisfying              completed at WPI, provided permission
     requirements for the degree presently                                                            departments; exceptions are: three-course
                                                         to take courses for graduate credit has      maximum for biomedical engineering,
     being sought.                                       been granted.                                computer science, and electrical and com-
     A student who withdraws from a graduate          • All acceptable project work done at the       puter engineering; two-course maximum
     program and is later readmitted may some-           graduate level at WPI.                       for management. Once these maximums
     times apply course and other credits taken       • All acceptable thesis work done at the        are reached, additional course registrations
     before withdrawal toward the degree. The            graduate level at WPI.                       will be changed to pass/fail and may not
     admitting program will determine at the          Departments/programs may limit the use          be used for degree credit. Therefore, appli-
     time of readmission which courses taken          of credit depending upon their specific         cations should not be delayed beyond the
     by the student may be applied toward the         departmental requirements.                      maximum per department.
     degree and the latest date those courses
                                                                                                      Each admitted student is assigned an
     may be applied. There is no limit, other         Deadlines                                       academic advisor. Advisors assist in devel-
     than that imposed by the program, on             Research and teaching assistantships are
     how many credits a readmitted student                                                            opment of a planned program of study
                                                      typically awarded by April 1 for the fall
     may use from prior admissions to the same                                                        which will meet departmental require-
                                                      semester. For prospective students request-
     degree program. Generally, all courses used                                                      ments while at the same time providing
                                                      ing such financial assistance, applications
     toward a degree must be completed within                                                         the opportunity to explore areas of interest
                                                      must be on file no later than February 1 of
     eight years.                                                                                     to the individual.
                                                      the academic year preceding admission.
     With the appropriate background, a student       Some programs also offer assistantships
     may ask the degree-granting program for          beginning in January, with an October 15
     permission to waive a required course and        application deadline. Applicants who do
     substitute a specified, more advanced course     not seek financial assistance must submit
     in the same discipline. Requests are subject     complete applications no later than April 1
     to approval by the student’s program and         to be considered for the fall semester regis-
     must be filed with the Registrar within one      tration, and no later than October 15 for
     year of the date of matriculation in the pro-    spring semester registration.
     gram. A program may waive (with specified
     substitutions) up to three required courses
     for a single student.
                                                                                      ADMISSION INFORMATION

                                                                                     Application Requirements
Certificate Applications
          Applicants to all graduate certificate and advanced certificate programs are required to submit to the Graduate Studies & Enrollment Office:
                     1. An application form,
                     2. A $70 application fee, and
                     3. Official transcripts from all colleges or universities attended.
          (Management students should consult with the Graduate Management Office for application requirements.)

Degree Applications
          In addition to the items listed above, the following items are required for application to all graduate degree programs.
          They are organized by academic department and program.

                                                                                             Three Letters of
Department                  GRE                              Statement of Purpose            Recommendation                TOEFL
Biology and Biotechnology Required for all Applicants        Required for all Applicants     Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                                                                                                                         English is not their first language*
Biomedical Engineering      Required for all Applicants/     Required for all Applicants     Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                            Waived for WPI Alumni and                                                                    English is not their first language*
                            Current Undergraduate
Biomedical Sciences         Required for all Applicants      Required for all Applicants     Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                                                                                                                         English is not their first language*
Chemical Engineering        Required for all           Not Required                          Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                            International Applicants/                                                                    English is not their first language*
                            Recommended for all Others
Chemistry and Biochemistry Required for all Applicants/      Required for all Applicants     Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                           Waived for WPI Alumni and                                                                     English is not their first language*
                           Current Undergraduate
Civil and Environmental     Recommended for all              Not Required                    Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
Engineering                 Applicants                                                                                   English is not their first language*
Computer Science**          Required for all Applicants/ Required for all Applicants         Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                            Waived for WPI Alumni and                                                                    English is not their first language*
                            Current Undergraduate
                            Students; Recommendation:
                            CS subject test
Electrical and Computer     Required for all U.S.            Required for PH.D. Only         Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
Engineering                 Fellowship Applicants/                                                                       English is not their first language
                            Required for all                                                                             Requirement may be waived by the depart-
                            International Applicants                                                                     ment graduate coordinator after a telephone
                                                                                                                         interview for applicants who have earned
                                                                                                                         their B.S. or M.S. degree at a U.S. college*
Fire Protection Engineering Not Required                     Requested for Those Without Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                            Evaluated if submitted           Work Experience                                         English is not their first language*
Management                  GRE may be substituted for Required for all Applicants           Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants whose native
                            M.S. and Graduate Certificate                                                                language is not English and who have not
                            Applicants                                                                                   earned a degree from an English-instruction
                            M.B.A. Applicants must submit                                                                college or university
                            GMAT scores
Manufacturing Engineering Required for all           Not Required                            Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                          International Applicants/                                                                      English is not their first language*
                          Recommended for all Others
Materials Science and       Required for all           Not Required                          Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
Engineering                 International Applicants/                                                                    English is not their first language*
                            Recommended for all Others
Mathematical Sciences       GRE and GRE Mathematics Not Required                             Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                            Test (rescaled)                                                                              English is not their first language*
                            Recommended for all
Mechanical Engineering      Recommended for all              Required for all Applicants     Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                            Applicants                                                                                   English is not their first language*
Physics                     Recommended for all              Not Required                    Required for all Applicants Required for all Applicants for whom
                            Applicants                                                                                   English is not their first language*
**TOEFL waived for applicants who have attended a U.S. (English-speaking) institution full time for at least one year.
**Students who elect to take two WPI graduate computer science courses and receive a grade of B or better in both may waive the GRE requirement.

     Financial Information                           faculty research projects, and conducting
                                                     literature reviews on topics of research
                                                                                                       of the Institute. The Robert H. Goddard
                                                                                                       Fellowships are limited to U.S. citizens and
     Financial Aid                                   interest. Research projects are typically         provide the recipients with a full 12-month
     Financial assistance to support graduate        supported by grants and contracts awarded         stipend and tuition support. Support
     students is available in the form of teach-     to the Institute by government agencies,          required by the student beyond the initial
     ing assistantships, research assistantships,    industrial firms or other private organiza-       12 months may be provided by the depart-
     fellowships, internships and loans. Enter-      tions.                                            ment in which the student is enrolled, or by
     ing students awarded either teaching or         RAs who perform research directly con-            a research award from the Thesis Advisor.
     research assistantships will normally receive   nected to their thesis/dissertation must rec-     Applicants are evaluated on merit by the
     statements pertaining to the type and level     ognize that research is a full-time profes-       Faculty Selection Committee, chaired by the
     of financial assistance from the Graduate       sional commitment that must be balanced           Associate Provost for Academic Affairs, from
     Studies & Enrollment Office.                    with the course work required for the             whom application forms and instruction are
                                                     desired degree.                                   available. A completed application must be
     The academic standing of students holding
                                                                                                       submitted by February 1 to be considered
     awards for teaching and research assistant-     The level of support provided to graduate         for a fall semester award.
     ships is reviewed annually. To remain eligi-    students who have been selected for an assis-
     ble for a graduate assistantship, a student     tantship varies depending on the specific na-     Internships
     must demonstrate acceptable progress            ture of the course work, project and stu-         Graduate internship programs are offered
     toward degree requirements, be registered       dent’s status. Funds may also be available to     in biomedical engineering, civil and envi-
     continuously, and maintain a minimum            support summer research activities for stu-       ronmental engineering, and fire protection
     GPA of 3.0 in courses and research work         dents through Institute or departmental           engineering. These opportunities are simi-
     (A = 4.0).                                      sources, or sponsored research projects.          lar to the traditional undergraduate coop-
                                                     Some provisions exist under which WPI will        erative education concept, except that par-
     Teaching Assistantships                         pay the tuition for a student’s graduate pro-     ticipating students have already achieved
     Teaching assistantships are awarded to          gram, but provide no support beyond               the baccalaureate degree and are working
     graduate students on a competitive basis.       tuition.                                          toward a master’s degree.
     They include tuition support for a maxi-
     mum of 10 credit hours per semester and a       GAANN                                             Two options are available for scheduling
     stipend. Teaching assistants (TAs) are gen-     Graduate Assistants in Areas of National          students’ work and study activities: parallel
     erally assigned duties that support faculty     Need or GAANNs are provided through               and alternating formats. Under the parallel
     in their teaching responsibilities. Typical     government grants to specific departments         format, students work part-time and
     duties of TAs include (but are not limited      and research faculty. WPI has been award-         attend classes during the academic year.
     to) grading of undergraduate and graduate       ed several of these grants, which are avail-      They may work full-time during the sum-
     student course paperwork, supervision of        able to qualified graduate students.              mer. The alternating option permits cycles
     undergraduate science and engineering                                                             of full-time work and full-time study.
     laboratory course sections, as well as indi-    Fellowships                                       Departments may allow students to take
     vidual and small-group conference sections      Fellowship assistance for graduate students       courses during the full-time work cycle.
     associated with faculty lecture courses. TAs    is available in a number of areas (see page       Consult department descriptions for more
     are required to be on campus and available      18). Some departments offer fellowships           information.
     for their assignments 10 days before            provided by corporate gifts or philanthrop-
     undergraduate classes begin in the fall, and    ic agencies. The college also directly sup-
                                                                                                       Student Loans
                                                                                                       Financial assistance is also available
     every day the Institute is open during the      ports graduate research programs through
                                                                                                       through the WPI Financial Aid Office in
     academic year, until the spring graduation      fellowship awards.
                                                                                                       the form of student loans. To qualify, stu-
     (see The Academic Calendar on pages 4
                                                     GEM Fellowships                                   dents must be enrolled in a degree-granti-
     and 5). TAs are expected to work 20 hours
                                                     WPI is proud to be a GEM qualified uni-           ng program on at least a half-time basis
     per week on their assigned duties. Some
                                                     versity. GEM fellowships are awarded to           and must be U.S. citizens or permanent
     departments have more stringent require-
                                                     minorities interested in studying science         residents of the United States. Available
     ments. Consult specific departmental
                                                     and engineering at the graduate level. For        loans include the Federal Subsidized
     descriptions for details.
                                                     more information, please contact the              Stafford Loan, the Federal Unsubsidized
     Research Assistantships                         Graduate Studies & Enrollment Office at           Stafford Loan, and the private education
     Research assistants (RAs) are compensated       508-831-5301 or                      loans.
     for participating in sponsored research
                                                     Goddard Fellowships                               Subsidized Federal Stafford Loan
     projects in connection with their academic
                                                     The Robert H. Goddard Fellowships are             A low-interest government subsidized loan.
     programs. Typical duties of RAs include
                                                     awarded to new full-time graduate students        Students can borrow up to $8,500 per year
     (but are not limited to) conducting labora-
                                                     on a competitive basis. These highly sought-      with repayment starting six months after
     tory experiments, assisting in the develop-
                                                     after awards span the entire research interests   graduation. The current interest rate is
     ment of theoretical advances related to

                                                                             FINANCIAL INFORMATION

8.25%. Eligibility requirements: students        Definition of Full-Time and                       MasterCard, VISA or Discover. (If
must qualify for the loan by filing a Free       Part-Time Status                                  MasterCard/VISA/Discover accounts are
Application for Federal Student Aid              If a student is registered for 9 or more          declined, either a penalty fee will be
(FAFSA) and demonstrating financial              credits, the student is deemed to be a full-      charged or registration will be invalidated.
need. WPI also requires students to com-         time student for that semester. If a student      Transcripts may also be held.)
plete an institutional Graduate Personal         needs fewer than 9 academic credits to
Data Form. Students must be enrolled on                                                            Late Registration
                                                 complete degree requirements, registration        A $25.00 late registration fee will be
at least a half-time basis (minimum of 6         for the number of credits required for
credits) and must not be in default on any                                                         charged starting September 3, 2003 (fall
                                                 completion of the degree gives the student        semester) and January 20, 2004 (spring
other educational loans.                         full-time status. A student pursuing a mas-       semester). A $50.00 late registration fee
                                                 ter’s degree, whose plan of study shows
Unsubsidized Federal Stafford Loan                                                                 will be charged starting September 10,
                                                 completion of all degree requirements             2003 (fall semester) and January 27, 2004
A low-interest loan not subsidized by the
                                                 within a single two-year period, retains          (spring semester).
federal government, borrowers are responsi-
                                                 full-time status so long as the student
ble for the interest while enrolled. Graduate
students can borrow up to $10,000 or cost,
                                                 complies with that plan of study. A stu-          Deferred Payment Plan
                                                 dent officially enrolled in a graduate            A deferred payment plan is available for
whichever is less. These loans carry the
                                                 internship program has full-time status           the fall and spring semesters. By paying a
same interest rate as the Subsidized Stafford
                                                 during the internship period. If a student        one-time fee per use, students may divide
Loan above. Eligibility requirements: stu-
                                                 has completed the minimum number of               their tuition into three equal monthly pay-
dents must first apply for the Subsidized
                                                 credits required for a degree, and is certi-      ments. For specifics, call the Accounting
Stafford Loan and must not be in default
                                                 fied by the department or program to be           Office at 508-831-5728.
on any other educational loans.
                                                 working full-time toward the degree,
Private Student Loans                            enrollment in 1 credit of dissertation            Deposit
Several private student loans are available to   research (for a student seeking the doctor-       The letter of admission from the Graduate
cover tuition and living expenses if applica-    ate) or 1 credit of thesis research (for a stu-   Studies & Enrollment Office indicates the
ble. All loans are credit-based, and students    dent seeking a master’s degree) establishes       semester for which approval is granted and
can borrow a maximum of the cost of the          the student’s full-time status. For the pur-      requires that the student respond. If
program less any other assistance. Since stu-    poses of this rule, the semesters are fall        accepting an offer for full-time graduate
dents must pass a credit review to be eligi-     (extending from August 15 through                 study, the student must submit a $150
ble, a co-borrower may be required.              December 31), spring (extending from              nonrefundable deposit. Of this amount,
International students are eligible to borrow    January 1 through May 14) and summer              $100 is credited toward tuition, $20 is the
but a credit-worthy co-borrower who is a         (extending from May 15 through August             Graduate Student Organization fee and
U.S. citizen or a permanent resident of the      14).                                              $30 is the orientation fee.
United States is required. Please contact the    Part-time status applies to students who          Health and Accident Insurance
Office of Financial Aid for terms and con-       register for 2 to 8 credits per semester.         All graduate students must be covered by
ditions of each program available.                                                                 health and accident insurance equivalent
Withdrawal Policy/Refund                         Tuition and Fees                                  to that offered under the Student Health
If the student has paid a tuition bill with                                                        and Accident Insurance Plan. Optional
                                                 Tuition Rate                                      coverage for a spouse or dependent may be
proceeds from either a Subsidized or an          Tuition for all courses taken by graduate
Unsubsidized Federal Stafford Loan and                                                             obtained through a separate policy. Please
                                                 students is based on a $858 fee per semes-        see the Accounting Office for this cover-
has received a refund for either or both of      ter hour for the 2003-2004 academic year.
the loans, the student shall be responsible                                                        age. For additional information, please call
for any overpayment of funds. It is, there-      Audit Rate
fore, necessary for the student to contact       A reduced tuition rate of $429 per semes-         Orientation
the lender(s) upon withdrawal.                   ter hour for the 2003-2004 academic year          All new full-time graduate students are
                                                 is available for those who wish to audit a        required to pay a one-time $30 orientation
Graduate Student                                 course. Audit registration cannot be              fee. (This is paid by entering students as
Classifications                                  changed to credit once the semester has           part of the $150 deposit.)
• Full-time Degree Seeking                       started.
• Part-time Degree Seeking                                                                         Graduate Student Organization
• Nondegree Seeking                              Tuition Payments                                  Each full-time graduate student is charged
                                                 Tuition charges do not include the cost of        a fee of $20 per year to support the activi-
• Graduate Certificate or Advanced
                                                 textbooks. Tuition must be paid in full at        ties of the Graduate Student organization.
  Graduate Certificate
                                                 the time of registration. The following           (This fee is paid by entering students as
• Student on Graduate Exchange or                forms of payment will be accepted: check
  Internship                                                                                       part of the $150 deposit.)
                                                 payable to WPI, American Express,


     Graduate Fellowship
     Fellowship awards are administered              Axel F. Backlin Tuition Scholarship             Robert S. Parks Graduate Fellowship
     through the Office of the Associate             Department heads may request funding            Established through an endowment, this
     Provost. Students interested in additional      from the Backlin Scholarship on behalf of       fellowship shows preference to students in
     sources of funding should contact the           deserving graduate students by contacting       electrical engineering.
     graduate coordinator in their department.       the Associate Provost’s Office.
     Funding includes teaching and research                                                          Harold Lesher Pierson
     assistantships, corporate and federal spon-     Arvid and Marietta Anderson                     Memorial Fellowship
     sored programs, and graduate assistant-         Fellowship                                      This fund is used to support a graduate
     ships available to first-year and returning     This fellowship is awarded to an outstand-      student whose research is in an area related
     graduate students.                              ing woman graduate student in her first         to medicine that is likely to result in near-
                                                     year of doctoral studies. Preference is given   term benefits to mankind.
     Robert H. Goddard Fellowship                    to admission applications completed by
     Student applications and details of criteria    February 1.                                     Ralph E. Spaulding Fellowship
     for eligibility are available in the Graduate                                                   Preference in the awarding of this graduate
     Studies & Enrollment Office and on the          Fire Protection Engineering                     fellowship is given to students in civil
     Web at for the                 Distinguished Scholars Fund                     engineering.
     Robert H. Goddard Fellowship.                   Part of the purpose of this fund is to pro-
     Fellowship applications are due in the          vide teaching assistantships to students in     Helen E. Stoddard Fellowship in
     Graduate Studies & Enrollment Office no         WPI’s graduate Fire Protection                  Materials Science and Engineering
     later than February 15 for the class begin-     Engineering Program.                            This fellowship is awarded annually to an
     ning the following fall. Fellowship applica-                                                    outstanding first-year graduate student in
     tions will be considered for students with      Robert and Esther Goddard                       the field of materials science and engineer-
     admission applications on file no later         Fellowship Fund                                 ing.
     than February 1. This fellowship is             This fund is used to underwrite the Robert
                                                     H. Goddard Fellowship, available to full-       Carl and Inez Weidenmiller Fellowship
     reserved for first-year graduate students.
                                                     time graduate students on a competitive         This fellowship was created from a bequest
     Recipients receive a monthly stipend and
                                                     basis.                                          through the Carl and Inez Weidenmiller
     tuition for one year as a full-time student.
                                                     The Norton Graduate Fellowship
                                                     This fellowship is primarily awarded to a
                                                     first-year graduate student in manufactur-
                                                     ing engineering.


Registration Information                        Audit Registration                                Walk-In Registration Dates
                                                Students primarily interested in the con-
and Procedures                                  tent of a particular course may register as
                                                                                                  Fall Semester 2003
                                                                                                  Registrar’s Office,
The basic requirement for enrollment in a       auditors. Thesis and project work cannot
                                                                                                  Boynton Hall:
given course is a bachelor’s degree from an     be taken with audit registration. Audit reg-
                                                                                                  • August 28, 29 and September 2 —
accredited institution in a relevant field of   istration receives no credit and receives no
                                                                                                    8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m.
science or engineering. Although those          grade. Audit registration is controlled in
with management backgrounds may enroll          limited enrollment courses. Degree-               Waltham Campus:
in graduate management courses, no prior        seeking students receive preferred registra-      • August 25 - 28 — 10:00 a.m. - 6:30
management study is required. Persons           tion privileges and, as a consequence, audit        p.m.
who have been admitted to graduate study        registration in some courses may be               • August 29 — 8:00 a.m. - 4:00 p.m.
at WPI are given first priority in course       denied. Tuition fees for audit registration
                                                                                                  MetroWest Campus in Southborough:
registration. Persons not holding a bache-      are lower than fees for other registrations
                                                                                                  • August 27 and 28 — 4:00 p.m. - 6:00
lor’s degree, but who might qualify             (see Tuition Payments, page 17).
through training or experience, may be          Audit registrants are encouraged to partici-
allowed to enroll on either a credit or audit   pate in the courses, but typically do not         Spring Semester 2004
basis with permission of the instructor.        submit written work for evaluation. Often         Registrar’s Office,
Registration for graduate courses is on a       professors will accept written work of audit      Boynton Hall:
space-available basis for nonadmitted stu-      registrants, but this is left to the discretion   • January 15, 16 and 19 — 8:00 a.m. -
dents.                                          of individual instructors.                          5:00 p.m.
Graduate students are expected to enroll in     A student may change from credit to audit         Waltham Campus:
graduate courses or thesis credit by the        registration, but may not change from             • January 15 and 19 — 10:00 a.m. - 6:30
registration days designated in the WPI         audit to regular credit registration. To            p.m.
academic calendar (pages 4 and 5).              change to audit registration for any gradu-       • January 16 — 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m.
Registration on days not designated will        ate course, the student must place a peti-
incur additional fees (see Tuition and Fees,                                                      MetroWest Campus in Southborough:
                                                tion with the Registrar within the first          • January 15 and 19 — 4:00 p.m. - 6:00
page 17). Students should consult with the      three weeks of class. Forms for change to
Registrar’s Office for assistance on these                                                          p.m.
                                                audit registration are available from the
matters. Registration is not complete until     Registrar. No fees will be returned to stu-       Summer Semester 2004
tuition has been paid. Tuition payment          dents who change to audit registration.           Graduate students planning to register for
schedules can be arranged with the                                                                project, thesis or independent study cours-
Business Office.                                Admission                                         es during the summer semester should do
                                                Enrollment in a course or courses, and sat-       so through the Projects and Registrar’s
Degree-Seeking Student                          isfactory completion of those courses, does       Office. For information on summer regis-
Registration                                    not constitute acceptance as a candidate          tration, call 508-831-5211.
Graduate students must be registered for        for the master’s degree nor admission to
the semester in which degree requirements       graduate study. For students seeking              Transcripts
are completed. For master of science pro-       advanced degrees (post-baccalaureate              WPI will issue one transcript of record to a
grams requiring a thesis, the student must      degrees), formal admission to a graduate          student without charge. Additional tran-
register for a minimum of 1 semester cred-      program is required.                              scripts are issued upon receipt of a fee of
it hour. For a Ph.D. program, the student                                                         $4 per copy.
must register for a minimum of 3 semester
credit hours.                                                                                     Withdrawal and Incomplete
Students seeking degrees not requiring a
                                                                                                  Because the college makes a financial com-
thesis are not required to maintain contin-
                                                                                                  mitment at the time a course is scheduled
uous registration.
                                                                                                  for instruction, tuition refunds will be
Nondegree-Seeking Student                                                                         made on the following basis: if notice of
                                                                                                  withdrawal is received, in writing, in the
Course Registration                                                                               Registrar’s Office before classes begin, a
Nondegree-seeking students are to register
                                                                                                  refund minus $25 will be given; after first
for courses in the same manner as all other
                                                                                                  class, before second, refund minus $100;
students. Degree-seeking students have
                                                                                                  after second class, before third, refund
preference in registering for courses with
                                                                                                  minus $200; after third class, before
limited enrollments. It is important to reg-
                                                                                                  fourth, refund minus $300; after fourth,
ister as early as possible.
                                                                                                  no refund. A grade of W will be recorded


     if written notification of withdrawal from                              General Requirements for                                                  General Requirements for the
     the course is received after the third meet-                            All Advanced Degrees                                                      Master of Science and
     ing of the class and not later than the fol-
     lowing dates:
                                                                             All degree requirements must be satisfied                                 Master of Engineering
                                                                             before the degree is awarded. Exceptions to                               The student must obtain a minimum of
     Fall Semester: November 18, 2003                                        general and specific degree requirements or                               30 credit hours of acceptable course, thesis
     Spring Semester: March 22, 2004                                         to other rules may be made, but only by                                   or project work.
                                                                             the Committee on Graduate Studies and
     Withdrawal after these dates is permitted                                                                                                         If a thesis is required by the student’s pro-
                                                                             Research (CGSR).1 Requests for exceptions
     only by petition to the Registrar’s Office.                                                                                                       gram, it must include at least 6 credit
                                                                             are to be made by written petition to that
     Notice to the instructor or discontinuance                                                                                                        hours of research directed toward the the-
     of attendance does not constitute with-                                                                                                           sis, in a project resulting in the completion
     drawal. Such notice must be submitted in                                At the time the degree is awarded, the stu-                               of an M.S. thesis.
     writing to the Registrar’s Office.                                      dent must have been admitted to the grad-
                                                                                                                                                       A student completing a master’s degree with
     Incomplete grades are transitional grades                               uate program of the degree-granting pro-
                                                                                                                                                       a thesis option is required to make a public
     and must be changed by the instructor                                   gram. Administratively, a degree-granting
                                                                                                                                                       presentation of the thesis. Departments
     within 12 months. If course work is not                                 program may be a department or a pro-
                                                                                                                                                       may, at their option, extend the presenta-
     made up by this time, the grade automati-                               gram.
                                                                                                                                                       tion to include a defense of the thesis.
     cally becomes an F.                                                     A minimum of two-thirds of the required
                                                                                                                                                       The student must obtain a minimum of
                                                                             graduate credit for an advanced degree
     Withdrawal Policy/Refund                                                must have been earned at WPI.
                                                                                                                                                       21 credit hours of graduate level courses or
     If the student has paid a tuition bill with                                                                                                       thesis (18 credit hours for students in the
     proceeds from either a Subsidized or an                                 For the master of mathematics, the student                                Combined Bachelor’s/Master’s Program),
     Unsubsidized Federal Stafford Loan and                                  must have a program GPA2 of 2.9 or                                        including at least 15 credit hours of gradu-
     has received a refund for either or both of                             greater. For all other degrees, the student                               ate level courses or thesis in the major field
     the loans, the student shall be responsible                             must have a program GPA of 3.0 or                                         of the student. Other courses (to make up
     for any overpayment of funds. It is, there-                             greater.                                                                  the minimum total of 30 credit hours)
     fore, necessary for the student to contact                              From time to time, the faculty amends the                                 may include advanced undergraduate
     the lender(s) upon withdrawal.                                          general and specific degree requirements.                                 courses approved by the student’s program.
                                                                             To earn a degree, a student must satisfy the                              Such courses are normally considered to be
     Graduate Student Classifications                                        graduate rules in effect at a single date.                                those at the 4000 level. The use of
     • Full-time Degree Seeking                                              These rules may be those in place on the                                  advanced undergraduate courses for satis-
     • Part-time Degree Seeking                                              date of the student’s matriculation, those in                             faction of graduate degree requirements
     • Nondegree Seeking                                                     place on the date of the student’s applica-                               must be approved by the student’s pro-
     • Graduate Certificate or Advanced                                      tion for graduation, or those in place in a                               gram. A 1/3-unit WPI undergraduate
       Graduate Certificate                                                  single graduate catalog in effect between                                 course taken for graduate credit is assigned
                                                                             the dates of matriculation and graduation.                                3 credit hours of graduate credit. A gradu-
     • Student on Graduate Exchange or
                                                                             In applying for graduation, the student                                   ate student registered for graduate credit in
                                                                             must specify by year which graduate cata-                                 an undergraduate course may be assigned
                                                                                                                                                       additional work at the discretion of the
     Degree Requirements                                                     log contains the rules being satisfied.
     The following are WPI’s minimum require-                                After the Application for Degree is submit-
     ments for advanced degrees. The general                                 ted, all advanced degrees are subject to the                              General Requirements
     requirements for all advanced degrees must                              final approval of the CGSR, which deter-                                  for the Doctorate
     be satisfied to earn any advanced degree.                               mines if the student has satisfied the letter                             The student must demonstrate to the facul-
     The additional requirements for specific                                and intent of the requirements for                                        ty high academic attainment and the ability
     degrees must be satisfied in order to earn                              advanced degrees.                                                         to carry on original independent research.
     the specified degree, regardless of the field                           The CGSR makes its recommendations for                                    The student must complete a minimum of
     in which the degree is earned. Please look to                           the approval of advanced degrees to the fac-                              90 credit hours of graduate work beyond
     department requirements for more specific                               ulty of the Institute, which in turn recom-                               the bachelor’s degree, or a minimum of 60
     information.                                                            mends to the president and trustees for                                   credit hours of graduate work beyond the
                                                                             their final approval the names of students                                master’s degree, including in either case at
                                                                             who should be awarded advanced degrees.                                   least 30 credit hours of research.

     1 CGSR—The Committee on Graduate Studies and Research (CGSR) is concerned with all post-baccalaureate programs of the University, and reviews and recommends changes in WPI policies on goals, student
     recruitment, admissions, academic standards, teaching and research assistantships, scholarships and fellowships. It also makes recommendations to the faculty and administration on new graduate programs and
     courses, and changes in programs and courses. The committee acts on admission of graduate students to degree candidacy, dismissal for failure to meet academic standards, and student petitions on academic mat-
     ters. It brings to the faculty for action the names of students who it has determined are eligible for post-baccalaureate degrees. The committee reviews and recommends changes in policy on the funding, promotion
     and conduct of research at WPI.
     2 GPA—The Grade Point Average (GPA) is calculated as the sum of the products of the grade points and credit hours for each registered activity, in the average, divided by the total number of credit hours for all
     registered activities in the average. Grade points are as follows: A = 4.0; B = 3.0; C = 2.0; D = 1.0; and F = 0.0.
                                                                                     DEGREE REQUIREMENTS

The student must establish residency by                Other Degrees                                    graduate courses applied toward the under-
being a full-time graduate student for at              Requirements for the master of business          graduate degree are awarded undergraduate
least one continuous academic year.                    administration and master of mathematics         credit with a conversion rate of 1 credit
The student must attain status as a doctor-            for educators appear under the descrip-          hour = 1/9 undergraduate unit.
al candidate by satisfying specific degree             tions of the awarding programs. Students         Students in the Combined Program may
requirements in the student’s field.                   in the Combined Bachelor’s/Master’s              use advanced undergraduate courses to sat-
                                                       Program are subject to additional rules          isfy graduate degree requirements. The
The student must prepare a doctoral disser-
                                                       described in the next section.                   department decides which courses may be
tation and defend it before a Dissertation
Committee, at least two of whose members                                                                used in this way. Faculty members teach-
                                                       General Requirements for the                     ing these advanced undergraduate courses
must be from the student’s program and at
                                                       Combined Bachelor’s/Master’s                     may impose special requirements, appro-
least one of whose members must be from
outside the student’s program. After a suc-            Degree Program                                   priate to an undergraduate course being
cessful defense, determined by a majority              Only registered WPI undergraduates may           used for graduate credit, on Combined
vote in the affirmative by the Dissertation            enter the Combined Program. To enter, a          Program students.
Committee, the dissertation must be en-                student must apply to the WPI Graduate           If the programs awarding the bachelor’s and
dorsed by those members of the Dis-                    Program. Admission to the Combined               master’s degrees are not the same, the pro-
sertation Committee who voted to approve               Program is made by the faculty of the pro-       gram awarding the graduate degree may
it. The completed dissertation must follow             gram that awards the graduate degree. A          require that the student’s major qualifying
in format the instructions published by the            student in the Combined Program contin-          project relate in some way to the graduate
library. After final approval for format of            ues to be registered as an undergraduate         program’s discipline. The graduate program
the dissertation, the Associate Provost for            until the bachelor’s degree is awarded.          may also make other requirements as it
Academic Affairs will notify the Registrar             While in the Combined Program, a stu-            deems appropriate in any individual case.
that the dissertation has been approved.               dent may continue to take courses or pro-        These requirements take the form of a writ-
Once a student has satisfied the departmen-            jects toward the undergraduate degree; the       ten agreement (obtain the form from the
tal candidacy requirements, the student will           student may also register for graduate           Graduate Studies & Enrollment Office)
be permitted to enroll for dissertation cred-          courses, projects, directed research or thesis   between the student and the graduate pro-
its. Prior to completion of candidacy                  credits toward the master’s degree.              gram, which must be completed and filed
requirements, a student may enroll for no              To obtain a master’s degree via the Com-         with the Registrar before the student may
more than 18 credits of directed research.             bined Program, the student must satisfy all      be matriculated in the Combined Program.
                                                       requirements for that master’s degree,           Additional requirements appear within
Minimum Requirements                                   including any requirements of the graduate       each department’s section in this catalog.
for a Social Science                                   degree-awarding program for satisfactory         The Combined Program is a full-time3 pro-
Interdisciplinary Ph.D.                                completion of specified courses or a mas-        gram of study on both the bachelor and
In addition to the general requirements                ter’s thesis. To obtain a bachelor’s degree      master’s level. Once admitted to the Com-
established by WPI for an interdisciplinary            via the Combined Program, the student            bined Program, a student must register every
doctoral degree, applicants must pass a                must satisfy all requirements for that bach-     fall and spring semester until the graduate
qualifying examination. This examination               elor’s degree, including distribution and        degree is completed. A student in the
will test the basic knowledge and under-               project requirements.                            Combined Program who, during the fall or
standing of the student in the disciplines             A student in the Combined Program may,           spring semester, has no registered activities is
covered by the research as is normally                 within the program limit and with prior          automatically terminated from the
expected of degree holders in the disci-               approval, use the same courses toward the        Combined Program, and may only be read-
plines. It must be administered within the             bachelor’s and master’s degrees. The limita-     mitted to the Combined Program by the
first 18 credits of registration in the inter-         tion is computed from the graduate credit        Committee for Graduate Studies and
disciplinary Ph.D. program. The examina-               hours for each course. Courses whose credit      Research via petition showing extenuating
tion will be administered by a committee               hours total no more than 40% of the credit       circumstances. Termination from the Com-
of no less than three members, approved                hours required for the master’s degree, and      bined Program does not affect a student’s
by CGSR, representing the disciplines cov-             which meet all other requirements for each       ability to continue toward the bachelor’s
ered by the research. Students are allowed             degree, may be used to satisfy requirements      degree.
at most two attempts at passing the exami-             for both degrees. Such courses are recorded
nation, and may take a maximum of 18                                                                    Students usually apply for admission to
                                                       on the transcript using the credit hours/        combined degree status in their sophomore
credits prior to passage.                              units and grades appropriate at the gradu-       or junior year of WPI undergraduate study.
                                                       ate or undergraduate levels. For students in
                                                       the Combined Program, approved under-            Some graduate-degree-awarding programs
                                                       graduate courses are assigned graduate           impose additional restrictions on students
                                                       credit with a conversion rate of 1/3 WPI         in the Combined Program. Consult the
                                                       undergraduate unit = 3 credit hours, while       degree requirements of individual pro-
                                                                                                        grams for details.
  Full-time study means a minimum registration of at
least 9 credit hours.

     Theses and                                      In order to submit theses and dissertations
                                                     electronically, students must have a WPI
     Dissertations                                   account, obtainable on-line using a PIN
     WPI is a member of the Networked                provided by the Projects and Registrar’s
     Digital Library of Theses and Dissertations.    Office.
     This organization is dedicated to “unlock-      Training sessions will be held throughout
     ing access to graduate education” by mak-       the year, and extensive information about
     ing the full text of theses and dissertations   creating and submitting ETDs is available
     available on-line.                              on the ETD Web site at
     Students are required to submit theses and
     dissertations electronically. Electronic sub-
     mission of these works is not performed         Thesis Binding
     using CD-ROMs or floppy disks, but              Students and departments may wish to
     rather entirely through the Web.                retain a bound paper copy of theses and
                                                     dissertations. In this case, a $10 per copy
     Most documents will be made available to        binding fee must be paid at the
     the general public via the Web, but indi-       Accounting Office. Once the fee is paid,
     vidual authors and their advisors may           students can bring the receipt and the
     choose to restrict their works to be accessi-   copies to Technical Services in Gordon
     ble only by members of the WPI commu-           Library to be bound.
     nity or to be completely unavailable for a
     period of up to five years. Factors in this
     decision should include copyright, intellec-
     tual property and patenting concerns.
     Students should discuss these issues thor-
     oughly with their advisors and committee
     members as early in the process as possible.
     The following are required for proper
     submission of electronic theses and disser-
     tations (ETDs):
     1. A signed copy of the ETD Approval
        Form, available on the ETD Web site
     2. A copy of the title page, with all appro-
        priate faculty and student signatures
     3. The thesis or dissertation converted to
        PDF and uploaded via the ETD Web

                                ADVANCED DISTANCE LEARNING NETWORK

Advanced Distance
Learning Network
Distance Learning Program
In 1979, WPI’s commitment to active,
lifelong learning prompted the creation of
the ADLN, a partnership between several
academic departments and WPI’s Academ-
ic Technology Center. ADLN programs
enable working professionals to continue
to grow within their chosen field without
having to attend any classes at the WPI
campus. Persons electing to take courses
via ADLN with the intention of complet-
ing a degree or certificate apply for admis-
sion to WPI utilizing the same processes
and services as campus based students.
Once admitted to WPI, students may take
any ADLN course that is appropriate to
their WPI program. All students can take
ADLN courses and, within a given pro-           grounds, either via straight waivers for        Faculty
gram’s requirements, can combine on-            those with appropriate course work com-         The professors teaching ADLN courses are
campus and ADLN classes.                        pleted within the past six years with a grade   the same highly qualified faculty who
                                                of B or better, or via waiver exams. The        teach in WPI’s campus-based programs.
Delivery Media                                  M.B.A. program, the M.S. in fire protec-
Through ADLN, WPI delivers the same             tion engineering, and the M.S. in civil and     Tuition and Fees
courses, content and material that you          environmental engineering allow students        Tuition is $858 per semester hour for all
would receive on campus. Faculty, working       to transfer up to 9 credits from graduate-      programs in the 2003 - 2004 academic
with an instructional design team, deter-       level course work at other schools. Gradu-      year. This is the same rate as on-campus
mine the best technologies to use in the        ate and advanced certificate programs           courses. Students wishing to earn
delivery of their distance courses. This        require all credits to come from WPI.           Continuing Education Units (CEUs)
approach to distance learning ensures that                                                      instead of graduate credit may opt to audit
courses are kept current and the latest tech-   Special Programs                                courses at half tuition. See page 19 for
nologies are used. An e-mail account,           ADLN and appropriate academic person-           audit information.
access to the World Wide Web and the            nel are always willing to consider the addi-
minimal technical requirements found at         tion of new programs when there is suffi-       Financial Aid are required           cient interest.                                 Loan-based aid is available only through
for participation in an ADLN course.                                                            special arrangements. Students must be
                                                Student Services                                registered on a half-time basis (two courses
Programs of Study                               Academic advisors are assigned upon             per semester) or greater for federal loan
By taking courses through the Advance           admission. Library services are on-line, and    programs. See pages 16 and 17 for loan
Distance Learning Network, students can         reference services are available by tele-       information. Other loans for 3-credit
complete a master of business administra-       phone and e-mail. All students establish a      courses may be available.
tion (M.B.A), or a master of science            WPI UNIX account for on-line course
(M.S.) in environmental engineering or          access and e-mail. Technical help desk is       Contact and Information
fire protection engineering. In addition,       available by e-mail or phone. Career place-     Pamela Shelley, Assistant Director,
students may elect to take courses via          ment and counseling are available for           Advanced Distance Learning Network
ADLN to earn a graduate or advanced cer-        matriculated students. Books may be             Worcester Polytechnic Institute
tificate in these disciplines and in wireless   ordered toll-free from the WPI bookstore        100 Institute Road
communications and networking.                  (888-WPI-BOOKS) and are typically               Worcester, Massachusetts 01609-2280
                                                delivered one to three days after ordering.     U.S.A.
Credit Options                                                                                  508-831-5220 (voice)
The M.B.A. program allows up to 18                                                              508-831-5881 (fax)
foundation-level credits to be waived for                                             
those with appropriate academic back-                                                 


     Facilities and Services                          undergraduate students but graduate stu-
                                                      dents and alumni as well. Information and
                                                                                                        support for endorsed packages. CCC also
                                                                                                        provides instruction sessions on supported
     Books for Off-Campus Courses                     guidance is provided in the areas of full-        software in the state-of-the-art computer-
     Textbooks for off-campus courses may be          time employment, graduate school, part-           training classroom that CCC maintains in
     purchased at the first meeting of each           time employment, cooperative education            the Gordon Library.
     course. Payment may be made by cash,             and summer positions. Call 508-831-5260.          CCC is generally open from 11 a.m.
     check or credit card. Additionally, text-                                                          Sunday until 10 Friday (24 hours a day)
     books may be purchased on-line at
                                                      Class Cancellation
                                                                                                        and Saturday 11 a.m. to 7 p.m. during the
                                                      Classes are rarely cancelled because of or by calling the                                                                 academic year. When WPI is not in session
                                                      inclement weather. However, if in doubt,
     bookstore at 1-888-WPI-BOOKS. Text-                                                                and during undergraduate “term breaks,”
                                                      you may call the WPI switchboard, the
     book delivery for ADLN remote locations                                                            as well as summer session, hours will be
                                                      Graduate Studies & Enrollment Office or
     may be arranged by calling the bookstore                                                           posted at CCC.
                                                      508-831-5744 to find out if a particular
     or by e-mailing the bookstore at
                                                      class has been cancelled. When all classes        To reach the CCC help desk, call 508-
                                                      are cancelled (severe weather during the          831-5888 or e-mail:
     Bookstore                                        midday period, forecast to last through
     The bookstore, located on the second floor       evening) cancellation will be broadcast on        Extracurricular Activities
                                                      radio stations WTAG, WSRS, WAAF,                  The Institute provides a varied program of
     of the Campus Center, will be open dur-
                                                      WFTQ, WKOX and WBZ.                               sports and recreation. Graduate students
     ing the first days of classes from 8:00 a.m.
                                                                                                        usually enter teams in several intramural
     to 7 p.m. During the rest of the school
     year, hours of operation are 8 a.m. to
                                                      Computer Resources                                sports, and may participate in certain
                                                      WPI’s Fuller Laboratories provide dedicated       intercollegiate club sports as well as on-
     7 p.m. Monday through Thursday, 8 a.m.
                                                      space for faculty, staff and students working     campus musical or theater groups.
     to 5 p.m. Friday, and 11 a.m. to 5 p.m. on
                                                      in the information sciences. The WPI              There are outstanding athletic facilities for
     Saturday. For more information please call
                                                      Computing and Communication Center                tennis, swimming, bowling, squash, bas-
     toll free 888-WPI-books or e-mail
                                                      (CCC) is located in this building, along          ketball, racquetball and volleyball, as well
                                                      with the Computer Science Department              as a weight-lifting room, a fitness center, a
     Campus Police                                    and the Academic Technology Center.               sauna and several outdoor playing fields.
     Personal safety information, security prac-      CCC provides a wide range of services and         Graduate students frequently join faculty
     tices at WPI and the University’s crime sta-     access to computer resources for the WPI          groups for noontime jogging, aerobics and
     tistic information can be obtained by visit-     community, and manages an array of                basketball.
     ing the campus police Web site. Students         powerful UNIX, Linux and Windows                  A wide variety of entertainment is brought
     can also obtain a copy of the University’s       2000 servers. All WPI students, faculty           to the campus, ranging from small infor-
     safety brochure by contacting the WPI            and staff can obtain a login ID at CCC for        mal groups to popular entertainers in the
     Police Department at 508-831-5433.               academic course work, research and self-          3,500-seat Harrington Auditorium. A
     Parking on campus can be challenging.            education. The ID will remain in force as         series of films is shown in Perreault Hall,
     Graduate students are entitled to parking        long as the person continues to be regis-         and chamber concerts are presented in the
     permits for the Boynton Street parking lot       tered as a student at or is employed by           Baronial Hall of Higgins House.
     located behind the library. Parking is on a      WPI. The systems have been configured so
                                                      that the user will see the same familiar          The normal social activities of a medium-
     first-come, first-served basis. Decals can be
                                                      environment no matter which CCC work-             sized city are readily accessible, many with-
     purchased for $2.00 at the campus police
                                                      station is used.                                  in easy walking distance. Other activities
     station located at 35 Dean Street. You
                                                                                                        of interest to students are offered by the
     should also receive a copy of the                CCC facilities are accessible from a wide         many colleges in the Worcester Consor-
     University’s parking regulations. We rec-        variety of locations on campus, or from           tium (see Intercollege Studies and the
     ommend that you keep this brochure in            around the world via the Internet. CCC            Consortium, page 9).
     your vehicle’s glove compartment for easy        operates the campus data network and the
     reference. Parking is also available on the      Internet connectivity. Computer systems           Gordon Library
     city streets surrounding the campus. Be          operated by academic departments are also         The George C. Gordon Library supports
     sure to obey parking signs, as enforcement       on the same CCC communications infra-             the informational and research needs of the
     in Worcester is strict. The city’s winter        structure, so they are accessible just as easi-   WPI graduate community. The library staff
     parking regulations are available on the         ly. Wireless network access is available in       works closely with each department to aug-
     WPI police Web site, as well.                    all academic buildings as well as primary         ment library resources pertinent to gradu-
                                                      residence centers. Wireless laptops are           ate and other research interests.The collec-
     Career Development Center                        available on loan for use in the library and      tion currently numbers over 276,000 vol-
     The Career Development Center (CDC) at           campus center.                                    umes, and includes paper subscriptions to
     WPI assists students in the development of
                                                      CCC manages a computer help desk to               over 900 current periodicals and over
     lifelong skills related to careers and the job
                                                      answer users’ questions on any of the com-        10,000 electronic periodicals.The collec-
     search process. CDC serves not only
                                                      puter platforms and to provide technical          tion includes graduate theses and disserta-
                                                                                             STUDENT SERVICES

tions, as well as a rapidly growing number       apartments in residential areas near the       • Service window open (Monday through
of electronic theses and dissertations. The      campus.                                          Friday) 8 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
WPI Archives and Special Collections             Please feel free to contact the Office of      • Package pick-up
holds the paper records and artifacts of         Residential Services, 508-831-5645, for        • Stamps sold
WPI, as well as a significant number of rare     information regarding both on-campus           • Letters and packages weighed, metered
books. Library resources come in many for-       and off-campus housing. A listing of off-      • Discounted Express Mail
mats: print, audio, video and digital.           campus accommodations is available at          • Fax services
Gordon Library is open over 100 hours                   Printing Services
each week during the academic year. Many                                                        Located in Boynton Hall, lower level.
services and resources are also available to     International Graduate                         Telephone 508-831-5842 or -5571. Hours
graduate students 24 hours a day via the         Student Services                               (Monday through Friday???) 8 a.m. to
library’s World-Wide-Web-based system.           The Office of International Students and       4:30 p.m.
Here students can access the Gordon              Scholars is located in WPI’s International     • Offset printing
Library catalog, local and remote library        House at 28 Trowbridge Road. The office        • Photocopying (including color)
catalogs, over 150 electronic databases,         provides information and assistance on         • Binding of reports
full-text articles in electronic periodicals,    immigration and other regulatory matters,      • Laminating
and other reference tools and resources          information on cultural and social programs
located anywhere in the world.                   and services, as well as general counseling.   Student ID Cards
                                                                                                The WPI ID is your library card and is
In addition to the Gordon Library’s re-          The International House also serves as a
                                                                                                used in many departments for lab access as
sources, WPI students may utilize the col-       meeting place for international students
lections of other Worcester area libraries.      with its lounge area, meeting room and
Students with a WPI identification card          resource room. WPI’s English as a Second       You may also deposit money on your card
and a cross-borrowing card can borrow            Language (ESL) program is located in the       for use in the WPI dining locations at a
books directly from the libraries at Anna        house. The house also offers limited tem-      10% discount. The ID office is located in
Maria College, Assumption College,               porary housing for international graduate      Daniels Hall, first floor, and the hours are:
Becker College, Clark University, College        students.                                      Monday through Friday 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.
of the Holy Cross, University of Massachu-                                                      For information, call 508-831-5150.
                                                 Office of International Students and
setts Medical Center Library and Worcester       Scholars: 508-831-6030. ESL Director:
State College. Students can also request                                                        Student Life
                                                 508-831-6033.                                  The Student Life Office staff is available to
materials not owned by Gordon Library
                                                                                                students enrolled in all programs to assist
through the interlibrary loan and docu-          Mail Services
ment delivery services. Before classes begin                                                    with any out-of-the-classroom concerns
                                                 Located in the Campus Center, first floor.
each semester, library staff offer orientation                                                  that may arise. Staff members are available
                                                 Student Mail Room 508-831-5317,
sessions to graduate students. Throughout                                                       between 8:30 a.m. and 5 p.m.
                                                 Incoming/Receiving 508-831-5523,
the year, members of the Reference De-                                                          Appointments outside of these hours can
                                                 Mail Processing 508-831-5317.
partment conduct both library and Internet                                                      be arranged by calling 508-831-5201.
                                                 Supervisor: Celia McLaren 508-831-5683.
orientation and instruction sessions.            • Limited number of mailboxes available
Gordon Library staff will consult with stu-
dents in the preparation of theses and
dissertations. Standard reference guides are
also available. A pamphlet, “Regulations for
Preparation of Theses and Dissertations”
prepared by the library staff and sponsored
by the Office of Academic Affairs, is avail-
able in paper and on-line at the library’s
Web site (
Gordon Library is open Monday through
Thursday 8 a.m. to midnight, Friday 8
a.m. to 11 p.m., Saturday 9 a.m. to 9 p.m.,
and Sunday noon to midnight. A calendar
of hours is available in paper at the library,
or on-line at the library’s Web site.

A limited amount of on-campus housing is
available for single graduate students.
Family housing is not available on campus.
Most graduate students live in rooms or

                     Biology and Biotechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
                     Biomedical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
                     Biomedical Sciences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
                     Chemical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
                     Chemistry and Biochemistry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
                     Civil and Environmental Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
                     Computer and Communications Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
                     Computer Science . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
                     Electrical and Computer Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
                     Fire Protection Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
                     Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
                     Manufacturing Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
                     Materials Science and Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
                     Mathematical Sciences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
                     Mechanical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
                     Physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78


                                                                                   Biology and Biotechnology
Program of Study                                 committee and be the student’s faculty            their way in the global market. Such skills
The department offers a master of science        advisor. The Advisory Committee must              might include bioethics, and linguistic and
(M.S.) degree in biology and biotechnolo-        review and approve each M.S. student’s            interpretive skills that encourage a reasoned
gy. This degree requires students to suc-        program of study and thesis research.             awareness and acceptance of human differ-
cessfully complete a set of required “core”                                                        ences. Students may choose from offerings
courses in the field and a thesis project        For the Ph.D. in Biotechnology                    in bioethics, history and language to devel-
that applies the basic principles of biology     In addition to the WPI requirements, a            op a focused strength in one area. Graduate
and biotechnology to a current research          thesis project (minimum of 30 credit hours)       work in Cultural Studies is a minimum of 2
problem. Graduates with the master of sci-       is required. It is the intention of the faculty   credit hours done under the guidance of a
ence degree will have a broad knowledge          that the student develop for this degree a        humanities advisor. For example, a student
of the field of biology and biotechnology        thematic focus for a minor, interdiscipli-        could register for Bioethics for 2 credits.
as well as demonstrate detailed knowledge        nary area of study outside of the biology
and applied research skills in their area of     and biotechnology department, such that           Publications
specialization. Students who complete this       the following credit distribution be              In order to graduate, at least one manu-
M.S. degree program will be well prepared        required for course work:                         script should be submitted for publication
for further graduate education, or for           15 credit minimum                                 in a refereed journal and at least one paper
employment in academics or industry.             BB courses at the 4000 or 500 level (an           must have been presented at a national or
                                                 M.S. in a biological field may be considered      international conference.
Faculty in the Biology and Biotechnology         acceptable)
Department have research interests in the                                                          Exams, Reports and Dissertation
                                                 15 credit minimum
areas of bioprocessing technology, cell biolo-                                                     Defense
                                                 Within the minor area of study and taken
gy, developmental biology, ecology, evolu-                                                         A Ph.D. qualifying exam is required and
                                                 at the 4000 or 500 level (M.S. in an appro-
tion, environmental biology, molecular                                                             should be taken following the first year of
                                                 priate minor field of study may be consid-
genetics, neurobiology, and plant and ani-                                                         study. A majority of the Examining
                                                 ered acceptable)
mal organismal biology. Students seeking                                                           Committee must be members of the biolo-
the M.S. degree in biology and biotechnol-       15 credit maximum
                                                                                                   gy and biotechnology department faculty.
ogy should plan to work directly with one        At the 4000 level or below for all require-       The committee must also approve the stu-
of the department’s faculty in his or her        ments                                             dent’s dissertation research proposal and
research specialty area. The department sug-     2 credit minimum                                  will meet each semester to review and
gests that, prior to applying for entrance       To meet the cultural studies requirement          assess the student’s progress. Candidates
into the M.S. program, students use the          2 credit minimum                                  for the Ph.D. degree must also give annual
information at the department’s Web site         To meet the teaching skills requirement           presentations of their research work to the
(         3 credit minimum                                  department as part of the graduate seminar
to help identify potential faculty advisors.     Biology Seminar (BB 501)                          course.
                                                 Required every semester
Degree Requirements                                                                                A public defense of the completed disserta-
                                                 Teaching Requirement                              tion is required of all students, and will be
For the M.S. in Biology and                      2 credit minimum                                  followed immediately by a defense before
Biotechnology                                    The objective of this requirement is formal       the Examining Committee. All members
As with the standard WPI requirements            training in pedagogy. It can be fulfilled by      of the Examining Committee must be pre-
for the M.S. degree, students pursuing the       enrolling in: (1) an advanced undergradu-         sent for the defense. Operational details of
M.S. degree in biology and biotechnology         ate or graduate course in education; or (2)       the program, including the student quali-
must complete a minimum of 30 credit             a mentored teaching experience (IS/P)             fying exam and dissertation defense, can
hours of course and theses work, six of          arranged with an individual faculty mem-          be found in the graduate handbook pro-
which must be thesis research credits. In        ber, within the major discipline of the stu-      vided to all entering students.
addition, M.S. students must successfully        dent and the professor. This mentored
complete (grade of B or higher) three of         teaching experience is distinguished from a       For the Ph.D. in Biomedical Science
the four departmental core courses               teaching assistantship in that it requires        The department of biology and biotech-
(BB575, BB576, BB577 or BB578) and               significant mentored student involvement          nology participates in the Worcester
three credits of seminar (BB501, 1 credit        in course development, delivery and evalu-        Consortium Ph.D. Program in Biomedical
per semester). Students must assemble an         ation.                                            Science. This innovative program is
Advisory Committee of three faculty                                                                designed for students who already have
members. Two of the committee members            Cultural Studies Requirement                      substantial post-baccalaureate research
must be biology and biotechnology faculty        2 credit minimum                                  experience, such as an M.S. degree and/or
members. One of the biology and biotech-         Graduates of the biotechnology program            several years of laboratory research employ-
nology faculty members will chair the            will need more than technical skills to make      ment. This Consortium program includes


     Biology and Biotechnology
     WPI, Clark University, the University of      Faculty                                      S. M. Politz, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     Massachusetts Medical School and the          J. Rulfs, Associate Professor and            University of California at Los Angeles
     Worcester Foundation for Biomedical           Department Head; Ph.D., Tufts University     E. Ryder, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     Research. Applicants to the program must                                                   Harvard Medical School
     have a commitment to serve as the stu-        D. S. Adams, Professor; Ph.D.,
     dent’s Research Advisor from a faculty        University of Texas at Austin                J. Tyler, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
     member at one of the Consortium institu-      J. C. Bagshaw, Professor; Ph.D.,             SUNY, Albany
     tions. Students in the program will receive   University of Tennessee                      P. J. Weathers, Professor; Ph.D., Michigan
     their Ph.D. from WPI, but may conduct         R. D. Cheetham, Professor; Ph.D.,            State University
     dissertation research at any of the           Purdue University
     Consortium institutions. Students who
     enter the program through WPI’s depart-       T. C. Crusberg, Associate Professor;
     ment of biology and biotechnology must        Ph.D., Clark University
     satisfy the general degree requirements of    A. DiIorio, Affiliate-Assistant Professor;
     the University, and adhere to the rules and   Ph.D., WPI
     regulations for graduate students in the      D. G. Gibson III, Assistant Professor;
     department. A complete description of         Ph.D., Boston University
     procedures and degree requirements is
     available in the department office.           J. E. Miller, Professor; Ph.D., Case
                                                   Western Reserve University


                                                                             Biomedical Engineering
Programs of Study                              tions at each internship location listed         The joint WPI/UMMS Ph.D. program
The goal of the biomedical engineering         below is limited.                                employs the advanced technical knowledge
graduate programs is to apply engineering      1. Biomedical Engineering                        and expertise of engineering and medical
principles and technology as solutions to         UMMHC-Memorial Campus and                     faculty to provide students with the knowl-
significant biomedical problems. Students         UMMS                                          edge and skills necessary to apply engineer-
trained in these programs have found           2. Cardiovascular Medicine                       ing and scientific principles to medically
rewarding careers in major medical and            UMMS Surgery, UMMS                            related problems. A unique aspect of this
biomedical research centers, academia, the     The master of engineering program is con-        program is that it utilizes the expertise and
medical care industry and entrepreneurial      sidered to be a terminal professional            resources available from a public university
enterprises.                                   degree.                                          and a private institution of higher education
                                                                                                in a synergistic manner to train students in
Master’s Degree Programs                       Combined B.S./Master’s Degree                    the application of engineering to medical
There are three master’s degree options in     Program                                          research. The Ph.D. degree in this program
biomedical engineering: the Master of          This program affords an opportunity for          is awarded jointly by WPI and UMMS,
Science (M.S.) in Biomedical Engineering,      outstanding WPI undergraduate students           with the appropriate designation on the
the Master of Engineering (M.E.) in Clini-     to earn both a B.S. degree and a master’s        diploma.
cal Engineering and the Master of Engi-        degree in biomedical engineering concur-
neering (M.E.) in Biomedical Engineering.      rently, and in less time than would typical-
                                                                                                Research Interests
While the expected levels of student acade-    ly be required to earn each degree separate-     Biomaterials / Tissue Engineering
mic performance are the same for all           ly. The principal advantage of this program      Research focuses on understanding the
options, they are oriented toward different    is that it allows for certain courses to be      interactions between cells and precisely
career goals. The master of science option     counted towards both degree require-             bioengineered scaffolds that modulate cel-
in biomedical engineering is oriented          ments, thereby reducing total class time.        lular functions such as adhesion, migra-
toward the student who wants to focus on       With careful planning and motivation, the        tion, proliferation, differentiation and
a particular facet of biomedical engineering   Combined Program typically allows a stu-         extracellular matrix remodeling.
practice or research. The master of science    dent to complete requirements for both           Understanding cell-matrix interactions that
can serve as a terminal degree for students    degrees with only one additional year of         regulate wound healing and tissue remod-
interested in an in-depth specialization.      full-time study (five years total). However,     eling will be used to improve the design of
The master of engineering in clinical engi-    because a student must still satisfy all grad-   tissue-engineered analogs for the repair of
neering program is for those individuals       uate degree requirements, the actual time        soft and hard tissue injuries. Research areas
interested in employment in hospitals or       spent in the program may be longer than          include: (1) studies investigating the roles
other clinical environments. This subspe-      five years. There are two degree options for     of microfabricated scaffolds on ker-
cialty involves a close interaction with       students in the Combined Program: a the-         atinocyte function for tissue engineering of
patients and the health care delivery sys-     sis-based master of science (B.S./M.S.)          skin, (2) development of tissue scaffolds
tem. An internship experience is required      option and a non-thesis master of engi-          that mimic the microstructural organiza-
of all students in the clinical engineering    neering (B.S./M.E.) option.                      tion and mechanical responsiveness of
program.                                                                                        native tissues, and (3) development of
                                               Doctoral Programs                                microfabricated cell culture systems to
Internships                                    There are two doctor of philosophy degree        understand how extracellular matrix mole-
For students in the clinical engineering       options in biomedical engineering: The           cules regulate epithelial cell growth and
program, a rotating internship is offered      Ph.D. in Biomedical Engineering at WPI           differentiation. (Pins)
during the year. It includes an orientation    and the Ph.D. in Biomedical Engineering
period to acquaint the student with gener-     and Medical Physics offered jointly by           Biomedical Sensors
al hospital organization and procedures,       WPI and the University of Massachusetts          and Bioinstrumentation
gives a brief exposure to most of the areas    Medical School (UMMS). In both pro-              The development of integrated biomedical
listed below, and is normally required prior   grams, the degree of doctor of philosophy        sensors for invasive and noninvasive blood
to specialized internships.                    is conferred on candidates in recognition        gas and glucose monitoring. Design and in
                                               of high attainments and the ability to carry     vivo evaluation of reflective pulse oximeter
The specialized internship involves the stu-   on original independent research.                sensors. Microcomputer-based medical
dent full time for approximately one           Graduates of the program will be prepared        instrumentation, fiberoptic sensors for
month in ongoing clinical, research or         to affiliate with academic institutions and      medical instrumentation, application of
engineering activities, with supervision by    with the growing medical device and              optics to biomedicine. (Mendelson)
WPI faculty and the internship center          biotechnology industry, which have
staff. To assure maximum student involve-                                                       The development and testing of various
                                               become major economic factors in the             invasive and noninvasive biosensors and
ment and supervision, the number of posi-      Commonwealth of Massachusetts.                   associated bioinstrumentation.


     Biomedical Engineering
     Noninvasive optical sensors for measuring      Research areas include: (1) micromechani-        memory metals and polymers in biomed-
     glucose in diabetic individuals, urea in       cal characterization of tissues, (2) constitu-   ical devices. Fracture fixation devices.
     hemodialysis dialysate, other biochemical      tive modeling, (3) creation of bioartificial     Degradation of implant materials.
     analytes, as well as reagentless chemistry     tissues in vitro, and (4) the effects of         Interface mechanics issues between soft
     measurements are being developed. (Peura)      mechanical stimulation on the functional         and hard connective tissues and engineered
                                                    properties of cells and tissues. (Billiar)       biomaterials. Structural and biological
     In Vivo Optical Imaging                                                                         evaluation of new biomaterials via animal
     Research directed at revealing and under-      Bacterial Adhesion to Biomaterials               models. (Shivkumar)
     standing fundamental physiologic mecha-        The mechanisms governing bacterial adhe-
     nisms using optical imaging techniques in      sion to teeth, contact lenses, and implant-      Medical Imaging
     mouse models. Fluorescence, phosphores-        ed or transdermal devices are poorly             Contrast agents for nuclear medicine.
     cence, absorption and spectral imaging         understood at this time. However, it is          Dose reduction using new detectors.
     techniques are employed to probe cellular      known that the presence of a biofilm on a        Development of new detection devices for
     and physiologic events. Research areas         biomaterial surface will lead to infection       diagnostic radiology and nuclear medicine.
     include: (1) metabolic function and oxy-       and cause an implanted device to fail.           Characterization of image intensifiers,
     genation in the brain; (2) role of oxygen in   Often, removal of the device is the only         radiation dosimetry. Tomographic image
     diabetic retinopathy; (3) physiologic stud-    option since microbes attached to a surface      reconstruction, scatter and attenuation
     ies in inbred, transgenic and knockout         are highly resistant to antibiotics. Research    correction, restoration filtering, image seg-
     mouse models; (4) 3-D in vivo imaging in       in the laboratory is aimed at characterizing     mentation. (King, Glick, Davis)
     neural tissues; and (5) spectral imaging of    the fundamentals of microbial interaction
     neural tissues during functional activation.   forces, cell-to-cell interactions and micro-     Magnetic Resonance Imaging and
     (Shonat)                                       bial adhesion to biomaterials. We are using      Spectroscopy of Brain Function
                                                    atomic force microscopy and related tech-        The development and application of mag-
     Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Imaging             niques to probe microbe-surface or cell-to-      netic resonance imaging (MRI) and spec-
     and Spectroscopy                               cell interactions, in order to eventually        troscopy (MRS) to the study of brain
     Research projects in nuclear magnetic reso-    design materials that are resistant to micro-    function in animal models, including: (1)
     nance (NMR) imaging and spectroscopy           bial colonization.                               novel methodologies to dynamically mea-
     stress experimental aspects of NMR and                                                          sure cerebral blood flow, BOLD (vascular
     their application in both medical and non-     Biomechanics                                     oxygenation), compartment-specific tissue
     biological areas. Major biological research    Research involving the relationship              oxygen tension, arterial and venous blood
     projects include: (1) development of           between the applied stress and the               volume fractions; (2) high-resolution func-
     metabolite-imaging and spectroscopy tech-      response of neurons located in soft tissues      tional MRI techniques; and (3) simultane-
     niques for use in the evaluation of treat-     is being conducted at the University of          ous electrophysiological and functional
     ment of cancer; (2) development of NMR         Massachusetts Medical School.                    MRI recordings. Applications include: (1)
     imaging methods to delineate the “area of      Collaborative orthopedic research on large       the neurophysiological and biophysical
     risk” following stroke and assess potential    and small animals is being conducted at          basis of functional MRI signal sources; (2)
     therapeutic intervention; and (3) develop-     Tufts University School of Veterinary            submillimeter columnar structures and
     ment of noninvasive methods for measur-        Medicine. Current on-campus studies              organization; (3) blood blow, oxygenation
     ing tissue blood flow, as well as tumor oxy-   include the measurement and analysis of          and function of the retina; and (4) func-
     genation, to evaluate the response of neo-     kinetics and kinematics of human and ani-        tional recovery and reorganization after
     plasms to radiotherapy and chemotherapy.       mal motion, and improving the mechani-           stroke. (Duong)
     Nonmedical applications include nonde-         cal design of minimally invasive medical
     structive testing and characterization of      instruments. Also, flow patterns related to      Sensory and Physiologic Signal
     materials using high resolution (“micro-       arterial stenosis and the influence of arte-     Processing
     scopic”) NMR imaging and fluid velocity        riosclerosis on vasculative and dynamic          Application of signal processing, mathe-
     imaging in hollow-fiber bioreactors.           aortic compliance are being investigated.        matical modeling and other electrical and
     (Sotak, Helmer)                                Additional studies include evaluation of         computer engineering skills to the study of
                                                    osteoarthritis and osteoporosis models, and      issues related to human sensation and
     Soft Tissue Biomechanics/                      interfacial problems associated with engi-       physiology. Major areas of focus are hear-
     Tissue Engineering                             neered biomaterials. (Hoffman, Savilonis)        ing and electromyography (EMG).
     Research focused on understanding the                                                           Hearing research is concentrating on
     growth and development of connective tis-      Biomedical Materials                             improved signal processing in hearing aid
     sues and on the influence of mechanical        Calcium phosphate ceramics for bone sub-         devices to improve speech perception by
     stimulation on cells in native and engi-       stitution. Biocomposites for craniomaxillo-      the hearing impaired. In the area of EMG
     neered three-dimensional constructs.           facial and orthopedic applications. Shape        (the electrical activity of skeletal muscle),


                                                                             Biomedical Engineering
improvements to the detection and inter-        Research Laboratories and                       Degree Requirements
pretation of EMG for such uses as the           Facilities
control of powered prosthetic limbs and                                                         For the M.S.
                                                Research projects are primarily conducted       A minimum of 30 credit hours is required
musculoskeletal modeling are continuing.        in WPI’s Salisbury Laboratories and on the
(Clancy, Whitmal)                                                                               for the master of science degree, of which
                                                UMMS campus. Core WPI biomedical                at least 6 credit hours must be a thesis.
                                                engineering research laboratories include a     Course requirements include 6 credit
Spectroscopic Measurement
                                                bioinstrumentation laboratory, a bioma-         hours of life science, 6 credits of biomed-
of Blood and Tissue Chemistry
                                                terials/tissue engineering laboratory, a        ical engineering, 6 credits of advanced
Applications of optical spectroscopy for
                                                biosensor research laboratory, an optical       engineering math and 6 credits of electives
the noninvasive measurement of blood and
                                                imaging laboratory and a soft tissue biome-     (any WPI graduate-level engineering,
tissue chemistry, ultimately to be able to
                                                chanics/tissue engineering laboratory. Other    physics, math, biomedical engineering, or
perform chemical analysis and diagnosis
                                                research projects are conducted in the labo-    equivalent course, subject to approval of
without removing a sample from the
                                                ratories of associated biomedical engineer-     the department head or the student’s
patient. Currently investigating the use of
                                                ing program faculty at WPI and UMMS.            Academic Advisor). Students are required
near infrared spectroscopy in combination
                                                Major areas of research focus in these labo-    to pass BE591 Graduate Seminar twice.
with in vivo chemometric techniques to
                                                ratories include biomechanics, biological
determine tissue pH, blood hematocrit
                                                signal processing, imaging, tissue engineer-    For the M.E.
and electrolyte concentration. Also inter-
                                                ing and ultrasound. A close cooperation         A minimum of 33 credit hours is required
ested in the application of this technology
                                                with the Tufts University School of Veterin-    for the master of engineering degree.
in the triage and treatment of trauma
                                                ary Medicine makes their staff and facilities   Course requirements include 6 credits of
patients and diagnosis of vulnerable
                                                available for project work and internships.     life science, 12 credits of biomedical engi-
plaque. (Soller)
                                                A Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR)              neering, 6 credits of advanced engineering
Ultrasound Measurements                         imaging facility is located at the Central      math and 9 credits of electives (any WPI
Applications under current investigation        Massachusetts Magnetic Imaging Center           graduate-level engineering, physics, math,
include atherosclerotic plaque classification   (CMMIC) and is part of a joint research         biomedical engineering, or equivalent
by means of ultrasound and ultrasound-          program between the Department of               course, subject to approval of the depart-
based osteoporosis detection. For plaque        Biomedical Engineering and the                  ment head or the student’s Academic
classification, the goal is the development     Department of Radiology at the UMass            Advisor). Students may substitute 3 to 6
of an improved method for identifying           Memorial HealthCare (UMMHC) Center.             credits of directed research for 3 credits of
atherosclerotic plaque types, especially dis-   This 1630-square-foot research facility         biomedical engineering and/or 3 credits of
tinguishing between stable and vulnerable       houses a General Electric (GE) CSI-II 2.0       electives. An internship experience is
plaque, by overcoming the aberrating            Tesla (T) / 45 cm imaging spectrometer as       required for students earning the M.E. in
effect of the inhomogeneous soft tissue         well as a chemistry/electronics laboratory      Clinical Engineering (3 credits). Students
layers between the transducer and the ves-      for sample preparation and radio frequen-       are required to pass BE591 Graduate
sel. The concept is based on utilizing the      cy coil research. In addition to the research   Seminar twice.
detected backscatter level from a blood         facility, an 8500-square-foot clinical MR
volume adjacent to the atherosclerotic          facility housing two GE 1.5 T clinical          For the Ph.D.
lesion as a reference, in order to determine    imaging instruments is available at the         The Ph.D. program has no formal course
the absolute backscatter level of the lesion.   CMMIC for suitable research projects.           requirements. However, because research
For osteoporosis detection, the goal is to                                                      in the field of biomedical engineering
                                                In addition to the above research laborato-     requires a solid working knowledge of a
evaluate the efficacy of new ultrasound
                                                ries, the department maintains a number         broad range of subjects in the life sciences,
parameters for estimating bone density,
                                                of teaching laboratories and facilities that    engineering and mathematics, course cred-
microstructure and growth axis, as a basis
                                                may support research activities, including a    its must be distributed across the following
of assessing fracture risk. In addition to
                                                bioinstrumentation and biosignals labora-       categories with the noted minimums:
BUA, new parameters are being investigat-
                                                tory, a computing and imaging facility, a
ed. (Pedersen)                                                                                  • Biomedical Engineering (12 credits)
                                                dedicated projects laboratory and a physi-
                                                ology teaching facility. The department of      • Life Sciences (9 credits)
                                                biology and biotechnology, also located in      • Advanced Engineering Mathematics
                                                the Salisbury Laboratories, maintains a           (6 credits)
                                                number of facilities that also may support      • Laboratory Rotations (6 credits)
                                                biomedical engineering research activities.     • Responsible Conduct of Science (1 credit)
                                                The WPI Gordon Library provides com-            • Advanced Courses and Electives
                                                plete library services. Access to other           (12 credits)
                                                libraries in the Worcester area, including      • Dissertation Research (30 credits)
                                                the UMMS medical library, is available.

     Biomedical Engineering
     The student’s Academic Advisory Com-            presenting and evaluating a teaching exer-     Admission Requirements
     mittee may require additional course work       cise. This experience may involve a            Biomedical engineering embraces the appli-
     to address specific deficiencies in the stu-    research seminar, lecture, demonstration or    cation of engineering to the study of medi-
     dent’s background. Students are required        conference in the context of a medical         cine and biology. While the scope of bio-
     to pass BE591 Graduate Seminar four             school basic science course. Formal parts      medical engineering is broad, applicants are
     times.                                          of the presentation may be videotaped as       expected to have an undergraduate degree
     No later than the start of the third year       appropriate. The presentation and associat-    or a strong background in engineering and
     after formal admittance to the Ph.D. pro-       ed materials are critiqued and evaluated by    to achieve basic and advanced knowledge
     gram, students are required to pass a Ph.D.     program faculty members. The student’s         in engineering, life sciences, and biomed-
     qualifying examination. This examination        Academic Advisory Committee is responsi-       ical engineering. For the joint Ph.D. pro-
     is a defense of an original research propos-    ble for evaluating the teaching exercise       gram, students are also expected to have
     al, outside the area of the student’s disser-   based on criteria previously defined. The      had one semester of organic chemistry, a
     tation topic, made before a committee rep-      teaching requirement can be fulfilled at       full year of biology, and mathematics
     resentative of the area of specialization.      any time, and there is no limit to the         through differential equations. Special pro-
     The examination is used to evaluate the         number of attempts a student may make          grams are available for outstanding gradu-
     ability of the student to pose meaningful       to fulfill this requirement. It must, howev-   ates lacking the necessary prerequisites or
     engineering and scientific questions, to        er, be completed successfully before the       with a background in the physical or life
     propose experimental methods for answer-        dissertation defense can be held.              sciences. These special programs typically
     ing those questions, and to interpret the       The Ph.D. program requires a full-time         involve an individualized plan of course
     validity and significance of probable out-      effort for a minimum of at least three years   work at the advanced undergraduate level,
     comes of these experiments. It is also used     and does not require a foreign language        with formal admittance to the program fol-
     to test a student’s comprehension and           examination.                                   lowing the successful completion (with
     understanding of their formal course work                                                      grades of B or higher) of this course work.
     in life sciences, biomedical engineering
     and mathematics. Admission to candidacy
     is officially conferred upon students who
     have completed their course credit require-
     ments, exclusive of dissertation research
     credit, and passed the Ph.D. qualifying
     Students in the Ph.D. program are
     required to participate in at least two dif-
     ferent laboratory rotations during their
     first two years in the program. Laboratory
     rotations—short periods of research expe-
     rience under the direction of program fac-
     ulty members—are intended to familiarize
     students with concepts and techniques in
     several different engineering and scientific
     fields. They allow faculty members to
     observe and evaluate the research aptitudes
     of students and permit students to evaluate
     the types of projects that might be devel-
     oped into dissertation projects. Upon com-
     pletion of each rotation, the student pre-
     sents a seminar and written report on the
     research accomplished. Each rotation is a
     3- or 4-credit course and lasts a minimum
     of eight weeks if the student participates
     full time in the laboratory, or up to a full
     semester if the student takes courses at the
     same time.
     All candidates for the Ph.D. degree must
     demonstrate teaching skills by preparing,


Biomedical Engineering
Faculty                                      Hoffman, A. H., Ph.D.; Department of      Tuft, R. A., Ph.D.; Department of
Core BME Program Faculty                     Mechanical Engineering, WPI               Physiology, UMMS
C. H. Sotak, Professor and Department        King, M. A., Ph.D.; Department of         Walsh, J. V., M.D.; Department of
Head; Ph.D., Syracuse University             Radiology, UMMS                           Physiology, UMMS
K. L. Billiar, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,   Lifshitz, L. M., Ph.D.; Department of     Wang, Y-L., Ph.D.; Departments of Cell
University of Pennsylvania                   Physiology, UMMS                          Biology and Physiology, UMMS
K. G. Helmer, Research Assistant             Looft, F. J., III, Ph.D.; Department of   Wolf, D. E., Ph.D.; Department of
Professor; Ph.D., University of Rochester    Electrical and Computer Engineering,      Physiology, UMMS
Y. Mendelson, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,    WPI
                                                                                       Adjunct BME Faculty
Case Western Reserve University              Mardirossian, G., M.D., Ph.D.;
                                                                                       Leal, M. J., M.S.; U.S. Food and Drug
R. A. Peura, Professor; Ph.D., Iowa State    Department of Radiology, UMMS
University                                   Paydarfar, D., M.D.; Department of
                                                                                       Rodger, R. M., D.V.M.; Veterinarian,
G. D. Pins, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,      Neurology, UMMS
                                                                                       Private Practice
Rutgers University                           Pedersen, P. C., Ph.D.; Department of
R. D. Shonat, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,    Electrical and Computer Engineering,
University of Pennsylvania                   WPI
                                             Savilonis, B. J., Ph.D.; Department of
Associated BME Program Faculty               Mechanical Engineering, WPI
Anderson, F. A., Ph.D.; Department of
                                             Shivkumar, S. S., Ph.D.; Department of
Surgery, UMMS
                                             Mechanical Engineering, WPI
Ault, H. K., Ph.D.; Department of
                                             Singer, J. J., Ph.D.; Departments of
Mechanical Engineering, WPI
                                             Physiology and Biochemistry and
Camesano, T. A., Ph.D.; Department of        Molecular Pharmacology, UMMS
Chemical Engineering, WPI
                                             Soller, B. R., Ph.D.; Department of
Carrington, W. A., Ph.D.; Department of      Surgery, UMMS
Physiology, UMMS
                                             Sullivan, J. M., Ph.D.; Department of
Clancy, E. A., Ph.D.; Department of          Mechanical Engineering, WPI
Electrical and Computer Engineering,
                                             Tang, D.; Department of Mathematical
                                             Sciences, WPI
Davis, M. A., M.D.; Department of
Radiology, UMMS
Duong, T. Q., Ph.D.; Department of
Psychiatry, UMMS
Fogarty, K. E., M.S.; Department of
Physiology, UMMS
Glick, S. J., Ph.D.; Department of
Radiology, UMMS
Grigg, P., Ph.D.; Department of
Physiology, UMMS


     Biomedical Sciences
     Program of Study                               Biomedical Sciences                               is expected to have substantial academic
     The Worcester Consortium Ph.D.                 Laboratories                                      background, surpassing that acquired
     Program in Biomedical Sciences is an           The laboratory resources at all four partici-     while pursuing a traditional bachelor’s
     innovative program created and adminis-        pating institutions are available to aid in       degree in biology, and students with post-
     tered by WPI. The Consortium, for this         the student’s research activities, as are grad-   graduate experience or a master’s degree
     program, consists of WPI, Clark                uate level courses at WPI, Clark                  are encouraged to apply. Research assist-
     University, The University of                  University, University of Massachusetts           antships may be offered to qualified stu-
     Massachusetts Medical School and the           Medical School and the Worcester                  dents. Teaching assistantships may also be
     Worcester Foundation for Biomedical            Foundation for Biomedical Research.               available.
     Research. Students may enter the program
     and receive their degree either from WPI       Registration and Fees                             Dissertation Defense
     or from Clark, but may complete their dis-     Students may, with the approval of their          Candidates for the Ph.D. must give a
     sertation research at any of these             Advisory Committee, transfer up to one-           public seminar on their dissertation
     Consortium institutions. Admission to the      third of the required credit hours for the        research, to be followed immediately by a
     program requires evidence of substantial       doctoral degree from one of the other             defense of the dissertation before an
     post-baccalaureate research experience and     named consortium institutions or from             Examining Committee. The Dissertation
     a commitment of support from a research        another accredited institution subject to         Examining Committee should include the
     sponsor.                                       the following criteria:                           student’s Advisory Committee and must
                                                                                                      include at least two members of the WPI
     Students are expected to begin their disser-   • Must be graduate level courses with a
                                                                                                      faculty. For students in the Consortium
     tation research immediately upon entering        final grade of B or better.
                                                                                                      Ph.D. in Biomedical Sciences, the
     the program. Students choosing to enter        • Research credits are not transferable.          Dissertation Examining Committee must
     through WPI are considered WPI graduate        • Students registering at WPI for research        include at least one member of the
     students and must meet the general degree        credit at a Consortium institution other        Steering Committee of the Consortium.
     requirements of WPI as well as require-          than WPI are required to pay one-half           All members of the Examining
     ments specified by the department                the current cost per credit hour. Course        Committee must be present for the public
     through which they enter. A detailed             work and research conducted on campus           presentation and subsequent defense.
     description of procedures and degree             is charged at the normal credit-hour
     requirements is available in the office of       cost.                                           The Dissertation Examining Committee
     the biology and biotechnology depart-                                                            will pass the student unanimously or with
     ment.                                          Degree Requirements                               no more than one dissenting vote. The
                                                    For the Ph.D.                                     dissertation will be signed by those mem-
     Research Interests                             The student’s research program is super-          bers voting for approval. A student who
     Research opportunities at WPI exist in the     vised by a committee of professional scien-       fails the dissertation defense may repeat
     general areas of molecular biology and         tists representing at least two of the partic-    the defense within no more than six
     recombinant DNA technology. Other              ipating institutions, including a faculty         months from the date of the failed
     research interests include microbiology,       member from the degree-granting institu-          defense. A second failure will result in dis-
     environmental biology, developmental           tion. During the first year of study, the         missal from the program.
     biology, and plant and animal physiology.      student must pass a preliminary examina-          Requests for more information or applica-
     Details are available upon request.            tion that includes both written and oral          tion forms should be made to the pro-
     Combining resources of the four partici-       segments. A written dissertation, a seminar       gram director at 508-831-5930, or
     pating institutions presents a unique          based on the content of the dissertation
     opportunity for a graduate education. The      and a final dissertation defense are also
     faculty and laboratories available to the      required for the Ph.D. degree. There is no        Program Director
     student are magnified over those of any        foreign language requirement.                     J. C. Bagshaw, Professor and Program
     single institution. A professional environ-                                                      Head; Ph.D., University of Tennessee
                                                    Admission Requirements
     ment of these dimensions permits a great       A student entering through WPI must               Program faculty members are assembled as
     deal of freedom to acquire and develop         meet the entrance and graduation require-         appropriate from WPI, Clark University,
     many novel ideas during the pursuit of a       ments of this institution for the Ph.D.           University of Massachusetts Medical
     Ph.D.                                          However, the student may have a Research          School and the Worcester Foundation for
                                                    Advisor and project at University of              Biomedical Research.
                                                    Massachusetts Medical School, Clark
                                                    University, Worcester Foundation for
                                                    Biomedical Research or WPI. The student


                                                                                   Chemical Engineering
Programs of Study                                mentally benign catalytic processes. Process   Biochemical Engineering
Students have the opportunity to do cre-         control involves analysis and control of       Bioreactor Engineering: Whole Cells
ative work on state-of-the-art research pro-     nonlinear processes. Master’s and doctoral     Research in this area centers around stud-
jects as a part of their graduate study in       candidates’ research in these areas involves   ies of the analysis of biological reactors
chemical engineering. The programs offers        the application of all fundamental aspects     using whole cells as the biocatalysts. Types
excellent preparation for rewarding careers      of chemical engineering.                       of reactors studied include stirred tank,
in research, industry or education.              Of the 30 to 35 graduate students, approx-     packed bed and hollow fiber, and the types
Selection of graduate courses and thesis         imately 75% are Ph.D. candidates.              of cells studied are bacteria, yeast and
project is made with the aid of a faculty        Research groups tend to be small; because      mammalian. The focus of the work is on
advisor with whom the student works              of this, students find considerable interac-   understanding the behavior of cells in reac-
closely. All graduate students participate in    tion with faculty advisors as well as among    tor environments. Recently, we have
a seminar during each term of residence.         various research groups. In such an atmos-     explored the relationship between the
                                                 phere, graduate students have exceptional      stress response and overproduction of
The master’s degree program in chemical
                                                 opportunities to contribute to their field.    recombinant protein products.
engineering is concerned with the
advanced topics of the field. While special-     Studies may be pursued in the following
                                                 areas:                                         Bioreactor Engineering:
ization is possible, most students are urged                                                    Plant Tissue Culture
to advance their knowledge along a broad                                                        Plants are an important source of pharma-
front. All students select a portion of their    Advanced Materials Processing
                                                 Catalysis and Reaction Engineering             ceutically active compounds. Many of
studies from core courses in mathematics,                                                       these secondary metabolites are only pro-
thermodynamics, reactor design, kinetics         Research in this area is centered around
                                                 the physical and chemical behavior of flu-     duced if the plant cells exhibit a certain
and catalysis, and transport phenomena. In                                                      level of organization, i.e., they exist as
addition, they choose courses from a wide        ids, especially gases, in contact with homo-
                                                 geneous and heterogeneous catalysts.           plant organs such as roots or shoots.
range of electives. While a master’s degree                                                     Designing bioreactors to grow plant tissue
can be obtained with course work alone,          Projects include diffusion through porous
                                                 solids, multicomponent adsorption, mech-       culture and for micropropagation presents
most students carry on research terminat-                                                       unique engineering challenges. The focus
ing in a thesis.                                 anism studies; microkinetics, synthesis and
                                                 characterization of catalysts; catalytic       of our work is to understand the response
In the doctoral program, a broad knowl-          reformers; heat and mass transfer in cat-      of plant tissue cultures to changes
edge of chemical engineering topics is           alytic reactors; and reactor dynamics.         in reactor environment in order to opti-
required for success in the qualifying                                                          mize production. This work is a collabora-
examination. Beyond this point, more             Zeolite Science and Technology                 tive effort that involves chemical engineers,
intensive specialization is achieved in the      Research in the area of zeolite science        biologists and biochemists.
student’s field of research through course       involves synthesis, characterization and
work and thesis research.                        applications of molecular sieve zeolites. In   Bioseparations
                                                 particular, developing an understanding of     Full realization of biotechnology’s potential
Research Interests                               the fundamental mechanisms of zeolite          to produce useful products will require the
The Chemical Engineering Department’s            nucleation and crystal growth in               engineering of efficient and, in some cases,
research effort is concentrated in the follow-   hydrothermal systems is of interest. Uses of   large-scale production and recovery
ing major areas: advanced materials process-     zeolite as liquid and gas phase adsorbents,    processes. Research in the bioseparations
ing, biochemical engineering, biomedical         and as catalysts, are being studied.           laboratory is aimed at understanding and
engineering, process control and environ-        Incorporation of zeolites into membranes       exploiting the thermodynamic and trans-
mental engineering. Advanced materials           for separations is being investigated due to   port properties of biological materials
processing encompasses catalysis, reaction       zeolites’ very regular pore dimensions on      underlying their separation, to improve
engineering, and zeolite science and tech-       the molecular level.                           existing purification methods and develop
nology.                                                                                         new separation techniques. Recent projects
Biochemical engineering includes bioreac-        Solid-State Characterization                   include partitioning in aqueous two-phase
tor engineering and bioseparations while         The primary focus in this area is the use of   systems, affinity partitioning, extractive
biomedical engineering studies are focused       optical spectroscopy in the structural char-   fermentation, filtration using inorganic
on cell-surface interactions. Environmental      acterization of materials, especially cata-    membranes, and a new large-scale elec-
Engineering encompasses air pollution and        lysts.                                         trophoretic separation method.
atmospheric aerosols, and pollution pre-
vention in chemical processes, environ-
mentally benign chemical reactor technol-
ogy, fuel cell technology and new environ-


     Chemical Engineering
     Biomedical Engineering                          Environmental Engineering                       Fuel Cell Technology
     Bacterial Adhesion to Biomaterials              Air Pollution and Atmospheric                   Fuel cells have potential as clean and effi-
     The mechanisms governing bacterial adhe-        Aerosols                                        cient power sources for automobiles and
     sion to teeth, contact lenses, and implant-     Atmospheric aerosols play a major role in       stationary appliances. Research is being
     ed or transdermal devices are poorly            the chemical and radiative processes in the     conducted on developing, characterizing
     understood at this time. However, it is         atmosphere. Understanding the formation         and modeling of fuel cells that are robust
     known that the presence of a biofilm on a       and growth of new particles in the complex,     for these consumer applications. This
     biomaterial surface will lead to infection      multicomponent system represented by the        includes development of CO-tolerant
     and cause an implanted device to fail.          atmosphere is a major challenge. A related      anodes, higher temperature proton-
     Often, removal of the device is the only        issue is the formation of new phases in or on   exchange membranes and direct methanol
     option since microbes attached to a surface     the surface of an existing aerosol, that can    fuel cells. In addition, reformers are being
     are highly resistant to antibiotics. Work in    influence the chemical reactions occurring      investigated to produce hydrogen from liq-
     our laboratory is aimed at characterizing       there. Experiments and modeling are both        uid fuels.
     bacterial interaction forces and adhesion to    used to address these problems.
     biomaterials. We are using novel tech-                                                          Chemical Engineering
     niques to probe bacterial-surface interac-      Bacterial and Biopolymer Interactions in        Laboratories
     tions, in order to design materials that are    the Aquatic Environment                         Biocolloid Laboratory
     resistant to microbial colonization.            Interests are directed to the roles bacteria    All of the experimental work in this lab is
                                                     and bacterial extracellular polymers play in    geared at characterizing biocolloid systems
     Process Analysis and Control                    environmental processes. Experimental work      (bacterial cells, biopolymers, other types of
     Nonlinear Process                               is focused at characterizing biocolloid sys-    cells, etc.) at the nanoscale. The main
     Current research efforts lie in the broad       tems at the nanoscale. The main areas of        piece of equipment used is an atomic force
     area of nonlinear process analysis and con-     environmental research are: (1) transport of    microscope, which can operate in liquids
     trol, and are directed toward a fundamen-       bacteria in porous media, (2) adhesion of       or under ambient conditions. Computers
     tal understanding of certain key issues         bacteria to soil or to the natural organic      with sophisticated image analysis software
     which are present in the analysis and syn-      matter coatings present on soil, (3) the role   are used to quantify phenomena observed
     thesis of control systems for nonlinear         of biopolymers in promoting bacterial adhe-     in the images. A laminar flow hood is used
     processes in both continuous and discrete-      sion, and (4) the role of biopolymers in        for working with sterile cultures, and
     time domain. In particular, the following       coagulation of trace metals in surface water.   ample wet chemistry space to do prepara-
     thematic areas may be identified in our         The applications involve natural and engi-      tive work.
     current research plan: (1) synthesis of         neered systems, and include improving in
     robust optimal continuous and discrete-         situ bioremediation efforts, prevention of      Bioreactor Engineering Laboratory
     time (digital) feedback regulators for non-     water contamination with either microbes or     This laboratory has stirred-tank, packed-
     linear processes in the presence of model       toxic compounds, and the design of better       bed and membrane-type bioreactors used
     uncertainty; (2) design of discrete-time        treatment options for wastewater.               in the production of biological products.
     nonlinear state estimators for digital
     process monitoring and fault                    Environmental Catalysis                         Zeolite Crystallization Laboratory
     detection/diagnosis purposes; (3) risk          and Reactor Design                              This laboratory is equipped for hydrother-
     analysis and management with applica-           The use of catalysis to solve problems of       mal syntheses of molecular sieve zeolites
     tions to process safety; (4) development of     environmental importance is emphasized.         over a wide range of temperature, chemical
     the appropriate software tools for the effec-   New processes that will avoid the produc-       composition and hydrodynamic condi-
     tive digital implementation of the above        tion of pollutants and also processes that      tions. The objective is to understand how
     control, monitoring and risk management         will recycle undesired products are             zeolites nucleate and grow.
     schemes; and (5) design and conduct of          explored. Working closely with industry to      Synthesis results are characterized by opti-
     process dynamic analysis, control, moni-        identify significant issues is important.       cal and electron microscopy, X-ray diffrac-
     toring and diagnostics-related experiments      Design of novel reactors to minimize the        tion and particle size analysis. The unique
     associated with a variety of operation units    formation of harmful unwanted side prod-        aspect of measuring zeolite crystal size dis-
     in the process control lab for educational,     ucts is being carried out, with present         tribution is facilitated by the computer-
     training and research purposes.                 emphasis on membrane reactors and pre-          interfaced Particle Data Electrozone
                                                     venting thermal runaway in fixed-bed reac-      Celloscope.
                                                     tors. Novel-supported molten metal cata-
                                                     lysts are being developed for pollution         Heat and Mass Transfer Laboratory
                                                     abatement.                                      This laboratory is mainly computational.
                                                                                                     Workstations are dedicated to the applica-
                                                                                                     tion of computational fluid dynamics


                                                                                Chemical Engineering
(CFD) to transport problems in chemical       industrial catalysts, kinetics is measured in   eral packed-bed reactors, a Parr reactor, a
reaction engineering. Current research        flow, batch and CSTR reactors. The prod-        slurry reactor, a membrane reactor, a
interests include simulation of flow and      uct analysis is made with gas chromato-         porous-walled tubular reactor and an adia-
heat transfer in packed-bed reactors and      graphs (GC), mass spectrometers (MS) or         batic tubular reactor with several thermo-
membrane reactors. Capabilities also exist    GC-MS. Other characterization methods           couples for monitoring temperature. All
in this lab for simulation of gas dynamics    are temperature-programmed reaction with        necessary analytical instruments are also
in microchannels. Experimental facilities     an MS detector and volumetric cell appara-      available, such as several microbalances,
include the measurement of heat and mass      tus for the determination of total and          volumetric BET apparatus, mercury
transfer coefficients in packed columns.      metal surface areas. Studies under reaction     porosimeter, several gas chromatographs, a
                                              conditions are carried out with ultraviolet     Perkin-Elmer GC-MS with Q-Mass 910
Plant Tissue Culture Laboratory               and visible Raman spectrometers.                mass spectrometer, Nicolet Magna-IR 560
This laboratory includes plant culture                                                        FTIR with DRIFT cell for catalyst surface
                                              For the model catalyst studies, two ultra-
rooms, analytical equipment to monitor                                                        characterization, Rosemount
                                              high-vacuum, surface science analysis sys-
the composition of the liquid and gas                                                         Chemiluminescence NO/NOx Analyzer
                                              tems are available. These systems were cus-
phases of the reactors, and to analyze for                                                    NGA 2000 and a TEOM Series 1500
                                              tom built and were designed to measure
the desired secondary products.                                                               PMA Pulse Mass Analyzer for TPD/TGA
                                              kinetics at high pressure (1.5 atm). The
                                              sample can be transferred directly between      experiments. Other available equipment in
Aerosol Laboratory                                                                            CREL includes hoods, several HPLC liq-
This laboratory is equipped to conduct        the analysis and the reactor cell without
                                              exposure to the ambient. The techniques         uid feed pumps; several vacuum pumps;
fundamental studies of aerosol formation,                                                     temperature, pressure and flow monitors
growth and structure, using both a two-       available are mass spectrometry, low-energy
                                              electron diffraction, X-ray photoelectron       and controllers, furnaces, vacuum oven,
pulse expansion cloud chamber and a                                                           diffusion cell, and all necessary glassware
supersonic nozzle, so that we can examine     spectroscopy, Auger electron spectroscopy
                                              and scanning tunneling microscopy. The          and other laboratory supplies for catalyst
a wide range of supersaturations. The                                                         preparation and testing. In addition, sever-
supersonic nozzle is portable and is regu-    reactor cell is designed for the measure-
                                              ment of reaction kinetics and for in situ       al Macintosh computers and PCs are avail-
larly transported to the Cold Neutron                                                         able within the laboratory. The available
Research Facility at the National Institute   Raman spectroscopy.
                                                                                              equipment is used for the design, synthesis
of Standards and Technology to conduct                                                        and characterization of novel catalytic
                                              Catalyst and Reaction Engineering
small-angle neutron scattering experiments                                                    materials, and for reactor analysis.
                                              Laboratory (CREL)
on nanodroplet aerosols.
                                              A large variety of equipment is available in
                                              CREL for catalyst preparation and charac-       Fuel Cell Laboratory (FCL)
Environmental Catalysis Laboratory                                                            A 5 cm2 and a 25 cm2 proton-exchange
Kinetics on industrial catalysts and their    terization, and detailed kinetic studies.
                                              This includes various reactors such as sev-     membrane (PEM) fuel cell test station—
flat model replicas are studied. For the                                                      complete with flow, pressure, humidity
                                                                                              and temperature controllers, and an exter-
                                                                                              nal electronic load (HP Model No.
                                                                                              6060B) with a power supply (Lambda
                                                                                              LFS-46-5) —are available. In addition, a
                                                                                              direct methanol fuel cell (DMFC) is avail-
                                                                                              able. A hot press, Carver Model C—along
                                                                                              with other equipment for casting mem-
                                                                                              branes and for fabricating membrane-
                                                                                              electrode assemblies (MEAs) including cat-
                                                                                              alyst preparation equipment—is available.
                                                                                              A cell for studying conductivity at differ-
                                                                                              ent relative humidities and temperatures is
                                                                                              available. Other equipment includes a
                                                                                              Solartron SI 1260 AC Impedance Analyzer
                                                                                              and a rotating disc electrode. The available
                                                                                              equipment allows design and thorough
                                                                                              characterization of new fuel cells, includ-
                                                                                              ing cyclic voltammetry and frequency


     Chemical Engineering
     Center for Inorganic Membrane                   Degree Requirements                              Faculty
     Studies (CIMS)                                                                                   R. Datta, Professor and Department
     The goals of the Center for Inorganic           For the M.S.
                                                                                                      Head; Ph.D., University of California,
     Membrane Studies are to develop industry        Thesis Option
                                                                                                      Santa Barbara
     and university collaboration for inorganic      A total of 30 credit hours is required,
                                                     including 18 credit hours of course work         T. A. Camesano, Assistant Professor;
     membrane research, and to promote and
                                                     and at least 12 credit hours of thesis work.     Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University
     expand the science of inorganic mem-
     branes as a technological base for industri-    The course work must include 15 credit           W. M. Clark, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     al applications through fundamental             hours of graduate level chemical engineer-       Rice University
     research. An interdisciplinary approach has     ing courses and 9 of these must be chosen
                                                                                                      D. DiBiasio, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     been taken by the center to assemble all of     from the core curriculum. A satisfactory
                                                                                                      Purdue University
     the essential skills in synthesis, modeling,    oral seminar presentation must be given
                                                     every year in residence.                         A. G. Dixon, Professor; Ph.D., University
     material characterization, diffusion mea-
                                                                                                      of Edinburgh
     surements and general properties determi-
                                                     Non-Thesis Option
     nations of inorganic membranes. Current                                                          N. K. Kazantzis, Assistant Professor;
                                                     A total of 30 credit hours is required,          Ph.D, University of Michigan
     projects include microporous and dense
                                                     including a minimum of 24 credit hours
     inorganic membrane synthesis, and reac-                                                          Y. H. Ma, Professor; Ph.D. Massachusetts
                                                     in graduate level courses. At least 21
     tive membrane studies, fouling and trans-                                                        Institute of Technology
                                                     course credit hours must be in chemical
     port studies, characterization of membrane
                                                     engineering and 9 of these must be chosen        W. R. Moser, Professor Emeritus; Ph.D.,
     degradation and applications in biotech-
                                                     from the core curriculum. A maximum of           Massachusetts Institute of Technology
     nology. Facilities including SEM with
                                                     6 credit hours of independent study under
     EDX and ultrafiltration units are available.                                                     R. W. Thompson, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                     the faculty advisor may be part of the pro-
                                                                                                      Iowa State University
     Fuel Cell Center (FCC)                          gram.
                                                                                                      R. E. Wagner, Professor Emeritus; Ph.D.,
     The Fuel Cell Center is a
                                                     For the Ph.D.                                    Princeton University
     University/industry alliance comprising
                                                     There are no language requirements,              A. H. Weiss, Professor Emeritus; Ph.D.,
     industrial members, faculty members, staff,
                                                     although candidates are encouraged to be         University of Pennsylvania
     and graduate and undergraduate students.
                                                     familiar with those languages in which a
     The faculty members of FCC come from                                                             B. E. Wyslouzil, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                     significant portion of their specialized field
     the various departments at WPI. The                                                              California Institute of Technology
                                                     is published.
     research is performed in the various labo-
     ratories of the faculty members. The            Upon completion of the comprehensive
     industrial members represent companies or       qualifying examination, candidates must
     other organizations with interest in fuel       present a research proposal in order to
     cell technology, including fuel cell compa-     acquaint members of the faculty with the
     nies, automobile manufacturers, utilities,      chosen research topic.
     petroleum companies, chemical compa-
     nies, catalysis companies, etc.                 Admission Requirements
                                                     An undergraduate degree in chemical engi-
     The objectives of the FCC are: (1) to per-      neering is preferred for master’s and doc-
     form research and development of fuel cells,    toral degree applicants. Those with related
     fuel reformers and related components for       backgrounds will also be considered, but
     mobile and stationary applications; (2) to      may be required to complete prerequisite
     educate graduate and undergraduate stu-         course work in some areas.
     dents in fuel cell technology; and (3) to
     facilitate technology transfer between the
     University and industry. The current pro-
     jects include development of proton-
     exchange membrane (PEM) fuel cells, direct
     methanol fuel cells (DMFCs), molten car-
     bonate fuel cells (MCFCs), microbial fuel
     cells, fuel cell stacks, membrane reformers,
     microreformers, reformer catalysis, fuel cell
     electrocatalysis, composite proton-exchange
     membranes, inorganic membranes, and
     transport and reaction modeling.


                                                               Chemistry and Biochemistry
Programs of Study                              Chemistry and Biochemistry                     Degree Requirements
The Department of Chemistry and                Laboratories                                   Because graduate education in chemistry
Biochemistry offers the M.S. in either         The Chemistry and Biochemistry                 and biochemistry is primarily research ori-
chemistry or biochemistry, as well as a        Department is located in Goddard Hall,         ented, there are no formal departmental
Ph.D. The major areas of research in the       which houses 20,000 square feet of research    course requirements in the graduate pro-
department are biochemistry and bio-           laboratories, shops and instrument laborato-   gram. However, it is expected that each
physics, molecular engineering and synthe-     ries. The research activities in the depart-   graduate student will take graduate level
ses, and nanotechnology. As graduate edu-      ment are concentrated in the following         courses in areas of chemistry that are rele-
cation in chemistry and biochemistry is        areas: organic synthesis, medicinal chem-      vant to their field of specialization.
primarily research oriented, there are no      istry, biochemistry, laser chemistry, photo-   Entering students who have deficiencies in
formal course requirements other than par-     chemistry, solid state chemistry and molec-    specific areas of chemistry (inorganic,
ticipation in seminar in every semester of     ular modeling. Department facilities and       organic, physical, or biochemistry), as
residence. It is expected that students will   instrumentation in individual research labo-   revealed by preliminary examinations, will
begin their research in collaboration with a   ratories that support this research include    take appropriate courses to correct these
faculty member by the end of the first         200 and 400 MHz FT-NMR, GC-MS,                 deficiencies.
term of residence.                             GC, HPLC, capillary electrophoresis, DSC       Each student should select a research advi-
                                               (differential scanning calorimeter), TGA       sor no later than the end of the first term
Research Interests
                                               (thermogravometric analysis), polarizing       (seven weeks) of residence, and research
The three major areas of research in the
                                               optical stenomicroscope, FT-IR, UV-VIS         should be started by the beginning of the
department are:
                                               absorption, flourescence and phosphores-       second term.
• Biochemistry and biophysics. Within          cence spectroscopy; and cyclic voltammetry.
  this area there is active research on a      The department is exceptionally well set up    For the M.S.
  number of topics including heavy metal       with computer facilities and is also net-      Thesis
  transport and metal homeostasis of both      worked to the University’s mainframe.          The M.S. degree in chemistry or biochem-
  plants and bacteria, plant pathogen                                                         istry requires 30 semester hours of credit, of
  interactions, enzyme structure and func-                                                    which at least 6 or more must be thesis
  tion, regulation of plant development by                                                    research, and the remainder in approved
  light, and others.                                                                          independent studies and courses at the
• Molecular Engineering and Synthesis.                                                        4000 or 500 level. Special requirements of
  Within this area there is active research                                                   the Chemistry and Biochemistry
  on topics encompassing supramolecular                                                       Department are that an M.S. candidate
  materials, photovoltaic materials, poly-                                                    must submit a thesis based upon research
  morphism in pharmaceutical drugs,                                                           conducted under the direction of a faculty
  spectroscopy of heterocyclic molecules,                                                     member during his or her tenure at WPI.
  photophysical properties of cumulenes,                                                      The thesis must be approved by the faculty
  host-guest chemistry, and more.                                                             advisor and the chairman of the Chemistry
• Nanotechnology. This research area                                                          and Biochemistry Department.
  encompasses such projects as photonic
  and nonlinear optical materials,                                                            For the Ph.D.
  nanoporous and microporous crystals of                                                      Qualifying Examination
  organic and coordination compounds,                                                         After formal admission to the doctoral
  molecular interactions at surfaces, and                                                     program Ph.D. candidates must take the
  others.                                                                                     qualifying examination in their field of
                                                                                              At the end of the first semester of the sec-
                                                                                              ond year of residence, the student must
                                                                                              submit a written and an oral progress
                                                                                              report on research completed to the
                                                                                              Chemistry and Biochemistry Department.


     Chemistry and Biochemistry
     A committee of three faculty members,           Admission Requirements                   Faculty
     including the Research Advisor, will con-       A B.S. degree with demonstrated profi-   J. P. Dittami, Professor and Department
     sider this progress report and the student’s    ciency in chemistry or biochemistry is   Head; Ph.D., Rensselaer Polytechnic
     performance in courses, and will recom-         required to enter the M.S. program.      Institute
     mend to the department whether or not           Students wishing to pursue the Ph.D.
     the student should complete a master of                                                  J. M. Argüello, Associate Professor;
                                                     must follow the procedure described      Ph.D., Universidad Nacional de Rió
     science degree, or if the student should be     above.
     formally admitted to the Ph.D. program.                                                  Cuarto, Argentina
                                                                                              H. Beall, Professor; Ph.D.,
     Dissertation                                                                             Harvard University
     An oral examination is held after candi-
                                                                                              L. H. Berka, Research Professor; Ph.D.,
     dates have submitted their dissertations.
                                                                                              University of Connecticut
     The faculty of the Chemistry and
     Biochemistry Department, at least one                                                    R. E. Connors, Professor; Ph.D.,
     member of another department and other                                                   Northeastern University
     scientists are invited to participate. The                                               C. D. Fairchild, Assistant Professor;
     examination generally consists of a brief                                                Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley
     oral presentation of the principal points of
                                                                                              W. D. Hobey, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     the dissertation by the candidate, followed
                                                                                              California Institute of Technology
     by questions from the faculty. The scope of
     the examination may be broadened if the                                                  N. K. Kildahl, Professor; Ph.D.,
     faculty feel it necessary. In addition, the                                              University of Illinois
     candidate is required to present as a part of                                            W. G. McGimpsey, Professor; Ph.D.,
     the thesis and examination an original, sig-                                             Queen’s University, Canada
     nificant proposal for further research in
     the area. Students formally admitted to the                                              J. MacDonald, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
     Ph.D. program are expected to complete                                                   University of Minnesota
     their qualifying examination within three                                                J. W. Pavlik, Professor; Ph.D., George
     semesters (not including summers) from                                                   Washington University
     their admission date. At that time students                                              A. A. Scala, Professor; Ph.D., Polytechnic
     should apply to the department for Ph.D.                                                 Institute of Brooklyn
     candidacy status.
                                                                                              V. R. Thalladi, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                                                              University of Hyderabad, India
                                                                                              S. J. Weininger, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                                                              University of Pennsylvania
                                                                                              K. K. Wobbe, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                                                              Harvard University


                                            Civil and Environmental Engineering
Programs of Study                              WPI are as follows – three-dimensional           with Alden Research Laboratory, an inde-                  dynamic response of tall buildings to sto-       pendent hydraulics research laboratory
Depts/CEE/Grad                                 chastic winds; the inelastic dynamic             with large-scale experimental facilities.
The Department of Civil and Environ-           response of tall buildings to earthquakes;
mental Engineering (CEE) offers graduate       response of braced, framed-tube and outrig-      Geotechnical Engineering
programs leading to the degrees of master      ger-braced tall buildings to wind; dynamic       Course offerings in soil mechanics, geo-
of science, master of engineering and doctor   response of tall buildings with base-isolation   technical and geoenvironmental engineer-
of philosophy. The department also offers      to seismic loads; eccentrically braced tall      ing may be combined with structural
graduate and advanced certificate programs.    buildings to resist earthquakes; approximate     engineering and engineering mechanics
Full- and part-time study is available.        methods of analysis and preliminary design       courses, as well as other appropriate
                                               of tall buildings; knowledge-based systems       University offerings.
Master of Science and                          and neural networks for tall building de-
Doctor of Philosophy                           sign; structural design agents for building      Engineering and Construction
The master of science and doctor of phi-       design; finite element methods for nonlin-       Designed to assist the development of pro-
losophy in civil and environmental engi-       ear analysis; finite element analysis of shell   fessionals knowledgeable in the design/
neering are arranged to meet the interests     structures for dynamic and instability analy-    construction engineering processes, labor
and objectives of the individual student.      sis; and box girder bridges.                     and legal relations, and the organization
Through consultation with an advisor and                                                        and use of capital. The program has been
appropriate selection from the courses         Environmental Engineering                        developed for those students interested in
listed in this catalog, from 4000-level        The environmental engineering program is         the development and construction of
undergraduate courses suitable for gradu-      designed to meet the needs of engineers          large-scale facilities. The program includes
ate credit, independent graduate study and     and scientists in the environmental field.       four required courses: CE 580, CE584,
concentrated effort in a research or project   Coursework provides a strong foundation          CE585 and MG 501. MG 501 can be
activity, a well-planned program may be        in both the theoretical and practical            substituted by an equivalent 3-credit-hour
achieved. Students may take acceptable         aspects of the environmental engineering         course approved by department. It must
courses in other departments. The com-         discipline, while project and research activ-    also include any two of the following
plete program must be approved by the          ities allow for in-depth investigation of        courses: CE 581, CE 582, CE 583 and
student's advisor and the Graduate             current and emerging topics. Courses are         CE 586. The remaining courses in the stu-
Program Coordinator.                           offered in the broad areas of water quality      dents’ program include a balanced choice
                                               and waste treatment. Topics covered in           from other civil engineering and manage-
The faculty have a broad range of teaching
                                               classes include: hydraulics and hydrology;       ment courses as approved by the advisor. It
and research interests. Through courses,
                                               physical, chemical and biological treatment      is possible to integrate a program in design
projects and research, students gain excel-
                                               systems for water, wastewater, hazardous         and construction to develop a cohesive
lent preparation for rewarding careers in
                                               waste and industrial waste; contaminant          master builder plan of studies. Active areas
many sectors of engineering, including
                                               transport, transformation and modeling;          of research include integration of design
consulting, industry, government and edu-
                                               and water quality.                               and construction, models and information
                                                                                                technology, cooperative agreements, and
                                               Current research interests in the environ-
Specialty programs are available in the
                                                                                                international construction.
                                               mental engineering program span a wide
following areas:                               range of areas. These areas include micro-       Highway Infrastructure
Structural Engineering
                                               bial contamination of source waters, col-        The objective of the highway infrastruc-
Courses from the structural offerings,         loid and surface chemistry, physiochemical       ture program is to provide a center for
combined with appropriate mathematics,         treatment processes, disinfection, pollution     learning and education for the engineers
mechanics and other courses, provide           prevention for industries, treatment of haz-     who will design, build and maintain
opportunities to pursue programs ranging       ardous and industrial wastes, biological         tomorrow’s highway infrastructure.
from theoretical mechanics and analysis to     wastewater treatment, environmental fluid
                                               dynamics and coastal processes, contami-         The highway infrastructure program is a
structural design and materials research.                                                       multi-disciplinary interdepartmental pro-
There are ample opportunities for research     nant fate and transport in groundwater
                                               and surface water, exchanges between sur-        gram designed to prepare students for
and project work in mechanics, structures                                                       careers designing, maintaining and manag-
and construction, utilizing campus facili-     face and subsurface waters, computer sim-
                                               ulations of distribution systems, and land       ing highway infrastructure systems.
ties and in cooperation with area consult-                                                      Students gain proficiency in highway infra-
ing and contracting firms. The integration     use development and controls. Research
                                               facilities include the Environmental             structure technology in two complimenta-
of design and construction into a cohesive                                                      ry ways: projects and course work. Projects
master builder plan of studies is available.   Laboratory and several computing labora-
                                               tories. Additional opportunities are provid-     focus on developing improved practical
The research topics in the recent past at      ed through collaborative research projects       methods, procedures and techniques.


     Civil and Environmental Engineering
                                                                                                    This is a practice-oriented program that
                                                                                                    builds upon a project-based curriculum
                                                                                                    and uses a multidisciplinary approach to
                                                                                                    problem solving for the integration of
                                                                                                    planning, design, construction and facility
                                                                                                    management. It emphasizes hands-on
                                                                                                    experience with information technology
                                                                                                    and teamwork.

                                                                                                    The environmental master of engineering
                                                                                                    program concentrates on the collection,
                                                                                                    storage, treatment and distribution of
                                                                                                    industrial and municipal water resources,
                                                                                                    and on pollution prevention and the treat-
                                                                                                    ment and disposal of industrial and
                                                                                                    municipal wastes.

                                                                                                    Civil and Environmental
                                                                                                    Engineering Laboratories
                                                                                                    The department has three civil and envi-
                                                                                                    ronmental engineering laboratories
                                                                                                    (Environmental Lab, Geotechnical Lab,
                                                                                                    and Materials/Structural Lab), plus three
                                                                                                    computer laboratories located within
     Course work is focused on practical aspects     Interdisciplinary M.S. Program in              Kaven Hall, as well as a structural mechan-
     of infrastructure technology needed by          Construction Project Management                ics impact laboratory. The CEE laborato-
     practicing engineers.                           The interdisciplinary program combines         ries are used by all civil and environmental
     Research in the highway infrastructure          offerings from several disciplines including   engineering students and faculty. The
     program is sponsored by a variety of pri-       civil engineering, management science,         computer laboratories are open to all WPI
     vate and governmental organizations             business and economics. Requirements for       students and faculty. Uses for all laborato-
     including the U. S. Federal Highway             the degree are similar to those listed above   ries include formal classes, student pro-
     Administration, the National Cooperative        for the master of science in engineering       jects, research projects and unsupervised
     Highway Research Program, the                   and construction management program.           student activities.
     Massachusetts Highway Department, The
     Maine Department of Transportation, the         Master of Engineering                          Structural Mechanics Impact
     Iowa Department of Transportation, the          The master of engineering is a professional    Laboratory
     New England Transportation Consortium,          practice-oriented degree. The degree is        The Structural Mechanics Impact
     the National Science Foundation and oth-        available both for undergraduate students      Laboratory is a teaching and research labo-
     ers. Some of the more active research areas     who wish to remain at WPI an additional        ratory. The impact laboratory is used to
     being pursued in the highway infrastruc-        year to obtain both a bachelor of science      explore the behavior of materials and com-
     ture program include developing side-           and a master of engineering, as well as for    ponents in collisions.
     impact crash test and evaluation proce-         students possessing a B.S. degree who wish
                                                                                                    The Structural Mechanics Impact
     dures, developing procedures for perform-       to enroll in graduate school to seek this
                                                                                                    Laboratory consists of the following major
     ing in-service performance evaluations of       degree. At present, the M.E. program is
                                                                                                    pieces of equipment:
     traffic barriers, assessing the field perfor-   offered in the following two areas of con-
                                                     centration:                                    • An Instron Dynatup Model 8250
     mance of traffic barriers, finite element                                                        Instrumented Impact Test System,
     analysis of crash events, structural crash-
                                                     Master Builder                                 • A high-speed video camera system,
     worthiness, Superpave technology, pave-
                                                     The master builder program is designed         • A data acquisition system, and
     ment smoothness and ride quality mea-
                                                     for engineering and construction profes-       • A large-mass drop tower.
     surement, recycled asphalt materials, and
                                                     sionals who wish to better understand the
     implementation of innovation in trans-                                                         Fuller Environmental Laboratory
                                                     industry’s complex decision-making envi-
     portation management and other trans-                                                          The Fuller Laboratory is designed for
                                                     ronment and to accelerate their career
     portation-related topics.                                                                      state-of-the-art environmental analyses,
                                                     paths as effective project team leaders.
                                                                                                    including water and wastewater testing


                                          Civil and Environmental Engineering
and treatability studies. Major equipment      hook-up jacks to network connections for        approved by the CEE department head or
includes an atomic absorption                  laptop computers are provided at four           the Graduate Program Coordinator, when
spectrophotometer, gas chromatograph,          large group tables in the center of the         they are developed or changed. The pro-
total organic carbon analyzer, UV-Vis          CECIL room. A complete presentation             gram requires the completion of 30 semes-
spectrophotometer and particle counter.        system (computer projector, VCR and             ter hours of credit. The following activities
Along with ancillary equipment (such as a      sound system) is in this facility. Primary      must be fulfilled through completion of the
centrifuge, autoclave, incubators, balances,   use of this laboratory is for courses and       courses noted or by appropriate documen-
pH meters and water purification system),      civil engineering group project work.           tation by the department head or graduate
the laboratory is equipped for a broad                                                         program coordinator: experience with com-
range of physical, chemical and biological     Graduate Research Computing                     plex project management (CE 593
testing. The laboratory is shared by gradu-    Laboratory (GRCL)                               Advanced Project), competence in integra-
ate research projects, graduate and under-     The GRCL is located in Kaven Hall,              tion of computer applications and informa-
graduate courses (CE 4060 Environmental        Room 203. The laboratory is for the use of      tion technology (CE 585 Information
Engineering Laboratory and CE 569              civil and environmental engineering gradu-      Technology in the Integration of Civil
Environmental Engineering Treatability         ate students in the pursuit of their research   Engineering), and knowledge in the area of
Laboratory) and undergraduate projects.        and course work. The GCRL contains the          professional business practices and ethics
                                               following equipment:                            (CE 501 Professional Practice). The pro-
Materials/Structural Laboratory                • 4 dual-processor Pentium computers            gram shall also include course work in at
The Materials/Structural Laboratory is set        (WindowsNT),                                 least two subfields of civil and environmen-
up for materials and structures testing. The   • 4 single-processor Pentium computers          tal engineering that are related to the M.E.
laboratory is utilized for undergraduate          (Windows98),                                 area of specialization.
teaching and projects, and graduate
                                               • 1 Pentium computer with a digitizer           The primary subfield will provide the stu-
research. The laboratory is equipped for
                                                  pad,                                         dent with competence required for the
research activities including construction
                                               • 1 Power PC with a scanner, and                analysis of problems encountered in prac-
materials processing and testing. Materials
                                               • 1 HP LaserJet printer.                        tice and the design of engineering process-
tested in this lab include portland cement,
                                               All the hardware is connected to the WPI        es, systems and facilities. Subfields are cur-
concrete, asphalt, and fiber composites.
                                               network. The Civil and Environmental            rently available in structural engineering,
The laboratory has several large-load
                                               Engineering Department is continually           engineering and construction management,
mechanical testing machines.
                                               adding hardware and software to this facil-     highway and transportation engineering,
Geotechnical Laboratory                        ity in support of research activities in the    geotechnical engineering, materials engi-
The Geotechnical Laboratory is equipped        department.                                     neering, geohydrology, water quality man-
for soil testing and is utilized for under-                                                    agement, water resources, waste manage-
graduate teaching and projects, and gradu-     Degree Requirements                             ment, and impact engineering. The sub-
ate research. The primary use of the labo-     For the M.S.                                    field requirements are satisfied by complet-
ratory is teaching CE 4046.                    The completion of 30 semester hours of          ing two thematically related graduate
                                               credit, of which 6 credits must be research     courses that have been agreed upon by
Computer Laboratory No. 1                      or project work, is required. A non-thesis      both the student and the advisor as appro-
Computer Laboratory No. 1 (2000 square         alternative consisting of 33 semester hours     priate to the program of study. In addition
feet, referred to as the Stat Lab because of   is also available. In addition to civil and     to the subfields noted above, other appro-
its association with the Mathematics           environmental engineering courses, stu-         priate areas may be identified as long as it
Department) contains 28 X-terminals con-       dents also may take courses relevant to         is clear that the courses represent advanced
nected to WPI’s UNIX network system.           their major area from other departments.        work and compliment the program. Course
This facility has a complete presentation      Students who do not have the appropriate        work and other academic experiences to
system (with PC, computer projector,           undergraduate background for the graduate       fulfill this requirement will be defined in
VCR and sound system). Primary use of          courses in their program may be required        the integrated plan of study at the start of
this laboratory includes computer science      to supplement the 30 semester hours with        the program.
and mathematics courses, civil engineering     additional undergraduate studies.
project work and open use by the WPI                                                           Transfer between
community.                                     For the M.E.                                    M.S. and M.E. Program
                                               The master of engineering degree requires       A student may transfer from the M.E. pro-
Computer Laboratory No. 2                      the completion of an integrated program of      gram to the M.S. program at any time. A
Computer Laboratory No. 2 (2000 square         study that is formulated with a CEE facul-      student may transfer from the M.S. pro-
feet, referred to as the CECIL Lab) con-       ty advisor at the start of the course of        gram to the M.E. program only after an
tains 24 Pentium 400 computers connect-        study. The program and subsequent modi-         integrated program of study has been
ed to WPI’s network system. In addition,       fications thereof must be submitted to and      agreed upon by the student and the advi-


     Civil and Environmental Engineering
     sor in the area of concentration and              also required. All graduates of this option      A. G. Ferron, Adjunct Associate Professor;
     approved by the CEE department head or            will receive a master of science in environ-     B.S., WPI
     the Graduate Program Coordinator.                 mental engineering.                              R. W. Fitzgerald, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                       Students with a B.S. in civil engineering        University of Connecticut
     For the Ph.D.
                                                       may petition the department Graduate             M. S. FitzPatrick, Associate Professor of
     A dissertation in the candidate’s major field
                                                       Program Committee to change the degree           Urban and Environmental Planning;
     of study is required. It is through the disser-
                                                       designation to an M.S. in civil engineer-        Ph.D., Harvard University
     tation that a student demonstrates the abili-
                                                       ing, if they so desire and are qualified.
     ty to work independently on complex prob-                                                          P. Jayachandran, Associate Professor;
     lems at a level commensurate with the             For the interdisciplinary M.S. program in        Ph.D., University of Wisconsin
     Ph.D. degree. Since research interests of the     construction project management, stu-
                                                       dents with degrees in areas such as archi-       R. B. Mallick, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
     civil and environmental engineering faculty
                                                       tecture, management engineering and civil        Auburn University
     are varied, there is opportunity for conduct-
     ing research in several areas.                    engineering technology are normally              P. P. Mathisen, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                       accepted to this program. Management             Massachusetts Institute of Technology
     In addition to the college requirements for
                                                       engineering students may be required to
     the Ph.D. degree, the CEE department                                                               F. Mulligan, Adjunct Professor; M.S.,
                                                       complete up to one year of undergraduate
     requires students to establish a minor and                                                         WPI
                                                       civil engineering courses before working
     to pass a comprehensive examination.                                                               J. C. O’Shaughnessy, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                       on the M.S.
     Students must establish a minor outside                                                            Pennsylvania State University
     their major area. This may be accom-              For the M.E.
     plished with three courses in the approved                                                         M. Padmanabhan, Adjunct Associate
                                                       A B.S. degree in civil engineering (or           Professor; Ph.D., Georgia Institute of
     minor area. One member of the student’s           another acceptable engineering field) is
     dissertation committee should represent                                                            Technology
                                                       required for admission to the M.E. pro-
     the minor area. The student’s dissertation        gram in civil engineering.                       R. Pietroforte, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     committee has the authority to make deci-                                                          Massachusetts Institute of Technology
     sions on academic matters associated with         For the Ph.D.                                    J. D. Plummer, Assistant Professor;
     the Ph.D. program. To become a candi-             Ph.D. applicants must have earned a mas-         Ph.D., University of Massachusetts,
     date for the doctorate, the student must          ter’s degree (at WPI or another acceptable       Amherst
     pass a comprehensive examination admin-           school) and passed a qualifying admission
     istered by the student’s dissertation com-                                                         M. H. Ray, Associate Professor and White
                                                       examination. This examination is adminis-
     mittee. The candidate, on completion and                                                           Chair; Ph.D., Vanderbilt University
                                                       tered within the first 18 credits of registra-
     submission of the dissertation, must              tion in the Ph.D. program.                       G. F. Salazar, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     defend it to the satisfaction of the disserta-                                                     Massachusetts Institute of Technology
     tion committee.                                   Faculty                                          J. K. Wakely, Adjunct Associate Professor;
                                                       F. L. Hart, Professor and Department
     Admission Requirements                                                                             BS., University of Maine
                                                       Head; Ph.D., University of Connecticut
     For the M.S.
                                                       L. D. Albano, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     A B.S. degree in civil engineering (or
                                                       Massachusetts Institute of Technology
     another acceptable engineering field) is
     required for admission to the M.S. pro-           R. K. Allen, Adjunct Associate Professor;
     gram in civil engineering. Students who do        J.D., Franklin Pierce Law Center
     not have an ABET accredited B.S. degree           J. Bergendahl, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
     may wish to enroll in the inderdisciplinary       University of Connecticut
     M.S. program.
                                                       D. N. Brocard, Adjunct Associate
     For the environmental engineering pro-            Professor; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute
     gram, a B.S. degree in civil, chemical or         of Technology
     mechanical engineering is normally
                                                       J. F. Carney III, Provost and Vice
     required; however, students with a B.S. in
                                                       President for Academic Affairs, Professor;
     other engineering disciplines as well as
                                                       Ph.D., Northwestern University
     physical and life sciences are eligible, pro-
     vided they have met the undergraduate             R. A. D’Andrea, Associate Professor;
     math and science requirements of the civil        Ph.D., Cornell University
     and environmental engineering program.            T. El-Korchi, Professor; Ph.D., University
     A course in the area of fluid mechanics is        of New Hampshire


                            Computer and Communications Networks
Program of Study                                CCN Project                                    Degree Requirements
A specialization in computer and com-           Each student in the CCN specialization         Computer Science
munications networks is available within        must complete an in-depth project              33 credits
the master’s degree programs of the             demonstrating the ability to apply and
Computer Science (CS) and the Electrical        extend the material studied in their course    Electrical and Computer Engineering
and Computer Engineering (ECE)                  work. Students have the option of com-         33 credits for non-thesis; 30 credits for thesis
Departments.                                    pleting a practice-oriented internship or a
                                                                                               Required Courses
Students enrolled in this specialization will   research-oriented thesis.                      (4 courses, 12 credits):
receive the master of science degree in         The internship is a high-level network         • Analysis of Probabilistic Signals and
computer science or electrical and comput-      engineering experience, tailored to the spe-     Systems or Analysis of Computations
er engineering, with a notation on their        cific interests and background of the stu-       and Systems
transcript “Specialization in Computer and      dent. Each internship is carried out in          (EE 502 or CS 504)
Communications Networks (CCN).” The             cooperation with a sponsoring organiza-        • Introduction to Local- and Wide-Area
program is focused on preparing students        tion, and must be approved and advised by        Networks (CS 513/EE 506)
for professional positions in industry, but     a WPI faculty member in the CS or ECE          and two of the following courses:
the education also provides excellent           department. Internships may be proposed        • Telecommunications Transmission
preparation for Ph.D. study in networks.        by a faculty member, by an off-campus            Technologies (EE 535)
                                                sponsor or by the student. The internship
This program prepares graduates for tech-                                                      • High Performance Networks (CS
                                                must include proposal, design and docu-
nical leadership positions in the design and                                                     530/EE 530)
                                                mentation phases, and generally includes
implementation of computer and commu-                                                          • Advanced Computer and
                                                implementation and testing. The student
nications networks, including local- and                                                         Communications Networks (EE 537/CS
                                                will prepare a report describing the intern-
wide-area computer networking, distrib-                                                          577)
                                                ship activities, and will make a presenta-
uted computation, telecommunications                                                           • Modeling and Performance Evaluation
                                                tion before a committee including the fac-
(including voice, data and video services),                                                      of Networks and Computer Systems
                                                ulty advisor and a representative of the
wireless networking and personal mobile                                                          (CS 533/EE 581)
                                                sponsoring organization. Internship exam-
communications. All of the fundamental
                                                ples include transceiver design for new        Elective Courses
hardware and software aspects of networks
                                                media, security and encryption protocols,      (at least three from list):
will be treated in the program:
                                                protocol converters, databases to support      • Digital Communications: Modulation
1. The seven layers of the ISO network          efficient routing, and network system            and Coding (EE 532)
   model                                        designs for specific environments.             • Advances in Digital Communication
2. Transmission media and terminals                                                              (EE 533)
                                                The thesis option for the CCN project is a
   (including fiber optics, cable and radio)
                                                research-oriented experience in an area of     • Multiple Processor and Distributed
3. Switching and routing methods (includ-       current research in an area of computer          Systems
   ing packet switching)                        and communications networks. The thesis          (EE 575/CS 515)
4. Systems modeling and performance             must be pursued under the direction of a       • Advanced Operating System Theory (CS
   analysis                                     WPI faculty member in the CS or ECE              535)
5. Methods of distributed computation           department. The result of the thesis is a      • Design of Software Systems (CS 509)
6. Current and evolving standards and pro-      thesis document, describing the results of
                                                                                               • Wireless Information Networks (EE
   tocols                                       the research, and a public presentation.
7. Impacts of the information type (voice,                                                     • Cryptography and Data Security
   video, text, etc.) on optimal transmis-                                                       (CS 578/EE 578)
   sion and routing methods
                                                                                               • Advanced Cryptography (EE 579R)
An accelerated part-time option is available
                                                                                               • Telecommunication Policy (EE 508)
with cooperating corporations, with com-
pletion in two years.                                                                          • Mobile Data Networking (EE 539S)
                                                                                               • Any of the courses EE 535, EE 530/
                                                                                                 CS 530, EE 537/CS 577, and CS
                                                                                                 533/EE 581 not taken to satisfy the
                                                                                                 required courses above.


     Computer and Communications Networks
     CCN Project                                       Admission Requirements
     The student must complete one of the fol-         The program is conducted at an advanced
     lowing:                                           technical level, and requires, in addition to
     1. Computer and Communications                    the WPI admissions requirements, a solid
        Networks Internship (EE 595/CS 595)            background in electrical engineering (EE)
       (6 credits)                                     and/or computer science (CS). Normally a
        This project requirement may be waived         B.S. degree in EE or CS is expected; how-
        with documentation of relevant indus-          ever, applicants with comparable back-
        trial experience. The waiver must be           grounds, together with expertise gained
        approved by the Graduate Program               through work experience, will also be con-
        Committee of the student’s department          sidered. Admission is highly selective, and
        in consultation with the CCN director.         decisions will be based both on previous
        If this requirement is waived, the stu-        academic performance and on relevant
        dent must take two additional courses          technical experience. Admission decisions
        from the list of elective courses above, or    are made by the department to which the
        two additional courses approved by the         student applies.
        department’s Graduate Program
        Committee.                                     Faculty
     2. Master’s thesis in the area of computer        This is a joint specialization taught by
        and communications networks                    computer science and electrical and com-
       (9 credits)                                     puter engineering faculty.

     Free Electives
     To bring total to 33 credits, or 30 credits for
     students in the ECE department completing
     a master’s thesis. Courses may be chosen
     from relevant graduate-level courses in com-
     puter science, electrical and computer engi-
     neering, mathematics or management. Some
     students in the computer science degree pro-
     gram will need to use these electives to satis-
     fy the area requirements for the CS master’s
     degree program.

     Important Note
     Since the CCN specialization is a special-
     ization in the master’s programs of the
     Computer Science and Electrical and
     Computer Engineering Departments, stu-
     dents in the CCN specialization must also
     satisfy all requirements of whichever com-
     puter science or electrical and computer
     engineering master’s program they are
     enrolled in.


                                                                                                  Computer Science
Programs of Study                                engineering lab, an advanced information          the pros and cons of these alternatives in
The graduate program in computer science         systems lab and a visualization lab, as well      consultation with his or her advisor prior to
provides a foundation in the advanced            as several undergraduate project labs, and a      selecting an option, typically in the second
areas of computer science. Course work           graduate project lab. WPI’s academic pro-         year of study. The department will allow a
includes the theory, design, analysis and        grams are supported by a large array of           student to change options only once.
application of computer software and             powerful computer facilities, including
                                                 SPARC-Solaris, SGI and Sun machines, as           Thesis Option
hardware. Although the graduate degrees
are designed to provide a strong founda-         well as numerous PCs, terminals and work-         At least 33 credit hours, including the the-
tion in general computer science, students       stations. The College Computing Center            sis, must be satisfactorily completed. A the-
may concentrate on courses outside of the        (CCC) provides additional resources, such         sis consisting of a research or development
core in a particular area of computer sci-       as a supercomputer and large displays.            project worth a minimum of 9 credit hours
ence. Both master of science and doctor of                                                         must be completed and presented to the
philosophy degrees are available.
                                                 Off-Campus Research                               faculty. A thesis proposal must be approved
                                                 Opportunities                                     by the department by the end of the semes-
The program is flexible, designed for both       Computer science graduate students have           ter in which a student has registered for a
the recent graduate and the working pro-         opportunities for research and develop-           third thesis credit. Proposals will be consid-
fessional. The same teaching staff, courses      ment in cooperation with several neigh-           ered only at regularly scheduled department
and high standards apply to both versions        boring organizations, both for their mas-         meetings. The 33 credit hours must include
of the graduate program.                         ter’s thesis and Ph.D. dissertation. These        at least one course from each of the core
                                                 and other opportunities provide real-world        areas. Students should endeavor to take
Research Interests                                                                                 these required four courses as early as possi-
                                                 problems and experiences consistent with
The current departmental activities include,
                                                 WPI’s policy of extending learning beyond         ble so as to provide the background for the
among other areas, analysis of algorithms,
                                                 the classroom.                                    remaining graduate work. The remaining
artificial intelligence, computer vision, com-
                                                                                                   courses may, with prior approval of the stu-
puter graphics, database and information         Degree Requirements                               dent’s advisor, consist of computer science
systems, distributed systems, graph theory
                                                 For the M.S.                                      courses, independent study, or courses elect-
and computational complexity, network
                                                 These degree requirements are effective for       ed from other disciplines. (CS 501 and CS
performance evaluation, programming lan-
                                                 all students matriculating after July 1, 1991.    507 cannot be counted toward the required
guages, software engineering, visualization,
                                                 Those students who matriculated prior to          course credits.) At most, two courses in
and Web-based systems. Research groups
                                                 this date may choose to use the degree            other disciplines will be accepted.
meet weekly and focus on topics related to
                                                 requirements stated in the graduate catalog
the above areas. Students are encouraged to
                                                 effective at the time of matriculation. The
participate in the meetings related to their
                                                 student may choose between two options to
area(s) of interest. Research and develop-
                                                 obtain the master’s degree: thesis or course
ment projects and theses are available in
                                                 work. Each student should carefully weigh
these areas. Computer science students may
also participate in computer applications
research work being conducted in a number
of other departments including electrical
and computer engineering, mechanical
engineering, biomedical and fire protection
engineering. Students are also encouraged
to undertake projects and theses in coopera-
tion with neighboring computer manufac-
turers or commercial organizations.

Computer Science Laboratories
The Computer Science (CS) Department
has a number of laboratories equipped
respectively with state-of-the-art machines,
ranging from SGI machines to NT servers,
housing respective research groups. These
include an artificial intelligence lab, a
performance evaluation and distributed sys-
tems lab, a database systems lab, a software


     Computer Science
     Course Work Option                               its are limited to courses taken before         The student may also enroll for research
     A total of at least 33 credit hours must be      matriculation at WPI.                           credits, but is only allowed up to 18
     satisfactorily completed, including at least     Students funded by a teaching assistant-        research credits prior to the acceptance of
     one course from each of the core areas.          ship, research assistantship or fellowship      the written dissertation proposal by the
     Students should endeavor to take these           must complete the thesis option.                Dissertation Committee. With the
     required courses as early as possible so as to                                                   approval of the Dissertation Committee,
     provide the background for the remaining         For the Ph.D.                                   the student applies for and takes the Ph.D.
     graduate work. The remaining seven courses       Students are advised to contact the depart-     comprehensive examination. This exami-
     may, with prior approval of the student’s        ment for detailed rules, as there are depart-   nation must be passed prior to the com-
     advisor, consist of computer science courses,    mental guidelines, in addition to the           pletion of the dissertation defense, and is
     independent study, or up to two courses          Institute’s requirements, for the Ph.D.         normally taken after some initial disserta-
     elected from other disciplines. (CS 501 and      degree.                                         tion research has been performed. With
     CS 507 cannot be counted toward the                                                              approval of the Dissertation Committee,
                                                      Upon admission, the student is assigned
     required course credits.)                                                                        the student applies for and takes the dis-
                                                      an Academic Advisor, and together they
     To obtain a master’s degree, all students                                                        sertation proposal examination, usually
                                                      design a plan of study during the first
     must demonstrate graduate level compe-                                                           within one year of the Ph.D. candidacy.
                                                      semester of the student’s Ph.D. program.
     tence in the following core areas of com-                                                        The Ph.D. research component consists of
                                                      The student must take and perform
     puter science. To satisfy each core area                                                         at least 30 credits (including any research
                                                      acceptably on the Ph.D. qualifying exami-
     requirement, the student must satisfactori-                                                      credits earned prior to the acceptance of
                                                      nation, which includes both a written
     ly complete at least one of the courses                                                          the dissertation proposal and excluding
                                                      examination and a research component.
     given in each core area. Students may peti-                                                      any research credits applied toward a mas-
                                                      Application to take the examination
     tion the department to waive any core area                                                       ter’s degree) leading to a dissertation and a
                                                      should be submitted to the department
     requirement under special circumstances,                                                         public defense, which must be approved
                                                      secretary at least two months prior to the
     but such action is strongly discouraged.                                                         by the student’s Dissertation Committee.
                                                      examination date. The Ph.D. student is
     Theory                                           required to pass the examination prior to
     • CS 503 Foundations of Computer                 completing 36 Ph.D. credits.
     • CS 553 Theory of Computability                 Upon successful completion of the Ph.D.
     • CS 559 Advanced Topics in Theoretical          qualifying examination, the student
       Computer Science                               becomes a computer science Ph.D. candi-
                                                      date. The student’s Dissertation
                                                      Committee must be formed within the
     •    CS 504 Analysis of Computations             first year of candidacy. The student selects
          and Systems                                 a Research Advisor from within the CS
     Design                                           department, and together they select, with
     • CS 509 Design of Software Systems              the approval of the CS Graduate
     • CS 536 Programming Language Design             Committee, three additional members, at
     Systems                                          least one of whom must be from outside
     • CS 502 Operating Systems                       the WPI CS department. The Dissertation
     • CS 513 Introduction to Local- and              Committee will be responsible for super-
        Wide-Area Networks                            vising the comprehensive examination, and
     • CS 533 Modeling and Performance                approving the dissertation proposal and
        Evaluation of Network and Computer            final report.
        Systems                                       The Ph.D. degree requirements consist of
     • CS 535 Advanced Topics in Operating            a course work component and a research
        Systems                                       component, which together must total at
     The department will accept at most 9 cred-       least 60 credit hours beyond the master’s
     it hours of transfer credit from other gradu-    degree requirement. The course work com-
     ate programs. If appropriate, this trans-        ponent consists of at least 28 graduate
     ferred credit may be used to satisfy core        credits, including 3 credits of graduate
     area requirements. These credits must not        level mathematics. (CS 501 and CS 507
     have been used to satisfy the requirements       cannot be counted toward the required
     of another academic degree earned by the         course credits.)
     candidate. With rare exceptions, these cred-


                                                                                             Computer Science
Admission Requirements                          Faculty
A bachelor’s degree in computer science,        M. Hofri, Professor and Department
engineering or the sciences, a technically      Head; D.Sc., Technion-ITT, Haifa, Israel
oriented business degree or relevant experi-    E. O. Agu, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
ence is required for admission to the gradu-    University of Massachusetts, Amherst
ate program in computer science. An appli-
cant should have proficiency in at least one    L. A. Becker, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
recursive high-level language and some          University of Illinois
assembler language. In addition, an appli-      D. C. Brown, Professor; Ph.D.,
cant should have a general knowledge of         Ohio State University
data structures and digital processes, and a
                                                M. L. Claypool, Assistant Professor;
solid foundation in mathematics.
                                                Ph.D., University of Minnesota
A student may apply to the Ph.D. pro-
                                                D. J. Dougherty, Professor; Ph.D.,
gram upon completion of either a bache-
                                                University of Maryland
lor’s (in which case the master’s degree must
first be completed) or master’s degree in       D. Finkel, Professor; Ph.D.,
computer science, or with an equivalent         University of Chicago
background.                                     K. Fisler, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                Indiana University
                                                M. A. Gennert, Associate Professor; Sc.D.,
                                                Massachusetts Institute of Technology
                                                G. T. Heineman, Associate Professor;
                                                Ph.D., Columbia University
                                                N. T. Heffernan, Assistant Professor;
                                                Ph.D., Carnegie-Mellon University
                                                R. E. Kinicki, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                Duke University
                                                K. A. Lemone, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                Northeastern University
                                                F. C. Colon Osorio, Research Associate
                                                Professor; Ph.D., University of
                                                Massachusetts, Amherst
                                                C. Ruiz, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                University of Maryland
                                                E. A. Rundensteiner, Associate Professor;
                                                Ph.D., University of California at Irvine
                                                G. N. Sarkozy, Affiliate Associate
                                                Professor; Ph.D., Rutgers University
                                                S. M. Selkow, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                University of Pennsylvania
                                                M. O. Ward, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                University of Connecticut
                                                C. E. Wills, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                Purdue University


     Electrical and Computer Engineering
     Programs of Study                              has many UNIX workstations and                communications, microstrip antennas and
     The Electrical and Computer Engineering        Pentium-class PCs. In addition to these,      RF circuit design. The lab has been partic-
     (ECE) Department offers programs lead-         students may use the College Computing        ularly active in the measurement of indoor
     ing to the M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in elec-     Center’s (CCC) facilities.                    RF propagation.
     trical engineering, as well as graduate and
     advanced certificates. The following gener-    Analog Microelectronics Laboratory            Computational Fields Laboratory
     al areas of specialization are available to    The Analog Microelectronics Laboratory        The purpose of this laboratory is to serve as
     help students structure their graduate         was opened in 1998, funded by an NSF          a computational resource to undergraduate
     courses: communications and signal pro-        grant for the purchase of test and measure-   and graduate students interested in numeri-
     cessing, computer engineering, electromag-     ment equipment, which is dedicated to         cal analysis as applied to problems in com-
     netics and ultrasonics engineering, elec-      support work in the areas of high-speed       putational electrodynamics and acoustics.
     tronics and solid state, power engineering,    data communication, high-speed imaging,       The lab contains a wide variety of platforms,
     and systems and controls.                      and mixed signal circuit characterization.    including Pentium-class PCs and several
                                                    In addition to the direct impact on re-       workstations for X-window applications.
     Research Interests                             search, this equipment will also enable the   Software utilities supporting numerical
     Listed are the major areas of specialization   Analog Microelectronics Laboratory to         analysis (mesh-making algorithms, matrix
     in which Electrical and Computer               become a valuable resource for educating      solvers, graphics interface drivers) are of
     Engineering (ECE) faculty have research        both undergraduates and graduate students     particular interest to the lab community, as
     interests and in which courses are offered:    in the complete integrated circuit design     is the development of integrated packages
                                                    process. The lab focuses on three specific    targeted for research or educational pur-
     • Computer engineering, including paral-
                                                    areas:                                        poses.
       lel and fault-tolerant processing VHDL,
       computer networks, and digital VLSI          1. Analog microelectronics for telecommu-
                                                       nication has a goal to guide IC design     Computer Architecture Laboratory
                                                       by connecting system-level performance     This laboratory contains facilities for
     • Communications and signal processing,                                                      the research and development of single-
                                                       to fundamental limits imposed by cir-
       including wireless and data communica-                                                     processor and multiprocessor systems.
                                                       cuit-level considerations, for example
       tions, computer communications and
                                                       thermal and shot noise.                    The laboratory is also equipped with logic
       image processing
                                                    2. High-speed imaging research applies        analyzers, in-circuit emulators and other
     • Ultrasonics and electromagnetics engi-
                                                       analog techniques to improve perfor-       equipment to support computer system
       neering, including numerical methods
                                                       mance in high-speed, wide dynamic          projects. Software systems supported by this
       and computer-aided design in electro-
                                                       range electronic imaging systems. Ap-      laboratory include various VLSI design and
       magnetic and microwave circuits, non-
                                                       plications include machine vision and      verification packages, several VHDL/FPGA
       destructive material evaluation and
                                                       adaptive optics.                           development systems, and a variety of soft-
       medical imaging
                                                    3. Mixed signal circuit characterization is   ware development tools (C, CTT, ASW,
     • Power systems engineering, including                                                       PIC developments, and so forth).
                                                       concerned with developing techniques
       power electronics and power systems
                                                       for measuring and modeling second
     • Electronics and solid state, including                                                     Convergent Technologies Center (CTC)
                                                       order error sources in mixed signal
       analog IC design, solid state device                                                       The laboratories in this center combine
                                                       circuits, for example, code-dependent
       theory and high-frequency circuit design                                                   diverse expertise for the exploration of the
                                                       noise in analog-to-digital converters.
     • Systems and controls, principally                                                          emerging and converging technologies of
       oriented to large-scale systems such as      Center for Wireless Information               computing, communications and
       power systems                                Networking Studies (CWINS)                    cognition. The Polaroid Machine Vision
                                                    This center is recognized as a pioneering     Laboratory (PMVL), and Network Com-
     Electrical and Computer                        facility in the important and rapidly grow-   puting Applications and Multimedia
     Engineering Laboratories                       ing area of wireless personal and data        (NETCAM) laboratory focus on the devel-
     Research Laboratories and                      communications. The lab is supported by       opment of new algorithms and on moving
     Computer Facilities                            a broad range of networking and telecom-      emergent technologies into commercial,
     The ECE department has laboratories in         munications corporations.                     medical and defense-related applications
     the following areas: power systems, VLSI,      The work of CWINS is quite diverse. In        for its sponsors.
     digital communications, computer engi-         recent years, basic research has been con-    Research in the CTC’s NETCAM lab
     neering, electromagnetics, global position-    ducted in channel modeling and simula-        derives from the technologies generated by
     ing, ultrasonics and nondestructive evalua-    tion, spread-spectrum techniques, adaptive    the success of the Internet, digital multi-
     tion and image processing. For general         equalization, multiple-access methods,        media, and distributed objects and
     computing requirements, the department         network architectures, wireless optical       middleware. Current projects explore the


                                           Electrical and Computer Engineering
optimization of network protocols for           Satellite Navigation
multimedia, distributed-object services         Laboratory
(CORBA) and virtual-reality-based user          This laboratory provides facili-
interfaces.                                     ties for work on civilian uses of
Research in the CTC’s PMVL has resulted         satellite systems, especially the
in the development of highly efficient          Global Positioning System
algorithms and new theoretical perfor-          (GPS). Receivers, signal
mance bounds for machine vision, auto-          processors and computers are
matic target recognition, and image fusion      provided for work on utiliza-
for optical, IR SAR and SONAR data.             tion of the DOD GPS system
                                                for civilian purposes, especially
Center for Sensory and Physiologic              aircraft navigation and landing.
Signal Processing — C(SP)2
Researchers within the C(SP)2 apply signal      Ultrasonics Laboratory
processing, mathematical modeling, and          Facilities in this laboratory are
other electrical and computer engineering       set up for performing basic
skills to study issues related to human sen-    ultrasound studies in the areas
sation and physiology. Currently, our           of basic acoustic research,
major focus areas are vision, hearing, tac-     transducer development, non-
tile reception and electromyography             destructive testing and medical
(EMG). In our vision research, we have          ultrasound diagnosis. The
digitally produced pulse-code-modulated         facilities are distributed over
patterns that evoke multicolor sensations       two separate laboratory areas
from black-and-white and monochromatic          and contain two Testech scan-
flicker patterns. Hearing research is con-      ning tanks for ultrasound
centrating on improved signal processing        measurements, workstations,
in hearing aid devices, to improve speech       PCs, ultrasound pulser-receiver
perception by the hearing impaired. The         equipment, high-speed digitizers, frequen-     Asynchronous Transfer Mode network. We
purpose of the tactile receptor studies is to   cy synthesizers, arbitrary function genera-    investigate system design and algorithmic
develop an understanding of the stimulus        tor, spectrum analyzer, and various mod-       issues.
encoder characteristics of tactile mechano-     ern test equipment.                            The CRIS lab is actively involved in a
receptors. In the area of EMG (the electri-                                                    number of joint projects with industry.
cal activity of skeletal muscle), efforts are   Cryptography and Information
                                                                                               The lab has also strong ties to research
being made to improve the detection and         Security (CRIS) Laboratory
                                                                                               groups in the United States and Europe,
interpretation of EMG for such uses as the      The CRIS Laboratory conducts research
                                                                                               with frequent exchange of graduate stu-
control of powered prosthetic limbs and         and development in cryptography and its
                                                                                               dents. Together with strong graduate
musculoskeletal modeling.                       applications. One research focus is fast
                                                                                               course offerings in cryptography, our
                                                implementations of the next generation of
                                                                                               research lab provides excellent opportuni-
Power Electronics and                           public-key algorithms such as elliptic and
                                                                                               ties for cutting-edge research and graduate
Power Systems Laboratory                        hyperelliptic curve schemes. We work on
This laboratory has been established for        fast software algorithms and efficient hard-
simulation of a large variety of linear, non-   ware architectures. The lab is equipped        Signal Processing and Information
linear and time-varying loads, including        with industry-standard development tools       Networking Laboratory (SPINLab)
transistor- and thyristor-controlled loads.     for ASIC and FPGA target hardware. We          SPINLab was established in 2002 with the
It contains transducers and instrumenta-        also apply Xilink FPGAs and Altera EPLDs       primary mission of analyzing and develop-
tion for a wide range of voltages, currents     to new types of cryptosystems, which allow     ing new linear and nonlinear signal
and frequencies. Compatible computer            for a fast switch of private-key encryption    processing techniques to improve the
equipment and A/D interfaces are available      algorithms (“algorithm agility”).              performance of high-speed information
for real-time data acquisition and process-     Another research focus is the integration of   networks. Currently, our major focus areas
ing. The Power Systems Laboratory has the       cryptography and data security into new        include channel identification and equal-
basic facilities for electromechanical energy   communication networks. We work on the         ization, synchronizaation, interference
conversion study, including sets of induc-      design and implementation of security          cancellation, and multiuser detection for
tion/synchronous/DC machines coupled            protocols for wireless networks, with an       copper, optical and wireless channels. We
together.                                       emphasis on wireless LANs. Another net-        have also recently begun to study software
                                                work type of interest is the high-speed        radio techniques for efficient implementa-


     Electrical and Computer Engineering
     tion of digital communication systems and      The program of study must be approved          The doctoral student must establish two
     signal processing algorithms. SPINLab has      by the student’s advisor, the Graduate         minors in fields outside of electrical engi-
     established relationships with several         Program Committee of the ECE depart-           neering. Physics, mathematics and com-
     telecommunications corporations and            ment and the WPI Committee on                  puter science are usually recommended.
     offers research opportunities at both the      Graduate Studies and Research. To ensure       Each student selects the minors in consul-
     graduate and undergraduate levels. For         that the program of study is acceptable,       tation with the Major Advisor. At least
     more details, please see the SPINLab Web       students should, in consultation with their    6 credits of graduate work is required in
     page at                advisor, submit it prior to the end of the     each minor area. Courses with an ECE
                                                    semester following admission into the          designation which are cross-listed in the
     Degree Requirements                            graduate program. Only courses that are        course offerings of another department
     For the M.S.                                   part of an approved plan of study can be       cannot be used toward fulfilling the
     There are two routes to the master of sci-     counted toward a graduate degree. Twenty-      requirements of a minor area.
     ence degree: the non-thesis option and the     one of these credits must be WPI graduate      Full-time residency at WPI for at least one
     thesis option. The minimum requirement         level electrical and computer engineering      academic year is required while working
     for the M.S. degree in electrical and com-     research or courses. The remaining credits     toward a Ph.D. degree. This usually corre-
     puter engineering is 33 credits in the non-    may be graduate level courses in mathe-        sponds to the period of active dissertation
     thesis program and 30 if a thesis is includ-   matics, physics or computer science.           research.
     ed. Of the minimum 33 or 30 semester           Students must obtain prior approval from
     hours, at least 21 must be graduate level      the Graduate Committee for the substitu-       Satisfactory completion of the diagnostic
     courses (500 level) or research in the field   tion of courses in other disciplines as part   examination and the area examination are
     of electrical and computer engineering         of their academic program.                     required.
     taken at WPI. The remaining courses may
                                                    Students may petition to transfer a maxi-      Diagnostic Examination
     be either at the 4000 (maximum of two)
                                                    mum of 15 graduate semester credits, with      The doctoral student is required to take
     or the 500 level in computer science,
                                                    a grade of B or better, after they have        the diagnostic examination during the first
     physics, engineering or mathematics. The
                                                    enrolled in the degree program. This may       year in the doctoral program of study.
     complete program must be approved by
                                                    be made up of a combination of up to 9         Prior to taking this examination, a student
     the student’s advisor and the Graduate
                                                    credits from the WPI ECE graduate cours-       must identify a faculty member who has
     Program Committee.
                                                    es taken prior to formal admission and up      indicated that he/she is willing to supervise
     Although the M.S. thesis is optional, stu-     to 9 credits from other academic institu-      the student’s research. The purpose of the
     dents are encouraged to include a research     tions. No transfer credit will be given for    diagnostic exam is to determine if the stu-
     component in their graduate program.           any of WPI’s undergraduate courses nor         dent has the necessary foundation in
     A directed research project involves a mini-   for undergraduate level courses taken at       mathematics, and electrical and computer
     mum of 3 credit hours of work under the        other institutions.                            engineering to undertake doctoral studies.
     supervision of a faculty member. The task      All full-time students are required to         The diagnostic examination is composed
     is limited to a well-defined goal. Thesis      attend/ pass the two graduate seminar          of two parts: evaluation of basic knowledge
     research involves 9 credit hours of work,      courses, EE 596A (fall semester) and EE        and evaluation of research skills.
     normally spread over a complete academic       596B (spring semester). See course listings
     year. It demands more creativity on the        for details.                                   Evaluation of Basic Knowledge
     part of the student than does a directed                                                      The examination covers fundamental con-
     research project. In addition, all WPI         For the Ph.D.                                  cepts and selected advanced topics in elec-
     thesis regulations must be followed.           The degree of doctor of philosophy is con-     trical engineering. It is administered by the
                                                    ferred on candidates in recognition of high    Graduate Program Committee. Students
     For students completing the M.S. thesis as
                                                    scientific attainments and the ability to      must select two areas from the following
     part of their degree requirements, a Thesis
                                                    carry on original research.                    list to be examined in, in addition to the
     Committee will be set up during the first
                                                                                                   exam in the area of engineering mathemat-
     semester of thesis work. This committee        Completion of 60 or more credits of grad-
                                                                                                   ics. A description of the material covered
     will be selected by the student in consulta-   uate work beyond the master of science
                                                                                                   in each examination area and sample exam
     tion with the Major Advisor and will con-      degree in electrical and computer engineer-
                                                                                                   questions from previous years are available
     sist of the Thesis Advisor (who must be a      ing, including at least 30 credits of
                                                                                                   from the ECE Graduate Secretary.
     full-time WPI ECE faculty member) and          research. The same academic standards as
                                                                                                   • Signals and Systems
     at least two other faculty members whose       described in the M.S. guidelines apply to
                                                                                                   • Waves and Fields
     expertise will aid the student’s research      the doctor of philosophy program. A pro-
                                                                                                   • Power Systems
     program. An oral presentation before the       gram of study form must be completed
                                                                                                   • Analog Circuits and Devices
     Thesis Committee and a general audience        and approved.
                                                                                                   • Computers and Digital Electronics
     is required.
                                                                                                   • Engineering Mathematics


                                            Electrical and Computer Engineering
The examination of basic knowledge is a         who must be a full-time faculty member of        full-time graduate student until the M.S.
written examination and is given yearly in      the ECE department. The research                 degree requirements are met. Any student
January. The results from the exam will be      described in the dissertation must be origi-     who is accepted into the B.S./Master’s pro-
graded Pass, Conditional Pass or Fail by        nal and constitute a contribution to             gram and who elects to finish the M.S.
the Graduate Program Committee. Stu-            knowledge in the major field of the candi-       degree part time will be required to meet
dents who receive the grade of Conditional      date. The Dissertation Committee normal-         the normal, non-B.S./Master’s program
Pass must pass the exam or specified            ly serves as the Defense Committee as            degree requirements.
portions of the exam the following year.        well, and certifies the quality and originali-
Students who receive the grade of Fail will     ty of the dissertation research, the             Admission Requirements
not be permitted to retake the exam or any      satisfactory execution of the dissertation       Holders of bachelor’s or master’s degrees in
portion of the exam. No students will be        and the preparedness of the defense. The         electrical engineering or a related field are
permitted to take the exam or any portion       Dissertation Committee consists of the           invited to submit an application for admis-
of the exam more than twice.                    Major Advisor (as committee chairperson)         sion to the M.S. or Ph.D. program.
                                                and at least two additional faculty mem-         Students with the bachelor of technology
Evaluation of Research Skills                   bers whose expertise will aid the student’s      or the bachelor of engineering technology
Upon passing the examination on basic           research program. At least two members of        degree must complete about 1-1/2 years of
knowledge of electrical engineering, satis-     the committee must be full-time WPI              undergraduate study in electrical engineer-
factory completion of one semester of           ECE faculty, and at least one member             ing before they can be admitted to the
directed research under a prospective           must be from outside the student’s depart-       graduate program.
Thesis Advisor is required. Specific guide-     ment. This committee will be selected by         Applicants without a B.S. degree in electri-
lines for both the research skills proposal     the student in consultation with the Major       cal engineering, but who hold a B.S.
and the final research skills summary           Advisor.                                         degree in mathematics, computer engi-
report are available from the department                                                         neering, physics or another engineering
Graduate Coordinator.                           For the Combined B.S./Master’s                   discipline, may apply for admission to the
Under no circumstances will a student be        Program                                          M.S. degree program in electrical and
permitted to continue working toward the        A student accepted into the B.S./Master’s        computer engineering with the following
Ph.D. degree if he/she has failed either the    program may use 6 credit hours of work           requirements:
written portion or the research portion of      for both the B.S. and M.S. degrees.
                                                Additional graduate credit hours of work         Basic skills
the diagnostic exam.                                                                             Students must have passed EE 2201, EE
                                                (beyond the 15 units required for the B.S.
                                                degree) up to a total of 12 credit hours         2311,
Area Examination
                                                may be transferred from the student’s            EE 3801 and EE 3111, or equivalent, with
The doctoral student is required to take
                                                undergraduate transcript. All of these           grades of B or better. Please consult the
the area examination before writing a dis-
                                                course credits must be defined prior to          WPI Undergraduate Catalog for course
sertation. The examination, which deals
                                                enrollment in the courses.                       descriptions.
with the student’s research area, is adminis-
tered by a committee consisting of the stu-     A student must define the 12 credit hours        Specialized skills
dent’s Major Advisor and other experts in       at the time of applying to the B.S./Master’s     Students must pass a minimum of two of
the area of the student’s research. Students    program. The 12 credit hours may be all          the following courses (or equivalent) with
who fail the examination may retake it at a     advanced undergraduate courses, graduate         grades of B or better before the end of the
later date with the approval of the ECE         courses, or combinations of both at the          second semester of the M.S. program—EE
Graduate Program Committee. Upon                discretion of the student’s advisor, subject     4203, EE 4304, EE 4502, EE 4801, EE
passing both the Area and Diagnostic            to the approval of the ECE department            4902, ES 4012. Students must complete
examinations, a student should make for-        Graduate Program Committee.                      24 additional graduate credits at WPI for
mal application for admission to candida-                                                        the M.S. degree (27 in the non-thesis
                                                At the start of Term A in the senior year, but
cy. This application must be approved by                                                         option).
                                                no later than at the time of application, stu-
the ECE Department and the Committee
                                                dents are required to submit to the graduate     Students with a master of science degree in
on Graduate Studies and Research at least
                                                coordinator of the Electrical and Computer       electrical and computer engineering may
eight months before the doctorate is to be
                                                Engineering Department a list of proposed        apply for the doctoral program of study.
                                                courses to be taken as part of the master’s      Admission to the Ph.D. program will be
Dissertation                                    degree program. A copy of the student’s          based on a review of the application and
All students must complete and orally           transcript (grade report) must be included       associated references.
defend a dissertation prepared under the        with the application.
general supervision of the Major Advisor,       A student who intends to complete the
                                                B.S./Master’s program is required to be a


     Electrical and Computer Engineering
     Faculty                                        R. A. Peura, Professor of Biomedical
     J. A. Orr, Professor and Department            Engineering; Ph.D., Iowa State University
     Head; Ph.D., University of Illinois            L. R. Ram-Mohan, Professor; Ph.D.,
     D. Brown, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,          Purdue University
     Cornell University                             J. M. Sullivan, Jr., Associate Professor;
     E. A. Clancy, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,      D.E., Dartmouth College
     Massachusetts Institute of Technology          B. Sunar, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
     K. A. Clements, Professor; Ph.D.,              Oregon State University
     Polytechnic Institute of Brooklyn              R. F. Vaz, Associate Professor; Ph.D., WPI
     D. Cyganski, Professor; Ph.D., WPI
     J. S. Demetry, Professor Emeritus; Ph.D.,
     Naval Postgraduate School
     R. J. Duckworth, Associate Professor;
     Ph.D., University of Nottingham
     W. H. Eggimann, Professor Emeritus;
     Ph.D., Case Institute of Technology
     A. E. Emanuel, Professor; P.E., D.Sc.,
     Technion-Israel Institute of Technology
     M. A. Gennert, Associate Professor; Sc.D.,
     Massachusetts Institute of Technology
     H. Hakim, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     Purdue University
     Brian King, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
     University of Arizona
     H. P. D. Lanyon, Professor Emeritus;
     Ph.D., University of Leicester
     F. J. Looft, Professor; Ph.D., University of
     R. Ludwig, Professor; Ph.D., Colorado
     State University
     S. Makarov, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     Saint Petersburg State University, Russia
     J. A. McNeill, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     Boston University
     W. R. Michalson, Associate Professor;
     Ph.D., WPI
     D. Papageorgiou, Assistant Professor;
     Ph.D., University of Michigan
     K. Pahlavan, Professor; Ph.D., WPI
     E. A. Parrish, Professor and WPI
     President; Ph.D., University of Virginia
     P. C. Pedersen, Professor; Ph.D.,
     University of Utah


                                                                   Fire Protection Engineering
Programs of Study                               Holders of bachelor of science degrees in      Research Interests
Fire protection engineers specialize in         the traditional engineering fields and the     Faculty research interests cover a wide
applying modern technology to the solu-         master’s degree in fire protection engineer-   range of topics in fire protection engineer-
tion of firesafety problems. The successful     ing enjoy extremely good versatility in the    ing and related areas. Research is directed
fire protection engineer must know some-        job market.                                    toward both theoretical understandings
thing about building construction and                                                          and the development of practical engineer-
industrial processes; must interact with        Graduate Internships                           ing methods.
and be somewhat competent in other              A unique internship program is available
                                                to fire protection engineering students,       Specific capabilities and interests include
design professions including architecture                                                      computer modeling, fire performance of
and electrical, mechanical, civil and chemi-    allowing them to gain important clinical
                                                experiences in practical engineering and       structural systems, fire detection and sup-
cal engineering. In addition, the firesafety                                                   pression, fire and smoke dynamics, wildfire
aspects of human behavior, business, man-       research environments. Students are able
                                                to earn income by alternating work with        phenomena, firesafety design methods for
agement and public administration are                                                          buildings and marine applications, explo-
important aspects of practice.                  on-campus classroom and laboratory activ-
                                                ities. With departmental permission, stu-      sion phenomena, failure analysis, risk
The fire protection engineering program at      dents may take courses during the full-        assessment, material composites and regu-
WPI adapts previous educational and             time work cycle.                               latory reform.
employment experiences into a cohesive
plan of study. Consequently, the program        Center for Firesafety Studies                  Fire Science Laboratory
is designed to be flexible enough to meet       The Center for Firesafety Studies serves as    This laboratory facility supports experi-
specific and varying student educational        a crossroads for bringing together talents     mentation in fire dynamics,
objectives. Students can select combina-        from many disciplines to focus on fire and     combustion/explosion phenomena, detec-
tions of major courses, non-major courses,      explosion safety problems. Operating as a      tion, and fire and explosion suppression.
thesis and project topics that will prepare     self-standing academic department, the         The cone calorimeter, standard flame
them to proceed in the career directions        center features formal degree and certifi-     spread apparatus, infrared imaging system,
they desire. The curriculum can be tailored     cate programs in fire protection engineer-     phase doppler particle analyzer and room
to enhance knowledge and skill in the gen-      ing, continuing education for the practi-      calorimeter are also available, with associ-
eral practice of fire protection engineering,   tioner, and research to uncover new            ated gas analysis and data acquisition sys-
in fire protection engineering specialties      knowledge about fire behavior and fire         tems.
(such as industrial, chemical, energy or        protection methods.                            The wet lab area will support water-based
power), or in the more theoretical and                                                         fire suppression and demonstration pro-
research-oriented sphere.                                                                      jects.
Practicing engineers or others already
employed and wishing to advance their
technical skills may enter the evening pro-
gram as part-time students or take off-
campus courses via WPI’s Advanced
Distance Learning Network (see page 23)
The master’s degree may be completed on
a part-time basis in three to five years,
depending on the number of courses taken
each semester.
WPI offers both master’s and doctoral
degrees as well as the advanced certificate
and graduate certificate in fire protection

Combined B.S./Master’s Program
High school seniors can apply for this five-
year program. This gives high school grad-
uates the opportunity to complete the
undergraduate degree in a selected field of
engineering and the master’s degree in fire
protection engineering in five years.


     Fire Protection Engineering
     Serving as both a teaching and research          courses to round out their backgrounds.       Faculty
     facility, the lab accommodates undergradu-       Applicants for the doctor of philosophy in    D. A. Lucht, Professor of Fire Protection
     ate projects as well as graduate students in     fire protection engineering should have       Engineering and Director; B.S.,
     fire protection engineering, mechanical          strong academic backgrounds in any of a       Illinois Institute of Technology
     engineering and related disciplines.             host of engineering or science disciplines.   J. R. Barnett, Professor of Fire Protection
     Fire Modeling Laboratory                         For more information, contact the Center      Engineering; Ph.D., WPI
     The Fire Modeling Laboratory specializes         for Firesafety Studies, 508-831-5593, via     E. V. Clougherty, Adjunct Professor;
     in computer applications to fire protection      e-mail at, or on the web at      Ph.D. Chemistry, Boston University
     engineering and research. Research activi-       http//
                                                                                                    R. L. P. Custer, Adjunct Professor
     ties include computational fluid dynamics
     modeling of building and vehicle fires, and                                                    D. A. Dembsey, Visiting Scholar; M.S.
     flame spread model development.                                                                Physics, University of Michigan
                                                                                                    N. A. Dembsey, Associate Professor of
     Degree Requirements                                                                            Fire Protection Engineering; Ph.D.,
     For the M.S.                                                                                   University of California at Berkeley
     The program for a master of science in fire
     protection engineering is flexible and can                                                     R. W. Fitzgerald, Professor of Fire
     be tailored to individual student career                                                       Protection Engineering and Civil
     goals. The fire protection engineering mas-                                                    Environmental Engineering; Ph.D.,
     ter’s degree requires 30 semester hours of                                                     University of Connecticut
     credit. Both a thesis and non-thesis option                                                    J. A. Ierardi, Instructor; Ph.D. FPE, WPI
     are offered.                                                                                   (in progress)

     For the Ph.D.                                                                                  H. Y. Kim, Affiliate Professor
     Ph.D. students must complete a minimum                                                         W. K. Kim, Affiliate Professor; M.S. FPE,
     of                                                                                             WPI
     90 semester hours of graduate work after                                                       F. Noonan, Associate Professor of Fire
     the bachelor’s degree (or 60 semester hours                                                    Protection Engineering and Management;
     after the master’s). This includes at least 15                                                 Ph.D., University of Massachusetts
     semester hours of fire protection engineer-
     ing course credits and                                                                         R. D. Pehrson, Adjunct Assistant
     30 hours of dissertation research.                                                             Professor; Ph.D. FPE, WPI

     Doctoral students must successfully com-                                                       Patrick J. Pagni, Affiliate Professor
     plete the fire protection engineering quali-                                                   Milosh T. Puchovsky, Adjunct Assistant
     fying examination, a research proposal and                                                     Professor
     public seminar, and the dissertation                                                           B. J. Savilonis, Professor of Mechanical
     defense.                                                                                       Engineering; Ph.D., State University of
     Admission Requirements                                                                         New York
     High school graduates applying for the                                                         J. P. Woycheese, Assistant Professor of
     Combined B.S./Master’s Program must                                                            Fire Protection Engineering; Ph.D.,
     meet normal undergraduate admission cri-                                                       University of California at Berkeley
     teria and submit a two-page essay articu-                                                      E. S. Yoon, Affiliate Professor: Ph.D.
     lating their interest in the field. Applicants                                                 Chemical Engineering, MIT
     for the master’s or certificate programs
     should have a B.S. in engineering, engi-                                                       R. G. Zalosh, Professor of Fire Protection
     neering technology or the physical                                                             Engineering; Ph.D., Northeastern
     sciences. Applicants with no FPE work                                                          University
     experience should submit a two-page essay
     articulating their interest in the field.
     Students with science degrees and gradu-
     ates of some engineering disciplines may
     be required to take selected undergraduate


Programs of Study                               for understanding disciplinary material        • Principles of Marketing
Better. Faster. Smarter. That is what today’s   that is critical for managers in a globally-   • Management Information Systems
executives want from tomorrow’s execu-          competitive, technological world. Core         • Economics of the Firm
tives, but those attributes are increasingly    courses include:                               • Domestic and Global Economic
difficult to achieve in today’s fast-paced      • Interpersonal and Leadership Skills for        Environment of Business
business environment. Increasingly, people        Technological Managers
                                                                                               Foundation-level courses are potentially
are turning to the Master of Business           • Creating and Implementing Strategy in
                                                                                               waivable based on prior graduate or under-
Administration (M.B.A.) to equip them-            Technological Organizations
                                                                                               graduate course work.
selves to work better, work faster, and         • Creating Processes in Technological
work smarter, so they can be tomorrow’s           Organizations                                The M.B.A. program also features a cap-
leaders. At WPI, we have been helping           • Business Analysis for Technological          stone Graduate Qualifying Project (GQP)
people develop those attributes since 1974.       Managers                                     which provides students with a hands-on
                                                • Legal and Ethical Context of                 real-world opportunity to apply and
A WPI education is focused on what you            Technological Organizations.                 enhance their classroom experience.
need to succeed. Our highly integrated,
                                                Leadership, ethics, communication and a        M.B.A. students are required to complete
applications-oriented M.B.A. program
                                                global perspective are emphasized through-     12 credit hours of free elective course
provides our students with the “big pic-
                                                out the core, all within our focus on the      work, which may be taken within the
ture” perspective required of successful
                                                management of technology.                      Department of Management or within
upper-level managers, and the hands-on
                                                                                               other academic departments at WPI. In
                                                                                               addition, students may select a 6-credit
                                                                                               option for specialization, which requires 6
                                                                                               additional credits in a particular functional
                                                                                               area, in combination with at least 6 credits
                                                                                               of the free electives in the chosen area.

                                                                                               M.S. in Marketing and
                                                                                               Technological Innovation
                                                                                               A highly specialized 32-credit-hour degree
                                                                                               program specifically designed for individu-
                                                                                               als employed in or aspiring to work in
                                                                                               marketing positions and/or positions
                                                                                               responsible for innovation within technol-
                                                                                               ogy-oriented environments. The M.S. in
                                                                                               marketing and technological innovation
                                                                                               features 14 credit hours of required course
                                                                                               work including: MG 503 Organizational
knowledge needed to meet the daily              Each core course, with the exception of        Behavior, MG 505 Quantitative Methods,
demands of the workplace. Our focus on          Legal and Ethical Context of Technological     MG 506 Principles of Marketing, MG 508
the management of technology comes              Organizations, has prerequisite require-       Economics of the Firm, MG 511 Inter-
from a recognition that rapidly changing        ments from within our 18-credit founda-        personal and Leadership Skills for
technology is driving the pace of business;     tion. The purpose of the foundation is to      Technological Managers, and MG 512
we make sure our students understand            ensure that students have a solid under-       Creating and Implementing Strategy in
leading technology-based organizations,         standing of the basic functions carried out    Technological Organizations.
integrating technology into organizations,      in organizations and of the environment in
                                                                                               Students then select 18 credit hours of
and creating new processes, products,           which they operate, as well as an introduc-
                                                                                               electives from the following courses:
services and organizations based on tech-       tion to the tools used to analyze business
                                                                                               MG 531 Managing Organizational
nology. Our strong emphasis on behavior         problems. Foundation courses consist of
                                                                                               Change, MG 546 Managing Technological
skills prepares you to be a leader in any       the following nine 2-credit courses, each of
                                                                                               Innovation, MG 548 Productivity Man-
organization, and the global threads            which covers a major functional area of
                                                                                               agement, MG 563 Marketing of Emerging
throughout our curriculum ensure that           business:
                                                                                               Technologies, MG 564 Global Technology
you will understand the global imperative       •   Financial Accounting                       Marketing, MG 566 Marketing and
facing all businesses.                          •   Finance                                    Electronic Commerce, MG 567 Integrated
WPI’s M.B.A. program features a 15-credit       •   Organizational Behavior                    Marketing Communications, MG 572
core of five cross-functional courses de-       •   Operations Management                      Telecommunications Management and
signed to give students a larger framework      •   Quantitative Methods                       Electronic Commerce, MG 576 Project


     Management, MG 592 New Venture                Internship, MG 598 Global Oper-ation           To obtain an M.B.A. via the Combined
     Management and Entrepreneurship, MG           Strategy, and MG 598 Independent Study.        Program, the student must satisfy all
     597 Internship, and MG 598 Independent        Students who have completed prior under-       M.B.A. degree requirements. In addition
     Study.                                        graduate or graduate-level course work         to the pre-requisite undergraduate courses
     Students who have completed prior under-      which satisfies the content of a foundation-   listed above, the student must complete
     graduate or graduate level course work        level requirement (MG 503, MG 504,             the following graduate courses:
     which satisfies the content of a foundation   MG 507) may request a waiver of the rele-      MG 511 Interpersonal and Leadership
     level requirement (MG 503, MG 505,            vant foundation course. Students granted          Skills for Technological Managers,
     MG 506, MG 508) may request a waiver          waivers must then take an additional 2 cred-   MG 512 Creating and Implementing
     of the relevant foundation course. Students   it hours of elective course work for each         Strategy in Technological Organizations,
     granted waivers must then take an addi-       foundation course waived, either in the area   MG 513 Creating Processes in
     tional 2 credit hours of elective course      of the waiver or in the “major” area.             Technological Organizations,
     work for each foundation course waived,                                                      MG 514 Business Analysis for
     either in the area of the waiver or in the    Combined B.S./Master’s (M.B.A.)                   Technological Managers,
     “major” area.                                 Program                                        MG 515 Legal and Ethical Context of
                                                   This program is available to WPI under-           Technological Organizations,
     M.S. in Operations and Information            graduate students. A separate and complete
                                                                                                  MG 516 Graduate Qualifying Project
     Technology                                    application to the M.B.A. program must be
                                                                                                     (GQP), and 12 elective credits.
     A highly specialized 30-credit-hour degree    submitted. Admission to the Combined
     program specifically designed for individu-   Program is determined by the faculty of the    Please refer to the section on the Com-
     als employed in or aspiring to work in pro-   Department of Management. The student          bined Programs (page 21) or contact the
     duction/operations positions, or manage-      should begin the curriculum planning           director of graduate management programs
     ment information systems (MIS) positions.     process at the time he/she commences           for more information.
     The master’s in operations and informa-       his/her undergraduate studies to ensure        Department Research
     tion technology features 12 credit hours      that all of the required prerequisite under-   In addition to teaching, Management
     of required course work including:            graduate courses are completed within the      Department faculty are involved in a variety
     MG 503 Organizational Behavior, MG 504        student’s four years of undergraduate study.   of sponsored research and consulting work.
     Operations Management, MG 507 Man-            It is recommended that the M.B.A. appli-       A sampling of current research includes:
     agement Information Systems, MG 511           cation be submitted at the beginning of        quality control in information-handling
     Interpersonal and Leadership Skills for       the student’s junior year of undergraduate     processes, supply chain management,
     Technological Managers, and MG 513            study. A student in the Combined Pro-          management of biotechnology, decision/risk
     Creating Processes in Technological           gram continues to be registered as an          analysis, conflict management, Latin
     Organizations.                                undergraduate until the bachelor’s degree      American economic development, capacity
     Students then select 18 credit hours of       is awarded.                                    planning, international accounting differ-
     electives from the following courses:         Students wishing to do a Combined              ences, strategy and new venture teams, and
     MG 505 Quantitative Methods, MG 531           B.S./M.B.A. must complete the following        re-engineering business education.
     Managing Organizational Change,               courses while an undergraduate, earning a
     MG 541 Operations Risk Management,                                                           The Collaborative for Entrepreneurship
                                                   B or better in each:
     MG 542 Quality Planning and Control,                                                         and Innovation
                                                   MA 2611 Applied Statistics I,
     MG 544 Supply Chain Management and                                                           The Collaborative for Entrepreneurship
                                                   MA 2612 Applied Statistics II,
     Electronic Commerce, MG 545 Produc-                                                          and Innovation (CEI) is a program of the
                                                   MG 1100 Financial Accounting,
     tion Systems Design, MG 546 Managing                                                         Department of Management, designed to
                                                   MG 2200 Financial Management,
     Technological Innovation, MG 548 Pro-                                                        inspire and nurture people to discover, cre-
                                                   MG 3600 Marketing anagement,
     ductivity Management, MG 549 Strategies                                                      ate and commercialize new technology-
                                                   MG 3700 Information Systems
     for Manufacturing and Service Firms,                                                         based products, services and organizations.
     MG 566 Marketing and Electronic Com-                                                         It coordinates all entrepreneurship-related
                                                   MG/IE 2300 Organizational Science,
     merce, MG 568 Business Data Mining,                                                          activity at WPI, including graduate and
                                                   MG/IE 3400 Production System Design,
     MG 571 Database Applications Develop-                                                        undergraduate courses; the CEI@WPI
                                                   SS 1110 Introductory Microeconomics,
     ment, MG 572 Telecommunications                                                              ALL-OUT $50K Business Plan Challenge;
     Management and Electronic Commerce,                                                          the WPI Venture Forum workshops,
                                                   SS 1120 Introductory Macroeconomics.
     MG 573 Systems Design and Develop-                                                           monthly lecture and case presentation
     ment, MG 575 Information and Decision         To obtain a bachelor’s degree via the Com-     programs, radio show and newsletter;
     Support Systems, MG 576 Project Man-          bined Program, the student must satisfy all    networking; a student-run entrepreneurs
     agement, MG 592 New Venture Manage-           requirements for the bachelor’s degree,        organization; the New England Collegiate
     ment and Entrepreneurship, MG 597             including distribution and project require-    Entrepreneurs Award; Web site administra-

tion of the Coalition for Venture Support;      • 2 Core Courses                                Faculty
and, on a periodic basis, the CEI will offer      MG 511, MG 513 (3 credits each)
conferences, workshops and seminars on                                                          M. C. Banks, Harry G. Stoddard
                                                • 6 Elective Courses
topics of interest to entrepreneurs. Pro-                                                       Professor of Management and Department
                                                  selected from the following
grams for high school outreach, social                                                          Head; Ph.D., Virginia Tech
                                                  MG 505 (2 credits),
entrepreneurship, internship opportunities,       MG 531, MG541, MG 542, MG 544,                E. Danneels, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
business incubation, various awards, an           MG 545, MG 546, MG 548, MG 549,               Pennsylvania State University
Entrepreneurship Fair and a Consortium-           MG 566, MG 571, MG 572, MG 573,               M. B. Elmes, Professor; Ph.D.,
wide business plan contest are in the plan-       MG 575, MG 576, MG 592, MG 597,               Syracuse University
ning stage. Please call 508-831-5075 or           MG 568 (3 credits each)
5218 for more information.                                                                      A. Gerstenfeld, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                All students admitted to a graduate man-        Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Degree Requirements                             agement degree program are assigned a
                                                                                                H. Higgins, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
For the M.B.A.                                  faculty advisor and must file a curriculum
                                                                                                Georgia State University
49 credits, prior to waivers, distributed as    plan during their first year in the program.
                                                                                                S. A. Johnson, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
follows (credit in parentheses):                Part-time students typically complete the
                                                                                                Cornell University
• 9 Foundation Courses                          M.B.A. program in three to five years,
  (or graduate/undergraduate equivalents)       dependent on prior academic background,         C. Kasouf, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
  MG 501, MG 502, MG 503, MG 504,               while full-time students typically complete     Syracuse University
  MG 505, MG 506, MG 507, MG 508,               the program in two years. An M.S. degree        E. T. Loiacono, Assistant Professor;
  MG 509 (2 credits each)                       program is typically completed in two to        Ph.D.,
• 5 Core Courses
                                                four years part-time, or one and a half         University of Georgia
  MG 511 (3 credits), MG 512 (3 credits),       years full-time.
                                                                                                S. McCoy, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
  MG 513 (3 credits), MG 514 (4 credits),       Admission Requirements                          University of Pittsburgh
  MG 515 (2 credits)                            Admission to WPI’s Graduate Manage-             J. J. Mistry, Assistant Professor; D.B.A.,
• Graduate Qualifying Project (GQP)             ment Programs is competitive. Admission         Boston University
  MG 516 (4 credits)                            is granted to applicants whose academic
• 4 Elective Courses                                                                            K. Mukherjee, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                and professional records indicate the likeli-
  12 credits                                                                                    University of Connecticut
                                                hood of success in a challenging academic
                                                program, and whose career aspirations are       F. Noonan, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
For the M.S. in Marketing and
                                                in line with the focus of the specific degree   University of Massachusetts
Technological Innovation
32 credits, distributed as follows (credit in   program to which they are applying.             J. T. O’Connor, Professor; Ph.D.,
parentheses):                                   Applicants should have the analytic apti-       Notre Dame University
• 4 Foundation Courses                          tude and academic preparation necessary         D. Strong, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
  (or graduate/undergraduate equivalents)       to complete a technology-oriented               Carnegie-Mellon University
  MG 503, MG 505, MG 506, MG 508                management program. This includes a
                                                minimum of three semesters of college           S. Taylor, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
  (2 credits each)
                                                level math or two semesters of college level    Boston College
• 2 Core Courses
  MG 511, MG 512 (3 credits each)               calculus. Applicants are also required to       H. G. Vassallo, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                have an understanding of computer sys-          Clark University
• 6 Elective Courses
                                                tems.                                           O. Volkoff, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
  selected from the following
  MG 531, MG 546, MG 548, MG 567,               Applicants must have the earned equiva-         University of Western Ontario
  MG 563, MG 564, MG 566, MG 572,               lent of a four-year U.S. bachelor’s degree      K. A. Wilkens, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
  MG576, MG 592, MG 597, MG 598                 to be considered for admission. Admission       University of Massachusetts
  (3 credits each)                              decisions are based upon all the informa-
                                                tion required from the applicant.               A. Zeng, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
For the M.S. in Operations and                                                                  Pennsylvania State University
Information Technology                          Locations                                       J. Zhu, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
30 credits, distributed as follows (credit in   Tailored to meet the challenges of working      University of Massachusetts
parenthesis):                                   professionals, WPI offers full- and part-
• 3 Foundation Courses                          time graduate management study at our
  (or graduate/undergraduate equivalents)       campuses in Worcester and Waltham,
  MG 503, MG 504, MG 507                        Massachusetts, as well as world-wide via
  (2 credits each)                              our Advanced Distance Learning Network
                                                (see page 23).

     Manufacturing Engineering
     Programs of Study                              The four MFE core courses are offered in        Research Interests                       the evenings. The typical MFE core class is     Current research areas include tolerance
     The Manufacturing Engineering (MFE)            made up of about half practicing engineers      analysis, CAD/CAM, production systems
     Program offers two graduate degrees: the       with day jobs and half full-time grad stu-      analysis, machining, fixturing, delayed
     master of science and the doctor of philos-    dents with teaching or research assistant-      dynamical systems, nonlinear chatter, sur-
     ophy. Full- and part-time study available.     ships or fellowships.                           face metrology, fractal analysis, surface
     The graduate programs in manufacturing                                                         functionality, metals processing and
                                                    For the Ph.D.                                   manufacturing management.
     engineering provide opportunities for stu-
                                                    The doctoral (Ph.D.) program in MFE is a
     dents to study current manufacturing
     techniques while allowing each student the
                                                    research degree, with no required courses.      Research Facilities and
                                                    All candidates must pass a comprehensive        Laboratories
     flexibility to customize their educational
                                                    exam, which is based on the material in         Graduate students in MFE can do their
     program. Course material and research
                                                    the four core courses required for the M.S.     project, thesis and dissertation work in
     activities often draw from the traditional
                                                    degree in MFE. All candidates must com-         almost any research or production facility
     fields of computer science, controls
                                                    plete at least one year in residence, have a    on or off campus. Often the work is done
     engineering, electrical and computer engi-
                                                    dissertation proposal accepted, then com-       in one of the following facilities:
     neering, environmental engineering, indus-
                                                    plete the dissertation and defend it success-
     trial engineering, materials science and                                                         Computer-aided Manufacturing Lab
     engineering, mechanical engineering,                                                             HAAS Center for Computer-controlled
     manufacturing engineering, and manage-         The dissertation is based on original and,          Machining
     ment. The program’s intention is to build      generally, externally sponsored research. A       Metals Processing Institute
     a solid and broad foundation in manufac-       broad range of research topics is possible,       Production and Machine Dynamics Lab
     turing theories and practices, and allow for   including investigation into the funda-           Robotics Lab
     further concentrated study in a selected       mental science on which manufacturing             Surface Metrology Lab
     specialty.                                     processes are based, material science,
                                                    manufacturing engineering education,            For more information, visit the MFE Web
     For the M.S.                                   metrology, quality, machine tool dynamics,      site:
     The master of science (M.S.) program in        manufacturing processes, design methodol-
                                                                                                    Admission Requirements
     Manufacturing Engineering (MFE) at             ogy and production systems.
                                                                                                    Candidates for admission must meet
     WPI is highly flexible. Students from a                                                        WPI’s requirements and should have a
     wide range of engineering and manage-          MFE Seminar
                                                    Seminar speakers include WPI faculty and        bachelor’s degree in science or engineering,
     ment backgrounds can design individual-                                                        preferably in such fields as computer sci-
     ized programs of study to meet their spe-      students as well as manufacturing experts
                                                    and scholars from around the world.             ence/engineering, electrical/ control engi-
     cial needs and interests.                                                                      neering, industrial engineering, environ-
                                                    Registration for, attendance at and partici-
     All candidates for the M.S. degree in MFE      pation in the seminar course, MFE 500, is       mental engineering, manufacturing engi-
     take four core courses (12 credits), provid-   required for full-time students. The semi-      neering, materials science and engineering,
     ing a common foundation in design and          nar series provides a common forum for all      or mechanical engineering. Students with
     control of manufacturing processes and         students to discuss current issues in manu-     other backgrounds will be considered
     systems, and design for manufacturability.     facturing engineering.                          based on their interest, formal education
     The remaining 18 credits can be earned                                                         and experience in manufacturing.
     through almost any combination of
     courses, thesis, independent study, or
     directed research. Students, with their
     advisor, can select grad courses from virtu-
     ally any department and can complete
     their degree entirely with course work.
     Thesis and directed research are available
     for those who would like to perform sig-
     nificant projects, working closely with a
     professor of their choosing, possibly
     involving sponsored research in one of
     WPI’s many research and teaching labora-
     tories, and possibly off campus.


                                             Manufacturing Engineering
C. A. Brown, Director of Manufacturing
Engineering, Saint Gobain Professor of
Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D.,
University of Vermont
D. Apelian, Howmet Professor of
Engineering, Director of the Metal
Processing Institute; Ph.D., Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
R. R. Biederman, George F. Fuller
Professor of Mechanical Engineering;
Ph.D., University of Connecticut
H. K. Ault, Associate Professor of
Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., WPI
D. C. Brown, Professor of Computer
Science; Ph.D., Ohio State University
P. D. Cotnoir, Visiting Lecturer in
Mechanical Engineering; M.S., WPI
M. A. Demetriou, Associate Professor of
Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., University
of Southern California
M. S. Fofana, Associate Professor of
Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., University
of Waterloo
S. A. Johnson, Associate Professor of
Management; Ph.D., Cornell University
R. N. Katz, Research Professor; Ph.D.,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
R. Ludwig, Professor of Electrical and
Computer Engineering; Ph.D., Colorado
State University
M. M. Makhlouf, Professor of Mechanical
Engineering, Director of Aluminum
Casting Research Laboratory; Ph.D., WPI
F. Noonan, Associate Professor of
Management; Ph.D., University of
J. C. O’Shaughnessy, Professor of Civil
and Environmental Engineering; Ph.D.,
Penn State University
Y. Rong, Professor of Mechanical
Engineering; Ph.D., University of
R. D. Sisson Jr., Professor of Mechanical
Engineering, Ph.D., Purdue University
J. M. Sullivan Jr., Associate Professor of
Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., Thayer
School of Engineering, Dartmouth College


     Materials Science and Engineering
     Program of Study                                Materials Science and                           Optical and Electron Metallography
                                                     Engineering Laboratories                        Laboratories
     Programs leading to a degree of master of                                             
                                                     Biomaterials Laboratory                         Two scanning electron microscopes
     science and/or doctor of philosophy.  
                                                                                                     (SEMs), an analytical scanning transmis-
     The master of science in materials science      This laboratory contains facilities for the
                                                                                                     sion electron microscope (AEM), optical
     and engineering provides students with an       synthesis, processing and testing of bioma-
                                                                                                     reflection and transmission microscopes,
     opportunity to study the fundamentals of        terials. The equipment includes foam-pro-
                                                                                                     and supporting sample preparation and
     materials science and state-of-the-art appli-   cessing apparatus, data acquisition systems,
                                                                                                     photographic equipment are the major
     cations in materials engineering and mate-      medical devices, sensors, polymer and syn-
                                                                                                     facilities available for microstructural
     rials processing. The program is designed       thesis modules, constant temperature shaker
                                                                                                     analysis. The AMR1200 (SEM) is
     to build a strong foundation in materials       baths, centrifuges, Shore hardness testers,
                                                                                                     equipped with a Kevex 7000 Energy
     science along with industrial applications      ASTM ball rebound testers and other poly-
                                                                                                     Dispersive X-Ray (EDX) Analyzer. The
     in engineering, technology and processing.      mer testing equipment.
                                                                                                     JSM840 (SEM) is equipped with stage-
     Both full- and part-time study are avail-
                                                     Ceramic/Powder Processing                       automated digital image analysis, a light
     able. For more information, contact the
                                                     Laboratory                                      element (Uranium down to Boron)
     program head at 508-831-5633.
                                                     Quantum X-Ray detector with a Kevex
     Program areas for the doctor of philosophy      This industry-sponsored laboratory sup-         Delta system, and a wavelength dispersive
     emphasize the processing-structure-proper-      ports particulate processing research by        X-ray analyzer. The JEOL 100C (AEM) is
     ty-performance relationships in metals,         materials science and manufacturing stu-        equipped with a Devex 8000 EDX system.
     ceramics, polymers and composites.              dents and faculty. The laboratory is            These facilities are used primarily for
     Current projects are addressing these issues    equipped with a variety of powder prepara-      micro-structural analysis and determina-
     in fuel cell materials, biopolymers, alu-       tion, processing and characterization           tion of crystal structures of fine phases
     minum and magnesium casting, the heat-          equipment, as well as equipment for green       present in metals and ceramics.
     treating of steels and aluminum alloys and      body consolidation and sintering. Equip-
     metal matrix composites.                        ment includes roller mills, mixers, a low-      Polymer Engineering Laboratory
     Well-equipped laboratories within               temperature drying oven, freeze dryer, cold
                                                                                                     This laboratory is used for the synthesis,
     Washburn Shops and Stoddard                     press, various sintering furnaces (capable of
                                                                                                     processing and testing of plastics. The
     Laboratories include such facilities as scan-   up to 1700C in air and controlled atmos-
                                                                                                     equipment includes: thermal analysis
     ning (SEM) and transmission (TEM)               pheres), a differential thermal analyzer,
                                                                                                     machines Perkin Elmer DSC 4, DSC 7,
     electron microscopes, X-ray diffractometer,     X-ray sedigraph, and equipment for elec-
                                                                                                     DTA 1400 and TGA 7; single-screw table-
     process simulation equipment, a mechani-        trical property and density measurements.
                                                                                                     top extruder; injection molding facilities;
     cal testing laboratory including two com-
                                                     Mechanical Testing Laboratory                   polymer synthesis apparatus; oil bath fur-
     puter-controlled servo-hydraulic mechani-
                                                 naces; heat treating ovens; and foam pro-
     cal testing systems, metalcasting, particu-
                                                     Experimental mechanical testing laborato-       cessing and testing devices.
     late processing, semisolid processing labo-
     ratories, a tribology laboratory, a metallo-    ries are available for teaching and research
                                                     related to mechanical properties and defor-     Surface Metrology Laboratory
     graphic laboratory, a polymer engineering                                              Met/
     laboratory with differential scanning           mation of metals, ceramics, and composite
     calorimeter (DSC) and thermo gravimetric        materials. Equipment available includes:        ME/MFE/SurfMet/
     analyzer (TGA), a corrosion laboratory,         two computer-controlled Instron 8502            The Surface Metrology Laboratory is dedi-
     topographic analysis laboratory and             Servo-Hydraulic Tension-Compression             cated to the study of surface textures, their
     machining force dynamometry. A range of         Systems with supporting grips, environ-         creation and their influence of surface
     materials processing, fastening, joining,       mental chambers, and furnaces; an Instron       behavior or performance. We also study
     welding, machining, casting and heat            Model 4201 computerized tensile tester          and design the manufacturing processes
     treating facilities is also available.          for high-accuracy, low-load testing of          that create specific surface textures. We
                                                     ceramic materials; an ASCERA hydraulic          study and develop specialized algorithms
                                                     tensile tester for brittle materials; two       that are used to support texture-related
                                                     high-temperature and three room-                product and process design, and to
                                                     temperature stress-rupture systems.             advance the understanding of texture-
                                                                                                     dependent behavior. Our experience
                                                                                                     extends to analyzing data sets on scales
                                                                                                     from kilometers (earth’s surface) to


                                                Materials Science and Engineering
Angstroms (cleaved mica), although the          Metal Processing Institute (MPI)                 MPI offers educational opportunities and
primary focus is on analyzing measured                          corporate resources to both undergraduate
surfaces or profiles (i.e., topographic data)   The Metal Processing Institute (MPI) is an       and graduate students, specifically:
acquired from surfaces created or modified      industry-University alliance. Its mission is     • International exchanges and internships
during manufacture, wear, fracture or cor-      to design and carry out research projects          with several leading universities around
rosion.                                         identified in collaboration with MPI’s             the globe—Europe and Asia
The objective of the research on texture        industrial partners in the field of near and     • Graduate internship programs leading
analysis is to develop characterization         net shape manufacturing. MPI creates               to a master’s or doctoral degree, where
parameters that reduce large data sets, such    knowledge that will help enhance the pro-          the research work is carried out at the
as those acquired by atomic probe               ductivity and competitiveness of the metal         industrial site
microscopy, scanning profiometry, con-          processing industry, and develops the indus-     For further details visit the MPI office on
focal microscopy, or conventional               try’s human resource base through the edu-       the third floor of Washburn, Room 326,
profilometry. The purpose of the charac-        cation of WPI students and the dissemina-        or the MPI Web site:
terization parameters is to support product     tion of new knowledge. More than 120 pri-
                                                                                                 MPI’s research programs are carried out by
and process design, or promote the under-       vate manufacturers participate in the
                                                                                                 three distinct research consortia. These are
standing of adhesion, friction, wear, frac-     Institute, and their support helps fund fun-
                                                                                                 described below:
ture, corrosion or other texture related        damental and applied research that address-
                                                                                                 • Advanced Casting Research Center
phenomena. The characterization parame-         es technological barriers facing the industry.
ters should have clear physical interpreta-     The MPI researchers also develop and
                                                                                                 • Center for Heat Treating Excellence
tions for understanding the mechanisms          demonstrate best practices and state-of-the-
which control surface behavior and surface      art processing techniques.
                                                                                                 • The Morris Boorky Powder Metallurgy
creation. The laboratory has also been uti-                                                        Research Center (PMRC)
lized in specialized image analyses, used,
for example, to characterize the internal
morphology of cermanic membrane.

X-Ray Diffraction Laboratory
Two fully automated and computerized X-
ray diffractometers are available for teach-
ing and research: a GE-XRD-5 diffrac-
tometer and a Nicolet 12/V polycrystalline
diffraction system. In addition, a variety of
software has been developed to utilize these
instruments effectively. Currently, back-
ground modeling, peak searching and
curve fitting with deconvolution are in use
for quantitative phase analysis and residual
stress analysis. A search of the JCPDS
Powder Diffraction File is provided with
the Nicolet system. A variety of X-ray cam-
eras and goniometers are available along
with choice of x-ray tube targets to provide
a wide X-ray diffraction capability. Addi-
tional support software is shared with the
electron microscopy facility to generate
diffraction patterns for any crystal system,
in any desired orientation.


     Materials Science and Engineering
     Advanced Casting                                 Over fifty corporate members participate     Degree Requirements
     Research Center (ACRC)                           in and support the CHTE research pro-        For the M.S.                    grams. MPI project opportunities, indus-
                                                                                                   For the master of science in materials sci-
                                                      trial internships, co-op opportunities and   ence and engineering, the student is
     The laboratory provides experimental facil-      summer employment are available through
     ities for course laboratories and for under-                                                  required to complete a minimum of 30
                                                      CHTE/MPI.                                    credit hours. Requirements include the fol-
     graduate and graduate projects. The labo-
                                                                                                   lowing core courses: MTE 510, MTE 525,
     ratory is equipped with extensive melting        The Morris Boorky Powder Metallurgy
                                                                                                   MTE 530, MTE 540, MTE 550 and
     and casting facilities, computerized data        Research Center (PMRC)
     acquisition systems for solidification stud-                MTE 560, two MTE or other 4000, 500
     ies, thermal analysis units, liquid metal fil-   Research/PMRC/                               or 600 level engineering, science or mathe-
     tration apparatus, rheocasting machines,         The center addresses the scientific, engi-   matics electives, and 6 thesis credits. All
     and a variety of heat treating furnaces. The     neering and managerial problems of the       courses must be approved by the student’s
     laboratory has strong collaborations with        powder metallurgy industry. By integrating   advisor and the Materials Graduate
     industry, and students work directly with        facilities from different disciplines, the   Committee.
     professional engineers from sponsoring           center has developed research programs in    Satisfactory participation in the materials
     companies. Forty-five corporate members          engineering and management, addressing       engineering seminar (MTE 580) is also
     participate in and support the ACRC              new technologies as well as methodologies    required for all full-time students. In addi-
     research programs. Student scholarships          for their implementation, i.e., valve cre-   tion to general college requirements, all
     offered by the Foundry Education                 ation and management issues in a small,      courses taken for graduate credit must
     Foundation (FEF) are available through           fragmented industry. The objectives of the   result in a GPA of 3.0 or higher. Waiver of
     the laboratory. The ACRC conducts work-          PMRC are as follows:                         any of these requirements must be
     shops, seminars and technical symposiums         • Establish an educational and research      approved by the Materials Science and
     for national and local industries. The labo-       center for the powder metallurgy indus-    Engineering Graduate Committee, which
     ratory is available throughout the year for        try, and provide a vehicle for manufac-    will exercise its discretion in handling any
     project activity and thesis work as well as        turing excellence and competitiveness of   extenuating circumstances or problems.
     co-op and summer employment. Project               the industry.
                                                                                                   Examples of Typical Program
     opportunities at international sites are also    • Establish long-term relationships          • Materials engineering core courses—
     available through ACRC/MPI.                        between the academic community and           18 credits
                                                        members of management, manufactur-         • Electives—6 credits
     Center for Heat Treating Excellence                ing and research in the industry.
     (CHTE)                                                                                        • Thesis—6 credits
                                                      • Develop for graduate and under-            • Total—30 credits
     Research/CHTE/                                     graduate students course and project
                                                        experiences that will foster an under-     For the Ph.D.
     The center is an alliance between the
                                                        standing of the industry.                  The number of course credits required for
     industrial sector and researchers to collabo-
                                                      Twenty-one corporate members participate     the doctor of philosophy degree, above
     ratively address short-term and long-term
                                                      and support the PMRC research programs.      those for the master of science, is not spec-
     needs of the heat treating industry. It is the
                                                      MQP project opportunities, industrial        ified precisely. For planning purposes, the
     center’s intent to enhance the position of
                                                      internships, co-op opportunities and sum-    student should consider a total of 21 to 30
     the heat treating industry by applying
                                                      mer employment are available through         course credits. The remainder of the work
     research to solve industrial problems, and
                                                      PMRC/MPI.                                    will be in research and independent study.
     to advance heat treatment technology. The
                                                                                                   The total combination of research and
     center’s objective is to advance the fron-
                                                                                                   course work required will not be less than
     tiers of thermal processing through funda-
                                                                                                   60 credits beyond the master of science
     mental research and development.
                                                                                                   degree or not less than 90 credits beyond
     Specifically, the center will pursue research                                                 the bachelor’s degree.
     to develop innovative processes to:
                                                                                                   Admission to candidacy will be granted
     • Control microstructure and properties
                                                                                                   only after the student has satisfactorily
       of metallic components
                                                                                                   passed the Materials Engineering Doctoral
     • Reduce energy consumption
                                                                                                   Qualifying/ Comprehensive Examination
     • Reduce process time
                                                                                                   (MEDQE). The purpose of this exam is to
     • Reduce production costs
                                                                                                   determine if the student’s breadth and
     • Achieve zero distortion
                                                                                                   depth of understanding of the fundamen-
     • Increase furnace efficiency
                                                                                                   tal areas of materials engineering is ade-
     • Achieve zero emissions


                                              Materials Science and Engineering
quate to conduct independent research         Admission Requirements                         Faculty
and successfully complete a Ph.D. disserta-   The program is designed for graduates          R. D. Sisson Jr., Professor of Mechanical
tion.                                         with engineering, mathematics or science       Engineering; Director, Materials Science
The MEDQE consists of both written and        degrees. Some undergraduate courses may        and Engineering Program; Ph.D., Purdue
oral components. The written exam must        be required to improve the student’s back-     University
be successfully completed before the oral     ground in materials science and engineer-      D. Apelian, Howmet Professor of
exam can be taken. The oral exam is usually   ing.                                           Engineering; Director, Metal Processing
given within two weeks of the completion      As part of their graduate program, stu-        Institute; Sc.D., Massachusetts Institute of
of the written exam. The MEDQE is             dents are encouraged to elect courses from     Technology
offered one time each year.                   the various engineering, mathematics and       I. Bar-On, Professor; Ph.D.,
A member of the materials science and         science departments. The interdisciplinary     Hebrew University of Jerusalem
engineering faculty will be appointed to be   aspects of materials science and engineer-
the chairperson of the MEDQE                  ing are emphasized. Please refer also to the   R. R. Biederman, George F. Fuller
Committee. This person should not be the      programs in mechanical engineering and         Professor of Mechanical Engineering;
student’s Ph.D. Thesis Advisor; but that      manufacturing engineering.                     Ph.D., University of Connecticut
advisor may be a member of the MEDQE                                                         R. F. Bourgault, Professor Emeritus;
Committee. Others on the committee                                                           M.S., Stevens Institute of Technology
should be the writers of the four sections                                                   C. A. Brown, Saint Gobain Professor;
of the examinations and any other faculty                                                    Director, Manufacturing Engineering;
selected by the chairperson. Faculty from                                                    Ph.D., University of Vermont
other departments at WPI or other col-
leges/universities, as well as experts from                                                  C. D. Demetry, Associate Professor;
industry, may be asked to participate in                                                     Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of
this examination if the materials engineer-                                                  Technology
ing faculty feels it is appropriate.                                                         R. N. Katz, Research Professor; Ph.D.,
At least one year prior to completion of                                                     Massachusetts Institute of Technology
the Ph.D. dissertation, the student must                                                     M. M. Makhlouf, Professor; Director,
present a formal seminar to the public                                                       Aluminum Casting Research Laboratory;
describing the proposed dissertation                                                         Ph.D., WPI
research project. This Ph.D. research pro-                                                   S. Shivkumar, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
posal will be presented after admission to                                                   Stevens Institute of Technology
                                                                                             K. Zeisler-Mashl, Research Assistant
All materials science and engineering stu-                                                   Professor; Ph.D., Michigan Technological
dents in the Ph.D. program must satisfac-                                                    University
torily complete a minor in a program-
related technical area. The minor normally
consists of a minimum of three related
courses and must be approved by the
Graduate Study Committee and the pro-
gram head.


     Mathematical Sciences
     Programs of Study                                  Professional Master of Science in              required by industrial multidisciplinary
     The Mathematical Sciences Department               Financial Mathematics Program                  team environments through courses in one
     offers four programs leading to the degree         This program offers an efficient, practice-    area of science or engineering, e.g.,
     of master of science, a Combined                   oriented track to prepare students for         physics, computer science, mechanical
     B.S./Master’s program, a program leading           quantitative careers in the financial indus-   engineering, electrical and computer engi-
     to the degree of master of mathematics for         try, including banks, insurance companies,     neering.
     educators, and a program leading to the            and investment and securities firms. The       The connection between academic training
     degree of doctor of philosophy.                    program gives students a solid background      and industrial experience will be provided
                                                        and sufficient breadth in the mathematical     by an industrial professional master’s pro-
     Master of Science in                               and statistical foundations needed to          ject that involves the solution of a con-
     Applied Mathematics Program                        understand the cutting edge techniques of      crete, real-world problem originating in
     This program gives students a broad back-          today and to keep up with future develop-      industry. The department, through the
     ground in mathematics, placing an empha-           ments in this rapidly evolving area over the   industrial connections of the faculty affili-
     sis on areas with the highest demand in            span of their careers. It also equips stu-     ated with the Center for Industrial
     applications: numerical methods and scien-         dents with expertise in quantitative finan-    Mathematics and Statistics (CIMS), will
     tific computation, mathematical modeling,          cial modeling, and the computational           help students identify and select suitable
     discrete mathematics, mathematical materi-         methods and skills that are used to imple-     industrial internships. Graduates of the
     als science, optimization and operations           ment the models. The mathematical              program are expected to start or advance
     research. In addition to these advanced            knowledge is complemented by studies in        their professional careers in industry.
     areas of specialization, students are encour-      financial management, information tech-
     aged to acquire breadth by choosing elec-          nology and/or computer science.                Combined B.S./Master’s Program
     tive courses in fields such as computer sci-       The bridge from the academic environ-          This program allows a student to work
     ence, mechanical engineering and electrical        ment to the professional workplace will be     concurrently toward bachelor and master
     and computer engineering, complementing            provided by a professional master’s project    of science degrees in applied mathematics,
     their studies in applied mathematics.              that involves the solution of a concrete,      applied statistics, financial mathematics
     Students have a choice of completing their         real-world problem directly originating        and industrial mathematics.
     master’s thesis or project in cooperation          from the financial industry. Students are
     with one of the department’s established           encouraged to complete summer intern-          Master of Mathematics for Educators
     industrial partners. The program provides a        ships at financial firms. The department       This is a 30-credit evening program
     suitable foundation for the pursuit of a           can help students to find suitable financial   designed primarily for secondary school
     Ph.D. degree in applied mathematics or a           internships through the industrial connec-     mathematics teachers. Courses offer a solid
     related field, or for a career in industry         tions of faculty affiliated with the Center    foundation in areas such as geometry, alge-
     immediately after graduation.                      for Industrial Mathematics and Statistics.     bra, modeling, discrete math and statistics,
                                                        Graduates of the program are expected to       while also including the study of modern
     Master of Science in                                                                              applications. Additionally, students devel-
                                                        start or advance their professional careers
     Applied Statistics Program                                                                        op materials, based on course work, which
                                                        involving financial product development
     This program gives graduates the knowledge                                                        may be used in their secondary classes.
                                                        and pricing, risk management, investment
     and experience to tackle problems of statisti-                                                    Technology is introduced when possible to
                                                        decision support or portfolio management.
     cal design, analysis and control likely to be                                                     give students exposure for future consider-
     encountered in business, industry or acade-        Professional Master of Science in              ation. Examples include Geometer’s
     mia. The program is designed to acquaint           Industrial Mathematics Program                 Sketchpad; Maple for algebra, calculus and
     students with the theory underlying modern         This is a practice-oriented program that       graphics; Matlab for analysis of sound and
     statistical methods, to provide breadth in         prepares students for successful careers in    music; and the TI CBL for motion and
     diverse areas of statistics and to give students   industry. The graduates are expected to be     heat.
     practical experience through extensive appli-      generalized problem-solvers, capable of        For teachers in the Massachusetts public
     cation of statistical theory to real problems.     moving from task to task within an organi-     schools, WPI may grant a professional
     Of particular note are the statistical consult-    zation. In industry, mathematicians need       license upon completion of the MME
     ing course, which develops interpersonal and       not only the standard mathematical and         degree.
     statistical consulting skills, and the Master’s    statistical modeling and computational
     Project, which involves the solution of a                                                         During the summers of 2002, 2003 and
                                                        tools, but also knowledge within other
     large-scale real-world problem, often origi-                                                      2004, 3-credit courses in modeling of
                                                        areas of science or engineering. This pro-
     nating in industry, business or government.                                                       industrial projects are available, thanks to a
                                                        gram aims at developing the analysis,
     Through the selection of elective courses,                                                        grant obtained from the General Electric
                                                        modeling and computational skills needed
     the student may choose a program with an                                                          Fund.
                                                        by mathematicians who work in industrial
     industrial emphasis or one with a more the-        environments. It also provides the breadth
     oretical emphasis.

                                                                               Mathematical Sciences
Doctor of Philosophy in                         Center for Industrial                          in another department may be taken for
Mathematical Sciences Program                   Mathematics and Statistics                     graduate credit, subject to the approval of
The goal of this program is to produce                                                         the departmental Graduate Committee.
                                                (CIMS)                                         Candidates are required to successfully
active and creative problem solvers, capa-
ble of contributing in academic and indus-      The Center for Industrial Mathematics          complete the graduate seminar MA 560.
trial environments. One distinguishing          and Statistics was established in 1997 to
feature of this program is a 9-credit-hour                                                     For the M.S. in Applied Statistics
                                                foster partnerships between the University
project to be completed under the guid-                                                        The master’s program in applied statistics
                                                and industry, business and government in
ance of an external sponsor, e.g., from                                                        is a 36-credit-hour program. Courses taken
                                                mathematics and statistics research.
industry or a national research center. The                                                    must include MA 540, MA 541 and MA
intention of this project is to connect         The problems facing business and industry      558. In addition the student must com-
theoretical knowledge with relevant appli-      are growing ever more complex, and their       plete a suitable 6-credit project, typically
cations and to introduce the candidate to       solutions often involve sophisticated math-    drawn from business, industry or acade-
potential employers.                            ematics. The faculty members and stu-          mia. The remaining seven courses are
                                                dents associated with CIMS have the            normally chosen from the statistics/proba-
Research Interests                              expertise to address today’s complex prob-     bility offerings of the Mathematical
Active areas of research in the Mathemati-      lems and provide solutions that use rele-      Sciences Department, courses numbered
cal Sciences Department include applied         vant mathematics and statistics.               MA 542-556 plus MA 509. Upper-level
and computational mathematics, industrial       The Center offers undergraduates and           undergraduate courses may be taken for
mathematics, applied statistics, scientific     graduate students the opportunity to gain      graduate credit subject to the approval of
computing, numerical analysis, ordinary         real-world experience in the corporate         the departmental Graduate Committee.
and partial differential equations, non-        world through projects and internships
linear analysis, electric power systems, con-                                                  For the M.S. in Financial Mathematics
                                                that make them more competitive in
trol theory, optimal design, composite                                                         The Professional Master’s Degree Program
                                                today’s job market. In addition, it helps
materials, homogenization, computational                                                       in Financial Mathematics is a 30-credit-
                                                companies address their needs for mathe-
fluid dynamics, biofluids, dynamical sys-                                                      hour program including a 3-credit-hour
                                                matical solutions and enhances their tech-
tems, free and moving boundary problems,                                                       professional M.S. project originating from
                                                nological competitiveness.
porous media modeling, turbulence and                                                          the financial industry. Students must take
chaos, mathematical physics, mathematical       The industrial projects in mathematics and     foundation courses MA 503 and MA 540,
biology, operations research, linear and        statistics offered by CIMS provide a           at least three from the four core financial
nonlinear programming, discrete mathe-          unique education for successful careers in     mathematics courses MA 571, MA 572,
matics, graph theory, group theory, linear      industry, business and higher education.       MA 573 and MA 574, and two additional
algebra, combinatorics, applied probability,                                                   electives chosen from the graduate courses
                                                Degree Requirements                            offered by the Mathematical Sciences
stochastic processes, time series analysis,
                                                For the M.S. in Applied Mathematics            Department.
Bayesian statistics, Bayesian computation,
                                                The master’s program in applied mathe-
survey research methodology, categorical                                                       A 6-credit block has to be completed in
                                                matics is a 36-credit-hour program.
data analysis, Monte Carlo methodology,                                                        one of the following complementary areas
                                                Students must complete seven core cours-
statistical computing, survival analysis and                                                   outside of the Mathematical Sciences
                                                es: MA 503, MA 504, MA 508, MA 509,
model selection.                                                                               Department: financial management (e.g.,
                                                MA 510, MA 530, and either MA 512 or
                                                MA 514. In addition, students are re-          from MG 501, MG 502, MG 509, MG
Mathematical Sciences                                                                          526 or MG 598), information technology
                                                quired to complete a 6-credit-hour master’s
Computer Facilities                                                                            (e.g., from MG 571, MG 573, MG 578
                                                thesis or project. The master’s thesis is an
The Mathematical Sciences Department                                                           or MG 598) or computer science (e.g.,
                                                original piece of mathematical research
relies heavily on the use of modern com-                                                       from CS 504, CS 507, CS 531, CS 534,
                                                work which focuses on advancing the state
puter facilities in the programs it offers.                                                    CS 542 or CS 552). Students with a
                                                of the mathematical art. The master’s pro-
Current facilities include approximately                                                       degree or substantial work experience in
                                                ject consists of a creative application of
70 workstations, X-terminals and PCs, as                                                       one of the above complementary areas can
                                                mathematics to a real world problem. It
well as nine 500+ MHz DEC Alphas. In                                                           substitute them with other courses subject
                                                focuses on problem definition and solution
addition, department faculty and graduate                                                      to prior approval by the Graduate
                                                using mathematical tools.
students have access to the University’s                                                       Committee. B.S./Master’s students can
16-node (32 cpu) IBM RS/6000 SP paral-          The remaining three courses may be             count undergraduate credits for MA 4213,
lel computer. We are continually adding         chosen from the graduate offerings of the      MA 4235, MA 4237, MA 4473 or
new resources and intend to maintain our        Mathematical Sciences Department.              MA 4632 toward electives, and suitable
position as one of the most heavily com-        Upper-level undergraduate mathematics          undergraduate courses toward the comple-
puterized mathematical sciences depart-         courses or a two-course graduate sequence      mentary area requirement.
ments in the country.

     Mathematical Sciences
     Students shall participate in the Profes-      • Machine learning module—MA 540,              • At least 6 credit hours of courses, 500
     sional Master’s Seminars MA 562A and             MA 541, CS 507 and CS 539;                     level or higher, in WPI departments out-
     MA 562B. The Professional M.S. Project         • Cryptography module—MA 533,                    side of mathematical sciences
     MA 598 involves solving a real-life prob-        MA 514, CS 503 and EE 578.
                                                                                                   Mathematical Sciences Ph.D. Project
     lem originating in the financial industry. A
     student’s plan of study and the topic of the   For the Combined B.S./Master’s                 As part of the research preparation phase,
     master’s project shall be approved by the      Programs in Applied Mathematics and            the student is encouraged to go off campus
     Graduate Committee.                            Applied Statistics                             to complete a project sponsored by indus-
                                                    A maximum of four courses may be count-        try, national research laboratories or other
     For the M.S. in Industrial Mathematics         ed toward both the undergraduate and           approved external organizations. The pro-
     The Professional Master’s Degree Program       graduate degrees. All of these courses must    ject shall be in an area involving an appli-
     in Industrial Mathematics is a 30-credit-      be 4000-level or above, and at least one       cation of mathematics or statistics. The
     hour program. Students must complete           must be a graduate course. Three of them       scope of the project shall be equivalent to
     four foundation courses: MA 503, MA            must be beyond the 7 units of mathemat-        9 credit hours of course work.
     510 and two courses out of MA 508, MA          ics required for the B.S. degree.              In the event that the student is unable to
     509 and MA 530. Students must also             Acceptance into the program means that         secure sponsorship through an off-campus
     complete a 12-credit-hour module com-          the candidate is qualified for graduate        organization, the student is required to
     posed of two courses within the depart-        school and signifies approval of the four      complete an on-campus project in a
     ment and a sequence of two courses from        courses to be counted for credit toward        department other than mathematical sci-
     one graduate program outside the Mathe-        both degrees. However, in order to obtain      ences.
     matical Sciences Department. The depart-       both undergraduate and graduate credit
     ment offers a wide selection of modules to     for these courses, grades of B or better       Plan of Study
     suit students’ interest and expertise.         have to be obtained.                           Within the first year of enrollment, each
     In addition, students are required to com-                                                    student is expected to choose a specializa-
     plete a 3-credit-hour elective from the        For the Master of Mathematics for              tion with his or her advisor. A plan of
     Mathematical Sciences Department and a         Educators (M.M.E.)                             study must be submitted to and approved
     3-credit-hour master’s project on a prob-      Candidates for the master of mathematics       by the departmental Graduate Committee.
     lem originating from industry. Candidates      for educators must successfully complete
                                                    30 credit hours of graduate study, includ-     General Comprehensive Examination
     are required to successfully complete the
                                                    ing a 6-credit-hour project (see MME 592,      In order to be admitted to candidacy, the
     Professional Master’s Seminars MA 562A
                                                    MME 594, MME 596). This project will           student must take the general comprehen-
     and MA 562B. The plan of study and the
                                                    typically consist of a classroom study with-   sive examination at the beginning of the
     project topic need prior approval of the
                                                    in the context of a secondary mathematics      first year of study if entering with a mas-
     Graduate Committee.
                                                    course and will be advised by faculty in the   ter’s degree, and no later than the begin-
     Examples of Modules for the M.S. Degree        Mathematical Sciences Department.              ning of the second year of study, if enter-
     in Industrial Mathematics                      Typically, a student will enroll in 4 credit   ing with a bachelor’s degree.
     The courses comprising the 12-credit           hours per semester during the fall and
                                                    spring, with the remaining credit hours        Admission to Candidacy
     module should form a coherent sequence
                                                    taken in the summer. Normal degree com-        Admission to candidacy is granted when
     that provides exposure to an area outside
                                                    pletion time is two years, including two       the student has passed the general compre-
     mathematics and statistics, providing at
                                                    summers.                                       hensive examination and has received
     the same time the mathematical tools
                                                                                                   approval of an application for admission to
     required by that particular area. Examples
                                                    For the Ph.D.                                  candidacy summarizing the student’s
     of typical modules are:
                                                    The course of study leading to the doctor      planned course of study.
     • Dynamics and control module—                 of philosophy in the mathematical sciences
       MA 512, MA 540, ME 522 and                   requires the completion of at least 60 cred-   Ph.D. Preliminary Examination
       ME 523 (or ME 527);                          it hours beyond the master’s degree, of        Before registering for Ph.D. dissertation
     • Materials module—MA 512, MA 526,             which at least 30 credit hours must be         credits the candidate must pass the Ph.D.
       ME 531 and ME 532;                           directed toward independent research. The      preliminary examination. This examina-
     • Fluid dynamics module—MA 512,                research preparation phase consists of:        tion, which has both written and oral
       MA 526, ME 511 and ME 512 (or                                                               components, should be taken sometime
       ME 513);                                     • 9 to 15 credit hours of supervised inde-
                                                                                                   during the second or third year after being
     • Biomedical engineering module—                 pendent study courses in the area of the
                                                                                                   admitted as a Ph.D. candidate.
       MA 512, MA 526, BE/ME 554 and                  candidate’s specialization
       BE/ME 558;                                   • 9 credit hours of the applied mathemat-
                                                      ics project (see description)


                                                                               Mathematical Sciences
Ph.D. Dissertation Proposal                     Admission Requirements                         Faculty
At least six months prior to completion of      A bachelor’s degree is required for admis-     B. Vernescu, Professor and Head; Ph.D.
the Ph.D. dissertation, the candidate must      sion to all M.S. programs. A basic knowl-      Institute of Mathematics, Bucharest,
present a formal seminar to the public          edge of undergraduate analysis, linear         Romania
describing the proposed dissertation            algebra and differential equations is          P. R. Christopher, Professor; Ph.D.,
research project. A formal written research     assumed for applicants to the master’s         Clark University
proposal must be submitted two weeks            programs in applied mathematics and
before the presentation.                        industrial mathematics. A strong back-         P. W. Davis, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                ground in mathematics, which should            Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
Ph.D. Final Examination                         include courses in advanced analysis and       B. D. Doytchinov, Assistant Professor;
With the dissertation and the other             linear algebra, is assumed for applicants to   Ph.D., Carnegie Mellon University
requirements of the program completed,          the master’s program in financial mathe-
the student is ready for the final oral                                                        W. Farr, Associate Professor and Associate
                                                matics. Typically, an entering student in
defense. The student’s Ph.D. Thesis                                                            Head ; Ph.D., University of Minnesota
                                                the master of science in applied statistics
Committee will determine by majority            program will have an undergraduate major       J. D. Fehribach, Associate Professor;
vote whether or not the student passes.         in the mathematical sciences, engineering      Ph.D., Duke University
                                                or a physical science; however, individuals    J. Goulet, Coordinator, Master of
Ph.D. Thesis Committee
                                                with other backgrounds will be considered.     Mathematics for Educators Program;
The student’s Dissertation Advisor chairs
                                                In any case, an applicant will need a strong   Ph.D., Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
the Ph.D. Thesis Committee. Under the
                                                background in mathematics, which should
direction of the advisor, the student selects                                                  A. C. Heinricher, Associate Professor;
                                                include courses in undergraduate analysis
the rest of the Ph.D. Thesis Committee.                                                        Ph.D., Carnegie Mellon University
                                                and probability. Students with serious defi-
The committee must have at least five                                                          M. Humi, Professor; Ph.D., Weizmann
                                                ciencies may be required to correct them
members; it should be made up of mem-                                                          Institute of Science
                                                on a noncredit basis.
bers of the mathematical sciences faculty
and at least one faculty member from            Candidates for the master of mathematics       J. H. Kimn, Visiting Assistant Professor;
another department, or one person from          for educators degree must have a bachelor’s    Ph.D., Courant Institute of Mathematical
outside WPI who is a recognized expert in       degree and must possess a background           Sciences
the area of the student’s dissertation. This    equivalent to at least a minor in mathemat-    C. J. Larsen, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
committee will participate in the Ph.D.         ics, including calculus and either teacher     Carnegie Mellon University
dissertation proposal and the Ph.D. final       certification in mathematics or science or a
                                                full-time teaching position in one of these    R. Y. Lui, Professor; Ph.D., University of
examination. It is required that the com-
                                                disciplines. Students are encouraged to        Minnesota
mittee be selected prior to the Ph.D. pre-
liminary examination.                           enroll in courses on an ad hoc basis without   K. A. Lurie, Professor; Ph.D., A. F. Ioffe
                                                official program admission. However, these     Physical-Technical Institute, Academy of
                                                students will not be eligible for any finan-   Science, USSR
                                                cial aid and must pay full tuition for each    C. Morales, Assistant Professor; Ph. D.,
                                                course. A typical student would complete       Boston University
                                                the program in two years, taking one course
                                                each semester. However, the program can        W. J. Martin, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                accommodate other completion schedules         University of Waterloo
                                                as well.                                       B. Nandram, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                                                               University of Iowa
                                                                                               D. Pasca, Visiting Assistant Professor;
                                                                                               Ph.D., University of Bucharest
                                                                                               J. D. Petruccelli, Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                                                               Purdue University
                                                                                               M. Sarkis, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
                                                                                               Courant Institute of Mathematical
                                                                                               B. Servatius, Professor; Ph.D., Syracuse


     Mathematical Sciences
     D. Shon, Visiting Assistant Professor;
     Ph.D., State University of New York at
     Stony Brook
     A. W. Swift, Visiting Assistant Professor;
     Ph.D., George Washington University
     D. Tang, Professor; Ph.D., University of
     D. Vermes, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     University of Szeged, Hungary
     H. F. Walker, Professor; Ph.D., Courant
     Institute of Mathematical Sciences
     S. Weekes, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
     University of Michigan
     A. H. Wiedie, Coordinator, Actuarial
     Mathematics Program; Ph.D.,
     University of Massachusetts
     J. Wilbur, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
     Purdue University
     V. Yakovlev, Visiting Associate Professor;
     Ph.D., Institute of Radio Engineering and
     Electronics, Russian Academy of Sciences

     G. C. Branche, Professor
     E. R. Buell, Professor
     V. Connolly, Professor
     W. J. Hardell, Professor
     J. J. Malone, Professor
     B. C. McQuarrie, Professor
     W. B. Miller, Professor


                                                                            Mechanical Engineering
Programs of Study                               Mechanical Engineering                         development, (2) the numerical implemen-
The Mechanical Engineering Department           Laboratories                                   tation, and (3) the experimental verifica-
offers two graduate degree options:             The Mechanical Engineering Department          tion and testing of intelligent control algo-
• Master of Science                             at WPI provides a multidisciplinary            rithms (adaptive, hybrid, switching, fault
• Doctor of Philosophy                          research and education environment com-        monitoring, on-line fault accommodation)
                                                bining elements of mechanical engineer-        for applications in structural, structural-
Areas of Research and                                                                          acoustic, thermofluid and mechatronics
                                                ing, manufacturing engineering and mate-
Areas of Study                                  rials science. The facilities of the depart-   systems.
Active areas of research in the Mechanical                                                     Two vibration isolation tables (TMC
                                                ment are housed in the Higgins Labora-
Engineering Department include: theoreti-                                                      1163-573) and one active isolation table
                                                tories and Washburn Shops.
cal, numerical and experimental work in                                                        (TMC 63-563) are used to isolate test
fluid mechanics, rarefied gas and plasma        Aerospace Laboratory                           structure from ground vibration. Various
dynamics, electric propulsion, multiphase       This laboratory includes a closed circuit,     piezoceramic patches (ACX QP20N) are
flows, turbulent flows, fluid structure         subsonic wind tunnel. This facility, with a    bonded on structures to provide (moment)
interactions, structural analysis, nonlinear    test section approximately 2x2-foot cross      actuation. Four high-volt/low-amp single-
dynamics and control, random vibrations,        section, is capable of speeds up to 60 mph.    channel (ACX-EL1224), a double-channel
biomechanics and biomaterials, materials        Another major element of this laboratory       Krohn-hite (7602M) and one six-channel
processing, mechanics of granular materi-       is a blow-down supersonic wind tunnel. It      rack-mounted (PCB 790A06) power
als, laser holography, MEMS, computer-          uses an evacuated tank for short intervals     amplifiers are used to power piezoceramic
aided engineering systems, and engineering      of time. Additionally, workshop areas are      actuators. For vibration measurements, five
design.                                         provided for model preparation and small-      miniature (0.5g) ceramic shear ICP
The graduate curriculum is divided into         er scale experiment development.               accelerometers (PCB U352C22) are avail-
five distinct areas of study:                                                                  able. A four-channel signal conditioner
• Fluids Engineering                            Computational Gas and Plasma Lab               (PCB 442C04) with gain (x1,x10,x100)
• Dynamics and Controls                         (CGPL)                                         and one dual-mode vibration amplifier
• Structures and Materials                      Research in CGPL entails the development       single-channel (PCB 443B01) are used to
• Design and Manufacturing                      of numerical simulation methods and            condition acceleration measurements.
• Biomechanical Engineering                     modeling of non-equilibrium, multicom-         Real-time data acquisition and control is
These areas are parallel to the research        ponent, multiscale, gaseous and plasma         realized through five dSPACE ACE-1104
interests of the mechanical engineering         flows. A major research component              (8 analog inputs, 8 analog outputs, 2
faculty. In this way, graduate courses intro-   involves the development continuum/            encoder inputs), one dSPACE ACE-1103
duce students to fundamentals of mechani-       atomistic simulation methods for micro-        (8 analog outputs, 20 analog inputs, 6
cal engineering while simultaneously            and nanoscale transport processes.             encoder inputs), and one ACE 1102 (4
providing the background necessary to           Applications include spacecraft propulsion     analog outputs, 4 analog inputs, 2 encoder
become involved with the ongoing research       and micropropulsion, spacecraft power,         inputs) stations. For signal generation and
of the mechanical engineering faculty.          space environment/spacecraft interactions,     processing, five Instek function generators
                                                microfluidics and nanofluidics. The com-       (3 MHz) and five Tektronix TDS2012
Students also receive credit for special top-   putational research in CGPL is always          two-channel oscilloscopes are available,
ics under ME 593 and ME 693, and inde-          conducted in close interaction with experi-    along with a Krohn-hite 3364 Low-
pendent study under ISP. Faculty members        ments. CGPL has been a participant in          pass/High-pass Butterworth/Bessel Filter.
often experiment with new courses under         various national and international space       The laboratory supports both undergradu-
these designations, although no course          programs. CGPL provides unique oppor-          ate and graduate research efforts.
may be offered more than twice in this          tunities to graduate and undergraduate
manner. Except for certain 4000-level           students with interests in aerospace appli-    Fluid Dynamics Laboratory
courses permitted in the B.S./ Master’s         cations or with interrests in computational    This laboratory provides experimental
program, no undergraduate courses may           methods. Infrastructure at CGPL includes       facilities and instrumentation for experi-
be counted toward graduate credit.              a Linux cluster for high-performance com-      mental activities in the area of fluid
                                                puting, peripherals, visualization and data    dynamics. A small, open-return subsonic
                                                reduction software.                            wind tunnel, hot wire anemometry system,
                                                                                               computer data acquisition systems and
                                                Controls Laboratory                            high-speed flow visualization systems are
                                                The Controls La0boratory, a 900-square-        available. Separate areas are provided for
                                                foot facility housed in Higgins Labs 248, is   model preparation and small-scale experi-
                                                involved primarily with (1) the theoretical    ments.


     Mechanical Engineering
     Controls Laboratory                              The lab is supported by a self-contained        Rehabilitation Engineering Laboratory
     The Controls Laboratory housed in                network of computers and peripheral facili-     This laboratory is concerned with the
     Higgins Laboratories is involved primarily       ties, as well as supporting instrumentation     development of equipment needed in
     with the theoretical development, the            systems. The lasers, computers and support-     research, in the areas of rehabilitation and
     numerical implementation, and the experi-        ing instrumentation are used in studies of      aiding the handicapped. Typically, the
     mental verification and testing of intelli-      fundamental phenomena governing high-           subjects studied are mobility aids for hand-
     gent control algorithms (adaptive, hybrid,       energy-density interactions in thin film        icapped children, and augmentative com-
     switching, fault monitoring, on-line fault       imaging, with powder metal materials, plas-     munication and mobility systems. The
     accommodation) for applications in struc-        tics, ceramics and composites, microma-         laboratory has a variety of instruments for
     tural, structural-acoustic, thermofluid and      chining, underwater propagation, hologra-       stress measurements in prostheses. This
     mechatronic systems. The laboratory sup-         phy, displacement and strain measurement,       laboratory has close ties with the Univer-
     ports both undergraduate and graduate            vibrations, fracture mechanics, mathemati-      sity of Massachusetts Rehabilitation
     research efforts.                                cal modeling, numerical computations and        Center and hospital, and several joint pro-
                                                      applications to other problems of modern        jects are currently in progress.
     Hydrodynamics Laboratory                         science, engineering and technology.
     This laboratory provides experimental                                                            Other Facilities
     facilities and instrumentation for measure-      Keck Design Center –                            The following laboratories, located in the
     ment of liquid flow phenomena. A closed-         the Design Studios                              Washburn Shops, are described in the
     circuit free surface water tunnel with a         These laboratories provide a prototype          Manufacturing Engineering and Materials
     2x2-foot test section and vertical water         facility consisting of a design studio and a    Science and Engineering program descrip-
     tank are available. These facilities allow for   prototype production facility linked by         tions:
     flow visualization and are supported by          computational equipment, and 20-30              • Metal Processing Laboratory
     data acquisition systems and various flow        high-end workstations with software sup-           — Advanced Casting Research Center
     measurement devices.                             port for video-picture-within-the-monitor              (ACRC)
                                                      teleconferencing to provide two-way com-           — Center for Heat Treating Excellence
     Dynamic Simulation Laboratory                    munication of audio, video and data                    (CHTE)
     (DYSIM Lab)                                      between the design studios and off-campus          — Powder Metallurgy Research Center
     This is a general purpose PC laboratory          sites. In the computationally equipped stu-            (PMRC)
     that exposes large numbers of students to        dio, students have clustered seating around     • Ceramic/Powder Processing Laboratory
     modern dynamic and geometric simula-             multiple workstations, and can discuss          • Mechanical Testing Laboratory
     tion techniques. Students use the DYSIM          and/or analyze with remote sponsors or
                                                                                                      • Optical and Electron Metallography
     Lab to perform simulated experiments and         others in real time as changes are made.
     observe demonstrations of course topics.         Part files can be ported to rapid prototyp-
     The lab is equipped with 40 PCs that are         ing machines or lithography units within        • Polymer Engineering Laboratory
     connected through the computation net-           the Design Center and beyond.                   • HAAS Center for Computer-Controlled
     work and direct links to other design                                                               Machining
     process components.                              Biomechanical Engineering Laboratory            • Robotics Laboratory
                                                      This laboratory provides experimental and       • Surface Metrology Laboratory
     Vibrations and Dynamics Laboratory               computational facilities for research in the    • Computer-Aided Manufacturing
     This facility houses equipment to support        area of biomechanics and biofluids. Facili-        Laboratory
     educational, project and research activities     ties include a hot wire anemometry sys-
     in the area of vibrations and controls. This     tem, PC-based computational facilities and
     is also a teaching laboratory for the devel-     ancillary equipment. The laboratory is also
     opment of analytical and experimental            equipped with anatomical dissection facili-
     skills in modern engineering measurement         ties; kinematic data acquisition systems;
     methods, based on electronic instrumenta-        instrumentation for measuring accelera-
     tion and computer-based data acquisition         tion, velocity, force and pressure; and com-
     systems.                                         puter data acquisition systems. This facility
                                                      serves for teaching and research in biome-
     Center for Holographic Studies and               chanics, biofluids, and biodynamics.
     Laser Technology (CHSLT)
     CHSLT is used for both research and edu-
     cational activities. The laboratory is
     equipped with several systems utilizing
     He-Ne, Ar-ion, and Nd:TAG Lasers.


                                                                             Mechanical Engineering
M.S. Program                                   Thesis Committee that consists of the              Changing M.S. Options
When applying to the master of science         Thesis Advisor and at least two other              Students in the non-thesis M.S. option may
program, students must specify their           mechanical engineering faculty members             switch into the thesis option at any time by
intention to pursue either the thesis or       from WPI with knowledge of the thesis              notifying the mechanical engineering
non-thesis M.S. option. Both the thesis        topic.                                             Graduate Committee of the change, provid-
and non-thesis options require the comple-     The schedule of academic advising is as            ed that they have identified a Thesis
tion of 30 graduate credit hours. Students     follows:                                           Advisor, formed a Thesis Committee, and
in the thesis option must complete             • Temporary Advisor—meets with student             have worked out a plan of study with their
12 credits of thesis research (ME 599),           prior to first registration to plan the first   Thesis Advisor. Subject to the Thesis
whereas students in the non-thesis option         9 credits of study.                             Advisor’s approval, directed research credits
may complete up to 9 credits of directed       • Academic Advisor—selected by student             (ME 598) earned in the non-thesis option
research (ME 598). The result of the              prior to registering for more than              may be transferred to thesis research credits
research credits (ME 599) in the thesis           9 credits. For thesis option students, the      (ME 599) in the thesis option.
option must be a completed master’s               Academic Advisor is the Thesis Advisor.         Any student in the thesis option M.S. pro-
thesis. The number of directed research        • Program of Study—arranged with                   gram may request a switch into the non-
credits (ME 598) completed in the non-            Academic Advisor prior to registering           thesis option by submitting the request in
thesis option can range from 0 to 9.              for more than 9 credits.                        writing to the mechanical engineering
In the thesis option, the distribution of      • Thesis Committee (thesis option only)            Graduate Committee. Before acting on
credits is as follows:                            —formed prior to registering for more           such a request, the Graduate Committee
• 9 graduate credits in mechanical engi-          than 18 credits. Consists of the Thesis         will require and seriously consider written
  neering                                         Advisor and at least two other mechani-         input from the student’s Thesis Advisor.
                                                  cal engineering faculty members from            Departmental financial aid given to the
• 12 credits of thesis research (ME 599)
                                                  WPI.                                            thesis-option students who are permitted to
• 3 graduate credits in mathematics                                                               switch to the non-thesis option will auto-
• 6 graduate credits of electives within or    This schedule ensures that students are
                                               well advised throughout, and that students         matically be withdrawn. Subject to the
  outside of mechanical engineering                                                               approval of the Mechanical Engineering
                                               in the thesis option are actively engaged in
In the non-thesis option, the distribution     their research at the early stages of their        Graduate Committee, a maximum of
of credits is as follows:                      programs.                                          9 credits of thesis research (ME 599)
• 18 graduate credits in mechanical                                                               earned by a student in the thesis option
  engineering (includes a maximum of           Thesis Defense                                     may be transferred to directed research
  9 credits of directed research—ME 598)       Each student in the thesis option must             credit (ME 598) in the non-thesis option.
• 3 graduate credits in mathematics            defend his/her research during an oral
• 9 graduate credits of electives within or    defense, which is administered by an
  outside of mechanical engineering            Examining Committee that consists of the
                                               Thesis Committee and a representative of
Academic Advising                              the mechanical engineering Graduate
Upon admission to the M.S. program,            Committee who is not on the Thesis
each student is assigned or may select a       Committee. The defense is open to public
temporary advisor to arrange an academic       participation and consists of a 30-minute
plan covering the first 9 credits of study.    presentation by the student followed by a
This plan must be made before the first        30-minute open discussion. At least one
registration. Prior to registering for addi-   week prior to the defense each member of
tional credits, the student must specify an    the Examining Committee must receive a
Academic Advisor with whom the remain-         copy of the thesis. One additional copy
ing course of study is arranged. The plan      must be made available for members of the
must be approved by the mechanical engi-       WPI community wishing to read the thesis
neering Graduate Committee.                    prior to the defense, and public notification
For students in the thesis option, the per-    of the defense must be given by the mechan-
manent advisor is the Thesis Advisor. Prior    ical engineering graduate secretary. The
to completing more than 18 credits, every      Examining Committee will determine the
student in the thesis option must form a       acceptability of the student’s thesis and oral
                                               performance. The Thesis Advisor will deter-
                                               mine the student’s grade.


     Mechanical Engineering
     Ph.D. Program                                    Academic Advising                                 the program with a bachelor’s degree, the
     The course of study leading to the Ph.D.         Upon admission to the doctoral program,           exam must be taken after three semesters if
     degree in mechanical engineering requires        each student is assigned or may select a          they began their studies in the fall, and
     the completion of 90 credits beyond the          temporary advisor to arrange an academic          after two semesters if they began in the
     bachelor’s degree, or 60 credits beyond the      plan covering the first 9 credits of study.       spring. For students who enter the pro-
     master’s degree. For students proceeding         This plan should be arranged before the           gram with a master’s degree, the exam
     directly from B.S. degree to Ph.D. degree,       first day of registration.                        must be taken after one semester if they
     the 90 credits should be distributed as                                                            began in the fall, and after two semesters if
                                                      Prior to registering for any additional cred-
     follows:                                                                                           they began in the spring. Students in the
                                                      its, the student must identify a permanent
        Course work:                                                                                    M.S. program who plan to apply for fall
                                                      Dissertation Advisor who assumes the role
          Courses in M.E.                                                                               admission to the Ph.D. program are
                                                      of Academic Advisor and with whom a
             (incl. Special Courses                                                                     strongly advised to take the candidacy
                                                      suitable dissertation topic and the remain-
             and ISP)                  15 credits                                                       exam in January before that fall. The
                                                      ing plan of study are arranged. Prior to
          Courses in or                                                                                 details of the examination procedure can
                                                      completing 18 credits, the student must
             outside of M.E.           15 credits                                                       be obtained from the mechanical engineer-
                                                      form a Dissertation Committee that con-
                                                                                                        ing Graduate Committee.
       Dissertation Research                          sists of the Dissertation Advisor, at least
         (ME 699)                      30 credits     two other mechanical engineering faculty          Dissertation Proposal
       Other:                                         members and at least one member from              Each student must prepare a brief written
        Additional course work                        outside the department. These committee           proposal and make an oral presentation
        Additional Dissertation
        Research (ME 699)
        Supplemental Research
          (ME 598, ME 698)
                                  }    30 credits

                                       90 credits
                                                      members should be selected because of
                                                      their abilities to assist in the student’s dis-
                                                      sertation research.
                                                      The schedule of advising is as follows:
                                                      • Temporary Advisor—meets with student
                                                                                                        that demonstrates a sound understanding
                                                                                                        of the dissertation topic, the relevant liter-
                                                                                                        ature, the techniques to be employed, the
                                                                                                        issues to be addressed, and the work done
                                                                                                        on the topic by the student to-date. The
     For students proceeding from master’s to            prior to first registration to plan first 9    proposal must be made within a year of
     Ph.D. degree, the 60 credits should be dis-         credits of study.                              admission to candidacy. Both the written
     tributed as follows:                             • Dissertation Advisor—selected by stu-           and oral proposals are presented to the
       Course work:                                      dent prior to registering for more than 9      Dissertation Committee and a representa-
        (incl. Special Topics                            credits.                                       tive from the mechanical engineering
        and ISP)                       12 credits     • Program of Study—arranged with                  Graduate Committee. The prepared por-
                                                         Dissertation Advisor prior to registering      tion of the oral presentation should not
       Dissertation Research
                                                         for more than 9 credits.                       exceed 30 minutes, and 90 minutes should
         (ME 699)                      30 credits
                                                                                                        be allowed for discussion. If the Disserta-
       Other:                                         • Dissertation Committee—formed by
                                                                                                        tion Committee and the Graduate Com-
        Additional course work                           student prior to registering for more

                                                                                                        mittee representative have concerns about
        Additional Dissertation                          than 18 credits. Consists of Dissertation
                                                                                                        either the substance of the proposal or the
          Research (ME 699)            18 credits        Advisor, at least two M.E. faculty and at
                                                                                                        student’s understanding of the topic, then
        Supp mental Research                             least one outside member.
                                                                                                        the student will have one month to pre-
          (ME 598, ME 698)                            This schedule ensures that students are           pare a second presentation that focuses on
       TOTAL                           60 credits     well advised and actively engaged in their        the areas of concern. This presentation will
     In either case, the result of the dissertation   research at the early stages of their pro-        last 15 minutes with an additional 45 min-
     research must be a completed doctoral dis-       grams.                                            utes allowed for discussion. Students can
     sertation. Prior to admission to candidacy,                                                        continue their research only if the proposal
                                                      Admission to Candidacy
     a student may receive up to 18 credits of                                                          is approved.
                                                      Admission to candidacy will be granted
     predissertation research under ME 698.
                                                      when the student has satisfactorily passed a      Dissertation Defense
     Only after admission to candidacy may a
                                                      written exam intended to measure funda-           Each doctoral candidate is required to
     student receive credit toward dissertation
                                                      mental ability in three of the following five     defend the originality, independence and
     research under ME 699.
                                                      curriculum areas: fluids engineering,             quality of research during an oral disserta-
                                                      dynamics and controls, structures and             tion defense that is administered by an
                                                      materials, design and manufacturing, and          Examining Committee that consists of the
                                                      biomechanical engineering. The three areas        Dissertation Committee and a representa-
                                                      are selected by the student. The exam is          tive of the mechanical engineering
                                                      given in January. For students who enter          Graduate Committee who is not on the


                                                                              Mechanical Engineering
Dissertation Committee. The defense is           Acceptance into the B.S./Master’s program         Admission Requirements
open to public participation and consists        means that the candidate is qualified for         For the M.S. program, applicants should
of a one-hour presentation followed by a         graduate school, and signifies approval of        have a B.S. in mechanical engineering or
one-hour open discussion. At least one           the four courses listed for credit toward         in a related field (i.e., other engineering
week prior to the defense, each member of        both the undergraduate and graduate               disciplines, physics, mathematics, etc.).
the Examining Committee must receive a           degrees. However, admission is contingent
copy of the dissertation. At the same time,      upon the completion of two graduate               The standards are the same for admission
an additional copy must be made available        courses (from the submitted list) with            into the thesis and non-thesis options of
for members of the WPI community wish-           grades of B or better in each. If grades of       the M.S. program. At the time of applica-
ing to read the dissertation prior to the        C or lower are obtained in any other listed       tion to the master’s program, the student
defense, and public notification of the          courses, then they are not counted toward         must specify his/her option (thesis or non-
defense must be given by the mechanical          the graduate degree, but the applicant is         thesis) of choice
engineering graduate secretary. The              still admitted to the program.                    For the Ph.D., a bachelor’s or master’s
Examining Committee will determine the           Students in the B.S./Master’s program who         degree in mechanical engineering or in a
acceptability of the student’s dissertation      choose the thesis M.S. option are strongly        related field (i.e., other engineering disci-
and oral performance. The Dissertation           encouraged to pick a thesis area of research      plines, physics, mathematics, etc.) is
Advisor will determine the student’s grade.      that is closely related to the subject of their   required.
                                                 major qualifying project. Those students in       The Mechanical Engineering Department
The Combined
                                                 the B.S./Master’s program who complete            reserves its financial aid for graduate stu-
Bachelor’s/Master’s Program                      their B.S. degrees in May and choose the          dents in the Ph.D. program or in the thesis
The Mechanical Engineering Department            thesis option are encouraged to begin their       option of the M.S. program.
offers a B.S./Master’s program for current-      thesis research during the summer imme-
ly enrolled WPI undergraduates. Students         diately following graduation.
in the B.S./Master’s program may choose
either the thesis or non-thesis M.S. option.     A detailed written description of the
The department’s rules for these programs        B.S./Master’s program in mechanical engi-
vary somewhat from the Institute’s rules.        neering can be obtained from the mechan-
                                                 ical engineering graduate secretary.
For students in the B.S./Master’s program,
a minimum of two courses and a maxi-
mum of four courses may be counted
toward both the undergraduate and gradu-
ate degrees. Regardless of how many are
counted toward both degrees, at least two
must be graduate courses (including grad-
uate-level independent study and special
topics courses), and none may be lower
than the 4000-level. No extra work is
required in the 4000-level courses. A grade
of B or better is required for any course to
be counted toward both degrees.
The application for the B.S./Master’s pro-
gram must include a list of four courses
that the applicant proposes to count
toward both his/her undergraduate and
graduate degrees. In most cases, the list
consists of courses that the applicant will
take in the senior year.
Applications will not be considered if they
are submitted prior to the second half of
the applicant’s junior year. Ideally, applica-
tions (including recommendations) should
be completed by the early part of the last
term (usually D-term) of the junior year.


     Mechanical Engineering
     Faculty                                         Michael A. Demetriou, Associate                Nikolaos A. Gatsonis, Associate Professor
     Gretar Tryggvason, Professor,                   Professor; Ph.D., University of Southern       and Director, Aerospace Engineering
     Department Head; Ph.D., Brown                   California, 1993; Control of intelligent       Program; Ph.D, Massachusetts Institute of
     University, 1985; Numerical modeling of         systems, control of fluid structure interac-   Technology, 1991; Computational gas and
     multiphase flows;                tions, fault detection and accommodation       plasma dynamics, space electric propul-
                                                     of dynamical systems, acoustic and vibra-      sion, spacecraft environment interactions,
     Diran Apelian, Howmet Professor,                tion control;                 crystal growth under microgravity; gatso-
     Director of the Metals Processing Institute;                                         
     Sc.D., Massachusetts Institute of               Chrysanthe Demetry, Associate Professor;
     Technology, 1971; Solidification process-       Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of              Raymond R. Hagglund, Professor; Ph.D.,
     ing, spray casting, molten metal process-       Technology, 1993; Nanocrystalline materi-      University of Illinois, 1962; Product relia-
     ing, aluminum foundry processing, plasma        als and nanocomposites, materials process-     bility, safety analysis, mechanics, design;
     processing and knowledge engineering in         ing, grain boundaries and interfaces in
     materials processing;          materials;                    Allen H. Hoffman, Professor; Ph.D.,
     Holly K. Ault, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,      Mikhail F. Dimentberg, Professor; Ph.D.,       University of Colorado, 1970;
     Worcester Polytechnic Institute, 1988;          Moscow Institute of Power Engineering,         Biomechanics, biomaterials, biomedical
     Geometric modeling, mechanical design,          1963; Applied mechanics, random vibra-         engineering, rehabilitation engineering,
     CAD, kinematics, biomechanics and reha-         tions, nonlinear dynamics, rotordynamics,      biofluids and continuum mechanics;
     bilitation engineering;          mechanical signature analysis, stochastic
                                                     mechanics;                      Zhikun Hou, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
     Isa Bar-On, Professor; Ph.D., Hebrew
     University of Jerusalem, 1984; Mechanical       William W. Durgin, K.G. Merriam                California Institute of Technology, 1990;
     behavior of materials, fracture and fatigue     Professor, Associate Provost; Ph.D., Brown     Vibration and control, structural dynam-
     of metals, ceramics and composites, relia-      University, 1970; Aerodynamics, hydrody-       ics, structural health monitoring, smart
     bility and life prediction, electronic pack-    namics, flow-induced vibrations, micro-        materials and adaptive structures, stochas-
     aging;                           gravity fluid dynamics, drag reduction,        tic mechanics, solid mechanics, finite ele-
                                                     noise generation, heat transfer, flow mea-     ments, earthquake engineering;
     Ronald R. Biederman, George F. Fuller           surement;           
     Professor; Ph.D. University of
     Connecticut, 1968; Materials science and        Asghar Esmaeeli, Research Assistant            Hamid Johari, Professor and Associate
     engineering, microstructural analysis,          Professor; Ph. D., University of Michigan,     Department Head; Ph.D., University of
     SEM, TEM, diffraction analysis;                 1995; Multiphase flows, boiling and            Washington, 1989; Fluid mechanics, tur-                                     bubbly flows, numerical modeling,              bulent mixing, unsteady and buoyant
                                                                            flows, aerodynamics;
     John J. Blandino, Assistant Professor;
     Ph.D. California Institute of Technology,       Mustapha S. Fofana, Associate Professor;       Robert N. Katz, Research Professor;
     2001; Fluid mechanics and heat transfer in      Ph.D., University of Waterloo, Canada,         Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of
     microdevices, electric propulsion and           1993; Nonlinear chatter dynamics, delay        Technology, 1969; Materials science,
     plasm dynamics, plasma-assisted materials       systems, CAD/CAM, CIM/Networked                ceramics, metal matrix composites, tech-
     processing;                    manufacturing systems;        nology assessment, design with brittle
                                                     Cosme Furlong, Assistant Professor;            materials, materials processing;
     Christopher A. Brown, Professor and                                                  
     Director, Manufacturing Engineering             Ph.D., WPI, 1990; MEMS, nanotechnolo-
     Program; Ph.D., University of Vermont,          gy, laser applications, holography, fiber      Makhlouf M. Makhlouf, Professor;
     1983; Surface metrology, machining, frac-       optics, computer modeling of dynamic           Ph.D., Worcester Polytechnic Institute,
     tal analysis, mechanics of skiing, tribology,   systems,                      1990; Solidification of metals, heat, mass
     axiomatic design, materials science, com-                                                      and momentum transfer in engineering
     putational modeling in surface metrology;                                                      materials problems, processing of ceramics                                                                                  materials;
     Eben C. Cobb, Visiting Assistant
     Professor; Ph.D., University of
     Connecticut, 1985; Design of high-speed
     precision equipment, dynamics of high-
     speed rotating equipment, smart struc-
     tures, vibration control;


                                                                          Mechanical Engineering
Yong-Mo Moon, Assistant Professor;            Satya S. Shivkumar, Associate Professor;
Ph.D., University of Michigan, 2000;          Ph.D., Stevens Institute of Technology
Mechanisms and reconfigurable machinery       1987; Biomedical materials, materials pro-
design, design methodology, control, and      cessing, structure property relationships,
mechanisms design,               plastics;
Robert L. Norton, Professor; M.S., Tufts      Richard D. Sisson, Jr., Professor and
University, 1970; Mechanical design and       Director, Materials Science and
analysis, dynamic signal analysis, comput-    Engineering Program; Ph.D., Purdue
er-aided engineering, computer-aided          University, 1975; Materials process model-
design, finite element method, vibration      ing and control, manufacturing engineer-
analysis, engineering design, biomedical      ing, corrosion, environmental effects on
engineering;                 metals and ceramics;
David J. Olinger, Associate Professor;        John M. Sullivan, Jr., Professor; D.E.,
Ph.D., Yale University, 1990; Fluid           Dartmouth College, 1986; Design of com-
mechanics, aero- and hydrodynamics, fluid     puter-aided engineering systems, develop-
structure interaction, fluid flow control,    ment of graphics tools and mesh genera-
chaos theory;                 tion, numerical analysis of partial differen-
Ryszard J. Pryputniewicz, Professor;          tial equations;
Ph.D., University of Connecticut, 1976;
MEMS, laser applications, holography,
fiber optics, computer modeling of dynam-
ic systems, bioengineering;
Joseph J. Rencis, Professor; Ph.D., Case
Western Reserve University, 1985;
Boundry- and finite-element methods,
computational mechanics;
Mark W. Richman, Associate Professor,
Graduate Committee Chair; Ph.D.,
Cornell University, 1984; Mechanics of
granular flows, powder compaction, pow-
der metallurgy;
Yiming (Kevin) Rong, Professor; Ph.D.,
University of Kentucky, 1989;
Manufacturing processes, CAD/CAM,
tooling and fixturing, computer-aided fix-
ture design and verification;
Brian J. Savilonis, Professor; Ph.D., State
University of New York at Buffalo, 1976;
Fluid mechanics, biofluid mechanics, fire
modeling, heat transfer;


     Programs of Study                                 Solid-state physics                            Faculty Research Interests
     WPI physics graduate programs prepare             Optical properties of semiconductor super-     P. K. Aravind—Theoretical nonlinear and
     students for careers in research which            lattices and quantum wells, Brillouin scat-    quantum optics
     require a high degree of initiative and           tering near phase transitions, high field      N. A. Burnham—Atomic force
     responsibility. Prospective employers are         surface conduction in semiconductors,          microscopy, nanomechanics
     industrial laboratories, government or            low-temperature properties of glassy and
                                                       amorphous materials, magnetic and non-         S. N. Jasperson—Optical properties of
     nonprofit research centers, or colleges and
                                                       magnetic impurities randomly distributed       solids, optical instruments
                                                       in solids, magnetic properties of rare-earth   T. H. Keil—Solid state physics, mathe-
     WPI’s physics courses are generally sched-
                                                       mixtures, ordering of random dipolar and       matical physics, fluid mechanics
     uled during the day but with sufficient
                                                       strain defects, semiconductor devices, and
     flexibility to accommodate part-time                                                             D. F. Nelson—Optical and transport
                                                       modulation spectroscopy applied to thin
     students. Special topics courses in areas of                                                     properties of semiconductors, solid state
                                                       films and to surface phenomena.
     faculty research interest are often available.                                                   physics experiment and theory
                                                       Statistical mechanics                          G. S. Iannacchione—Calorimetry, liquid
     Research Interests
                                                       Magnetic systems, cooperative phenomena        crystals, phase transitions
     Chemical and biochemical physics
                                                       and phase transitions, properties of chains    A. A. Zozulya—Nonlinear optics, photo-
     Diffusion and transport in liquids, light-
                                                       interacting via strain-strain and electric     refractive materials, atom pipes
     scattering spectroscopy and multidetector
                                                       dipole interactions, relaxation phenomena
     correlation spectroscopy.                                                                        S. W. Pierson—Statistical mechanics,
                                                       in disordered systems, and transport and
                                                       equilibrium properties of liquids, solutions   High-T superconductors, vortices
     Materials research
     Magnetic materials and ferroelectrics,            and polymer melts.                             L. C. Lew Yan Voon—Solid state physics,
     amorphous and glassy substances, low-                                                            super lattices in semi conductors
     temperature properties, diluted magnetic                                                         G. D. J. Phillies—Light scattering spec-
     semiconductors, semiconductor superlat-                                                          troscopy, biochemical physics, polymers
     tices, and polymer and biomacromolecule                                                          R. S. Quimby—Optical properties of
     solutions.                                                                                       solids, laser spectroscopy, fiber optics
     Classical and quantum optics                                                                     L. R. Ram-Mohan—Field theory, many-
     Fourier optics, photon statistics, nonlinear                                                     body problems, solid state physics
     optics, fiber optics, coherent states and                                                        C. Koleci—Physics education
     squeezed states, photoacoustic spec-
     troscopy, optical properties of rough sur-
     faces and of thin metal films, metrology
     and design of optical instruments, laser
     spectroscopy of impurity ions in glasses,
     development of infrared fiber lasers, quasi-
     elastic light scattering, inelastic light scat-
     tering and excitation spectroscopy of
     superlattices, and color center lasers.


Degree Requirements                            Admission Requirements                      Faculty
For the M.S.                                   B.S. in physics preferred, however appli-   T. H. Keil, Professor and Department
The M.S. degree in physics requires 30         cants with comparable backgrounds will      Head; Ph.D., University of Rochester
semester hours of credit: 6 or more in the-    also be considered.
                                                                                           P. K. Aravind, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
sis research and the remainder in approved                                                 Northwestern University
courses and independent studies, to
include PH 511, PH 514, PH 515,                                                            N. A. Burnham, Associate Professor;
PH 522 and PH 533 (15 semester hours).                                                     Ph.D., University of Colorado
Although a thesis defense is not required,                                                 G. S. Iannacchione, Assistant Professor;
students nearing completion of the M.S.                                                    Ph.D., Kent State University
program are required to present a seminar                                                  S. N. Jasperson, Professor; Ph.D.,
based on their thesis research.                                                            Princeton University
For the Ph.D.                                                                              C. Koleci, Assistant Professor; Ph.D.,
The doctor of philosophy degree requires                                                   Yale University
90 credit hours, including 42 in approved                                                  L. C. Lew Yan Voon, Associate Professor;
courses or directed study (which must                                                      Ph.D., WPI
include PH 511, PH 514-515, PH 522
                                                                                           D. F. Nelson, Research Professor; Ph.D.,
and PH 533, or their equivalents), 30 of
                                                                                           University of Michigan
dissertation research, and completion and
defense of a Ph.D. thesis. Courses taken to                                                G. D. J. Phillies, Professor; D.Sc.,
satisfy M.S. degree requirements may be                                                    Massachusetts Institute of Technology
counted against the required 42 credits of                                                 S. W. Pierson, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
courses, but completion of a M.S. degree                                                   University of Minnesota
is not required.
                                                                                           R. S. Quimby, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
One year of residency and passage of a                                                     University of Wisconsin, Madison
qualifying examination are required.
                                                                                           L. R. Ram-Mohan, Professor; Ph.D.,
General Information                                                                        Purdue University
The qualifying examination for the doctor                                                  A. Zozulya, Associate Professor; Ph.D.,
of philosophy degree is usually adminis-                                                   Lebedev Physics Institute
tered each year at the beginning of the sec-
ond semester. Ph.D. aspirants who enter
after the bachelor’s degree may take the
examination during their first year of grad-
uate school, and are expected to take the
examination by the end of their second
year. There is no penalty for failing or not
taking the examination during the first
year. Students who fail the examination
during their second year must pass the
examination when it is next offered. The
qualifying examination will include, but is
not limited to, material taken from PH
511, PH 514-515, PH 522 and PH 533.
Each student’s academic work is reviewed
on an annual basis by the physics depart-
ment Graduate Committee. Continuation
of student status is based on satisfactory
progress toward a degree, both in terms of
course work and of research. Renewals of
research and teaching assistantships are
dependent on satisfactory performance of
required duties.


                                          Course Descriptions
                                          The following is a listing of all courses available through WPI’s
                                          graduate science, engineering and management programs. The course
                                          schedule for the current academic year is outlined in a separate
                                          brochure and available at our Web site: This schedule,
                                          available upon request from the Graduate Studies & Enrollment
                                          Office or the Registrar’s Office, is subject to change, and registrants
                                          should consult the final schedule before completing any registration
                                          forms. If there is sufficient interest in a course not scheduled for a
                                          particular semester, WPI will consider offering the course. All course
                                          offerings are subject to a minimum enrollment.
                                          Most evening courses meet one evening per week; where noted, a
                                          twilight course may meet twice each week for a semester.
                                          Thesis, project or directed research is available in degree programs.
                                          Special topics courses or independent study are not always listed since
                                          they are on an as-arranged basis which must be made prior to
                                          The number of courses offered each year may be limited in some
                                          disciplines; the schedule of courses over a period of time generally
                                          allows a student taking four courses per semester to complete degree
                                          requirements for the master’s degree in about two years and students
                                          taking two courses per semester to complete requirements in three to
                                          four years.

                                          All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted.

                   Biology and Biotechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
                   Biomedical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
                   Chemical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
                   Chemistry and Biochemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
                   Civil and Environmental Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
                   Computer Science . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
                   Electrical and Computer Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
                   Fire Protection Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
                   Interdisciplinary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
                   Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
                   Manufacturing Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
                   Materials Science and Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
                   Mathematical Sciences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
                   Mathematics for Educators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
                   Mechanical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
                   Physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

                                                                                                COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Biology and                                              BB 544. Bioinformatics
                                                         This course will focus on the field of bioinformat-
                                                                                                                 BB 577. Advanced Ecological and
                                                                                                                 Evolutionary Bioscience
Biotechnology                                            ics. After providing an overview of biological data     This course will explore the organization of indi-
                                                         such as DNA and protein sequences and genetic           viduals into communities, and the evolution of
BB 501. Seminar                                          markers, and providing a summary of population          individual traits and behaviors. Problems discussed
1 credit per semester                                    genetics concepts, the course will cover various        will range from those of population harvesting
                                                         methods of computational genetic analysis.              and the effect humans have on the environment to
BB 502. Techniques in Electron                           Students will learn about DNA and protein               the evolution of disadvantageous traits.
Microscopy                                               sequence analysis, gene mapping, evolutionary           (Prerequisite: A familiarity with fundamentals of
This course presents the theory of operation,            analysis, molecular biology databases, analysis of      population interactions, evolution, and animal
applications and use of scanning and transmission        expression data and microarray analysis.                behavior.)
electron microscopy in biology. Recent original
articles from the biological literature illustrate the   BB 560. Methods of Protein                              BB 578. Advanced Applied Biology
applications of these techniques to research.            Purification and Downstream                             This course examines the use of biotechnological
Students prepare specimens for both kinds of elec-       Processing                                              advances toward solving real-world problems.
tron microscopes and employ the standard prepar-         This course provides a detailed hands-on survey of      Students will discuss problem-solving strategies
ative techniques including fixation, dehydration,        state-of-the-art methods employed by the biotech-       from the current literature in the areas of medi-
staining, critical point drying, vacuum evapora-         nology industry for the purification of products,       cine, agriculture, environmental protection/
tion, embedding and sectioning. Associated pho-          proteins in particular, from fermentation process-      restoration anad industrial biotechnology.
tographic methods are also introduced.                   es. Focus is on methods which offer the best            (Prerequisite: A familiarity with biochemistry,
                                                         potential for scale-up. Included are the theory of      microbiology, and plant and animal physiology.)
BB 505. Fermentation Biology                             the design as well as the operation of these meth-
Material in this course focuses on biological (espe-                                                             BB 598. Directed Research
                                                         ods both at the laboratory scale as well as scaled
cially microbiological) systems by which materials
and energy can be interconverted (e.g., waste
                                                         up. It is intended for biology, biotechnology,          BB 599. Master’s Thesis
                                                         chemical engineering and biochemistry students.
products into useful chemicals or fuels). The                                                                    BB 699. Ph.D. Dissertation
                                                         (Prerequisite: A knowledge of basic biochemistry is
processes are dealt with at the physiological and
the system level, with emphasis on the means by
which useful conversions can be harnessed in a           BB 565. Virology                                        Biomedical Engineering
biologically intelligent way. The laboratory focuses     This advanced level course uses a seminar format
on measurements of microbial physiology and on           based on research articles to discuss current topics
                                                                                                                 BE 523. Biomedical Instrumentation
bench-scale process design.                                                                                      Origins and characteristics of bioelectric signals,
                                                         related to the molecular/cell biology of viral struc-
                                                                                                                 recording electrodes, amplifiers, chemical pressure
                                                         ture, function, and evolution. Particular emphasis
BB 509. Scale Up of Bioprocessing                        is placed on pathological mechanisms of various
                                                                                                                 and flow transducers, noninvasive monitoring
Strategies for optimization of bioprocesses for                                                                  techniques and electrical safety. (Prerequisites:
                                                         human disorders, especially emerging disease, and
scale-up applications will be explored. In addition                                                              Circuits and electronics, control engineering or
                                                         the use of viruses in research.
to the theory of scaling up unit operations in bio-                                                              equivalent.)
processing, students will scale up a bench-scale         BB 570. Special Topics
bioprocess (5 liters), including fermentation and        Specialty subject courses are offered based on the
                                                                                                                 BE 525. Microprocessor-Based
downstream processing to 55 liters. Specific topics      expertise of the department faculty. Content and        Biomedical Instrumentation
include the effects of scaling up on: mass transfer      format varies to suit the interest and needs of the     This course provides hands-on laboratory experi-
and bioreactor design, harvesting techniques             faculty and students. This course may be repeated       ence with common biomedical transducers and
including tangential flow filtration and centrifuga-     for different topics covered.                           instrumentation used in physiological and clinical
tion, and chromatography (open column and                                                                        evaluation. Lectures and laboratory experiments
HPLC). (Prerequisites: BB 4050/505 and BB                BB 575. Advanced Genetics and                           cover electronic circuit design and construction,
4060/560 as a working knowledge of the bench-            Cellular Biology                                        analog/digital signal acquisition and processing,
scale processes will be assumed. Otherwise,              Topics in this course focus on the basic building       and microprocessor-based biomedical instrumen-
instructor permission is required.)                      blocks of life: molecules, genes and cells. The         tation. The basic principles of hardware and soft-
                                                         course will address areas of the organization, struc-   ware designs for interfacing biomedical sensors to
BB 542. Ecological Simulation                            ture, function and analysis of the genome and of        a general purpose IBM-PC are emphasized.
Modeling                                                 cells. (Prerequisite: A familiarity with fundamen-      (Prerequisite: Analog and digital electronics.)
This course will cover computer simulation mod-          tals of recombinant DNA and molecular biologi-
eling of populations, bioenergetics, behavior of         cal techniques as well as cell biology.)
                                                                                                                 BE 541. Biological Systems
individuals and ecosystem dynamics. Modeling                                                                     Review of control theory with applications to biolog-
techniques covered will range from simple linear         BB 576. Advanced Integrative                            ical control systems. Development of mathematical
models of populations and interactions between           Bioscience                                              models of selected biological control systems and the
ecosystem components to individual-based models          This course concentrates on the organization of         application of computer techniques in the simulation
of populations in complex environments. Students         cells into biological systems and into individual       of these systems. (Prerequisite: Control engineering)
successfully completing the course should be capa-       organisms. Discussion will center on the develop-       BE/ME 550. Tissue Engineering
ble of understanding models used in today’s study        ment and function of specific model systems such        This biomaterials course focuses on the selection,
of populations and ecosystems, and of developing         as the nervous and immune systems. (Prerequisite:       processing, testing and performance of materials
original models. Knowledge of a programming              A familiarity with fundamentals of developmental        used in biomedical applications with special
language is assumed.                                     biology, genetics and cell biology.)                    emphasis upon tissue engineering. Topics include
                                                                                                                 material selection and processing, mechanisms and
                                                                                                                 kinetics of material degradation, cell-material


     interactions and interfaces; effect of construct         Topics include cell biology, DNA technology and         ics include review of the basic physical concepts of
     architecture on tissue growth; and transport             the physiology of major organ systems.                  NMR, review of covalent chemical binding and its
     through engineered tissues. Examples of engineer-        NOTE: This course can be used to satisfy a life sci-    relationship to the NMR chemical shift, factors in
     ing tissues for replacing cartilage, bone, tendons,      ence requirement in the biomedical engineering pro-     biological systems that influence the NMR
     ligaments, skin and liver will be presented.             gram. It cannot be used to satisfy a biomedical engi-   chemical shift, data acquisition and processing
     (Prerequisites: A first course in biomaterials equiv-    neering course requirement.                             techniques in vivo NMR spectroscopy, and the
     alent to BE/ME 4814 and a basic understanding                                                                    application of NMR spectroscopy to clinical
     of cell biology and physiology. Admission of             BE 562. Laboratory Animal Surgery                       studies. (Prerequisites: BE 582, organic chemistry
     undergraduate students requires the permission of        A study of anesthesia, surgical techniques and          and biochemistry are strongly recommended.)
     the instructor.)                                         postoperative care in small laboratory animals.
     NOTE: Next offering spring 2004                          Anatomy and physiology of species used included         BE 591. Graduate Seminar
                                                              as needed. Class limited to 15 students. Approxi-       Topics in biomedical engineering are presented
     BE 551. Biological Signal Processing                     mately 15 surgical exercises are performed by each      both by authorities in the field and graduate stu-
     Basic principles of digital processing of biological     student. (Prerequisite: Graduate standing.              dents in the program. Provides a forum for the
     signals and its application on PC-compatible com-        Admission of undergraduate students requires the        communication of current research and an oppor-
     puters. The theoretical fundamentals and practical       permission of the department head and the               tunity for graduate students to prepare and deliver
     examples of signal processing. The major emphasis        instructor.)                                            oral presentations. Students may meet the atten-
     is on linking the theoretical knowledge with easy-                                                               dance requirement for this course in several ways,
                                                              NOTE: This course can be used to satisfy a life sci-
     to-comprehend, practical examples.                                                                               including attendance at weekly biomedical engi-
                                                              ence requirement in the biomedical engineering pro-
     (Prerequisite: Basic signal analysis.)                                                                           neering seminars on the WPI campus, attendance
                                                              gram. It cannot be used to satisfy a biomedical engi-
                                                                                                                      at similar seminar courses at other universities or
     BE/ME 552. Tissue Mechanics                              neering course requirement.
                                                                                                                      biotech firms, attendance at appropriate confer-
     This biomechanics course focuses on advanced                                                                     ences, meetings or symposia, or in any other way
                                                              BE 570. Engineering in the Clinical
     techniques for the characterization of the structure                                                             deemed appropriate by the course instructor.
     and function of hard and soft tissues and their
                                                              Examines the responsibilities and functions of the      BE 595. Special Topics in
     relationship to physiological processes. Applica-
                                                              biomedical engineer in the health care complex in
     tions include tissue injury, wound healing, the                                                                  Biomedical Engineering
                                                              the solution of the technical and engineering
     effect of pathological conditions upon tissue                                                                    Topics in biomedical engineering. Presentations
                                                              problems associated with patient care. Topics
     properties, and design of medical devices and                                                                    and discussions of the current literature in one or
                                                              include equipment management, monitoring
     prostheses. (Prerequisite: A first course in bio-                                                                more of the following areas: medical imaging,
                                                              systems, electrical safety, prosthetics, technical
     mechanics equivalent to BE/ME 4504.)                                                                             neurosensory systems, biostatics.
                                                              education for medical personnel, hospital systems
     BE/ME 554. Composites with                               engineering and administrative functions.               BE 595M. Medical Device Regulation
     Biomedical and Materials Applications                    BE 581. Medical Imaging Systems
                                                                                                                      This course provides an overview of regulations
     Introduction to fiber/particulate-reinforced, engi-                                                              that guide the medical devices industry. Primary
                                                              Overview of the physics of medical image analysis.
     neered and biologic materials. This course focuses                                                               focus is on the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act
                                                              Topics covered include X-Ray tubes, fluoroscopic
     on the elastic description and application of                                                                    (FD&C Act) and its associated regulations. The
                                                              screens, image intensifiers; nuclear medicine;
     materials that are made up of a combination of                                                                   course covers the FD&C Act, including defini-
                                                              ultrasound; computer tomography; nuclear mag-
     submaterials, i.e., composites. Emphasis will be                                                                 tions, prohibited acts, penalties and general
                                                              netic resonance imaging. Image quality of each
     placed on the development of constitutive equa-                                                                  authority. The course also covers regulations,
                                                              modality is described mathematically, using linear
     tions that define the mechanical behavior of a                                                                   including establishment registration, premarket
                                                              systems theory (Fourier transforms, convolutions).
     number of applications, including: biomaterial,                                                                  approval (PMA) and current good manufacturing
                                                              (Prerequisite: Signal analysis course EE 3303 or
     tissue and materials science. (Prerequisites: Under-                                                             practices. Requirements of other federal agencies
     standing of stress analysis and basic continuum                                                                  (NRC, FCC, EPA) will also be discussed.
     mechanics)                                               BE 582. Principles of In Vivo Nuclear                   BE 596. Research Seminar
     BE/ME 558. Biofluids and                                 Magnetic Resonance Imaging                              Presentations on current biomedical engin-eering
                                                              This course emphasizes the applications of Fourier      research.
     Biotransport                                             transform nuclear magnetic resonance (FTNMR)
     The emphasis of this course is on modeling fluid                                                                 BE 598. Directed Research
                                                              imaging and spectroscopy in medicine and biolo-
     flow within the cardiovascular and pulmonary sys-
                                                              gy. Course topics include review of the basic
     tems, and the transport processes that take place
                                                              physical concepts of NMR (including the Bloch
                                                                                                                      BE 599. Master’s Thesis
     in these systems. Applications include artificial
                                                              equations), theoretical and experimental aspects of
     heart valves, atherosclerosis, arterial impedance                                                                BE 698. Laboratory Rotation in
                                                              FTNMR, theory of relaxation and relaxation
     matching, clinical diagnosis, respiration, aerosol
                                                              mechanisms in FTNMR instrumentation for
                                                                                                                      Biomedical Engineering
     and particle deposition. Depending upon class                                                                    Offered fall, spring and summer for students
                                                              FTNMR, NMR imaging techniques (point, line,
     interest, additional topics may include reproduc-                                                                doing laboratory rotations on the WPI campus.
                                                              plane and volume methods) and in vivo NMR
     tive fluids, animal propulsion in air and water, and                                                             Available for 3 or 4 credits. (Prerequisite: Ph.D.
                                                              spectroscopy (including volume localization tech-
     viscoelastic testing. (Prerequisite: A first course in                                                           student in biomedical engineering.)
                                                              niques). (Prerequisites: Differential and integral
     biofluids equivalent to BE/ME 4606.)
                                                              calculus, ordinary differential equations; organic      BE 699. Ph.D. Dissertation
     BE 560. Physiology for Engineers                         chemistry recommended.)
     An introduction to fundamental principles in cell
                                                              BE 585. Principles of In Vivo Nuclear
     biology and physiology designed to provide the
     necessary background for advanced work in bio-
                                                              Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy
                                                              This course emphasizes the applications of Fourier
     medical engineering. Quantitative methods of
                                                              transform nuclear magnetic resonance (FTNMR)
     engineering and the physical sciences are stressed.
                                                              spectroscopy in medicine and biology. Course top-

                                                                                             COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

The following graduate/under-                         tion. Review of linear-systems theory and the           BE/ME 4814. Biomedical Materials
graduate biomedical engineering                       relevant principles of physics. Course work uses        This course discusses various aspects pertaining to
                                                      examples from microscopy, computed tomogra-             the selection, processing, testing (in vitro and in
courses are also available for
                                                      phy, X-ray radiography, and magnetic resonance          vivo) and performance of biomedical materials.
graduate credit.                                      imaging. A working knowledge of undergraduate           The biocompatibility and surgical applicability of
                                                      signal analysis, and linear algebra is desirable.       metallic, polymeric and ceramic implants and pros-
BE 4011. Biomedical Signal Analysis                   Facility with a high-level programming language is      thetic devices are discussed. The physico-chemical
Cat. II                                               recommended. This course will be offered in             interactions between the implant material and the
Introduction to biomedical signal processing and      2002-2003, and in alternating years thereafter.         physiological environment will be described. The
analysis. Fundamental techniques to analyze and                                                               use of biomaterials in maxillofacial, orthopedic,
process signals that originate from biological        BE/ME 4504. Biomechanics
                                                                                                              dental, ophthalmic and neuromuscular
sources: ECGs, EMGs, EEGs, blood pressure sig-        Cat. II                                                 applications is presented.(Recommended back-
nals, etc. Course integrates physiological knowl-     This course emphasizes the applications of              ground: BB 3130 or equivalent introduction to
edge with the information useful for physiologic      mechanics to describe the material properties of liv-   human anatomy, ES 2001 or equivalent introduc-
investigation and medical diagnosis and process-      ing tissues. It is concerned with the description       tion to materials science and engineering.)
ing. Biomedical signal characterization, time         and measurements of these properties as related to
domain analysis techniques (transfer functions,       their physiological functions. Emphasis on the          BE 4828. Biomaterial - Tissue
convolution, auto- and cross-correlation), frequen-   interrelationship between biomechanics and              Interactions
cy domain (Fourier analysis), continuous and dis-     physiology in medicine, surgery, body injury and        This course examines the principles of materials
crete signals, deterministic and stochastic signal    prosthesis. Topics covered include review of basic      science and cell biology underlying the design of
analysis methods. Analog and digital filtering.       mechanics, stress, strain, constitutive equations       medical devices, artificial organs, and scaffolds for
(Prerequisites: EE 2311, BE 3011 or equivalent.)      and the field equations encountered in fluids,          tissue engineering. Molecular and cellular interac-
This course will be offered in 2002-2003, and in      viscoelastic behavior and models of material be-        tions with biomaterials are analyzed in terms of cel-
alternating years thereafter.                         havior. The measurement and characterization of         lular processes such as matrix synthesis, degrada-
                                                      properties of tendons, skin, muscles and bone.          tion, and contraction. Principles of wound healing
BE 4023. Biomedical                                   Biomechanics as related to body injury and the          and tissue remodeling are used to study biological
Instrumentation Design I                              design of prosthetic devices. (Recommended back-        responses to implanted materials and devices. Case
Cat. II                                               ground: Differential and integral calculus, ordinary    studies will be analyzed to compare tissue responses
This course builds on the fundamental knowledge       differential equations, familiarity with the concepts   to intact, bioresorbable and bioerodible biomateri-
of bioinstrumentation and biosensors presented in     of mechanics, including continuum mechanics             als. Additionally, this course will examine criteria
BE 3011. Lectures and hands-on laboratory             [ES 2051, ES 2052, ME 3501, MA 2501].) This             for restoring physiological function of tissue and
experiments cover the principles of designing,        course will be offered in 2003-2004, and in alter-      organs, and investigate strategies to design implants
building and testing analog instruments to            nating years thereafter.                                and prostheses based on control of biomaterial-tis-
measure biological events. Design laboratories will                                                           sue interactions. (Prerequisites: BE 2604, BB 2550
include biopotential amplifiers and biosensor/        BE 4541. Biological Systems
                                                                                                              or equivalent, ES 2001 or equivalent, PH 1120 or
bioinstrumentation systems for the measurement        Cat. II                                                 PH 1121.)
of physiological parameters.                          Review of control theory with applications to bio-
(Prerequisites: BE 2204 and BE 3011.) This            logical control systems. Analysis and modeling of       The following courses in the Graduate
course will be offered in 2002-2003, and in alter-    physiological systems. Physiological systems iden-
                                                                                                              School of Biomedical Sciences (GSBS)
nating years thereafter.                              tification. Formulation of mathematical models of
                                                      biological systems and the application of computer      at the University of Massachusetts
BE 4025. Biomedical Instrumentation                   techniques in the simulation of these systems.          Medical School (UMMS) are appropri-
Design II                                             (Prerequisites: Laplace transforms, transient           ate for students in the biomedical
Cat. II                                               response, frequency response and system stability       engineering program and are available
This course builds on the fundamental knowledge       analysis.) This course will be offered in 2003-         for graduate credit. While these are
of bioinstrumentation and biosensors presented in     2004, and in alternating years thereafter.              the most common courses taken by
BE 3011. Lectures and hands-on laboratory exper-                                                              our students, many other GSBS cours-
                                                      BE/ME 4606. Biofluids
iments cover the principles of biosensor interfac-
                                                      Cat. II                                                 es not listed in this catalog may also
ing, low-level measurements, analog-to-digital and
digital-to-analog signal conversion, micro-           This course emphasizes the applications of fluid        be available for graduate credit.
processor- and microcontroller-based biomedical       mechanics to biological problems. The course con-
instrumentation, and programming.                     centrates primarily on the human circulatory and        Biomedical Science Core
(Prerequisites: BE 2204 and BE 3011.) This            respiratory systems. Topics covered include: blood      (I and II)
course will be offered in 2003-2004, and in alter-    flow in the heart, arteries and veins, and micro-       Provides students with an integral foundation in the
nating years thereafter.                              circulation and air flow in the lungs and airways.      sciences basic to medicine, emphasizing contempo-
                                                      Mass transfer across the walls of these systems is      rary topics in biological chemistry, transfer of genet-
BE 4201. Biomedical Imaging                           also presented. (Prerequisite: A background in          ic information, cellular architecture and regulation,
Cat. II                                               continuum mechanics [ME 3501] and fluid                 and multicellular systems and processes. Students
This course is a practical introduction to bio-       mechanics equivalent to ME 3602 is assumed.)
medical image processing using examples from          This course will be offered in 2002-2003, and in
various branches of medical imaging. Topics           alternating years thereafter.
include: point operations, filtering in the image
and Fourier domains, image reconstruction in
computed tomography and magnetic resonance
imaging, and data analysis using image segmenta-


     may take all or part of the core, in either quarter or   special emphasis on digital image processing.          carbon catalysts, anchored catalysts and others.
     semester format.                                         (Prerequisites: Calculus.)                             Important analytical techniques covered include
                                                                                                                     X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (ESCA), elec-
     Biomedical Sciences I (6 credits)                        PY750. “The Body Works”:                               tron microprobe, AUGER, scanning electron
       Quarter I:       Biochemistry (3 credits)              Cellular and Organ Physiology                          microscopy, EXAFS, Mossbauer, Fourier-trans-
       Quarter II:      Molecular Biology and Genetics        3 credits                                              form infrared, enhanced laser Raman spectroscopy
                        (3 credits)                           The objectives of “The Body Works” are to pro-         and photoacoustics spectroscopy. Examines rela-
                                                              vide a fundamental understanding of: (1) the basic     tionship between structures and reactivities of
     Biomedical Sciences II (6 credits)                       biophysical principles of physiology, (2) the rela-    important catalysts in hydrocarbon oxidation and
       Quarter III: Cell Biology (3 credits)                  tionship between cellular function and whole           functionalization, syngas reactions and petroleum
       Quarter IV: Systems (3 credits)                        organ physiology, (3) the integration and regula-      processing.
                                                              tion of the major organ systems of the human
     Responsible Conduct of Science                           body, and (4) the mechanism of pathogenesis of         CM 510. Dynamics of Particulate
     Ethics course on the responsible conduct of              disease. By correlating cellular processes with        Systems
     science. (1 credit)                                      organ function, this course will identify important    Analyzes discrete particles which grow in size or in
                                                              physiological paradigms and the modern research        some other characteristic variable (e.g., age, molec-
     BME 595. Tissue Engineering
                                                              methods used to resolve outstanding questions.         ular weight). Reaction engineering and population
     3 credits
                                                              (Prerequisites: Biochemistry, molecular biology        balance analyses for batch and continuous systems.
     This course provides an introduction to bio-
                                                              and cell physiology.)                                  Steady state and transient system dynamics. Topics
     materials that are engineered to mimic the struc-
     ture and function of tissues. (Prerequisite: A first                                                            may include crystallization, latex synthesis, polymer
     course in biomaterials and a basic understanding         Chemical Engineering                                   molecular weight distribution, fermentation/ eco-
                                                                                                                     logical systems and gas-solid systems.
     of cell biology and physiology. Admission of             4 Core   chemical engineering courses.
                                                              5 Only
     graduate students without the necessary back-                     one course for core credit.
                                                                                                                     CM 521. Biochemical Engineering
     ground requires the permission of the instructor.                                                               Ligand binding and membrane transport process-
     Admission of undergraduate students requires the         CM 501-502. Seminar
                                                              Reports on current advances in the various             es, growth kinetics of animal cells and micro-
     permission of the instructor.)                                                                                  organisms, kinetics of interacting multiple popula-
                                                              branches of chemical engineering or on graduate
     NOTE: Next offering spring 2003                                                                                 tions, biological reactor design and analysis,
                                                              research in progress. Must be taken during every
                                                              semester in residence.                                 soluble immobilized enzyme kinetics, optimization
     BME 850. Laboratory Rotation in                                                                                 and control of fermentation, biopolymer structure
     Biomedical Engineering                                   CM 504. Mathematical Analysis                          and function, properties of biological molecules,
     3 or 4 credits                                           in Chemical Engineering 4                              biological separation processes, scale-up of bio-
     Offered fall, spring and summer for students             Methods of mathematical analysis selected from         processes; laboratory work may be included when
     doing laboratory rotations on the UMMS campus.           such topics as vector analysis, matrices, complex      possible.
     (Prerequisite: Ph.D. student in biomedical               variables, eigenvalue problems, Fourier analysis,
     engineering.)                                                                                                   CM 543. Molecular Sieves
                                                              Fourier transforms, Laplace transformation, solu-
                                                                                                                     The structure, synthesis and properties of microp-
     BME 860. Preparation for Qualifying                      tion of ordinary and partial differential equations,
                                                                                                                     orous crystals known as zeolites are examined.
                                                              integral equations, calculus of variation and
     Examination                                                                                                     Major topics are systemization of crystal struc-
                                                              numerical analysis. Emphasis on application to the
     Variable credits                                                                                                tures, zeolite syntheses and their mechanisms,
                                                              solution of chemical engineering problems.
                                                                                                                     spectroscopic characterization, physical properties
     BME 900. Research in Biomedical                          CM 506. Kinetics and Catalysis 4                       and catalytic properties.
     Engineering and Medical Physics                          Theories of reaction kinetics and heterogeneous
     Variable credits                                                                                                CM 561. Advanced Thermodynamics 4
                                                              catalysis for simple and complex reactions.
     Equivalent to BE 699 Ph.D. Dissertation.                                                                        Examination of the fundamental concepts of clas-
                                                              Kinetics and mechanisms of catalyzed and un-
                                                                                                                     sical thermodynamics and presentation of exis-
                                                              catalyzed reactions, and effects of bulk and pore
     PY700. “The Cell Works”:                                 diffusion. Techniques for experimentation, reac-
                                                                                                                     tence theorems for thermodynamics properties.
     Principles of Cell Physiology                            tion data treatment, and catalyst preparation and
                                                                                                                     Inequality of Clausius as a criterion for equilibri-
     4 credits                                                                                                       um in both chemical and physical systems.
     The objectives of “The Cell Works” are to provide                                                               Examination of thermodynamic equilibrium for a
     a fundamental understanding of: (1) the basic            CM 507. Chemical Reactor Design 4                      variety of restraining conditions. Applications to
     biophysical principles of cell physiology, (2) the       Includes a review of batch, tubular and stirred tank   fluid mechanics, process systems and chemical sys-
     ability to relate cellular function to whole organ       reactor design. Kinetics review including advanced     tems. Computation of complex equilibria.
     physiology, and (3) the cellular mechanisms              chemical kinetics and biochemical kinetics, and
     underlying disease. By emphasizing the principles
                                                                                                                     CM 571. Intermediate Transport
                                                              transport processes in heterogeneous reactions. In-
     of cell physiology, the course will identify impor-      depth reactor analysis includes fixed bed reactors,    Phenomena 4, 5
     tant physiological paradigms and the modern              multiplicity and stability of steady states, reactor   Mass, momentum and energy transport; analytic
     research methods used to resolve outstanding             dynamics, optimal operation and control, biologi-      and approximate solutions of the equations of
     questions concerning cell function. (Prerequisites:      cal reactors, nonideal flow patterns, and fluidized    change. Special flow problems such as creeping,
     Biochemistry and molecular biology.)                     bed and multiphase reactors.                           potential and laminar boundary-layer flows. Heat
                                                                                                                     and mass transfer in multicomponent systems.
     PY740. “The Image Works”:                                CM 508. Catalysis and Surface                          Estimation of heat and mass transfer rates.
     Optical Methods in Physiology                            Science of Materials                                   Transport with chemical reaction.
     2 credits                                                Examines detailed structures and reactivities of
     This course studies basic optical techniques and         solid catalysts: zeolites, solid state inorganics,
     their application to physiological problems, with        supported metals and metal-support interactions,

                                                                                              COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CM 572. Mass and Energy Transfer 4, 5
Advanced treatment of heat and mass transfer.
                                                        Chemistry and                                         vector diagrams. A conceptual nonmathematical
                                                                                                              approach is employed in discussion of NMR theo-
Topics from: forced and natural convection; high-       Biochemistry                                          ry. The course is geared toward an audience which
                                                                                                              seeks an understanding of NMR theory and an
speed and rarefied gas flows; film and dropwise
condensation, spray cooling, boiling and two-           CH 501. Chemistry of the Main Group                   appreciation of the practical applications of NMR
                                                        Elements                                              in chemical analysis. Students are exposed to
phase flow; packed and fluidized bed heat and
                                                        An advanced course in recent developments in          hands-on NMR operation. Detailed instructions
mass transfer; the heat pipe; radiant transfer with-
                                                        selected areas of the chemistry of the elements       are provided and each student is expected to carry
in enclosures, including radiation from gases and
                                                        other than transition metals. Topics covered may      out his or her own NMR experiments on a Bruker
flames; ionic transport and electrochemical sys-
                                                        include electron-deficient compounds and main         AVANCE 400 MHz NMR spectrometer .
tems; combustion and mass transfer; drying and
diffusion in porous materials, mass transfer in liv-    group organometallics; and the preparation, reac-
                                                                                                              CH 537. Natural Products
ing systems; turbulent mass transfer; adsorption;       tions and physical properties of these compounds.
                                                                                                              The course will provide a review of the chemistry
design of heat and mass transfer equipment.             Course may be offered by special arrangement.
                                                                                                              and synthesis of compounds from representative
Course may be offered by special arrangement.                                                                 families of products such as terpenoids, steroids,
                                                        CH 502. Bioinorganic Chemistry
                                                                                                              polyketides, alkaloids and B-lactams. Prospective
CM 573. Separation Processes 4                          The subject matter of this course is bioinorganic
                                                        chemistry, with emphasis on the application of        students should have a good foundation in organic
Thermodynamics of equilibrium separation
                                                        physical methods to the study of active sites in      chemistry.
processes such as distillation, absorption, adsorp-
tion and extraction. Multistaged separations.           bioinorganic systems. The physical methods
                                                                                                              CH 538. Medicinal Chemistry
Principles and processes of some of the less            discussed include magnetic susceptibility measure-
                                                                                                              This course will focus on the medicinal chemistry
common separations.                                     ments, electronic absorption spectroscopy,
                                                                                                              aspects of drug discovery from an industrial phar-
                                                        resonance Raman spectroscopy, electron spin reso-
                                                                                                              maceutical research and development perspective.
CM 574. Fluid Mechanics 4                               nance, EXAFS and electrochemical techniques.
                                                                                                              Topics will include chemotherapeutic agents (such
Advanced treatment of fluid kinematics and              Applications of these to a variety of metallopro-
                                                                                                              as antibacterial, antiviral and antitumor agents)
dynamics. Stress and strain rate analysis using vec-    teins including oxygen carriers (myoglobin, hemo-
                                                                                                              and pharmacodynamic agents (such as antihyper-
tors and tensors as tools. Incompressible and com-      globin, hemocyanin), blue copper proteins, iron
                                                                                                              tensive, antiallergic, antiulcer and CNS agents).
pressible one-dimensional flows in channels, ducts      sulfur proteins, and low molecular weight struc-
                                                                                                              (Prerequisite: A good foundation in organic chem-
and nozzles. Nonviscous and viscous flow fields.        tural and functional model systems are covered in
                                                                                                              istry, e.g., CH 2310 Organic Chemistry I and CH
Boundary layers and turbulence. Flow through            detail.
                                                                                                              2320 Organic Chemistry II.)
porous media such as fixed and fluidized beds.
Two-phase flows with drops, bubbles and/or boil-        CH 516. Chemical Spectroscopy                         CH 539. Molecular Pharmacology
ing. Introduction to non-Newtonian flows.               The emphasis is on using a variety of spectro-
                                                                                                              After a review of the pertinent aspects of human
                                                        scopic data to arrive at molecular structures,
                                                                                                              physiology, the course will focus on the variety of
CM 580. Transformation and                              particularly of organic molecules. Major emphasis
                                                                                                              chemical messengers in the body, their storage
Transport in the Environment                            is on H- and C-NMR, IR and MS. There is rela-
                                                                                                              release, action on target receptors and eventual
This course will focus on the transformation and        tively little emphasis on theory or on sampling
                                                                                                              fate. Discussion of endocrine receptors introduces
transport of pollutant chemicals, nutrients and         handling techniques.
                                                                                                              the fundamental concepts of receptor-effector cou-
colloids in natural and engineered environmental                                                              pling, which are developed further in studies of
systems. The first part of the course deals with the    CH 531. Electronic Interpretation of
                                                                                                              the molecular structure and function of ion chan-
transfer of chemicals between different environ-        Organic Reactions
                                                                                                              nels with application to the nerve impulse and of
ments (water and air, water and solid phases). The      Organic reaction mechanisms are interpreted in
                                                                                                              the acetylcholine receptors. Concepts of agonist
second part of the course deals with processes by       terms of “electron-pushing” rationalizations and
                                                                                                              and antagonist specificity, nonspecific blocking,
which a compound is chemically or biologically          elementary molecular orbital theory. The course
                                                                                                              drug addiction, etc. will be further developed in
transformed into one or more products.                  involves a series of problem-solving discussion
                                                                                                              discussions of the cathecholamines and the
CM 594/ FPE 574. Process Safety                                                                               neuractive peptides. Nonreceptor blocking will be
Management                                              CH 533. Physical Organic Chemistry                    further developed in a segment of ion cotransport
                                                        Mechanisms of representative organic reactions        systems in renal regulation. A knowledge of the
This course provides basic skills in state-of-the-art
                                                        and the methods used for their evaluation.            material covered in one of the following is
process safety management and hazard analysis
                                                        Structural, electronic and stereochemical influ-      recommended: (1) CH 4110 and CH 4120,
techniques including hazard and operability
                                                        ences on reaction mechanisms.                         (2) BB 3100, or (3) CH 538, plus an understand-
studies (HAZOP), logic trees, failure modes and
                                                                                                              ing of protein and membrane structures.
effects analysis (FMEA) and consequence analysis.       CH 534. Organic Photochemistry
Both qualitative and quantitative evaluation            Introduction to the photophysical and photo-          CH 540. Regulation of Gene
methods will be utilized. Following a case study        chemical consequences of light absorption by          Expression
format, these techniques, along with current            molecules. Experimental techniques, excited state     This course covers the biochemical mechanisms
regulatory requirements, will be applied through        description, photochemical kinetics and energy        involved in regulation of gene expression:
class projects addressing environmental health,         transfer are among the topics discussed in relation   modifications of DNA structures that influence
industrial hygiene, hazardous materials, and fire or    to the primary photochemical reactions in simple      transcription rates, transcriptional regulation,
explosion hazard scenarios. (Prerequisite: An           and complex molecules.                                post-transcriptional processing of RNA including
undergraduate engineering or physical science                                                                 splicing and editing, nuclear/cytoplasmic trans-
background.)                                            CH 536. Theory and Applications of                    port, regulation of translation, and factors that
                                                        NMR Spectroscopy                                      control the half-lives of both mRNA and protein.
                                                        This course emphasizes the fundamental aspects of     During the course, common experimental meth-
                                                        1D and 2D nuclear magnetic resonance spec-            ods are explored, including a discussion of the
                                                        troscopy (NMR). The theory of pulsed Fourier          information available from each method.
                                                        transform NMR is presented through the use of


     CH 541. Membrane Biophysics                             CH 561. Functional Genomics                              CH 4420. Inorganic Chemistry II
     This course will focus on different areas of bio-       1 credit per semester                                    Cat. II
     physics with special emphasis on membrane               In this seminar course, students will present and        Complexes of the transition metals are discussed.
     phenomena. The biomedical-biological impor-             critically analyze selected, recent publications in      Covered are the electronic structures of transition
     tance of biophysical phenomena will be stressed.        functional genomics. The course will conclude            metal atoms and ions, and the topological and
     The course will begin with an introduction to the       with a written project, either a mini-grant propos-      electronic structures of their complexes. Symmetry
     molecular forces relevant in biological media and       al or an analysis of publicly available data in a        concepts are developed early in the course and
     subsequently develop the following topics: mem-         research manuscript format. The course will be           used throughout to simplify treatments of elec-
     brane structure and function; channels, carriers        offered in alternate years in lieu of CH 560, may        tronic structure. The molecular orbital approach
     and pumps; nerve excitation and related topics;         be repeated as many times as offered, and satisfies      to bonding is emphasized. The pivotal area of
     and molecular biophysics of motility. Topics will       the department’s requirement for a graduate semi-        organotransition metal chemistry is introduced,
     be developed assuming a good understanding of           nar in biochemistry.                                     with focus on complexes of carbon monoxide,
     protein and lipid chemistry, enzyme kinetics, cell                                                               metal-metal interactions in clusters, and catlysis by
     biology, and electricity.                               CH 571. Seminar                                          metal complexes. (Recommended background:
                                                             0.5 credit per semester                                  CH 2310 and CH 2320, or equivalent.) This
     CH 554. Molecular Modeling                              Reports on current advances in the various               course will be offered in 2002-2003 and in alter-
     This course trains students in the area of molecu-      branches of chemistry.                                   nate years thereafter.
     lar modeling using a variety of quantum mechani-
     cal and force field methods. The approach will be       The following graduate/undergradu-                       CH 4520. Chemical Statistical
     toward practical chemists who want to answer spe-       ate chemistry courses are also avail-                    Mechanics
     cific questions about molecular geometry, transi-       able for graduate credit.                                Cat. II
     tion states, reaction paths and photoexcited states.                                                             This course deals with how the electronic, transla-
     No experience in programming is necessary; how-         CH 4110. Biochemistry I                                  tional, rotational and vibrational energy levels of
     ever, a background at the introductory level in         Cat. I                                                   individual molecules, or of macromolecular sys-
     quantum mechanics is highly desirable. Methods          The principles of protean structure are presented.       tems are statistically related to the energy, entropy
     to be explored include extended Huckel theory,          Mechanisms of enzymatic catalysis, including             and free energy of macroscopic systems, taking
     molecular mechanics, semiempirical molecular            those requiring coenzymes, are outlined in detail.       into account the quantum mechanical properties
     orbital methods, ab initio methods, graphical dis-      The structures and biochemical properties of car-        of the component particles. Ensembles, partition
     play of molecules.                                      bohydrates are reviewed. Bioenergetics, the role of      functions, and Boltzmann, Fermi-/Dirac and
                                                             ATP, and its production through glycolysis and           Bose-Einstein statistics are used. A wealth of phys-
     CH 555. Advanced Topics                                 the TCA cycle are fully considered.                      ical chemical phenomena, including material relat-
     1 to 3 credits as arranged                                                                                       ed to solids, liquids, gases, spectroscopy and
     A course of advanced study in selected areas whose      CH 4120. Biochemistry II                                 chemical reactions are made understandable by the
     content and format varies to suit the interest and      Cat. I
                                                                                                                      concepts learned in this course. This course will be
     needs of faculty and students. This course may be       Oriented around biological membranes, this term
                                                                                                                      offered in 2003-2004 and in alternate years there-
     repeated for different topics covered.                  begins with a discussion of electron transport and
                                                             the aerobic production of ATP, followed by a
     CH 556. Experimental Photochemistry                     study of photosynthesis. The study of the biosyn-        CH 4550. Polymer Chemistry
     This course illustrates how modern spectroscopic        thesis of lipids and steroids leads to a discussion of   Cat. II
     techniques can be used to learn more about the          the structure and function of biological mem-            Fundamentals of polymer science and technology
     photo-induced chemistry of organic materials. The       branes. Finally, the membrane processes in neuro-        based on organic polymers. The principal mecha-
     principles of time-resolved and steady-state            transmission are discussed. (Recommended back-           nisms of polymerization including radical, ionic
     spectroscopic methods will be described in lectures     ground: CH 4110.)                                        and condensation are covered in detail. Character-
     and then applied in the laboratory to a variety of                                                               ization of polymers by physical means. Mechanical
     chemical systems. The aim will be to show how it        CH 4130. Biochemistry III                                behavior including bulk and solution properties of
     is possible to fully describe the ground and excited    Cat. I
                                                                                                                      polymers. Polymer syntheses and modifications
     state photochemical behavior of a chemical system       This course presents a thorough analysis of the
                                                                                                                      including graft and copolymerization. Structure,
     using these techniques. Aspects of UV-visible           biosynthesis of DNA (replication), RNA (tran-
                                                                                                                      property and end use applications of plastic mate-
     fluorescence emission, phosphorescence emission         scription) and proteins (translation), and of their
                                                                                                                      rials. Plastics processing, testing and technology.
     and laser-flash photolysis will be discussed.           biochemical precursors. Proteins and RNAs have
                                                                                                                      Survey of commodity plastics as well as engineer-
     Students will gain hands-on experience with the         distinct lifetimes within the living cell; thus the
                                                                                                                      ing resins, including their applications and eco-
     use of UV-visible absorption and fluorescence           destruction of these molecules is an important
                                                                                                                      nomic considerations. Presentation of trade and
     emission spectrometers as well as the laser flash       biochemical process that is also discussed. In addi-
                                                                                                                      technical literature in the field. (Recommended
     photolysis research facility. Also, as part of the      tion to mechanistic studies, regulation of these
                                                                                                                      background: CH 2310 and CH 2320 or equiva-
     course, students will submit a short research pro-      processes is covered.
                                                                                                                      lent.) This course will be offered in 2002-2003
     posal based on one or more of the techniques
     used. Although there is no formal requirement for
                                                             CH 4330. Organic Synthesis                               and in alternate years thereafter.
                                                             Cat. II
     this course, some background and an interest in
                                                             A discussion of selected modern synthetic meth-
     photochemisty would be an asset.
                                                             ods including additions, condensations and
     CH 560 Current Topics in Biochemistry                   cyclizations. Emphasis is placed on the logic and
     1 credit per semester                                   strategy of organic synthesis. (Recommended
     In this seminar course, a different topic is selected   background: CH 2310, CH 2320 and CH 2330,
     each semester. Current articles are read and            or the equivalent.) This course will be offered in
     analyzed.                                               2002-2003 and in alternate years thereafter.

                                                                                               COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Civil and Environmental                                  puter solutions of numerous examples using time-
                                                         sharing programs and STRUDL.
                                                                                                                torsional buckling, beam-columns, design for
                                                                                                                lateral forces, and connections for building frames.
Engineering                                              CE 523. Advanced Matrix Structural                     CE 532. Advanced Design
CE 501. Professional Practice                            Analysis                                               of Reinforced Concrete Structures
Professional practices in engineering. Legal issues      Matrix methods of structural analysis, displace-       Advanced design of reinforced concrete members
of business organizations, contracts and liability;      ment and flexibility methods; substructuring, tall     and structural systems; effect of continuity; codes
business practice of staffing, fee structures,           buildings, energy methods, finite elements, includ-    and specifications; ultimate strength theory of
accounts receivable, negotiation and dispute reso-       ing plane stress and strain elements, approximate      design; economic proportions and constructibility
lution, and loss prevention; marketing and pro-          methods, solution of linear systems.                   considerations; and deep beams, torsion, beam-
posal development; project management involving                                                                 columns, two-way slabs, design for lateral forces,
                                                         CE 524/ME 533. Stress Analysis by                      and beam-to-column joints.
organizing and staffing, budgeting, scheduling,
performance and monitoring, and presentation of
                                                         Finite Elements
                                                         See course description under ME 533 on page            CE 533. Prestressed Concrete
deliverables; professionalism, ethics and responsi-
                                                         108.                                                   Structures
                                                                                                                Analysis and design of prestressed concrete struc-
CE 510. Structural Mechanics                             CE 525. Analysis and Design                            tures. Linear prestressing, materials used in
Analysis of structural components: uniform and           of Shell Structures                                    prestressed concrete, determinate and statically
nonuniform torsion of structural shapes, analysis        Analysis and design of thin shell concrete struc-      indeterminate prestressed concrete structures,
of determinate and indeterminate beams (includ-          tures such as domes, cylindrical shells, hyperbolic    connections, and shear and torsion. Design of
ing elastic foundation conditions) by classical          paraboloids, shells of double curvature and folded     tension and compression members and flat plates.
methods, finite difference equations, numerical          plate roof systems; membrane theory of thin shells     (Prerequisite: A knowledge of undergraduate
integrations, series approximation, elastic stability    and the methods of analysis for displacements and      course in concrete design is necessary.)
of beams and frames, lateral stability of beams,         stress-resultants; methods of analysis of shells
beams-columns, analysis of frames including the          including finite element formulations; design of       CE 534. Structural Design
effect of axial compression. Course may be offered       cylindrical, spherical and hyper shell structures;     for Fire Conditions
by special arrangement.                                  applications to long-span roof systems, arch dams      The development of structural analysis and design
                                                         and liquid-containment structures. An under-           methods for steel and reinforced concrete mem-
CE 511. Structural Dynamics                              standing of the undergraduate topics in structural     bers subjected to elevated temperatures caused by
Analysis and design of beams and frames under            mechanics, reinforced concrete design and differ-      building fires. Beams, columns and rigid frames
dynamic loads; dynamics of continuous beams,             ential equations is assumed.                           will be covered. The course is based on research
multistory building frames, floor systems and                                                                   conducted during the past three decades in
bridges; dynamic analysis and design of structures       CE 526. Advanced Finite Element                        Europe, Canada and the United States. Course
subjected to wind and earthquake loads; approxi-         Methods                                                may be offered by special arrangement.
mate methods of analysis and practical design            (Same as ME 633.) See course description under         (Prerequisites: Knowledge of statically indetermi-
applications.                                            ME 633 on page 109.                                    nate structural analysis, structural steel design and
                                                                                                                reinforced concrete design.)
CE 512. Structural Stability Theory                      CE 527. Impact Analysis and
Theory of elastic and inelastic buckling of beam         Structural Crashworthiness                             CE 535. Integration of
columns and frames; lateral and torsional buckling       This course provides the student with a basic          Design and Construction
of beams; buckling rings, arches and thin plates;        understanding of the mechanics of impact and           As an interactive case study of the project develop-
buckling of shells; design equations and finite ele-     contact as well as the behavior of materials sub-      ment process, student groups design a facility and
ment methods in stability; bending of thin plates        jected to dynamic loadings. Analytical, computa-       prepare a construction plan, including cost and
and shells. Use of microcomputers in stability           tional and experimental methods are used to            schedule, to build the project. The students pre-
problems. Course may be offered by special               investigate impact phenomena. Students will            sent their design-build proposal to participating
arrangement. (Prerequisite: Differential equations,      explore impact phenomena in a semester-long            industrial clients. Emphasis is on developing skills
structural mechanics and matrix structural analysis      investigation of a particular impact problem of        to generate, evaluate and select design alternatives
will be assumed.)                                        interest to the student, involving analytical meth-    that satisfy the needs of the owner and the con-
                                                         ods, physical experiments, and computation mod-        straints imposed by codes and regulations, as well
CE 519. Advanced Structural Analysis                     eling. Topics include one-dimensional wave             as by the availability of construction resources.
Energy methods in structural analysis, concepts of       mechanics, impulsively loaded beams, explicit          Emphasis is also in developing team-building skills
force method and displacement methods, methods           time integration, computational contact methods,       and efficient communication. Computer-based
of relaxation and numerical techniques for the           and element formulation for impact problems.           methods for design, construction cost estimating
solution of problems in buildings, and long-span         While a good general background in mechanics is        and scheduling, and personal communications are
structures and aircraft structural systems. Effects of   required, no special preparation in finite element     extensively used. The interactive case study is
secondary stress in structures. Course may be            methods or continuum mechanics is presumed.            specifically chosen to balance the content between
offered by special arrangement. (Prerequisites:          This course is normally offered every fall semester.   design, construction engineering and manage-
Structural mechanics and undergraduate courses
                                                                                                                ment. Students taking this course are expected to
in structural analysis, differential equations.)         CE 531. Advanced Design                                have a background in at least two of these disci-
                                                         of Steel Structures                                    plines.
CE 523. Advanced Matrix Analysis                         Advanced design of steel members and connec-
Review of matrix computer methods of structural
                                                         tions; ultimate strength design in structural steel;   CE 536. Construction Failures:
analysis including the stiffness and flexibility
methods, energy formulation, Eigenvalue prob-
                                                         codes and specifications; loads and working stress-    Analysis and Lessons
                                                         es; economic proportions; and buckling of slender      This course develops an understanding of the
lems, the finite element method, elements suitable
                                                         elements and built-up sections, torsion, lateral-      integration process of technical, human, capital,
for analysis, structural dynamic problems, com-
                                                                                                                social and institutional aspects that drive the life


     cycle of a construction project. The study of fail-        Topics include the classification and purposes of       CE 553. Advanced Foundation
     ures provides an excellent vehicle to find ways for        roadway systems, developing safety design criteria,     Engineering
     the improvement of planning, design and con-               the design of safe vertical and horizontal align-       This course covers advanced methods of subsur-
     struction of facilities. Student groups are required       ments, proper selection of cross-sectional ele-         face exploration and recent developments in pre-
     to complete a term project on the investigation of         ments, providing adequate sight distance, selection     diction of bearing capacity and settlement of shal-
     a failure and present their findings and recom-            of appropriate speed limits, control of speeds, and     low foundations. It includes design of mat foun-
     mendations. This investigation includes not only           other highway design issues. While there is no          dations, analysis and design of pile and drilled
     the technical analysis of the failure but also             formal prerequisite, the course presumes a basic        shaft foundations, and discussion of case studies.
     requires a comprehensive analysis of the organiza-         knowledge of undergraduate highway design as            The course content is determined in part by the
     tional, contractual and regulatory aspects of the          taught in CE 3050. This course is usually offered       student’s interests and often also includes design of
     process that lead to the failure. The course uses          in alternate spring semesters.                          lateral support systems, reinforced earth, dewater-
     case studies to illustrate different types of failure in
                                                                CE 544. Highway Safety Audits and                       ing systems and buried structures.
     the planning, design, construction and operation
     of constructed facilities. Students taking this            Safety Management                                       CE 560. Advanced Principles
     course are expected to have some background in             This course is an in-depth study of highway safety
                                                                audit techniques as used in Europe and Canada,
                                                                                                                        of Water Treatment
     the disciplines mentioned above.                                                                                   Theory and practice of drinking water treatment.
                                                                and safety management as used in the United
                                                                                                                        Water quality and regulations; physical and chemi-
     CE 537. Advanced Properties and                            States to identify and correct hazardous locations.
                                                                                                                        cal unit processes including disinfection, coagula-
     Production of Structural Materials                         Students will learn safety audit techniques through
                                                                                                                        tion, clarification, filtration, membranes, air strip-
     This course is particularly designed for civil engi-       class work and a semester project where they per-
                                                                                                                        ping, adsorption, softening, corrosion control, and
     neers and will cover structure, properties and             form a safety audit on an actual roadway. Topics
                                                                                                                        other advanced processes.
     performance of construction materials. Topics              include hazard and risk modeling, societal cost of
     include the structure of solids, phase equilibrium         collisions, performing a safety audit, recommend-       CE 561. Advanced Principles
     and reaction kinetics. A detailed analysis of              ing alternative solutions, quantifying safety bene-
                                                                                                                        of Wastewater Treatment
     mechanical properties and deterioration of solids          fits and prioritizing improvements. While there is
                                                                                                                        Theory and practice of wastewater treatment.
     will be presented. Theories and mathematical               no formal prerequisite, the course presumes a
                                                                                                                        Natural purification of streams; screening; sedi-
     models based on these concepts will be applied to          basic knowledge of undergraduate highway design
                                                                                                                        mentation; flotation, thickening; aerobic treat-
     construction materials such as cementitious                as taught in CE 3050. The material covered in
                                                                                                                        ment methods; theory of aeration; anaerobic
     materials, bituminous materials, metals and alloys,        CE 543 is also useful background for this course.
                                                                                                                        digestion; disposal methods of sludge including
     timber, ceramics and composites.                           This course is usually offered in alternate spring
                                                                                                                        vacuum filtration, centrifugation and drying beds;
     (Prerequisites: Structural mechanics, materials of         semesters.
                                                                                                                        wet oxidation; removal of phosphate and nitrogen
     construction, differential equations and computer                                                                  compounds; and tertiary treatment methods.
                                                                CE 550. Theoretical Soil Mechanics
                                                                This course provides an advanced level study of
                                                                                                                        CE 562. Biosystems in Environmental
     CE 538. Pavement Analysis and                              theories of soil behavior and mechanics. The top-
     Design for Highways and Airports                           ics reviewed are physico-chemical factors affecting
                                                                                                                        Application of microbial and biochemical under-
     This course is designed for civil engineers and will       soil behavior, the effective stress principle, mois-
                                                                                                                        standing to river and lake pollution; natural
     provide a detailed survey of analysis and design           ture migration, application of the theory of elastic-
                                                                                                                        purification processes; biological conversion of
     concepts for flexible and rigid pavements for high-        ity to compute stresses in soil masses, settlement
                                                                                                                        important elements such as C, N, S, O and P;
     ways and airports. The materials will cover elastic        analysis, consolidation theory and geothermics.
                                                                                                                        biological aspects of wastewater treatment; disease-
     and inelastic theories of stress pavement                  Appropriate laboratory and field testing proce-
                                                                                                                        producing organisms with emphasis on water-
     components and currently used design methods,              dures are discussed. Course may be offered by spe-
                                                                                                                        borne diseases; and quantitative methods used in
     i.e., Corps of Engineers, AASHTO, etc. The use             cial arrangement.
                                                                                                                        indicator organism counts and disinfection.
     of finite element methods for pavement stress and          CE 551. Theoretical Soil Mechanics II
     deformation analysis will be presented. A review of        A continuation of CE 550. It addresses the nature
                                                                                                                        CE 5621. Open Channel Hydraulics
     pavement rehabilitation methods and processes                                                                      This course begins with fundamentals of free sur-
                                                                of the strength-deformation characteristics of both
     will be presented. (Prerequisites: Differential                                                                    face flow, and includes engineering and environ-
                                                                rapidly and slowly draining soils. Stress path
     equations, construction materials, soil mechanics,                                                                 mental applications. Development of basic princi-
                                                                methods of analysis and critical state behavior
     computer literacy.)                                                                                                ples, including specific energy, momentum and
                                                                models are emphasized. Elastic and plastic materi-
                                                                                                                        critical flow. Rapidly varied, uniform and gradual-
     CE 542. Geohydrology                                       al failure theories are reviewed, and modern labo-
                                                                                                                        ly varied steady flow phenomena and analysis.
     This course addresses engineering problems associ-         ratory and field testing devices are described.
                                                                                                                        Density-stratified flow. Similitude considerations
     ated with the migration and use of subsurface              Course may be offered by special arrangement.
                                                                                                                        for hydraulic models. Optional topics: dispersion
     water. An emphasis is placed on the geology of             CE 552. Earth Structures                                and heat transfer to atmosphere. Course may be
     water-bearing formations including the study of            This course provides an in-depth study of the           offered by special arrangement.
     pertinent physical and chemical characteristics of         geotechnical principles applied to design of earth
     soil and rock aquifers. Topics include principles of       structures including earth dams, waste contain-
                                                                                                                        CE 563. Industrial Waste Treatment
     groundwater movement, geology of groundwater                                                                       Legislation; the magnitude of industrial wastes;
                                                                ment facilities, soil slopes, highway cuts, embank-
     occurrence, regional groundwater flow, subsurface                                                                  effects on streams, sewers and treatment units;
                                                                ments and slurry trenches. It includes fundamen-
     characterization, water well technologies, ground-                                                                 physical, chemical and biological characteristics;
                                                                tals of analysis of flow through porous media by
     water chemistry and unsaturated flow.                                                                              pretreatment methods; physical treatment meth-
                                                                graphical and digital techniques, slope stability,
                                                                                                                        ods; chemical treatment methods; biological treat-
     CE 543. Highway Design and Traffic                         use of geosynthetics, soil stabilization, and the
                                                                                                                        ment methods; and wastes from specific indus-
     Safety                                                     design of preloads and drain installations. Course
                                                                                                                        tries. Lab includes characterization and treatment
     This course is an in-depth study of highway safety         may be offered by special arrangement.
                                                                                                                        of typical industrial wastes.
     as it affects the geometric design of highways.

                                                                                                 COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CE 565. Stream, Lake and Estuarine                        interfaces; and the effects of reactions on the         well as future technology, and how these variables
Analysis                                                  transport in the environment.                           affect not only our present but also future genera-
This course provides a quantitative base for deter-       (Prerequisite: A knowledge of the material covered      tions—water resource availability, threatened
mining the fate of effluent discharged into natural       in ES 3004 and CE 3069 is expected.)                    species, global warming or infrastructure develop-
waters. Models are developed to describe the                                                                      ment—is critical to the civil engineer.
                                                          CE 571. Water Chemistry
transport, dispersal, and chemical/biological reac-       This course covers the topics of chemical equilib-      CE 580. Advanced Project
tion of substances introduced in rivers, estuaries,       rium, acid/base chemistry, the carbonate system,        Management
lakes and coastal areas. The concept of conserva-         solubility of metals, complexation and oxidation-       This course develops an understanding of the
tion of mass is used to derive the general transport      reduction reactions. These principles will be           managerial principles and techniques used
equation. This equation is applied to analyze             applied to understanding of the chemistry of sur-       throughout a construction project as they are
BOD, DO, temperature, nutrients and plankton              face waters and groundwaters, and to understand-        applied to its planning, preconstruction and con-
population dynamics. Fate of toxic pollutants is          ing the behavior of chemical processes used in          struction phases. The course emphasizes the
also addressed.                                           water and wastewater treatment.                         integrative challenges of the human, physical and
CE 566. Groundwater Flow and                              CE 572. Physical and Chemical
                                                                                                                  capital resources as experienced from the owner’s
Pollution                                                                                                         point of view in the preconstruction phase of a
                                                          Treatment Processes                                     project. Through assignments and case studies, the
This course provides a review of the basic princi-        This course presents the physical and chemical
ples governing ground water flow and solute                                                                       course reviews the complex environment of the
                                                          principles for the treatment of dissolved and par-      construction industry and processes, project cost-
transport, and examines the models available for          ticulate contaminants in water and wastewater.
prediction and analysis including computer mod-                                                                   ing and economic evaluation, project organization,
                                                          These concepts will provide an understanding of         value engineering, time scheduling, contracting
els. Topics covered include mechanics of flow in          the design of commonly used unit operations in
porous media; development of the equations of                                                                     and risk allocation alternatives, contract adminis-
                                                          treatment systems. Applications will be discussed       tration, and cost and time control techniques.
motion and of conservation of solute mass; ana-           as well. Topics covered include water characteris-
lytical solutions; and computer-based numerical           tics, reactor dynamics, filtration, coagulation/floc-   CE 581. Real Estate Development
approaches and application to seepage, well analy-        culation, sedimentation, adsorption, gas stripping,     Principles of real estate development, emphasizing
sis, artificial recharge, groundwater pollution, sa-      disinfection, and chemical oxidation.                   the system approach to the process of conception,
linity intrusion and regional groundwater analyses.                                                               design, construction and operation; organization
                                                          CE 573. Treatment System Hydraulics                     and control systems for real estate development,
CE 567. Hazardous Waste:                                  Hydraulic principles of water, domestic wastewater      value and decision analysis.
Containment, Treatment and Prevention                     and industrial wastewater systems. Hydraulic
This course provides a survey of the areas associat-      analysis and design of collection, distribution and     CE 582. Engineering and
ed with hazardous waste management. The course            treatment systems and equipment. Topics covered         Construction Information Systems
materials deal with identification of hazardous           include pipe and channel flow, pump characteris-        This course provides an understanding of the vari-
waste legislation, containment, storage, transport,       tics and selection, friction loss, corrosion and        ous subjects involved in the use, design, develop-
treatment and other hazardous wastes manage-              material selection.                                     ment, implementation and maintenance of com-
ment issues. Topics include hazardous movement                                                                    puter-based information systems in the construc-
and containment strategies, barrier design consid-        CE 574. Water Resources                                 tion industry. Theoretical and hands-on review of
erations, hazardous waste risk assessment, spill          Management                                              basic building blocks of information and decision
response and clean-up technologies, centralized           This course provides an introduction to water           support systems including user interfaces, database
treatment facilities, on-site treatment, in situ treat-   resources engineering and management, with an           management systems, object-oriented approaches
ment, and industrial management and control               emphasis on water resources protection and water        and multimedia. Applications include project
measures. Design of selected containment and              supply. Course content addresses technical aspects      scheduling and cost control, budgeting, project
treatment systems, and a number of industrial case        as well as the legal, regulatory and policy aspects     risk analysis, construction accounting, materials
studies are also covered. This course is offered to       of water resources management. Topics include           management and procurement systems, project
students with varying backgrounds. Students               surface water hydrology and watershed protection,       document tracking and resource management.
interested in taking this course must identify a          development of water supplies, conjunctive use of       Commercial software—such as PRIMAVERA
specific problem that deals with either regulation,       groundwater and surface water, management of            Project Planner, TIMBERLINE, and spreadsheets
containment of hazardous waste, treatment of              reservoirs and rivers, the role of probability and      and databases— is extensively used. Students are
hazardous waste or industrial source reduction of         statistics, systems analysis techniques, and plan-      required to complete a term project reviewing an
hazardous waste. This problem becomes the focal           ning of water resources projects.                       existing information system and presenting recom-
point for in-depth study. The arrangement of top-                                                                 mendations for improvement.
ics between the students and the instructor must          CE 579. Planning and Designing for a
                                                                                                                  (Prerequisites: A knowledge of the material cov-
be established by the third week. A knowledge of          Sustainable Built and Natural                           ered in CE 580, CE 584 and CE 585 is expected).
basic chemistry is assumed.                               Environment                                             Course may be offered by special arrangement.
                                                          The planning and designing for a sustainable built
CE 570. Multiphase Contaminant                            and natural environment contrasts with the sprawl       CE 583. Contracts and Law
Transport                                                 and resource use which is occurring presently.          for Civil Engineers
Introduces concepts of transport processes in the         Sustainable development, whether it be an indi-         An introduction to the legal aspects of construc-
environment with emphasis on exchanges across             vidual home, an office building, a neighborhood,        tion project management, emphasis on legal prob-
phase boundaries. Topics include equilibrium con-         a town/city, a region, or a nation, necessitates        lems directly applied to the practice of project
ditions of environmental interfaces; partitioning         planning and designing with an understanding of         management, contracts and specifications docu-
and distribution of contaminants in the environ-          social, economic and aesthetic factors, as well as      ments, codes and zoning laws, and labor laws.
ment; transport in surface water; dispersion, sorp-       impact on scarce and nonrenewable resources. A
tion and the movement of nonaqueous phase                 knowledge of the availability of limited resources,
liquids in groundwater; exchanges across air-water        density assumptions and population demands, as


     CE 584. Advanced Cost Estimating                        CE 593. Advanced Project                                combinatorics, the solution of recurrence relations
     Procedures                                              This capstone project is intended for students          and the establishment of asymptotic bounds. A
     This course examines cost estimating as a key           completing the M.E. degree. The student is              number of algorithms and advanced data struc-
     process in planning, designing and constructing         expected to identify all aspects of the M.E. cur-       tures are discussed, as well as paradigms for algo-
     buildings. Topics include the analysis of the ele-      riculum and an integrative, descriptive systems         rithm design. (Prerequisites: The ability to write a
     ments of cost estimating; database development          approach. The project activity requires the student     structured program in a recursive language and a
     and management, productivity, unit costs, quanti-       to describe the development, design construction,       knowledge of discrete mathematics at the under-
     ty surveys and pricing, and the application of          maintenance and operation process for an actual         graduate level.)
     these tools in business situations; marketing, sales,   facility; to evaluate the performance of the facility
                                                                                                                     CS 505. Social Implications of
     bidding, negotiating, value engineering, cost           with respect to functional and operational objec-
                                                             tives; and to examine alternative solutions. Specific   Computing
     control, claims management and cost history.
                                                             areas of study are selected by the student and          This course is concerned with the effects of com-
     Computerization is evaluated as an enhancement
                                                             approved by the faculty member. The work may            puter technology on society. It will explore a wide
     to the process.
                                                             be accomplished by individuals or small groups of       range of topics including privacy, liability, propri-
     CE 585. Information Technology in the                   students working on the same project.                   etary protection, the effects of artificial intelli-
     Integration of Civil Engineering                        (Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.)                  gence on humanity’s view of itself and globaliza-
     This course provides an understanding and hands-                                                                tion. It will also consider the issues of professional
     on experience of state-of-the-art information tech-     CE 599. M.S. Thesis                                     ethics and professional responsibility, as well as
     nology and its application to the planning, design,     Research study at the M.S. level.                       discrimination in the workplace, in education and
     construction and management of civil engineering                                                                in user interfaces. Papers, presentations, discus-
                                                             CE 699. Ph.D. Thesis                                    sions, extensive readings and a course project are
     projects. These technologies include integrated
                                                             Research study at the Ph.D. level.                      possible components of this course. (Prerequisites:
     database management systems, electronic data
     interchange (EDI), electronic media for date                                                                    A college degree and either two computer science
     input/output (bar coding, voice recognition,            Computer Science                                        classes or a year’s experience in the computer
                                                                                                                     industry including sales and management.)
     image processing), networks and knowledge-based
     systems. The course format includes formal lec-         CS 501. Discrete Structures/
                                                             MA 530. Discrete Mathematics                            CS 507. Data Structures and Analysis
     tures, computer laboratory sessions and a class
                                                             Topics from discrete mathematics relevant to com-       of Algorithms
     project developed collaboratively by the students
                                                             puter science are presented in a way that helps the     This course studies different data structures from
     throughout the term. Using information technolo-
                                                             student develop a facility for dealing with abstrac-    the point of view of the operations performed
     gy, the class develops a package that includes
                                                             tions and formal proofs. These topics include sets,     upon the data, and to apply analysis and design
     drawings, specifications, cost estimate and sched-
                                                             relations, posets, graphs, digraphs, monoids,           techniques to non-numeric algorithms that act on
     ule of a civil engineering project.
                                                             groups, discrete probability theory and proposi-        data structures. Data structures are presented as
     (Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of computers and
                                                             tional calculus. (Prerequisites: College math at        abstract objects admitting certain operations.
     construction project management.)
                                                             least through calculus and some experience with         Choices of internal representations and algorithms
     CE 586. Building Systems                                recursive programming.)                                 to implement them are covered in some detail.
     This course introduces design concepts, compo-                                                                  The data structures covered include lists, stacks,
                                                             NOTE: This course is intended only for students         queues, priority queues, trees, balanced trees,
     nents, materials and processes for major building       with a limited formal computer science background
     projects. The topics analyze the choice of founda-                                                              graphs and dictionaries. Projects and assignments
                                                             and should only be taken with advisor or instructor     will treat the development of theoretical results,
     tions, structures, building enclosures and other        approval.*
     major building subsystems as affected by environ-                                                               the writing of programs to obtain practical results
     mental and legal conditions, and market and             CS 502. Operating Systems                               and techniques to integrate different data struc-
     project constraints. Consideration is given to the      The design and theory of multiprogrammed oper-          tures in complex algorithms that place a variety of
     functional and physical interfaces among building       ating systems, concurrent processes, process com-       demands upon them. (Prerequisites: The student
     subsystems. Emphasis is given to the processes          munication, input/output supervisors, memory            is expected to know a recursive programming lan-
     through which design decisions are made in the          management, resource allocation and scheduling are      guage, to have taken two years of college math
     evolution of a building project.                        studied. (Prerequisites: Knowledge of computer          and an undergraduate course in data structures,
                                                             organization and elementary data structures, and a      and to have exposure to formal mathematics as
     CE 590. Special Problems                                strong programming background.)                         might be found in CS 501.)
     2 to 4 credits
                                                                                                                     NOTE: This course is intended only for students
     Individual investigations or studies of any phase of    CS 503. Foundations of Computer                         with a limited formal computer science background
     civil engineering as may be selected by the student     Science                                                 and should only be taken with advisor or instructor
     and approved by the faculty member who super-           The foundations of computer science are present-        approval.*
     vises the work.                                         ed here. These form the basis for a more complete
                                                             understanding of and proficiency in computer sci-       CS 509. Design of Software Systems
     CE 591 Environmental Engineering                                                                                This course focuses on the high-level design
                                                             ence. Topics include logic, computational models,
     Seminar                                                 formal languages, computability and complexity          aspects of software engineering. Included are
     Participation of students in discussing topics of                                                               architectural and interface design. Within archi-
                                                             theory. (Prerequisite: Undergraduate or graduate
     interest to environmental engineers.                                                                            tectural design, the topics covered are Yourdan
                                                             level discrete structures such as CS 2022, CS 501
                                                             or MA 2201.)                                            structured design, Jackson structured design and
     CE 592. Constructed Facilities Seminar
                                                                                                                     object-oriented design. When possible, real-time
     Participation of students, faculty and recognized
                                                             CS 504. Analysis of Computations                        extensions are discussed. Sufficient coverage of the
     experts outside of WPI in developing modern and
     advanced topics of interest in the constructed
                                                             and Systems                                             areas of requirements specification and testing is
                                                             The following tools for the analysis of computer        given to support the above topics.
     facilities area.
                                                             programs and systems are studied: probability,
                                                                                                                     * The course does not provide graduate credit
                                                                                                                       toward a CS degree.

                                                                                              COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

(Prerequisites: Knowledge of a recursive high-level    CS 534. Artificial Intelligence                         will examine some of the recent AI-based work on
language and data structures. An undergraduate         This course gives a broad survey of artificial intel-   design problem-solving. The course will be run in
course in software engineering is desirable.)          ligence. Several basic techniques such as search        seminar style, with readings from the current
                                                       methods, formal proofs and knowledge representa-        literature and with student presentations. The
CS 513/EE 506. Introduction to Local                                                                           domains will include electrical engineering design,
                                                       tion are covered. Selected topics involving the
and Wide Area Networks                                 applications of these tools are investigated. Such      mechanical engineering design, civil engineering
This course provides an introduction to the theory     topics might include natural language understand-       design and software design (i.e., automatic pro-
and practice of the design of computer and com-        ing, scene understanding, game playing, learning        gramming). This course will be of interest to those
munications networks, including the ISO seven-         and planning. (Prerequisites: A familiarity with        wanting to prepare for research in design, or those
layer reference model. Analysis of network topolo-     data structures and a recursive high-level language.    wishing to increase their understanding of expert
gies and protocols, including performance analy-       Knowledge of LISP is an advantage.)                     systems. Graduate students from departments
sis, is treated. Current network types including                                                               other than computer science are welcome.
local area and wide area networks are introduced,      CS 535. Advanced Topics                                 (Prerequisite: Knowledge of artificial intelligence is
as are evolving network technologies. The theory,      in Operating Systems                                    required. This can only be waived with permission
design and performance of local area networks are      This course discusses advanced topics in the theo-      of the instructor).
emphasized. The course includes an introduction        ry, design and implementation of operating sys-
to queueing analysis and network programming.          tems. Topics will be selected from such areas as        CS 542. Database Management
(Prerequisites: A knowledge of the C programming       performance of operating systems, distributed           Systems
language is assumed. CS 504 or EE 502 or equiva-       operating systems, operating systems for multi-         An introduction to the theory and design of data-
lent background in probability may be taken con-       processor systems and operating systems research.       base management systems. Topics covered include
currently.)                                            (Prerequisites: CS 502 and CS 504, or equivalent        internals of database management systems, funda-
                                                       background in probability.)                             mental concepts in database theory, and database
CS 514/EE 572. Advanced Systems                                                                                application design and development. In particular,
Architecture                                           CS 536. Programming Language                            logical design and conceptual modeling, physical
See EE 572 course description on page 94.              Design                                                  database design strategies, relational data model
                                                       This course discusses the fundamental concepts          and query languages, query optimization, transac-
CS 525. Topics in Computer Science                                                                             tion management and distributed databases. Typi-
                                                       and general principles underlying current pro-
A topic of current interest is covered in detail.
                                                       gramming languages and models. Topics include           cally there are hands-on assignments and/or a
(Prerequisites: Vary with topic.) Please consult the
                                                       control and data abstractions, language processing      course project. Selected topics from the current
department for a current listing of selected topics
                                                       and binding, indeterminacy and delayed evalua-          database research literature may be touched upon
in this area.
                                                       tion, and languages and models for parallel and         as well. (Prerequisite: CS 504 or permission of the
CS 530/EE 530. High-Performance                        distributed processing. A variety of computational      instructor.)
Networks                                               paradigms are discussed: functional programming,
                                                       logic programming, object-oriented programming          CS 543. Computer Graphics
This course is an in-depth study of the theory,                                                                This course examines typical graphics systems,
design and performance of high-speed networks.         and data flow programming. (Prerequisites: Stu-
                                                       dent is expected to know a recursive programming        both hardware and software; design of low-level
Topics include specific high-performance network                                                               software support for raster displays; 3-D surface
implementations and emerging technologies,             language and to have an undergraduate course in
                                                       data structures.)                                       and solids modeling; hidden line and hidden
including multimedia networks and quality of ser-                                                              surface algorithms; and realistic image rendering
vice issues. Topics associated with interconnecting    CS 538. Expert Systems                                  including shading, shadowing, reflection, refrac-
networks such as bridges and routers will also be      The course will review expert knowledge-based           tion and surface texturing. (Prerequisites: A famil-
discussed. Performance analysis of networks will       problem-solving systems. It will concentrate on an      iarity with data structures, a recursive high-level
include basic queueing models.                         analysis of the architecture, knowledge and prob-       language and linear algebra. CS 509 would be
(Prerequisite: CS 513/EE 506.)                         lem-solving style of each system in order to classify   helpful.)
CS 531. System Simulation                              and compare them. For each system, an attempt
                                                       will be made to evaluate its contribution to our        CS 544. Compiler Construction
The theory and design of discrete simulations are                                                              A general approach to the design of language
discussed. Other topics are random number gener-       understanding of problems that expert systems can
                                                       tackle. (Prerequisite: CS 534 or equivalent, or per-    processors is presented without regard for either
ations, analysis of output and optimization.                                                                   the source language or target machine. All phases
(Prerequisites: CS 504 or equivalent background        mission of the instructor.)
                                                                                                               of compilation and interpretation are investigated
in probability, and some background in statistics.)    CS 539. Machine Learning                                in order to give the student an appreciation for the
                                                       The focus of this course is machine learning for        overall construction of a compiler. Typical projects
CS 533/EE 581. Modeling and
                                                       knowledge-based systems. It will include reviews        may include implementation of a small compiler
Performance Evaluation of Network                                                                              for a recursive or special-purpose language.
                                                       of work on similarity-based learning (induction),
and Computer Systems                                   explanation-based learning, analogical and case-        (Prerequisites: A knowledge of several higher-level
Methods and concepts of computer and commu-            based reasoning and learning, and knowledge             languages and at least one assembly language. The
nication network modeling and system perfor-           compilation. It will also consider other approaches     material in CS 503 is helpful.)
mance – evaluation. Stochastic processes; measure-     to automated knowledge acquisition as well as
ment techniques; monitor tools; statistical analysis   connectionist learning. (Prerequisite: CS 534 or        CS 545/EE 545. Digital Image
of performance experiments; simulation models;         equivalent, or permission of the instructor.)           Processing
analytic modeling and queueing theory; M/M,                                                                    This course presents fundamental concepts of
Erlang, G/M, M/G, batch arrival, bulk service and      CS 540. Artificial Intelligence in                      digital image processing and an introduction to
priority systems; work load characterization;          Design                                                  machine vision. Image processing topics will
performance evaluation problems.                       The main goal of this course is to obtain a deeper      include visual perception, image formation, imag-
(Prerequisites: CS 504 or EE 502 or equivalent         understanding of what “design” is, and how AI           ing geometries, image transform theory and appli-
background in probability.)                            might be used to support and study it. Students         cations, enhancement, restoration, encoding and


     compression. Machine vision topics will include         instructor. Research papers from recent journals
     feature extraction and representation, stereo           and conferences are used. Group project required.     Electrical and Computer
     vision, model-based recognition, motion and
     image flow, and pattern recognition. Students will
                                                             (Prerequisites: CS 542 or equivalent. Expected
                                                             background includes a knowledge of relational
     be required to complete programming assignments         database systems.)                                    EE 502. Analysis of Probabilistic
     in a high-level language. (Prerequisites: A working                                                           Signals and Systems
     knowledge of undergraduate level signal analysis        CS 562. Advanced Topics
                                                                                                                   Applications of probability theory and its engineer-
     and linear algebra; familiarity with probability the-   in Software Engineering                               ing applications. Random variables, distribution
     ory is helpful but not necessary.)                      This course focuses on the nondesign aspects of
                                                                                                                   and density functions. Functions of random vari-
                                                             software engineering. Topics may include require-
                                                                                                                   ables, moments and characteristic functions.
     CS 546. Human-Computer Interaction                      ments specification, software quality assurance,
                                                                                                                   Sequences of random variables, stochastic conver-
     This course prepares graduate students for research     software project management and software main-
                                                                                                                   gence and the central limit theorem. Concept of a
     in human-computer interaction. Topics include           tenance. (Prerequisite: CS 509.)
                                                                                                                   stochastic process, stationary processes and ergodic-
     the design and evaluation of interactive computer
                                                             CS 563. Advanced Topics                               ity. Correlation functions, spectral analysis and
     systems, basic psychological considerations of
                                                                                                                   their application to linear systems. Mean square
     interaction, interactive language design, interactive   in Computer Graphics
                                                                                                                   estimation. (Prerequisite: Undergraduate course in
     hardware design and special input/output tech-          This course examines one or more selected current
                                                                                                                   signals and systems.)
     niques. Students are expected to present and            issues in the area of image synthesis. Specific
     review recent research results from the literature,     topics covered are dependent on the instructor.       EE 503. Digital Signal Processing
     and to complete several projects.                       Potential topics include: scientific visualization,   Discrete-time signals and systems, frequency
     (Prerequisites: Students are expected to have           computational geometry, photo-realistic image         analysis, sampling of continuous time signals, the
     mature programming skills. Knowledge of soft-           rendering and computer animation.                     z-transform, implementation of discrete time sys-
     ware engineering would be an advantage.)                (Prerequisite: CS 543 or equivalent.)                 tems, the discrete Fourier transform, fast Fourier
                                                                                                                   transform algorithms, filter design techniques.
     CS 549. Computer Vision                                 CS 577/EE 537.
                                                                                                                   (Prerequisites: Courses in complex variables, basic
     This course examines current issues in the com-         Advanced Computer and                                 signals and systems.)
     puter implementation of visual perception. Topics       Communications Networks
     include image formation, edge detection, segmen-        This course covers advanced topics in the theory,     EE 504. Analysis of Deterministic
     tation, shape-from-shading, motion, stereo, tex-        design and performance of computer and commu-         Signals and Systems
     ture analysis, pattern classification and object        nications networks. Topics will be selected from      Review of Fourier series and linear algebra. Fourier
     recognition. We will discuss various representa-        such areas as local area networks, metropolitan       transforms, Laplace transforms, Z transforms and
     tions for visual information, including sketches        area networks, wide area networks, queueing mod-      their interrelationship. State space modeling of
     and intrinsic images. (Prerequisites: CS 534, CS        els of networks, routing, flow control, new tech-     continuous-time and discrete-time systems. Can-
     543, CS 545, or the equivalent of one of these          nologies and protocol standards. The current liter-   nonical forms, solution of state equations, control-
     courses.)                                               ature will be used to study new networks concepts     lability, observability and stability of linear sys-
                                                             and emerging technologies. (Prerequisite: CS 513/     tems. Pole placement via state feedback, observer
     CS 552/MA 510. Numerical Methods
                                                             EE 506 and CS 533/EE 581.)                            design, Lyapunov stability analysis.
     See MA 510 course description on page 103.
                                                                                                                   (Prerequisite: Undergraduate course in signals and
     CS 553. Theory of Computability                         CS 578/EE 578. Cryptography and                       systems.)
     This course investigates the principal concerns of      Data Security
     computability theory and presents several alternate     See EE 578 course description on page 95.             EE 505. Computer Architecture
     formulations of the Church-Turing Thesis.                                                                     This course introduces the fundamentals of com-
                                                             CS 595/EE 595. Computer and                           puter system architecture and organization. Topics
     Starting where the computability portion of CS
     503 leaves off, the interrelationships between
                                                             Communications Networks Internship                    include CPU structure and function, addressing
                                                             6 credits                                             modes, instruction formats, memory system orga-
     mathematics and computation are explored using
                                                             This project will provide an opportunity to put       nization, memory mapping and hierarchies, con-
     several different approaches. (Prerequisite: CS
                                                             into practice the principles which have been stud-    cepts of cache and virtual memories, storage sys-
                                                             ied in previous courses. It will generally be con-    tems, standard local buses, high-performance I/O,
     CS 559. Advanced Topics in                              ducted off campus and will involve a real-world       computer communication, basic principles of
     Theoretical Computer Science                            networking situation. Overall conduct of the          operating systems, multiprogramming, multipro-
     This course has an instructor-dependent syllabus.       internship will be supervised by a WPI faculty        cessing, pipelining and memory management. The
                                                             member, and an on-site liaison will direct day-to-    architecture principles underlying RISC and CISC
     CS 561. Advanced Topics in                              day activity. The project must include substantial    processors are presented in detail. The course also
     Database Systems                                        analysis and/or design related to computer or         includes a number of design projects, including
     This course covers modern database and informa-         communications networking, and will conclude          simulating a target machine, architecture using a
     tion systems as well as research issues in the field.   with a substantial written report. A public oral      high-level language (HLL).
     Topics and systems covered may include object-          presentation must also be made, to both the host      (Prerequisites: Undergraduate course in logic cir-
     oriented, workflow, active, deductive, spatial, tem-    organization and a committee consisting of the        cuits and microprocessor system design, as well as
     poral and multimedia databases. Also discussed          supervising faculty member, the on-site liaison and   proficiency in assembly language and a structured
     will be recent advances in database systems such as     one additional WPI faculty member. Successful         high-level language such as C or Pascal.)
     data mining, on-line analytical processing, data        completion of the internship will be verified by
     warehousing, declarative and visual query lan-          this committee. For a student from industry, an       EE 506/CS513. Introduction to
     guages, multimedia database tools, web and              internship may be sponsored by his or her             Local and Wide Area Networks
     unstructured data sources, and client-server and        employer. (Prerequisite: Completion of 12 credits     This course provides an introduction to the theory
     heterogeneous systems. The specific subset of top-      of the CCN program.)                                  and practice of the design of computer and com-
     ics for a given course offering is selected by the                                                            munications networks, including the ISO seven-

                                                                                               COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

layer reference model. Analysis of network topolo-     scattering parameter analysis, microwave filters,         EE 530/CS 530. High Performance
gies and protocols, including performance analy-       matching networks, power flow relations, unilater-        Networks
sis, is treated. Current network types and evolving    al and bilateral amplifier designs, stability analysis,   This course is an in-depth study of the theory,
network technologies are introduced, including         oscillators circuits, mixers and microwave antennas       design and performance of high-speed networks.
local, metropolitan and wide area networks. The        for wireless communication systems.                       Topics include specific high-performance network
theory, design and performance of local area net-      (Prerequisites: EE 501 Modern Signal Analysis,            architectures and protocols and emerging technol-
works are emphasized. The course includes an           undergraduate course in electromagnetic field             ogies including multimedia networks and quality-
introduction to queueing analysis and network          analysis.)                                                of-service issues. Topics associated with intercon-
programming. (Prerequisites: A knowledge of the                                                                  necting networks such as bridges and routers will
C programming language is assumed. CS 504 or           EE 523. Power Electronics
                                                       The application of electronics to energy conver-          also be discussed. Performance analysis of net-
EE 502 or equivalent background in probability;                                                                  works will include basic queueing models.
may be taken concurrently. NOTE: Students who          sion and control. Electrical and thermal character-
                                                       istics of power semiconductor devices—diodes,             (Prerequisite: EE 506/CS 513.)
receive credit for EE 573 may not receive credit
for EE 506.)                                           bipolar transistors and thyristors. Magnetic com-
                                                       ponents. State-space averaging and sampled-data           EE 531. Principles of Detection and
EE 508. Telecommunications Policy                      models. Emphasis is placed on circuit techniques.         Estimation Theory
This course provides an understanding of some of       Application examples include dc-dc conversion,            Detection of signals in noise, optimum receiver
the major trends and issues involved in the devel-     controlled rectifiers, high-frequency inverters,          principles, M-ary detection, matched filters,
opment of U.S. telecommunications and informa-         resonant converters and excitation of electric            orthogonal signals and representations of random
tion technology policies. The course highlights the    machines. (Prerequisites: EE 3204 and undergrad-          processes. MAP and maximum likelihood estima-
interaction between technology and policy; it will     uate courses in modern signal theory and control          tion. Wiener filtering and Kalman filtering.
help engineers to accept the reality that, in the      theory; EE 504 is recommended.)                           Channel considerations: pre-whitening, fading and
introduction of new technologies, policy consider-                                                               diversity combining. (Prerequisites: EE 502 and
ations often play a more important role than do        EE 524. Advanced Analog Integrated                        EE 504 or equivalent.)
technological advances. The course traces the his-     Circuit Design
                                                       This course is an introduction to the design of           EE 532. Digital Communications:
torical development of U.S. telecommunications
policy from supporting a regulated monopoly to         analog and mixed analog-digital CMOS integrated           Modulation and Coding
the creation of the current increasingly more com-     circuits for communication and instrumentation            Studies various modulation techniques and coding
petitive and less regulated information market-        applications. An overview of the CMOS fabrica-            schemes for digital communications over additive
place. Topics explored include: the difficulties       tion process shows the differences between discrete       white Gaussian noise channels. Overview of
involved in assessing newly emerging technologies;     and integrated circuit design. The MOS transistor         communication networks, and relation to link
regulation and deregulation of the telecommunica-      is reviewed with basic device physics and the             design and modem design technology. Represen-
tions and information industries; the past, present    development of circuit models in various operat-          tation of bandpass signals. Binary and M-ary sig-
and future concept of universal service; the con-      ing regions. The use of SPICE simulation in the           naling, basic modulation techniques: PSK, FSK,
vergence of telecommunications, computer and           design process will be covered. Integrated MOS            PAM, QAM and MSK. Timing and phase recov-
television technologies to create the information      amplifier circuits are developed with an emphasis         ery. Introduction to information theory, source
network of the future; current competition in          on understanding performance advantages and               coding and channel coding. Signaling with coded
local, long-distance, wireless and multimedia ser-     limitation in such areas as speed, noise and power        waveforms, soft decision and hard decision block
vices; issues related to standards, interoperability   dissipation. Simple circuits are combined to form         codes, convolutional codes and Trellis Code
and intellectual property.                             the basic functional building blocks such as the          Modulation. Characterization of time-dispersive
                                                       op-amp, comparator, voltage reference, etc. These         band-limited channels and intersymbol interfer-
EE 512. Acoustic and Ultrasound                        circuit principles will be explored in an IC design       ence (ISI). (Prerequisite: EE 502.)
Engineering                                            project, which may be fabricated in a commercial
                                                                                                                 EE 533. Advances in
Fundamentals of vibration. The acoustic wave           analog CMOS process. Examples of possible top-
equation, transmission phenomena, absorption           ics include sample-and-hold (S/H) amplifier, ana-         Digital Communication
and attenuation. Radiation from acoustic sources,      log-to-digital (A/D) and digital-to-analog (D/A)          Methods for ISI reduction: linear, decision feed-
dipole and line source radiation, planar piston        converters, phase-locked loop (PLL), voltage-             back, pass band and fractionally spaced equalizers;
source, radiation patterns, beam width, directivity,   controlled oscillator, phase detector, switched           maximum likelihood sequence estimation
fields from pulsed transducers, Green’s function,      capacitor and continuous-time filters, and sampled        (MLSE). Fast start-up equalization, blind equali-
diffraction, reciprocity. Techniques for ultrasound    current techniques. (Prerequisite: Background in          zation and echo-cancellation. Characterization of
modeling. Acoustic waveguides. Ultrasound trans-       analog circuits both at the transistor and function-      fading multipath channels such as troposcatter,
ducer types and transducer modeling. Transducer        al block [op-amp, comparator, etc.] level. Also           HF, microwave line-of-sight, urban and indoor
characterization and calibration. Acoustic mea-        familiarity with techniques such as small-signal          radio. Digital signaling over fading multipath
surements techniques. (Prerequisites: EE 502 and       modeling and analysis in the s-plane using Laplace        channels. Methods to improve performance in
EE 504 or equivalent, undergraduate course in          transforms. Undergraduate course equivalent               fading multipath channels: diversity combining,
modern signal theory, undergraduate course in          background EE 3204; EE 4902 helpful but not               coding and equalization. Introduction to spread
E/M field theory, or permission of the instructor.)    essential.)                                               spectrum communication: code division multiple
                                                                                                                 access, performance in fading channels. Multiple
EE 514 Fundamentals of RF and MW                       EE 529. Selected Topics in Electronic                     access techniques in radio networks.
Engineering                                            System Design                                             (Prerequisite: EE 532 or equivalent).
This introductory course develops a comprehen-         Courses in this group are devoted to the study of
                                                                                                                 EE 534. Adaptive Space-Time Filtering
sive understanding of Maxwell’s field theory as        advanced topics in electronic system design.
applied to high-frequency radiation, propagation                                                                 and Spectral Estimation
and circuit phenomena. Topics include radio-                                                                     This course presents adaptive algorithms used in
frequency (RF) and microwave (MW) propagation                                                                    spatial beamforming and temporal filtering. It also
modes, transmission line aspects, Smith Chart,                                                                   includes algorithms used in spectral estimation.


     Topics covered include: single-channel (single-       EE 539. Selected Topics in                              EE 569. Selected Topics in Solid State
     sensor) temporal processing and multisensor/          Communication Theory and Signal                         Courses in this group are devoted to the study of
     multichannel spatial-temporal processing; FFT-                                                                advanced topics in solid state, for example: degen-
     based, nonparametric algorithms; channel estima-                                                              erate semiconductors, many-body theory, elastic
                                                           Topics from the following: sensitivity and error
     tion, Welch’s method, parametric spectral estima-                                                             effects and phonon conduction, and solar cells. To
                                                           analysis in linear systems; band-limited signals; the
     tion, autoregressive modeling, Levinson-Durbin                                                                reflect changes in faculty research interests, these
                                                           uncertainty principle; bandwidth compression,
     algorithms, Burge algorithm and maximum                                                                       courses may be modified or new courses may be
                                                           nonstationary processes; radio and inter-symbol
     entropy method; lattice structures; and adaptive                                                              added.
                                                           interference. Current problems in digital and ana-
     transversal filters. It also covers the LMS and RLS
                                                           log communications; two-dimensional Fourier
     algorithm, algorithms based on parameter estima-                                                              EE 569A Advanced Solid-State
                                                           analysis; pattern recognition; Fourier optics. Time-
     tion using ML techniques, direction finding, con-
                                                           series analysis, radar signals, graph theory and in-
     jugate gradient descent algorithms, Matrix decom-                                                             The operation of the MOS transistor will be
                                                           formation theory. The content of this course will
     positions, QR and SVD, and subspace tracking                                                                  explored in detail, resulting in thorough under-
                                                           change from year to year.
     algorithms will also be covered.                                                                              standing of observed phenomena. Device behavior
     (Prerequisite: EE 502 and EE 503; 531 is recom-       EE 539S. Mobile Data Networking                         will be explained using the energy band diagram
     mended).                                              This course presents the principles of wireless data    and modeled for large and small signals as well as
                                                           communications by introducing the state-of-the-         high frequencies. Sources of noise, sub-threshold
     EE 535. Telecommunications                                                                                    operation, scaling effects, and other non-ideal
                                                           art network architectures, standards and products,
     Transmission Technologies                             and explaining the key factors in evolution of this     behavior will also be addressed. While the MOS
     This course introduces the principal technologies     industry. Overview of wireless networks. Architec-      transistor will be the focus of the course, advanced
     used to implement the physical networking layer.      ture of existing mobile date networks: ARDIS,           topics in bipolar transistor design may also be
     These include high-speed electronic pulse shapers     Mobitex, TETHRA, Merticom, CDPD and                     included. This course is intended for students pur-
     and receivers, optical sources, detectors, fiber      GPRS. Wireless LAN technologies: 802.11,                suing study in either integrated circuit design or
     media, active optical elements, RF devices and sys-   HIPERLAN and wireless ATM. Effects of mobili-           device physics. (Prerequisite: undergraduate analog
     tems, and the related protocols and modulation        ty on different ISO layers. Physical layer options.     electronics)
     schemes for reliable and multi-user communica-        MAC layer in mobile environments. Issues in
     tions (time, frequency, space and code-division       mobile computing. Mobile IP, IP-v6, and DHCP.
                                                                                                                   EE 572/CS 514. Advanced Systems
     multiplexing, error correction coding, spectral re-   Mobility gateway technologies: MASE and                 Architecture
     use, and so on). The course includes laboratory       eNetwork. Intertech roaming and handover for            This course covers techniques such as caching,
     experiments. (Prerequisites: EE 502 or CS 504;        wireless data networks. (Prerequisite: Familiarity      hierarchical memory, pipelining and parallelism,
     undergraduate-level understanding of signal and       with communication networks [EE 506 or similar]         that are used to enhance the performance of com-
     circuit theory.)                                      is desirable.)                                          puter systems. It compares and contrasts different
                                                                                                                   approaches to achieving high performance in
     EE 537/CS 577. Advanced Computer                      EE 545/CS 545. Digital Image                            machines ranging from advanced microprocessors
     and Communications Networks                           Processing                                              to vector supercomputers (CRAY, CYBER). It also
     This course covers advanced topics in the theory,     See CS 545 course description on page 91.               illustrates how these techniques are applied in
     design and performance of computer and commu-                                                                 massively parallel SIMD machines (DAP, Connec-
     nication networks. Topics will be selected from       EE 549. Selected Topics in Control                      tion Machine). In each case the focus is on the
     such areas as local area networks, metropolitan       Courses in this group are devoted to the study of       combined hardware /software performance
     area networks, wide area networks, queuing            advanced topics in the formulation and solution         achieved and the interaction between application
     models of networks, routing, flow control, new        of theoretical or practical problems in modern          demands and hardware/software capabilities.
     technologies and protocol standards. The current      control.                                                (Prerequisites: This course assumes the material
     literature will be used to study new networks con-                                                            covered in EE 505. The student should also have a
     cepts and emerging technologies. (Prerequisite:       EE 559. Selected Topics in                              background in computer programming and oper-
     EE 506/CS 513 and EE 581/CS 533.)                     Energy Systems                                          ating systems (CS 502). Familiarity with basic
                                                           Courses in this group are devoted to the study of       probability and statistics such as EE 502 or
     EE 538. Wireless Information                          advanced topics in energy systems. Typical topics       MA 541 is recommended.)
     Networks                                              include optimal power flow, probability methods
     Overview of wireless information networks and         in power systems analysis, surge phenomena,             EE 574. VHDL Modeling and Synthesis
     personal communications systems: digital cellular,    design of electrical apparatus, transient behavior of   This is an introductory course on the VHDL
     wireless PBX, cordless phone, wireless LAN, and       electric machines and advanced electromechanical        (VHSIC Hardware Description Language) for stu-
     mobile data, multimedia wireless and directions of    energy conversion.                                      dents with no background in VHDL or hardware
     the future. Radio propagation modeling for urban                                                              modeling. In this course we will examine some of
     and indoor radio channels, coverage interface and     EE 566. VLSI Design                                     the important features of VHDL. The course will
     cell size. Modulation techniques for efficient use    VLSI Design introduces computer engineers and           enable students to design, simulate, model and
     of bandwidth resources. Methods to increase the       computer scientists to the techniques, method-          synthesize digital designs. The data flow, structural
     data rate: antenna diversity and sectorization,       ologies and issues involved in conceptual and           and behavioral modeling techniques will be dis-
     adaptive equalization, multirate transmission and     physical design of complex, digital integrated          cussed and related to how they are used to design
     multiamplitude phase modulation. Spread spec-         circuits. The course presupposes knowledge of           combinational and sequential circuits. The use of
     trum for digital cellular, personal communications    computer systems and hardware design such as            test benches to exercise and verify the correctness
     and wireless LAN applications. TDMA, CDMA,            found in EE 505, but does not assume detailed           of hardware models will also be described. Course
     ALOHA, and CSMA, DECT, GSM, USDC,                     knowledge of transistor circuits and physical elec-     projects will involve the modeling and synthesis of
     JDC, IEEE 802.11, WINForum, and HIPER-                tronics. (Prerequisite: EE 505 or equivalent.)          systems using the ECE department VHDL design
     LAN. (Prerequisite: Background in networks.                                                                   tools. (Prerequisites: Logic circuits, programming
     Familiarity with probability, statistics and signal                                                           in a high-level language such as C or Pascal, and a
     processing).                                                                                                  computer architecture course such as EE 505.)

                                                                                               COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EE 578/CS 578. Cryptography and                         EE 579S. Computer Security                              focus of computer arithmetic is the development
Data Security                                           This course provides a comprehensive introduc-          of high-speed arithmetic algorithms, design of
This course gives a comprehensive introduction          tion to the field of computer security. Security        application-specific circuits to enhance the speed
into the field of cryptography and data security.       architectures and their impact on computers are         of numerical applications, and understanding their
The course begins with the introduction of the          examined. Critical computer security aspects are        implementation in ASIC technology. This course
concepts of data security, where classical algo-        identified and examined from the standpoints of         consists of a detailed study of the theory, specifica-
rithms serve as an example. Different attacks on        both the user and the attacker: physical security,      tion and design of basic arithmetic algorithms and
cryptographic systems are classified. Some pseudo-      communications security, system security and            hardware architectures used in digital systems.
random generators are introduced. The concepts          operational security. Computer system vulnerabili-      Topics that will be covered include: number sys-
of public and private key cryptography are devel-       ties are examined, and mitigating approaches are        tems and representation, redundant and residue
oped. As important representatives for secret key       identified and evaluated. Concepts and procedures       syst;ems. Addition/subtraction circuits, multiplica-
schemes, DES and IDEA are described. The pub-           for computer and computer network risk analysis         tion, division, square-root-finding algorithms, and
lic key schemes RSA and ElGamal, and systems            are introduced. An overview of computer security        floating point arithmetic systems.
based on elliptic curves are then developed. Signa-     statutes and case law is presented. The course
                                                                                                                EE 581/CS 533. Modeling and
ture algorithms, hash functions, key distribution       emphasizes a timely approach, maintained by
                                                        using recent examples of computer attacks and the       Performance Evaluation of Network
and identification schemes are treated as advanced
topics. Some advanced mathematical algorithms           resources available to deal with the rapidly chang-     and Computer Systems
for attacking cryptographic schemes are discussed.      ing framework of computer security.                     Methods and concepts of computer and commu-
Application examples will include a protocol for        (Prerequisites: Working knowledge of computers,         nication network modeling and system perfor-
security in a LAN and a secure smart card system        basic computer networks and a programming lan-          mance evaluation. Stochastic processes; measure-
for electronic banking. Special consideration will      guage.)                                                 ment techniques; monitor tools; statistical analysis
be given to schemes which are relevant for net-                                                                 of performance experiments; simulation models;
work environments. For all schemes, implementa-
                                                        EE 579T. Network Security                               analytic modeling and queueing theory; M/M,
                                                        This course provides a comprehensive introduc-          Erlang, G/M, M/G, batch arrival, bulk service and
tion aspects and up-to-date security estimations
                                                        tion to the field of network security. Network          priority systems; work load characterization; per-
will be discussed. (Prerequisites: Working knowl-
                                                        architectures and protocols and their impact on         formance evaluation problems.
edge of C; an interest in discrete mathematics and
                                                        security are examined. Critical network security        (Prerequisites: CS 504 or EE 502, or equivalent
algorithms is highly desirable. Students interested
                                                        aspects are identified and examined from stand-         background in probability.)
in a further study of the underlying mathematics
                                                        points of both the user and the attacker. Network
may register for MA 4891 [B term], where topics
in modern algebra relevant to cryptography will be
                                                        vulnerabilities are examined, and mitigating            EE 595/CS 595. Computer and
                                                        approaches are identified and evaluated. Concepts       Communications Networks Internship
                                                        and procedures for network risk analysis are intro-     6 credits
EE 579. Selected Topics in Computer                     duced. Integration of network and computer secu-        This project will provide an opportunity to put
Engineering                                             rity is introduced. An overview of statutes and         into practice the principles which have been stud-
Courses in this group are devoted to the study of       case law affecting network security is presented.       ied in previous courses. It will generally be con-
advanced topics in computer engineering such as         The course emphasizes a timely approach, main-          ducted off campus and will involve a real-world
real-time intelligent systems, VLSI design and          tained by using recent examples of network vul-         networking situation. Overall conduct of the
high-level languages.                                   nerability. (Prerequisites: Working knowledge of        internship will be supervised by a WPI faculty
                                                        computers, basic computer networks, computer            member, and an on-site liaison will direct day-to-
EE 579R. Advanced Cryptography                          security, and a programming language.)                  day activity. The project must include substantial
This course provides deeper insight into areas of                                                               analysis and/or design related to computer or
cryptography which are of great practical and the-      EE579U Information Security Systems                     communications networking, and will conclude
oretical importance. The three areas treated are        and Management                                          with a substantial written report. A public oral
detailed analysis and the implementation of             This course addresses the essential elements of         presentation must also be made to both the host
crypto-algorithms, advanced protocols, and mod-         turning individually secure workstations and net-       organization and a committee consisting of the
ern attacks against cryptographic schemes. The          works into a secure information system. An engi-        supervising faculty member, the on-site liaison,
first part of the lecture focuses on public key algo-   neering view of how overall security can be             and one additional WPI faculty member. Success-
rithms, in particular ElGamal, elliptic curves and      obtained in the face of individual system elements      ful completion of the internship will be verified by
Diffie-Hellman key exchange. The underlying             that are only partially secure will be undertaken.      this committee. For a student from industry, an
theory of Galois fields will be introduced. Imple-      Risk identification, vulnerability assessment, disas-   internship may be sponsored by his or her em-
mentation of performance security aspects of the        ter planning and recovery, continuity of opera-         ployer. (Prerequisite: Completion of 12 credits in
algorithms will be looked at. The second part of        tions, and interactions of large computer networks      the program.)
the course deals with advanced protocols. New           will be discussed. Essential information on perti-
schemes for authentication, identification and          nent laws and regulations will be included, as will     EE 596A and EE 596B. Graduate
zero-knowledge proof will be introduced. Some           an introduction to computer forensics. A viable         Seminars
complex protocols for real-world application—           systems security design and supporting security         The presentations in the graduate seminar series
such as key distribution in networks and for smart      policy will be developed. (Prerequisites: EE579S,       will be of tutorial nature and will be presented by
cards—will be introduced and analyzed. The third        579T)                                                   recognized experts in various fields of electrical
part will look into state-of-the-art cryptoanalysis                                                             and computer engineering. All full-time graduate
(i.e., ways to break cryptosystems). Brute force
                                                        EE 579V. Computer Arithmetic Circuits                   students will be required to take both seminar
                                                        Computer arithmetic is a subfield of digital com-
attacks based on special purpose machines, the                                                                  courses, EE 596A and EE 596B, once during their
                                                        puter organization. It deals with the hardware real-
baby-step giant-step and the Pohlig-Hellman algo-                                                               graduate studies in the Electrical and Computer
                                                        ization of arithmetic functions to support various
rithms will be discussed. (Prerequisites: EE 578/                                                               Engineering Department. The course will be given
                                                        computer architectures, as well as with arithmetic
CS 578 or equivalent background.)                                                                               Pass/Fail. (Prerequisite: Graduate standing.)
                                                        algorithms for hardware implementation. A major


     EE 597. Independent Study                              for products and systems including interior finish,    fire/smoke detectors are reviewed in the context of
     Approved study of a special subject or topics          wall and floor assemblies, thermal insulation, fur-    contemporary equipment and installation stan-
     selected by the student to meet his or her particu-    niture, bedding and draperies.                         dards. Smoke control systems based on buoyancy
     lar requirements or interests. Can be technical in                                                            and HVAC principles are studied in the context of
                                                            FPE 520. Fire Modeling                                 building smoke control for survivability and safe
     nature, or a review of electrical and computer
                                                            Advanced topics in fire dynamics, combustion and       egress. (Prerequisites: FPE 553. Also FPE 521,
     engineering history and literature of importance
                                                            compartment fire behavior will be discussed within a   which can be taken concurrently.)
     and permanent value. (Prerequisite: B.S. in EE or
                                                            framework of modeling fire and its effects. Topics
                                                            include computer modeling of pre-flashover and         FPE 563/MG 541. Operations Risk
     EE 598. Directed Research                              post-flashover compartment fires, burning charac-      Management
     Each student will work under the direct supervi-       teristics of polymers and other fuels, the effect of   See MG 541 course description on page 98.
     sion of a member of the department staff on an         fire retardants, products of combustion genera-
     experimental or theoretical problem which may          tion, flame spread models, plume and ceiling jet       FPE 565. Firesafety Engineering
     involve an extensive literature search, experimental   models, and overall toxicity assessment. Some          Evaluation
     procedures and analysis. A comprehensive report        familiarity with computer programming is recom-        This course develops techniques to evaluate the
     in the style of a technical report or paper and an     mended. (Prerequisite: FPE 521 or permission of        firesafety performance of a variety of facilities of
     oral presentation are required. (A maximum of          the instructor.)                                       the built environment and to produce manage-
     two registrations in EE 598 is permitted.)                                                                    ment plans for decision making. The framework
                                                            FPE 521. Fire Dynamics I                               for this course is a firesafety engineering method
     (Prerequisite: Graduate standing.)
                                                            This course introduces students to fundamentals        which decomposes the firesafety system into dis-
     EE599 Thesis                                           of fire and combustion and is intended to serve as     crete elements suitable for quantitative evaluation
                                                            the first exposure to fire dynamics phenomena.         using a variety of fire protection engineering and
     EE 630. Advanced Topics                                The course includes fundamental topics in fire         fire science materials. (Prerequisites: FPE 521,
     in Signal Processing                                   and combustion such as thermodynamics of com-          FPE 553 and FPE 570.)
     The course will cover a set of important topics in     bustion, fire chemistry, premixed and diffusion
     signal and image analysis: orthogonal signal           flames, solid and liquid burning, ignition, plumes     FPE 570. Building Fire Safety I
     decomposition, wavelet transforms, analytic            and ceiling jets. These topics are then used to        This course focuses on the presentation of qualita-
     signals, time-frequency estimation, 2D FT,             develop the basis for introducing compartment          tive and quantitative means for firesafety analysis
     Hankel transform and tomographic reconstruc-           fire behavior, pre- and post-flashover conditions      in buildings. Fire test methods, fire and building
     tion. In addition, the course will each year have      and smoke movement. (Prerequisites: Undergrad-         codes and standards of practice are reviewed in the
     selected current topics in signal processing, e.g.,    uate chemistry, thermodynamics or physical chem-       context of a systematic review of firesafety in pro-
     ambiguity functions in RADAR and SONAR,                istry, fluid mechanics and heat transfer.)             posed and existing structures.
     coded waveforms, Fourier based beamforming for
     2D arrays and single value decomposition. In           FPE 553. Fire Protection Systems                       FPE 571. Performance-Based Design
     place of a final exam, there will be a student pro-    This course provides an introduction to automati-      This course covers practical applications of fire
     ject. The course is intended for students working      cally activated fire suppression and detection sys-    protection engineering principles to the design of
     in areas such as image analysis, NDE, ultrasound,      tems. A general overview is presented of relevant      buildings. Both compartmented and non-com-
     audio, speech, RADAR, SONAR and date com-              physical and chemical phenomena, and commonly          partmented buildings will be designed for criteria
     pression. Signal/image theory and applications will    used hardware in automatic sprinkler, gaseous          of life safety, property protection, continuity of
     be emphasized over coding; however, Matlab-            agent, foam and dry chemical systems. Typical          operations, operational management and cost.
     based modules for self-paced signal/image visual-      contemporary installations and current installation    Modern analytical tools as well as traditional codes
     ization and manipulation will be part of the           and approval standards are reviewed.                   and standards are utilized. Interaction with archi-
     course. (Prerequisites: EE504 Analysis of              (Prerequisites: Undergraduate courses in chem-         tects and code officials, and an awareness of other
     Deterministic Signals and Systems, undergraduate       istry, fluid mechanics and either thermodynamics       factors in the building design process are incorpo-
     course in linear systems theory and vector calcu-      or physical chemistry.)                                rated through design exercises and a design studio.
     lus.)                                                                                                         (Prerequisites: FPE 553, FPE 521 and FPE 570,
                                                            FPE 554. Advanced Fire Suppression                     or special permission of the instructor.)
     EE699 Ph.D. Dissertation                               Advanced topics in suppression systems analysis
                                                            and design are discussed with an aim toward            FPE 572. Failure Analysis
                                                            developing a performance-based understanding of        Development of fire investigation and reconstruc-
     Fire Protection                                        suppression technology. Automatic sprinkler sys-       tion as a basis for evaluating and improving fire-
     Engineering                                            tems are covered from the standpoint of predicting
                                                            actuation times, reviewing numerical methods for
                                                                                                                   safety design. Accident investigation theory and
                                                                                                                   failure analysis techniques such as fault trees and
     FPE 510. Flammability Tests, Codes                     hydraulic analyses of pipe flow networks and           event sequences are presented. Fire dynamics and
                                                            understanding the phenomenology involved in            computer modeling are applied to assess possible
     and Standards
                                                            water spray suppression. Special suppression sys-      fire scenarios and the effectiveness of fire protec-
     Code-related fire test standards will be presented
                                                            tems are covered from the standpoint of two-phase      tion measures. The product liability aspects of
     at a level appropriate for fire-protection engineers
                                                            and non-Newtonian pipe flow and simulations of         failure analysis are presented. Topics include
     in a format which includes background on per-
                                                            suppression agent discharge and mixing in an           products liability law, use of standard test meth-
     ceived need to regulate, analysis of the value and
                                                            enclosure. (Prerequisite: FPE 553 or special per-      ods, warnings and safe product design. Applica-
     limitation of test methodology, and effectiveness
                                                            mission of instructor.)                                tion of course materials is developed through pro-
     of code requirements to control combustible
                                                                                                                   jects involving actual case studies.
     materials and mitigate particular fire hazards. Fire   FPE 555. Detection, Alarm and                          (Prerequisite: FPE 521, FPE 553, FPE 570 or spe-
     test standards selected for discussion provide data    Smoke Control                                          cial permission of the instructor.)
     and results which relate to surface flame spread,      Principles of fire detection using flame, heat and
     fire penetration, smoke obscuration, toxic potency     smoke detector technology are described. Fire          FPE 573. Industrial Fire Protection
     of combustion products, and rate of heat release       alarm technology and the electrical interface with     Principles of fire dynamics, heat transfer and ther-
                                                                                                                   modynamics are combined with a general knowl-

                                                                                               COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

edge of automatic detection and suppression sys-        FPE 590. Thesis                                          priate analytical and quantitative skills.
tems to analyze fire protection requirements for        Research study at the M.S. level.                        (Prerequisites: MG 501 or equivalent content, and
generic industrial hazards. Topics covered include                                                               a knowledge of college algebra and basic statistics.)
safe separation distances, plant layout, hazard iso-    FPE 592. Graduate Project
lation, smoke control, warehouse storage, and           This activity requires the student to demonstrate        MG 503. Organizational Behavior
flammable liquid processing and storage. Historic       the capability to integrate advanced firesafety          2 credits
industrial fires influencing current practice on        science and engineering concepts into the profes-        This course introduces concepts, theories and
these topics are also discussed.                        sional practice environment. The work may be             current research in the effective management of
(Prerequisites: FPE 553, FPE 521 or special per-        accomplished by individuals or small groups of           organizations. Topics include the basics of systems
mission of the instructor.)                             students working on the same project. This               thinking, as well as team and group dynamics.
                                                        practicum requires the student to prepare detailed,      The role of perception and motivation in the
FPE 574/CM 594. Process Safety                          written technical reports and make oral presenta-        behavior of the individual is addressed. Cases,
Management                                              tions to communicate the results of their work.          workshops and readings are integrated in a cohe-
This course provides basic skills in state-of-the-art                                                            sive approach to management problems.
process safety management and hazard analysis           FPE 690. Ph.D. Dissertation
techniques including hazard and operability stud-
                                                                                                                 MG 504. Operations Management
                                                                                                                 2 credits
ies (HAZOP), logic trees, failure modes and
effects analysis (FMEA), and consequence analysis.
                                                        Interdisciplinary                                        This course provides students with a broad con-
                                                                                                                 ceptual framework for evaluating operations man-
Both qualitative and quantitative evaluation meth-      IDG 501. Seminar in College Teaching                     agement practices, and for developing useful intu-
ods will be utilized. Following a case study format,    2 credits
                                                                                                                 ition into the strategies and tactics that companies
these techniques along with current regulatory          This seminar is designed to acquaint graduate
                                                                                                                 are employing to become world-class firms. Major
requirements will be applied through class projects     students with some of the basic principles and the-
                                                                                                                 topics are divided into two categories: (1) deci-
addressing environmental health, industrial             ories of education and with instructional practices
                                                                                                                 sions on the design issues, including operations
hygiene, hazardous materials, and fire or explosion     associated with effective college teaching. This
                                                                                                                 strategy, management of technology, process man-
hazard scenarios. (Prerequisite: An undergraduate       information applies without regard to the particu-
                                                                                                                 agement, statistical process control, total quality
engineering or physical science background.)            lar nature of the subject matter being taught; the
                                                                                                                 management, capacity planning, facility location
                                                        emphasis is on the educational process, not the
FPE 575. Explosion Protection                                                                                    and facility layout; and (2) decisions on planning
                                                        disciplinary content. Course activities include
Principles of combustion explosions are taught                                                                   and controlling, such as supply chain manage-
                                                        readings, lectures, discussion, and individual and
along with explosion hazard and protection appli-                                                                ment, forecasting, aggregate planning, inventory
                                                        group projects. Topics covered include an intro-
cations. Topics include a review of flammability                                                                 control, material requirements planning, just-in-
                                                        duction to learning theories, cognitive develop-
limit concentrations for flammable gases and                                                                     time, lean manufacturing principle, scheduling,
                                                        ment and motivation for learning; effective teach-
dusts; thermochemical equilibrium calculations of                                                                project management and others.
                                                        ing skills such as lecturing, class discussion, active
adiabatic closed-vessel deflagration pressures, and     and cooperative learning, and use of instructional       MG 505. Quantitative Methods
detonation pressures and velocities; pressure devel-    technology; evaluating student performance; and          2 credits
opment as a function of time for closed vessels         life as a college professor. Students who have com-      This course provides the background by which a
and vented enclosures; the current status of explo-     pleted IDG 501 will be prepared for ISG 502              modern manager may understand and apply
sion suppression technology; and vapor cloud            Practicum in College Teaching, which is offered as       quantitative methods. Topics covered include
explosion hazards.                                      an independent study on demand.                          descriptive state, probability theory, measures of
FPE 580. Special Problems                                                                                        dispersion and hypothesis testing, and confidence
Individual or group studies on any topic relating       Management                                               descriptions. Additional discussion focuses on cor-
                                                                                                                 relation and regression analysis, as well as analysis
to fire protection may be selected by the student
and approved by the faculty member who super-           MG501. Financial Accounting                              of variance and time series mathematics as applied
vises the work.                                         2 credits                                                to business analysis.
                                                        This course is an introduction to the accounting
FPE 581. Seminar                                        process, its underlying concepts, and the tech-          MG 506. Principles of Marketing
0 credits                                               niques of preparing and analyzing financial state-       2 credits
Reports on current advances in the various              ments. Students are introduced to issues in              This course provides the background by which
branches of fire protection.                            accounting for assets, liabilities and stockholders’     managers may understand consumer and indus-
                                                        equity, and issues in revenue and expense recogni-       trial decision making. Topics covered include seg-
FPE 587. Fire Science Laboratory                        tion. The course demonstrates the role of account-       mentation and target marketing, market research,
This course provides overall instruction and            ing information for users outside the firm, and the      competitor analysis and marketing information
hands-on experience with fire-science-related           application of accounting numbers in financial           systems. Additional discussion focuses on the
experimental measurement techniques. The objec-         analyses and market decisions. Where appropriate,        development of a marketing plan and positioning
tive is to expose students to laboratory-scale fire     emphasis is given to technology-oriented firms.          of the product. Attention is also paid to product
experiments, standard fire tests and state-of-the-art                                                            management, new product development, promo-
measurement techniques. The lateral ignition and        MG 502. Finance                                          tion, price and distribution. Both national and
flame transport (LIFT) apparatus, state-of-the-art      2 credits                                                global aspects of these issues are discussed.
smoke detection systems, closed-cup flashpoint          This course introduces students to the foundations
tests and gas analyzers are among the existing lab-     of modern finance. The student is expected to            MG 507. Management Information
oratory apparatus. Fire-related measurement tech-       gain an understanding of the time value of money,        Systems
niques for temperature, pressure, flow and veloci-      basic security valuation, investment criteria, capi-     2 credits
ty, gas species and heat fluxes, infrared thermome-     tal market history, portfolio theory, and exchange       This course focuses on information technology
try, laser doppler velocimetry (LDV) and laser-         rate risk. These topics are taught using a problem-      and management. Topics covered are information
induced fluorescence (LIF) will be reviewed.            oriented approach with an emphasis on conceptu-          technology and organizations, information tech-
(Prerequisite: FPE 521.)                                al understanding and the acquisition of the appro-       nology and individuals (privacy, ethics, job securi-


     ty, job changes), information technology within         covered include assessment analysis, including         MG 516. Graduate Qualifying Project
     the organization (technology introduction and           controlling quality and tracking customer              in Management (GQP)
     implementation), business process engineering and       response. (Prerequisite: MG 506 or equivalent          4 credits
     information technology between organizations            content, or consent of the instructor.)                This course integrates management theory and
     (electronic data interchange and electronic com-                                                               practice, and incorporates a number of skills and
     merce).                                                 MG 513. Creating Processes in
                                                                                                                    tools acquired in the M.B.A. curriculum. The
                                                             Technological Organizations                            medium is a major project, often for an external
     MG 508. Economics of the Firm                           This course introduces students to the critical role
     2 credits                                                                                                      sponsor, that is completed individually or in
                                                             of processes in modern technological organizations.
     This course covers the basic concepts of supply                                                                teams. In addition to a written report, the project
                                                             This course addresses organizational, technical and
     and demand. Various forms of business                                                                          will be formally presented to members of the
                                                             ethical issues related to designing, analyzing and
     organization (e.g., corporations, partnerships) are                                                            department, outside sponsors and other interested
                                                             reengineering business process. Techniques and
     discussed. Attention is paid to both consumer                                                                  parties. (Prerequisites: All foundation and core
                                                             tools for process design are covered. Key global
     behavior (e.g., utility theory) and firm behavior                                                              courses or equivalent content, or consent of
                                                             processes such as customer service, order fulfill-
     (including production theory and cost analysis).                                                               instructor.)
                                                             ment, and goods/services creation and distribution
     Alternative market structures, including output         processes and their enabling information technolo-     MG531. Managing Organizational
     markets (e.g., competition, monopoly) and inputs        gy are studied in detail. (Prerequisites: MG503,       Change
     (e.g., labor, capital) are addressed. Additional top-   MG 504 and MG 507 or equivalent content, or            This course focuses on the design and implemen-
     ics include the government regulation of markets        consent of instructor.)                                tation of organizational change. The course is
     (e.g., antitrust laws), international trade, and pub-
                                                             MG 514. Business Analysis for                          developed around important theories of change
     lic and merit goods.
                                                                                                                    using technology-based organizations as case stud-
                                                             Technological Managers
     MG 509. Domestic and Global                             4 credits
                                                                                                                    ies. The course also emphasizes the roles and
     Economic Environment of Business                                                                               responsibilities of change management with par-
                                                             This course provides an understanding of the con-
     2 credits                                                                                                      ticular reference to the strategists, implementers
                                                             cepts and tools of business analysis. One major
     This course addresses the role of government in                                                                and recipients of change.
                                                             focus emphasizes how accounting information aids
     the economy, including concepts of income               the planning, control, decision making and evalu-      MG 532. Human Resource
     redistribution, taxation and stabilization. The         ation of the firm’s operations, through product
     fundamentals of aggregate demand and supply are
                                                             costing techniques, budgetary planning, control        Presents challenges and issues in the management
     also discussed. Topics include the concept and          and evaluation of operations using accounting          of an organization’s human resources. The course
     measurement of aggregate output and input               information, and analysis of how accounting in-        is intended for students with a general interest in
     (e.g., Gross Domestic Product [GDP]); Keynesian         formation can advance a firm’s goals and strate-       management issues, not for specialists in the
     and post-Keynesian income determination analy-          gies. This course also provides an introduction to     human resources function. It stresses case studies
     sis; fiscal policy (including government deficits       the strategic role of financial management, analysis   focusing on current problems of managing the
     and the public debt); monetary policy, the role of      of company performance, the impact of major            work force due to changing technologies, environ-
     the Federal Reserve, and the banking system; eco-       corporate decisions, the relationship among major      mental and social factors, strategic business
     nomic growth; international trade and exchange          stakeholders of the firm and cash management.          considerations, and organizational and personal
     rate determination.                                     (Prerequisites: MG 501, MG 502, MG 505, MG             values.
                                                             506 and MG 508 or equivalent content, or con-
     MG 511. Interpersonal and                               sent of instructor).                                   MG 533. Negotiations
     Leadership Skills for Technological                                                                            This course focuses on improving the student’s
     Managers                                                MG 515. Legal and Ethical Context of                   understanding of the negotiation process and
     This course provides a background on the new            Technological Organizations                            effectiveness as a negotiator. Emphasizes issues
     technological organization, including new employ-       2 credits                                              related to negotiating within and on behalf of
     ment relationships and organizational forms.            This course introduces students to U.S. and            organizations, the role of third parties, the sources
     Attention is focused on cultural dynamics and           International law, examining the structure, func-      of power within negotiation, and the impact of
     diversity, including national, global and ethical       tion and development of the areas of law most          gender, culture and other differences. Conducted in
     issues. The importance of teams and leadership in       important to the conduct of business. Heavy            workshop format, combining theory and practice.
     the networked organization are addressed. Assign-       emphasis is given to approaches to ethical analysis
     ments include case analyses, individual and group       for decision making. Students will gain a sound        MG 541/FPE 563. Operations Risk
     projects and presentations. (Prerequisite: MG 503       understanding both of the basic areas of law           Management
     or equivalent content, or consent of instructor.)       (torts, contracts, property and constitutional law)    Operations risk management deals with decision
                                                             and of the analytical principles that govern the       making under uncertainty. It is interdisciplinary,
     MG 512. Creating and Implementing                       application of law generally. The course will also     drawing upon management science, engineering
     Strategy in Technological                               touch on the areas of intellectual property law,       economy and managerial decision making, along
     Organizations                                           business formation and organization, international     with material from cognitive psychology and soci-
     This course focuses on understanding the market         business law, securities regulation, cyber law and     ology. Classic methods from risk assessment and
     and the importance of market research, customer         e-commerce, antitrust law, employment law and          risk evaluation are first covered and then applied,
     needs, competitor analysis, business environment        environmental law. The course focuses on practical     from the perspective of business process improve-
     and forecasting. The development of ethical and         considerations and makes extensive use of case         ment, across a broad set of operations manage-
     effective strategy is discussed, including exploiting   studies. In addition to analyzing the legal man-       ment problems. A course project is required to
     and developing the core competencies of the orga-       dates that restrict and guide the conduct of           teach skills for integrating diverse sources of infor-
     nization. Promoting and developing interfunction-       business, the course discusses and debates ethical     mation/data (i.e., qualitative and quantitative,
     al and international communication and coopera-         considerations that often confront managers.           subjective and objective) so as to utilize all avail-
     tion are addressed. Special attention is paid to the                                                           able evidence when modeling and evaluating risk.
     integration of emerging technologies. Other areas                                                              Projects are chosen by the students according to

                                                                                                COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

their interest and, in the past, have addressed top-    ment efforts in both manufacturing and service           distribution channels, and marketing communica-
ics in fire protection engineering, environmental       organizations, including overall strategies as well as   tions. The course considers both business-to-
management, and project and operations manage-          specific techniques for improving productivity.          consumer and business-to-business applications,
ment. (An introductory understanding of proba-          Both the technological and behavioral aspects of         and explores the major opportunities, limitations
bility and statistics is assumed.)                      productivity improvement are covered.                    and issues of profiting from the Internet.

MG 542. Quality Planning and                            MG 549. Strategies for Manufacturing                     MG 567. Integrated Marketing
Control                                                 and Service Firms                                        Communications
This course focuses on the quality aspects of prod-     This course focuses on developing and imple-             This course provides students with an understand-
uct design and manufacturing. Topics include            menting strategies for product design that will best     ing of the role of integrated marketing communi-
total quality management, quality function              support the overall strategy of the firm. Topics         cations in the overall marketing program and its
deployment, poke-yoke systems, statistical process      include: positioning the product and production          contribution to marketing strategy. The tools of
control, capability studies, quality loss function      system in the industry, making location and              marketing communications include advertising,
and design of experiments (Taguchi methods).            capacity decisions, selecting and implementing           sales promotion, publicity, personal selling, public
(An introductory understand of statistics is            manufacturing or service technologies, planning,         relations, trade shows, direct, and online market-
assumed.)                                               vertical integration, and developing organizations,      ing. Understanding the concepts and processes
                                                        cultures and policies for implementation. Case           that organizations use in developing effective and
MG 544. Supply Chain Management                         studies of manufacturing and service firms are uti-      synergistic marketing communications is useful for
and Electronic Commerce                                 lized extensively. (Prerequisite: MG 504 or equiva-      managers across functional disciplines. This course
This course provides students with a managerial         lent content, or consent of instructor.)                 will also consider ethical issues of IMC.
background in supply chain management and its
interface with electronic commerce. The major           MG 563. Marketing of Emerging                            MG568. Data Mining Business
issues and strategies in supply chain management        Technologies                                             Applications
will be identified for better understanding of sup-     This course focuses on the new product develop-          This course provides students with the key con-
ply chain performance, and how e-commerce               ment process in high-tech corporations, from idea        cepts and tools to turn raw data into useful busi-
enables companies to be more efficient and flexi-       generation through launch. Topics include: under-        ness intelligence. A broad spectrum of business sit-
ble in their internal and external operations will be   standing customer responses to innovation,               uations will be considered for which the tools of
explored. The major content of the course is            engaging customers in the innovation process,            classical statistics and modern data mining have
divided into three modules: supply chain integra-       developing the marketing mix for new products            proven their usefulness. Problems considered will
tion, supply chain decisions, and supply chain          (product features and benefits, pricing, channel         include such standard marketing research activities
management and control. A variety of instruction-       selection, communications), new product intro-           as customer segmentation and customer preference
al tools including lectures, case discussions, guest    duction timing and competitive positioning.              as well as more recent issues in credit scoring,
speakers, games, videos, and group projects and         Particular emphasis is placed on how new prod-           churn management and fraud detection. Roughly
presentations are employed.                             ucts can be used to generate firm growth and             half the classtime will be devoted to discussions on
                                                        renewal in a dynamic environment, and on the             business situations, data mining techniques, their
MG 545. Production Systems Design                       challenges of incorporating emerging technologies        application and their usage. The remaining time
This course focuses on the design and implementa-       in new products. Basic knowledge of marketing            will comprise an applications laboratory in which
tion of computer-integrated production systems.         management is assumed.                                   these concepts and techniques are used and inter-
Topics include: computer-aided design, computer-                                                                 preted to solve realistic business problems. Some
aided process planning, group technology, pro-          MG 564. Global Technology                                knowledge of basic marketing principles and basic
grammable machine tools, industrial robotics,           Marketing                                                data analysis is assumed.
automated material handling, computer-aided             Extending technology to global markets requires
quality control, computer process control, flexible     an understanding of consumer behavior in differ-         MG 571. Database Applications
manufacturing systems, computer-aided produc-           ent cultures, and effective management of risk and       Development
tion management systems, computer databases and         overseas infrastructures. This course addresses the      Business applications are increasingly centered on
communications networks, and manufacturing sys-         issues associated with technology application in         databases and the delivery of high-quality data
tems engineering. (Prerequisite: MG 504 or equiv-       new markets and includes the following topics:           throughout the organization. This course intro-
alent content, or consent of instructor.)               consumer behavior differences in international mar-      duces students to the theory and practice of com-
                                                        kets and the implications for the marketing mix,         puter-based data management. It focuses on the
MG 546. Managing Technological                          cultural differences that affect business practices in   design of database applications that will meet the
Innovation                                              new markets, managing exchange rate fluctuation,         needs of an organization and its managers. The
This course studies successful innovations and          factors that affect manufacturing and research           course also covers data security, data integrity and
how firms must enhance their ability to develop         location, the impact of local government on mar-         data distribution. Students will be exposed to
and introduce new products and processes. The           keting decision making, and the use of strategic         commercially available database management sys-
course will discuss a practical model of the            alliances to acquire expertise and manage risk in        tems, such as MS/Access and SQL Server. As a
dynamics of industrial innovation. Cases and            global market development. Knowledge of mar-             project during the course, students will design and
examples will be discussed for products in which        keting management is assumed.                            implement a small database that meets the needs
cost and product performance are commanding                                                                      of some real-world business data application.
factors. The important interface among R&D/             MG 566. Marketing and
manufacturing/marketing is discussed. Inter-            Electronic Commerce                                      MG 572. Telecommunications
national technology transfer and joint venture          This course discusses the tools and techniques           Management and Electronic
issues are also considered.                             being used today to harness the vast marketing           Commerce
                                                        potential of the Internet. It examines various Web-      Telecommunications is an integral part of the way
MG 548. Productivity Management                         based business models for effectively and efficient-     work is done in today’s business organizations. This
This course focuses on planning, implementing,
                                                        ly using the net as a strategic marketing tool for       course provides students with the technical and
measuring and evaluating productivity improve-
                                                        new products, market research, direct and indirect


      managerial background of telecommunications              MG 592. New Venture Management                          ken up into six sections: introduction to informa-
      and its applications in electronic commerce. It          and Entrepreneurship                                    tion security and architecture, hardening and secu-
      covers the technical fundamentals of data trans-         Entrepreneurship has been defined as the “pursuit       rity, preparation for an attack, detection of the
      mission, local area networks, local Internetworking      of opportunity without regard to resources cur-         attack, incident response, and security improve-
      and enterprise Internetworking. The issues               rently held.” This course is intended to introduce      ment. Additional topics covered include an
      involved in developing and managing an organiza-         students to a new way of thinking (the pursuit of       overview of computer crimes, information warfare,
      tion’s telecommunications infrastructure will be         opportunity) and a new set of economic relation-        cyberterrorism and protection of critical infra-
      discussed. This course also examines the role of tele-   ships (without regard to resources currently held)      structures. Upon completion of this course, the
      communications technology, especially the Inter-         through its requirement that they plan and launch       student will have an in-depth understanding of
      net, in electronic commerce, and surveys current         a new e-commerce venture. Topics will include           the steps required to build and maintain an infor-
      topics in electronic commerce. As a course project,      opportunity recognition and evaluation, new ven-        mation security department, and the depth of
      students will learn to use commercially available        ture teams, the business plan, venture finance and      technical understanding to be able to communi-
      Web development tools to design and implement            resource requirements, and harvesting the venture.      cate effectively with information security teams.
      a small Web-based business application.
                                                                                                                       MG 598V. Special Topics:
      MG 573. System Design and                                MG 597. Internship
                                                                                                                       Virtual Teams
                                                               The internship is an elective-credit option de-
      Development                                                                                                      This course focuses primarily on helping students
                                                               signed to provide an opportunity to put into prac-
      This course introduces students to the concepts                                                                  understand the challenges of working on virtual
                                                               tice the principles which have been studied in
      and principles of systems analysis and design. It                                                                teams, and identify and practice more effective
                                                               previous courses. Internships will be tailored to
      covers all aspects of the systems development life                                                               ways to manage those challenges. It is totally Web-
                                                               the specific interests of the student. Each intern-
      cycle, from project planning and management                                                                      based and relies on the Blackboard course manage-
                                                               ship must be carried out in cooperation with a
      through requirements identification, process and                                                                 ment and communication tool to serve as the
                                                               sponsoring organization, generally from off cam-
      data modeling, system design and implementa-                                                                     venue where each virtual team will meet, work
                                                               pus, and must be approved and advised by a WPI
      tion. Object-oriented analysis techniques will be                                                                and learn about the opportunities and pitfalls of
                                                               faculty member in the Department of Manage-
      introduced. Students will learn to use an upper                                                                  virtual team participation.
                                                               ment. Internships may be proposed by the student
      level CASE (computer-aided software engineering)
      tool, which they will employ in completing a real-
                                                               or by an off-campus sponsor. The internship must        MG 598S. Independent Study
                                                               include proposal, design and documentation              Directed in-depth independent study or seminar
      world systems analysis and design project.
                                                               phases. Following the internship, the student will      program following one or more of the core areas
      (Prerequisite: MG 571 or consent of the instruc-
                                                               prepare a report describing his or her internship       of management. Independent study can focus on a
                                                               activities and will make a presentation before a        major problem in manufacturing, information sys-
      MG 575. Information and                                  committee including the Faculty Advisor and a           tems, health systems, energy, government, etc.
      Decision Support Systems                                 representative from the sponsoring organization.        Each student must have a designated faculty advi-
      This course analyzes how managers make deci-             Students are limited to one 3-credit, semester-         sor who must approve the subject and methodolo-
      sions and the information they need to make these        length internship experience. The internship may        gy in advance. Before registering for independent
      decisions. It focuses on the planning, deployment        not be completed at the student’s place of employ-      study, students should contact the director of
      and use of information systems and technologies          ment. (Prerequisite: Completion of the required         graduate management programs.
      for delivering high-quality information to man-          component of the individual student’s graduate
      agers and for supporting their decision making.          management degree program.)                             MG 599. Thesis
                                                                                                                       6 to 9 credits
      This is primarily a case-based course. The cases         MG 598G. Special Topics: Global                         Research study at the master’s level.
      include examples of the design and implementa-
                                                               Operations Strategy
      tion of a variety of information technologies to
      support organizational operations as well as man-
                                                               This course focuses on operations strategy from a
                                                               global perspective. Topics such as strategy of logis-
      agerial decision making. The information tech-
      nologies covered in the cases include enterprise
                                                               tics and decisions to outsource are examined.
                                                               These topics will include the strategic issues con-
      systems, decision support systems, expert systems,
                                                               cerned with firms, for example, that are doing          MFE 500. Current Topics
      group support systems and executive information
      systems. Students will analyze case studies, write
                                                               R&D in the United States, circuit board assembly        in Manufacturing Seminar
                                                               in Ireland and final assembly in Singapore. Cases       0 credits
      short papers and investigate new information
                                                               are used, as well as textbooks and recent articles      This seminar identifies the typical problems
      technologies for ensuring that high-quality infor-
                                                               relating to this topic. A term paper based on actu-     involved in a variety of manufacturing operations,
      mation is accessible to an organization and its
                                                               al cases is required.                                   and generic approaches for applying advanced
      managers as needed. (Prerequisite: MG 571 or
                                                                                                                       technologies to implement operations. Topical
      consent of the instructor.)
                                                                                                                       areas of application and development such as
      MG 576. Project Management                               MG 598S. Information Security                           intelligent materials processing, automated assem-
      This course presents the specific concepts, tech-        Management                                              bly, MRP and JIT scheduling, vision recognition
      niques and tools for managing projects effectively.      This course will introduce CERT-CC’s five-step          systems, high-speed computer networks, distrib-
      The role of the project manager as team leader is        process for the management of information securi-       uted computer control of manufacturing processes
      examined, together with important techniques for         ty, and is aimed at teaching managers how to cre-       and flexible manufacturing systems may be cov-
      controlling cost, schedules and performance para-        ate a solid enterprise-wide information security        ered. This seminar is coordinated with the under-
      meters. Lectures, case studies and projects are          practice. This course is aimed at any student inter-    graduate program in manufacturing engineering.
      combined to develop skills needed by project             ested in gaining a managerial-level understanding
      managers in today’s environment.                         of information security and practice. Readings,
                                                               demos, lectures, case studies and real world events
                                                               will be discussed with the intent of bridging theo-
                                                               ry with practice, law and ethics. The course is bro-

                                                                                                 COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

MFE 510/ME 542. Control and                             alternative manufacturing methods based on                Salient aspects pertaining to the corrosion and
Monitoring of Manufacturing                             anticipated volumes and design for automated              environmental degradation of materials will be
                                                        assembly.                                                 discussed. This course will provide the background
                                                                                                                  for students in any engineering or science major
Covers a broad range of topics centered on control      MFE 594. Special Topics                                   for future course and research work in materials.
and monitoring functions for manufacturing,             Theoretical and experimental studies in subjects of       (Prerequisites: senior or graduate standing in engi-
including process control, feedback systems, data       interest to graduate students in manufacturing            neering or science.) Offered each year.
collection and analysis, scheduling, machine-           engineering. (Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.)
computer interfacing and distributed control.                                                                     MTE 520. Design and Analysis
Typical applications are considered with lab work.      MFE 594T. Surface Metrology:                              of Manufacturing Processes
                                                        Measurement and Analysis                                  The first half of the course covers the axiomatic
MFE 511. Application
                                                        of Surface Textures                                       design method applied to simultaneous product
of Industrial Robotics                                  This course examines the methods for measuring            and process design for concurrent engineering,
(Concurrent with ME 4815) This course intro-            and analyzing surface texture (roughness) in order        with emphasis on process and manufacturing tool
duces the student to the field of industrial auto-      to make functional correlations between the tex-          design. Basic design principles as well as qualita-
mation. Topics covered include robot specification      ture and performance, and to improve the under-           tive and quantitative methods of analysis of
and selection, control and drive methods, part          standing of texture-dependent surface phenomena           designs are developed. The second half of the
presentation, economic justification, safety, imple-    like adhesion, scattering, fracture, friction and         course addresses methods of engineering analysis
mentation, product design and programming lan-          wear. Selection of surface measurement instru-            of manufacturing processes, to support machine
guages. The course combines the use of lecture,         ments and analysis methods, including fractal-            tool and process design. Basic types of engineering
project work and laboratories that utilize indus-       based analysis, for finding functional correlations,      analysis are applied to manufacturing situations
trial robots. Theory and application of robotic         quality control and the design of surface textures        including elasticity, plasticity, heat transfer,
systems will be emphasized.                             will be discussed. Examples from a broad range of         mechanics and cost analysis. Special attention will
MFE 520/ME 543. Design and                              applications will be discussed, including skin, run-      be given to the mechanics of machining (tradi-
                                                        ways, thermal spray adhesion, hard disks, machin-         tional, nontraditional and grinding) and the pro-
Analysis of Manufacturing
                                                        ing and grinding.                                         duction of surfaces. Students, with the advice and
The first half of the course covers the axiomatic
                                                                                                                  consent of the professor, select the topic for their
design method, applied to simultaneous product          MFE 598. Directed Research                                term project.
and process design for concurrent engineering,          3 to 6 credits
with the emphasis on process and manufacturing                                                                    MTE 525/ME 5325. Advanced
tool design. Basic design principles as well as qual-   MFE 599. Thesis Research                                  Thermodynamics
itative and quantitative methods of analysis of         Maximum 3 credits
                                                                                                                  3 credits
designs are developed. The second half of the
                                                                                                                  Thermodynamics of solutions—phase equilibria—
course addresses methods of engineering analysis        MFE 5822/MTE 5822. Solidification                         Ellingham diagrams, binary and ternary phase dia-
of manufacturing processes, to support machine          Processes                                                 grams, reactions between gasses and condensed
tool and process design. Basic types of engineering     See MTE 5822 course description on page 102.              phases, reactions within condensed phases, ther-
analysis are applied to manufacturing situations,
                                                                                                                  modynamics of surfaces, defects and electrochem-
including elasticity, plasticity, heat transfer,        MFE 5823/MTE 5823. Particulate                            istry. Applications to chemical thermodynamics as
mechanics and cost analysis. Special attention will     Processing of Materials                                   well as heat engines. (Prerequisites: ES 3001, ME
be given to the mechanics of machining (tradi-          See MTE 5823 course description on page 102.              4850 or equivalent.) Offered each year.
tional, nontraditional and grinding) and the pro-
duction of surfaces. Students, with the advice and
consent of the professor, select the topic for their    Materials Science                                         MTE 530/ME 5330. Crystallography,
                                                                                                                  Diffraction and Microscopy of
term project.                                           and Engineering                                           Materials
MFE 530/ME 544. Computer-                               Research—As arranged.                                     The fundamentals of crystallography and X-ray
                                                                                                                  diffraction of metals, ceramics and polymers will
Integrated Manufacturing                                Additional acceptable courses, 4000 series, may be
                                                        found in the Undergraduate Catalog.                       be presented and discussed. The techniques for the
An overview of computer-integrated manufactur-
                                                                                                                  experimental determination of phase fraction and
ing (CIM). As the CIM concept attempts to inte-
                                                        MTE 510/ME 5310. Principles of                            phase identification via X-ray diffraction will be
grate all of the business and engineering functions
of a firm, this course builds on the knowledge of       Materials Science and Engineering                         highlighted. The theory and practice of optical
                                                        3 credits                                                 and electron microscopy will also be included.
computer-aided design, computer-aided manufac-
                                                        This course provides a comprehensive review of            Both scanning and transmission electron
turing, concurrent engineering, management of
                                                        the fundamental principles of materials science           microscopy will be theoretically and experimental-
information systems and operations management
                                                        and engineering. The classical interplay among            ly investigated. (Prerequisites: ES 200 or equiva-
to demonstrate the strategic importance of inte-
                                                        structure-processing-properties-performance in            lent, and senior or graduate standing in engineer-
gration. (Prerequisites: Recommended background
                                                        materials including plastics, metals, ceramics,           ing or science.) Offered each year.
courses—MG 504, MG545.)
                                                        glasses and composites will be emphasized. The
MFE 540. Design for                                     structure in materials ranging from the subatomic         MTE 540/ME 5340. Analytical
Manufacturability                                       to the macroscopic, including nano-, micro- and           Methods in Materials Engineering
                                                        macromolecular structures, will be discussed to           3 credits
The problems of cost determination and evalua-
                                                        highlight bonding mechanisms, crystallinity and           Heat transfer and diffusion kinetics are applied to
tion of processing alternatives in the design-
                                                        defect patterns. Representative thermodynamic             the solution of materials engineering problems.
manufacturing interface. Approaches for introduc-
                                                        and kinetic aspects such as diffusion, phase dia-         Mathematical and numerical methods for the
ing manufacturing capability knowledge into the
                                                        grams, nucleation and growth, and TTT diagrams            solutions to Fourier’s and Pick’s laws for a variety
product design process are covered, with emphasis
                                                        will be discussed. Basics of elasticity, plastic defor-   of boundary conditions will be presented and dis-
on part and process simplification, analysis of
                                                        mation and viscoelasticity will be highlighted.           cussed. The primary emphasis is given heat treat-


      ment and surface modification processes. Topics to        es which are the basis for most fabrication steps,        MTE 5841. Surface Metrology
      be covered include solutionizing, quenching, and          such as bulk crystal growth, thin film deposition,        and Tribology
      carburization heat treatment. (Prerequisites:             lithography, metallization, ion implantation, etch-       This course examines the methods for measuring
      ME 4840 or MTE 510 or equivalent.) Offered                ing, reliability, electrical behavior and materials       and analyzing surface texture (roughness) in order
      each year.                                                device characterization. The emphasis of this             to make functional correlations between the tex-
                                                                course will be on materials-processing principles         ture and performance, and to improve the under-
      MTE 550/ME 5350. Phase                                    and the relationship with structure, properties and       standing of texture-dependent surface phenomena
      Transformations in Materials                              performance.                                              like adhesion, scattering, fracture, friction and
      3 credits
                                                                                                                          wear. Tribology, the study of friction, lubrication
      This course is intended to provide a fundamental          MTE 580. Materials Science and                            and wear, will be reviewed in the context of sur-
      understanding of thermodynamic and kinetic                Engineering Seminar                                       face texture. Selection of surface measurement
      principles associated with phase transformations.         Reports on the state-of-the-art in various areas of       instruments and analysis methods, including
      The mechanisms of phase transformations will be           research and development in materials science and         fractal-based analysis, for finding functional corre-
      discussed in terms of driving forces to establish a       engineering will be presented by the faculty and          lations, for quality control and for the design of
      theoretical background for various physical phe-          outside experts. Reports on graduate student              surface textures will be discussed. Examples from a
      nomena. The principles of nucleation and growth           research in progress will also be required.               broad range of applications will be discussed,
      and spinodal transformations will be described.
                                                                                                                          including skin, runways, thermal spray adhesion,
      The theoretical analysis of diffusion controlled          MTE 5811. Physical Ceramics
                                                                                                                          hard disks, machining and grinding.
      and interface controlled growth will be presented         Examination of the interrelationships among crys-
      The basic concepts of martensitic transformations         tal structure, microstructure, processing and             MTE 5842. Corrosion and Corrosion
      will be highlighted. Specific examples will include       properties. Fundamentals of microstructure devel-         Control
      solidification, crystallization, precipitation, sinter-   opment; nucleation, grain growth, precipitation,          Advanced topics in corrosion. Stress corrosion
      ing, phase separation and transformation toughen-         sintering, vitrification. Mechanical, optical, electri-   cracking and hydrogen effects on metals. High-
      ing. (Prerequisites: MTE 510, ME 4850 or equiv-           cal, magnetic properties in various ceramic systems       temperature oxidation, carburization and sulfida-
      alent.) Offered each year.                                and their relationship to microstructure will be          tion. Discussions focus on current corrosive engi-
                                                                discussed. (Prerequisite: ME 4813.)                       neering problems and research. Course may be
      MTE 554. Composites with Biomedical
                                                                MTE 5822/MFE 5822. Solidification                         offered by special arrangement.
      and Materials Applications
      Introduction to fiber/particulate reinforced, engi-       Processes                                                 MTE 594. Special Topics—As arranged.
      neered and biologic materials. This course focuses        A course designed for in-depth study of industrial        Theoretical or experimental studies in subjects of
      on the elastic description and application of mate-       processes based on liquid-solid transformations.          interest to graduate students in materials science
      rials that are made up of a combination of subma-         Fundamentals are developed and applied to com-            and engineering.
      terials, i.e., composites. Emphasis will be placed        mercial processes. The topics covered include
      on the development of constitutive equations that         qualitative treatment of casting processes, sand
      define the mechanical behavior of a number of             casting, die casting, investment casting, semisolid       Mathematical Sciences
      applications including biomaterial, tissue and            forming, various welding processes, laser welding,
                                                                                                                          MA 4451. Boundary Value Problems
      materials science. (Prerequisites: Understanding of       rapid solidification, spray forming, compocasting
                                                                                                                          Science and engineering majors often encounter
      stress analysis and basic continuum mechanics.)           and other emerging technologies which utilize liq-
                                                                                                                          partial differential equations in the study of the
                                                                uid-solid transformations. Library and laboratory
      MTE 560/ME 5360. Materials                                work will be included. (Suggested preparation: an
                                                                                                                          flow, vibrations, electric circuits and similar areas.
      Performance and Reliability                                                                                         Solution techniques for these types of problems will
                                                                understanding of heat transfer, fluid flow, solid
      3 credits                                                                                                           be emphasized in this course. Topics covered
                                                                state diffusion and microscopy [ES 2001, ES
      The failure and wear-out mechanisms for a variety                                                                   include derivation of partial differential equations
                                                                3003, ES 3004, ME 3811, ME 4840] or equiva-
      of materials (metals, ceramics, polymers, compos-                                                                   as models of prototype problems in the areas men-
                                                                lent.) Offered in the 2000/2001 academic year
      ites and microelectronics) and applications will be                                                                 tioned above, solution of linear partial differential
                                                                and in alternate years thereafter.
      presented and discussed. Multi-axial failure theo-                                                                  equations by separation of variables, Fourier inte-
      ries will be discussed. A series of case studies will     MTE 5823/MFE 5823. Particulate                            grals and a study of Bessel functions. (Prerequisite:
      be used to illustrate the basic failure mechanisms        Processing of Materials                                   A knowledge of ordinary differential equations is
      of plastic deformation, creep, fracture, fatigue,         Particulate processing is used to manufacture net-        assumed.)
      wear and corrosion. The methodology and tech-             shaped components from particulate materials as           MA 501. Engineering Mathematics
      niques for reliability analysis will also be presented    in powder metallurgy (PM), metal injection mold-          This course develops mathematical techniques
      and discussed. A materials systems approach will          ing (MIM) and the processing of ceramic and               used in the engineering disciplines. Preliminary
      be used. (Prerequisites: ES 2502 and ME 3023 or           refractory materials. Processing of particulate           concepts will be reviewed as necessary, including
      equivalent, and senior or graduate standing in            materials is covered in detail, including atomiza-        vector spaces, matrices and eigenvalues. The prin-
      engineering or science.) Offered each year.               tion to produce powders, compaction, sintering            ciple topics covered will include vector calculus,
                                                                and postsintering operations. Interfacial issues to       Fourier transforms, fast Fourier transforms and
      MTE 570. Electronic, Magnetic and                         control flow and final density are studied, as are        Laplace transformations. Applications of these tech-
      Optical Materials Science and                             the fundamentals of phase flow, compaction and            niques for the solution of boundary value and initial
      Processing                                                densification. Industrial applications and plant          value problems will be given. The problems treated
      This course discusses the fundamentals of materi-         trips will augment classroom experience.                  and solved in this course are typical of those seen in
      als science and processing for information technol-       (Suggested background: [ES 2001, ME 2820,                 the applications and include the problems of heat
      ogy devices. Optical, electrical and magnetic prop-       ME 3811, ME 4840] or equivalent.) Offered in              conduction, mechanical vibrations and wave propaga-
      erties of materials will be studied. The theory and       the 1999/2000 academic year and alternate years           tion. (Prerequisite: A knowledge of ordinary differ-
      technology of integrated circuit fabrication will be      thereafter.                                               ential equations, linear algebra and multivariable
      presented. The focus will be on understanding the
                                                                                                                          calculus is assumed.)
      underlying physical principles of the unit process-

                                                                                               COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

MA 503-504. Analysis I and II                           approximation by various types of polynomials,          MA 519. Optimization
Topics covered include open and closed sets, com-       orthogonal polynomials, least-squares approximation,    This course provides a basic foundation for stu-
pactness, continuity, upper and lower semiconti-        trigonometric polynomials and fast Fourier trans-       dents interested in mathematical programming.
nuity, Lebesque measure, integration, functions of      forms, piecewise polynomials and splines, numeri-       This course introduces the concepts of convex
bounded variation, absolute continuity, the funda-      cal differentiation and integration, unconstrained      analysis, optimality conditions, Lagrangian duality,
mental theorem of calculus for Lebesque integrals,      optimization including Newton’s method and the          algorithms for unconstrained and constrained
Banach spaces, classical Lp spaces, the Holder and      conjugate direction method, and an introduction         optimization, convergence properties and compu-
Minkowski inequalities, the Riesz-Fischer theo-         to the solution of systems of linear equations and      tational complexity of algorithms. Topics covered
rem, and the Riesz representation theorem.              initial value problems for ordinary differential        include search methods, Newton’s method and
(Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of undergraduate         equations. Both theory and practice are examined.       steepest descent method, trust region methods,
analysis is assumed.)                                   Error estimates, rates of convergence and the con-      penalty/barrier functions, interior point methods,
                                                        sequences of finite precision arithmetic are also       finite element techniques and applications to special
MA 505. Complex Analysis                                discussed. Other topics may include integral equa-      nonlinear programming problems arising in such
This course will provide a rigorous and thorough        tions or an introduction to boundary value prob-        areas as structural optimization using finite ele-
treatment of the theory of functions of one com-        lems. In the course of analyzing some of the meth-      ment formulations. May be taught by special
plex variable. The topics to be covered include,        ods, topics from elementary functional analysis         arrangement. (Prerequisite: Knowledge of graduate
complex numbers, complex differentiation, the           will be introduced. These include the concept of a      or undergraduate numerical analysis, basic linear
Cauchy Riemann equations, analytic functions,           function space, norms and inner products, opera-        algebra and a higher-level programming language are
Cauchy’s theorem, complex integration, the              tors and projections. (Prerequisite: Knowledge of       assumed.)
Cauchy integral formula, Liouville’s theorem,           undergraduate linear algebra and differential equa-
Gauss mean value theorem, maximum modules               tions, and a higher-level programming language is       MA 525. Optimal Control and Design
theorem, Rouche’s theorem, Poisson integral for-        assumed.)                                               with Composite Materials I
mula, Taylor-Laurant expansions, singularity theo-                                                              Modern technology involves a wide application of
ry, conformal mapping with applications, analytic       MA 512. Numerical Differential                          materials with internal structure adapted to envi-
continuation, Schwarz’s reflection principle and        Equations                                               ronmental demands. This, the first course in a
elliptic functions. (Prerequisite: A knowledge of       This course begins where MA 510 ends in the             two-semester sequence, will establish a theoretical
advanced calculus.)                                     study of the theory and practice of the numerical       basis for identifying structures that provide opti-
                                                        solution of differential equations. Central topics      mal response to prescribed external factors.
MA 508. Mathematical Modeling                           include a review of initial value problems, includ-     Material covered will include basics of the calculus
This course introduces mathematical model build-        ing Euler’s method, Runge-Kutta methods, multi-         of variations: Euler equations; transversality
ing using dimensional analysis, perturbation theo-      step methods, implicit methods and predictor-cor-       conditions; Weierstrass-Erdmann conditions for
ry and variational principles. Models are selected      rector methods; the solution of two-point bound-        corner points; Legendre, Jacobi and Weierstrass
from the natural and social sciences according to       ary value problems by shooting methods and by           conditions; Hamiltonian form of the necessary
the interests of instructor and students. Examples      the discretization of the original problem to form      conditions; and Noether’s theorem. Pontryagin’s
are: planetary orbit, spring-mass systems, fluid        systems of nonlinear equations; numerical stability;    maximum principle in its original lumped para-
flow, isomers in organic chemistry, biological com-     existence and uniqueness of solutions; and an intro-    meter form will be put forth as well as its distrib-
petition, biochemical kinetics and physiological        duction to the solution of partial differential equa-   uted parameter extension. Chattering regimes of
flow. Computer simulation of these models will          tions by finite differences. Other topics might         control and relaxation through composites will be
also be considered. (Prerequisite: A knowledge of       include finite element or boundary element meth-        introduced at this point. May be offered by special
ordinary differential equations and of analysis at      ods, Galerkin methods, collocation, or variational      arrangement.
the level of MA 501 is assumed.)                        methods. (Prerequisites: Graduate or undergradu-
                                                        ate numerical analysis. Knowledge of a higher-level     MA 526. Optimal Control and Design
MA 509. Stochastic Modeling
This course gives students a background in the
                                                        programming language is assumed.)                       with Composite Materials II
                                                                                                                Topics presented will include basics of homoge-
theory and methods of probability, stochastic           MA 514. Numerical Linear Algebra                        nization theory. Bounds on the effective properties
processes and statistics for applications. The course   This course provides students with the skills           of composites will be established using the transla-
begins with a brief review of basic probability, dis-   necessary to develop, analyze and implement com-        tion method and Hashin-Shtrikman variational
crete and continuous random variables, expecta-         putational methods in linear algebra. The central       principles. The course concludes with a number of
tions, conditional probability and basic statistical    topics include vector and matrix algebra, vector        examples demonstrating the use of the theory in
inference. Topics covered in greater depth include      and matrix norms, the singular value decomposi-         producing optimal structural designs. The
generating functions, limit theorems, basic sto-        tion, the LU and QR decompositions, House-              methodology given in this course turns the problem
chastic processes, discrete and continuous time         holder transformations and Given rotations, and         of optimal design into a problem of rigorous mathe-
Markov chains, and basic queuing theory includ-         iterative methods for solving linear systems includ-    matics. This course can be taken independently or
ing M/M/1 and M/G/1 queues.                             ing Jacobi, Gauss-Seidel, SOR and conjugate             as the sequel to MA 525.
(Prerequisite: A knowledge of basic probability at      gradient methods; and eigenvalue problems. Ap-
the level of MA 2631 and statistics at the level of     plications to such problem areas as least squares       MA 530. Discrete Mathematics/
MA 2612 is assumed.)                                    and optimization will be discussed. Other topics        CS 501. Discrete Structures
                                                        might include: special linear systems, such as sym-     This course provides the student of mathematics
MA 510/CS 522. Numerical Methods
                                                        metric, positive definite, banded or sparse systems;    or computer science with an overview of discrete
This course is an introduction to modern numeri-
                                                        preconditioning; the Cholesky decomposition;            structures and their applications, as well as the
cal techniques. It is suitable for both mathematics
                                                        sparse tableau and other least-square methods; or       basic methods and proof techniques in combina-
majors and students from other departments. It
                                                        algorithms for parallel architectures.                  torics. Topics covered include sets, relations,
covers material not treated in either MA 512 or
                                                        (Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of linear algebra or     posets, enumeration, graphs, digraphs, monoids,
MA 514, and it introduces the main ideas of those
                                                        equivalent background. Knowledge of a higher-           groups, discrete probability theory and proposi-
two courses. Topics covered include interpolation
                                                        level programming language is assumed.)                 tional calculus. (Prerequisites: College math at
by polynomials, roots of nonlinear equations,


      least through calculus. Experience with recursive          MA 544. Statistical Response                                of fields, ranging from economics to engineering,
      programming is helpful, but not required.)                 Surface Analysis                                            and methods of analyzing time series constitute an
                                                                 Response surface methodology is a collection of             important area of statistics. There are several objec-
      MA 533. Discrete Mathematics II                                                                                        tives in analyzing a time series which can be classi-
      This course is designed to provide an in-depth             statistical techniques for analyzing the relationship
                                                                 between a set of independent variables or operat-           fied as description, explanation, prediction and
      study of some topics in combinatorial mathemat-                                                                        control. This course provides students with the
      ics and discrete optimization. Topics may vary             ing conditions and a response variable. It is com-
                                                                 monly used in scientific and industrial work to (1)         basic knowledge of time series both in the fre-
      from year to year. Topics covered include, as time                                                                     quency domain and in the time domain. Topics
      permits, partially ordered sets, lattices, matroids,       describe and explain this relationship, (2) choose
                                                                 operating conditions to achieve desired specifica-          covered include, as time permits, autocorrelation,
      matching theory, Ramsey theory, discrete pro-                                                                          elements of spectral analysis, ARMA models,
      gramming problems, computational complexity of             tion, and (3) search for optimal operating
                                                                 conditions. Topics covered include review of basic          ARIMA models, Box-Jenkins methodology, fit-
      algorithms, branch and bound methods.                                                                                  ting, forecasting, seasonal adjustment. Additional
                                                                 probability and statistics, least squares, response sur-
                                                                                                                             topics will be chosen from: Kalman filter,
      MA 540/4631. Probability and                               face designs, steepest ascent, and the fitting and
                                                                                                                             exponential smoothing, Holt-Winters procedures.
      Mathematical Statistics I                                  analysis of second order models. As time permits,
                                                                                                                             Applications of the theory to real data using statis-
      Intended for advanced undergraduates and begin-            additional topics will be chosen from transforma-
                                                                 tions, ridge systems and variance-optimal designs.          tical computer packages will be emphasized.
      ning graduate students in the mathematical
                                                                 Emphasis will be on the application of the theory           (Prerequisite: A knowledge of MA 541 is assumed
      sciences, and for others intending to pursue the
                                                                 to real data using statistical computer packages.           or may be taken concurrently.)
      mathematical study of probability and statistics.
      This course begins by covering the material of             (Prerequisite: A knowledge of statistics at the level       MA 552. Nonparametric and Robust
      MA 3613 at a more advanced level. Additional               of MA 2611 is assumed.)
                                                                                                                             Statistical Methods
      topics covered are: one-to-one and many-to-one
                                                                 MA 546. The Statistical Design and                          Nonparametric statistical methods do not require
      transformations of random variables; sampling                                                                          modeling a population in terms of a specific para-
      distributions, order statistics, and limit theorems.       Analysis of Scientific and Industrial
                                                                                                                             metric family of distributions. Robust statistical
      (Prerequisite: A knowledge of MA 2531 and                  Experiments
                                                                                                                             methods are methods which retain much of the
      MA 3831/3832 is assumed.)                                  The goal of the statistical design and analysis of
                                                                                                                             sensitivity of parametric methods when model
                                                                 experiments is to (1) identify the factors which
                                                                                                                             assumptions are satisfied, but which are relatively
      MA 541/4632. Probability and                               most affect a given process or phenomenon;
                                                                                                                             insensitive to departures from these assumptions.
      Mathematical Statistics II                                 (2) identify the ways in which these factors affect
                                                                                                                             Topics covered include, as time permits, order sta-
      This course is designed to provide background in           the process or phenomenon, both individually and
                                                                                                                             tistics and ranks; distribution free tests and associ-
      principles of statistics. Topics covered include           in combination; (3) accomplish goals 1 and 2 with
                                                                                                                             ated interval and point estimators including the
      point and interval estimation; sufficiency, com-           minimum cost and maximum efficiency while
                                                                                                                             sign test, rank sum tests, Mann-Whitney-
      pleteness, efficiency, consistency; the Rao-               maintaining the validity of the results. Topics cov-
                                                                                                                             Wilcoxon tests and Kruskal-Wallis tests; the
      Blackwell theorem and the Cramer-Rao bound;                ered include, as time permits, the implementation
                                                                                                                             Kolmogorov-Smirnov test; permutation methods;
      minimum variance unbiased estimators, maximum              and analysis of completely randomized, random-
                                                                                                                             M, L and R estimation and applications; comput-
      likelihood estimators and Bayes estimators; tests of       ized complete block, nested and nested factorial,
                                                                                                                             er techniques and programs; discussion and com-
      hypotheses including uniformly most powerful,              split plot type, Latin square type and other incom-
                                                                                                                             parison with standard parametric methods.
      likelihood ratio, minimax and Bayesian tests.              plete block designs; factorial designs and fractional
                                                                                                                             (Prerequisite: A knowledge of MA 541 is assumed
      (Prerequisite: A knowledge of MA 540 is                    factorial designs, and their relation to the Taguchi
                                                                                                                             or may be taken concurrently.)
      assumed.)                                                  methodology. Emphasis will be on the application
                                                                 of the theory to real data using statistical comput-        MA 554. Multivariate Analysis
      MA 542. Applied Regression Analysis                        er packages. (Prerequisite: A knowledge of basic            This course is an introduction to statistical meth-
      Regression analysis is a statistical tool that utilizes    statistics at the level of MA 2611 is assumed.)             ods for analyzing multivariate data. Topics covered
      the relation between a response variable and one
                                                                                                                             are multivariate sampling distributions, tests and
      or more predictor variables for the purposes of            MA 548. Reliability and Quality
                                                                                                                             estimation of multivariate normal parameters,
      description, prediction and/or control. Successful         Control                                                     multivariate ANOVA, correlation and regression,
      use of regression analysis requires an appreciation        This course provides the student with the basic sta-        discriminant analysis, factor analysis and principal
      of both the theory and the practical problems that         tistical tools needed to (1) evaluate the quality and       components. Additional topics covered as time
      often arise when the technique is employed with            reliability of manufactured products, and (2) design        permits include multivariate discrete analysis: log-
      real-world data. The widespread availability of            products and production processes to insure a               linear and logit regression models. Students will be
      computers and software has contributed greatly to          desired level of quality and reliability. Topics            required to analyze real data using one of the stan-
      the expanding use of regression in scientific and          covered include the philosophy and implementa-              dard packages available. (Prerequisite: A knowl-
      industrial work. Topics will be selected from: simple      tion of continuous quality improvement methods,             edge of MA 541 is assumed or may be taken con-
      linear regression and correlation, measures of             acceptance sampling, control charts, cumulative sum         currently.)
      model adequacy, simultaneous inferences, multiple          charts, reliability models, censoring, the identifica-
      regression, polynomial regression, indicator vari-         tion and fitting of reliability models to data, inference   MA 556. Decision Theory and Applied
      ables, variable selection and model building, multi-       from reliability models. Special emphasis will be           Bayesian Statistics
      collinearity and influential observations, general-        placed on realistic applications of the theory using        This course is an introduction to Decision Theory
      ized and weighted least squares and robust regres-         statistical computer packages available.                    and Applied Bayesian Statistics. Decision theory is
      sion, nonlinear regression, and validation of regres-      (Prerequisite: A knowledge of basic probability and         concerned with the ways that data can be used to
      sion models. Application of theory to real-world           statistics, at the level of MA 2611 is assumed.)            make decisions. The Bayesian approach allows the
      problems will be emphasized using statistical comput-                                                                  synthesis of current data with past information to
      er packages. (Prerequisite: A knowledge of statistics at   MA 550. Time Series Analysis and
                                                                                                                             aid decision making. Topics covered include
      the level of MA 2611 is assumed.)                          Forecasting                                                 decision theory, Bayes estimation and hypothesis-
                                                                 Time series are collections of observations made            testing. Standard normal-theory inference prob-
                                                                 sequentially in time. Examples occur in a variety

                                                                                                  COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

lems such as K-sample problems, regression and           Morton); pricing of corporate bonds, mortgage-             MA 562 A and B.
one-way ANOVA are emphasized. Numerical                  backed securities and insurance-linked bonds;              Professional Master’s Seminar
computation of posterior densities, e.g., Hermite,       implementation of pricing models; derivative               0 credits
Laplace approximation and Monte Carlo integra-           strategies for hedging and risk management in the          This seminar will introduce professional master’s
tion, is also covered. Applications of decision-the-     fixed income sector. (Prerequisites: MA 503,               students to topics related to general writing, pre-
oretic and Bayesian methods to such areas as sur-        MA 540 and MA 571.)                                        sentation, group communication and interviewing
vey sampling theory, reliability theory, time series                                                                skills, and will provide the foundations to success-
analysis and categorical data analysis will be dis-      MA 573. Computational Methods of
                                                                                                                    ful cooperation within interdisciplinary team envi-
cussed. (Prerequisite: A knowledge of MA 541 is          Financial Mathematics                                      ronments. All full-time students will be required
assumed or may be taken concurrently.)                   Most realistic financial derivatives models are too
                                                                                                                    to take both components A and B of the seminar
                                                         complex to allow explicit analytic solutions. The
MA 558. Statistical Consulting                                                                                      during their professional master’s. studies.
                                                         computational techniques used to implement
After suitable preparation through readings and          those models fall into two broad categories: finite        MA 598. Professional Master’s Project
practice consulting sessions, the student will serve     difference methods for the solution of partial dif-        1 or more credits
as a statistical consultant, under the supervision of    ferential equations (PDEs) and Monte Carlo sim-            This project will provide the opportunity to apply
statistics faculty, to clients from academia, business   ulation. Accordingly, the course consists of two 7-        and extend the material studied in the course
and industry. There are no formal prerequisites,         week blocks covering the following topics.                 work to the study of a real-world problem origi-
but knowledge of a range of statistical methodolo-                                                                  nating in the industry. The project will be a cap-
                                                         Part I: parabolic PDEs, Black-Scholes PDE for
gy will be required for admission.                                                                                  stone integrating industrial experience with the
                                                         European and American options; binomial and
                                                         trinomial trees; explicit, implicit and Crank-             previously acquired academic knowledge and
MA 560. Graduate Seminar
0 credits                                                Nicholson finite difference methods; far boundary          skills. The topic of the project will come from a
Designed to introduce graduate students to study         conditions, convergence, stability, variance bias;         problem generated in industry, and could origi-
of original papers and afford them opportunity to        early exercise and free boundary conditions; para-         nate from prior internship or industry experience
give account of their work by talks in the seminar.      bolic PDEs arising from fixed income derivatives;          of the student. The student will prepare a written
                                                         implied trees for exotic derivatives, adapted trees        project report and make a presentation before a
MA 571. Financial Mathematics I                          for interest rate derivatives.                             committee including the faculty advisor, at least
Introduction to arbitrage-based pricing of deriva-                                                                  one additional WPI faculty member and represen-
                                                         Part II: Random number generation and testing;
tive securities, and their uses for hedging and risk                                                                tatives of a possible industrial sponsor. The advisor
                                                         evaluation of expected payoff by Monte Carlo
management. Topics include securities markets,                                                                      of record must be a faculty member of the WPI
                                                         simulation; variance reduction techniques—anti-
futures, options, swaps and other derivatives;                                                                      Mathematical Sciences Department. The student
                                                         thetic variables, importance sampling, martingale
arbitrage and risk-neutral pricing; binomial trees,                                                                 must submit a written project proposal for
                                                         control variables; stratification, low-discrepancy
martingales, stochastic difference equations; Black-                                                                approval by the Graduate Committee prior to reg-
                                                         sequences and quasi-Monte Carlo methods; effi-
Scholes formula and partial differential equation                                                                   istering for the project.
                                                         cient evaluation of sensitivity measures; methods
via limit transition; pricing of American options,       suitable for multifactor and term-structure depen-
convertible bonds, options on dividend-paying                                                                       MA 590. Special Topics
                                                         dent models. (Prerequisites: MA 571, undergradu-           Courses on special topics are offered under this
stock and on futures; sensitivity measures               ate level familiarity with numerical methods and
(“greeks”), implied and estimated volatilities; use                                                                 number. Contact the Mathematical Sciences
                                                         basic programming skills.)                                 Department for current offerings.
of derivatives for hedging and risk management.
                                                         MA 574. Portfolio Valuation and                            MA 595. Independent Study
MA 572. Financial Mathematics II                         Risk Management                                            1 to 3 credits
This course introduces the advanced mathematical
                                                         Balancing returns vs. risks is one of the fundamen-        Supervised independent study of a topic of mutual
concepts and terminology used at the professional
                                                         tal tasks of quantitative financial management.            interest to the instructor and the student.
quantitative financial workplace and in the litera-
                                                         This course presents the most important mathe-
ture, and provides students with the background                                                                     MA 599. Thesis
                                                         matical concepts, methods and models used to
necessary to work in the rapidly expanding fixed                                                                    1 or more credits
                                                         value assets; select, maintain and optimize portfo-
income securities sector. The first part of the                                                                     Research study at the master’s level.
                                                         lios; and to manage risks. Topics covered include
course is devoted to the concepts, terminology and
                                                         the following: returns, risks and utilities; quantifi-
methods of continuous-time mathematical
finance. Topics include Brownian motion, contin-
                                                         cation of risk—variance, shortfall risk, value at
                                                         risk; portfolio analysis, diversification, correlations,
                                                                                                                    Mathematics for
uous-time martingales. Stochastic differential
equations, Ito calculus; risk-neutral valuation in
                                                         principal components, sensitivity measures                 Educators
                                                         (“greeks”); asset valuation and pricing methods as
terms of equivalent martingale measures. The
                                                         capital markets theory, capital asset pricing model,       MME 518. Geometrical Concepts
power of the new tools is demonstrated on the                                                                       This course focuses primarily on the foundations and
                                                         efficient frontiers, arbitrage pricing theory, con-
derivation of the Black-Scholes and foreign                                                                         applications of Euclidean and non-Euclidean geome-
                                                         sumption/accumulation and equilibrium models;
exchange option pricing formulas.                                                                                   tries. The rich and diverse nature of the subject
                                                         risk management techniques—diversification,
The second part of the course is devoted to fixed        immunization, insurance/reinsurance, hedging;              also implies the need to explore other topics, for
income securities and the term-structure of inter-       optimal asset allocation, portfolio optimization           example, chaos and fractals. The course incorpo-
est rates. Topics covered in this part include fixed     and dynamic delta hedging. The quantitative tech-          rates collaborative learning and the investigation
income markets, instruments, risks and the term          niques covered in this course are used to support          of ideas through group projects. Possible topics
structure of interest rates; yield curve models, cali-   decisions by trading desk managers, corporate              include geometrical software and computer graph-
bration and fitting; pricing of interest rate deriva-    investment strategists, mutual companies, utilities,       ics, tiling and tessellations, two- and three-dimen-
tives using models based on short rates (Vasicek,        and of companies with commodities or foreign               sional geometry, inversive geometry, graphical rep-
Cox-Ingersoll-Ross), and on the static and dynam-        exchange risk exposures. (Prerequisite: MA 571.)           resentations of functions, model construction,
ic term-structure of interest rates (Ho-Lee, Black-                                                                 fundamental relationship between algebra and
Derman-Toy, Hull-White and Heath-Jarrow-


      geometry, applications of geometry, geometry            • Probability models—mathematical models used           flow, air pollution flow, group decision making,
      transformations and projective geometry, and con-         to describe and predict random phenomena.             transportation, assignment, project planning and the
      vexity.                                                   Students will learn several basic probability         critical path method, genetics, inventory control
                                                                models and their uses, and will obtain experi-        and queueing.
      MME 522. Applications of Calculus                         ence in modeling random phenomena.
      2 credits                                                                                                       MME 529. Numbers, Polynomials and
                                                              • Data analysis—the art/science of finding pat-
      There are three major goals for this course: to
                                                                terns in data and using those patterns to explain
                                                                                                                      Algebraic Structures
      establish the underlying principles of calculus, to                                                             2 credits
      reinforce students’ calculus skills through investi-      the process which produced the data. Students
                                                                                                                      This course enables secondary mathematics teach-
      gation of applications involving those skills, and to     will be able to explore and draw conclusions
                                                                                                                      ers to see how commonly taught topics such as
      give students the opportunity to develop projects         about data using computational and graphical
                                                                                                                      number systems and polynomials fit into the
      and laboratory assignments for use by first-year          methods. The iterative nature of statistical
                                                                                                                      broader context of algebra. The course will begin
      calculus students. The course will focus heavily on       exploration will be emphasized.
                                                                                                                      with treatment of arithmetic, working through
      the use of technology to solve problems involving       • Statistical inference and modeling—the use of         Euclid’s algorithm and its applications, the funda-
      applications of calculus concepts. In addition,           data sampled from a process and the probability       mental theorem of arithmetic and its applications,
      MME students will be expected to master the               model of that process to draw conclusions about       multiplicative functions, the Chinese remainder
      mathematical rigor of these calculus concepts so          the process. Students will attain proficiency in      theorem and the arithmetic of Z/n. This informa-
      that they will be better prepared to develop their        selecting, fitting and criticizing models, and in     tion will be carried over to polynomials in one
      own projects and laboratory assignments. For              drawing inference from data.                          variable over the rational and real numbers, culmi-
      example, if an MME student chose to develop a           • Design of experiments and sampling studies—           nating in the construction of root fields for poly-
      lab on convergence of sequence, he/she would be           The proper way to design experiments and              nomials via quotients of polynomial rings.
      expected to understand the rigorous definition of         sampling studies so that statistically valid infer-   Arithmetic in the Gaussian integers and the inte-
      convergence and how to apply it to gain sufficient        ences can be drawn. Special attention will be         gers in various other quadratic fields (especially
      and/or necessary conditions for convergence. The          given to the role of experiments and sampling         the field of cube roots of unity) will be explored
      process of developing these first-year calculus           studies in scientific investigation.                  through applications such as the generation of
      assignments will enable the MME students to                                                                     Pythagorean triples and solutions to other
                                                              Through lab and project work, students will
      increase their own mathematical understanding of                                                                Diophantine equations (like finding integer-sided
                                                              obtain practical skills in designing and analyzing
      concepts while learning to handle mathematical                                                                  triangles with a 60 degree angle). The course will
                                                              studies and experiments. Course topics will be
      and computer issues which will be encountered by                                                                then explore cyclotomy, and the arithmetic in
                                                              motivated whenever possible by applications and
      their own calculus students. Their understanding                                                                rings of cyclotomic integers. This will culminate
                                                              reinforced by experimental and computer lab
      of the concepts and applications of calculus will be                                                            in Gauss’ construction of the regular 5-gon and
                                                              experiences. One in-depth project per semester
      further reinforced through computer laboratory                                                                  17-gon and the impossibility of constructing a
                                                              involving design, data collection, and statistical or
      assignments and group projects. Applications                                                                    9-gon or trisecting a 60-degree angle. Finally, solu-
                                                              probabilistic analysis will serve to integrate and
      might include exponential decay of drugs in the                                                                 tions of cubics and quartics by radicals will be
                                                              consolidate student skills and understanding.
      body, optimal crankshaft design, population                                                                     studied. All topics will be based on the analysis of
                                                              Students will be expected to learn and use a statis-
      growth, or development of cruise control systems.                                                               explicit calculations with (generalized) numbers.
                                                              tical computer package such as MINITAB.
                                                                                                                      The proposed curriculum covers topics that are
      MME 523. Analysis with Applications
      2 credits
                                                              MME 526-27. Linear Models I, II                         part of the folklore for high school mathematics
                                                              4 credits                                               (the impossibility of certain ruler and compass
      This course introduces students to mathematical
                                                              This two-course sequence imparts computational          constructions), but that many teachers know only
      analysis and its use in modeling. It will emphasize
                                                              skills, particularly those involving matrices; to       as facts. There are also many applications of the
      topics of calculus (including multidimensional) in
                                                              deepen understanding of mathematical structure          ideas that will allow the teachers to use results and
      a rigorous way. These topics will be motivated by
                                                              and methods of proof; and includes discussion on        ideas from abstract algebra to construct for their
      their usefulness for understanding concepts of the
                                                              a variety of applications of the material developed,    students problems that have manageable solutions.
      calculus and for facilitating the solutions of engi-
                                                              including linear optimization. Topics in this
      neering and science problems. Projects involving
                                                              sequence may include systems of linear equations,       MME 531. Discrete Mathematics
      applications and appropriate use of technology                                                                  This course deals with concepts and methods
                                                              vector spaces, linear independence, bases, linear
      will be an essential part of the course. Topics cov-                                                            which emphasize the discrete nature in many
                                                              transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and
      ered may include dynamical systems and differen-                                                                problems and structures. The rapid growth of this
                                                              eigenvectors, systems of linear inequalities, linear
      tial equations; growth and decay; equilibrium;                                                                  branch of mathematics has been inspired by its
                                                              programming problems, basic solutions, duality
      probabilistic dynamics; optimal decisions and                                                                   wide range of applicability to diverse fields such as
                                                              and game theory. Applications may include eco-
      reward; applying, building and validating models;                                                               computer science, management, and biology. The
                                                              nomic models, computer graphics, least squares
      functions on Rn vectors; properties of functions;                                                               essential ingredients of the course are:
                                                              approximation, systems of differential equations,
      parametric equations; series; applications such as
                                                              graphs and networks, and Markov processes.              Combinatorics —
      pendulum problems; electromagnetism; vibra-
                                                                                                                      The Art of Counting. Topics include basic count-
      tions; electronics; transportation; gravitational       MME 528. Mathematical Modeling                          ing principles and methods such as recurrence
      fields; and heat loss.                                  and Problem Solving                                     relations, generating functions, the inclusion-
                                                              2 credits
      MME 524-25. Probability, Statistics                                                                             exclusion principle and the pigeonhole principle.
                                                              This course introduces students to the process of
      and Data Analysis I, II                                 developing mathematical models as a means for
                                                                                                                      Applications may include block designs, latin
      4 credits                                                                                                       squares, finite projective planes, coding theory,
                                                              solving real problems. The course will encompass        optimization and algorithmic analysis.
      This course introduces students to probability, the
                                                              several different modeling situations that utilize a
      mathematical description of random phenomena,                                                                   Graph Theory. This includes direct graphs and
                                                              variety of mathematical topics. The mathematical
      and to statistics, the science of data. Students in                                                             networks. Among the parameters to be examined
                                                              fundamentals of these topics will be discussed, but
      this course will acquire the following knowledge                                                                are traversibility, connectivity, planarity, duality
                                                              with continued reference to their use in finding the
      and skills:                                                                                                     and colorability.
                                                              solutions to problems. Problems to be covered
                                                              include balance in small group behavior, traffic

                                                                                               COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

MME 562. Seminar: Issues in
                                                       Mechanical Engineering                                   bulent flow in internal and external flows. Char-
                                                                                                                acteristics of radiant energy spectra and radiative
                                                                                                                properties of surfaces. Radiative heat transfer in
2 credits                                              Fluids Engineering                                       absorbing and emitting media. Systems with
This course gives students an opportunity to par-
ticipate in focused discussions on various topics in   ME 511. Incompressible Fluid                             combined conduction, convection and radiation.
                                                                                                                Condensation, evaporation, and boiling phenome-
mathematics and mathematics education. Students        Dynamics
will research current literature in mathematics and                                                             na. (Prerequisite: Background in thermodynamics,
                                                       An introduction to graduate level fluid dynamics
mathematics education. Invited speakers will                                                                    fluid dynamics, ordinary and partial differential
                                                       including dimensional analysis, Eulerian and
address issues relevant to a broad understanding of                                                             equations, and basic undergraduate physics.)
                                                       Lagrangian descriptions, flowlines, conservation
mathematics and its applications in our society.       equations, governing equations of viscous fluid          ME 611. Turbulence
Students will be required to synthesize and cri-       motion, exact solutions of Navier-Stokes and             Material to be covered: introduction and motiva-
tique course materials through written papers and      Euler equations, unsteady flows, laminar boundary        tion, statistical techniques for analysis, mean flow
formal presentations. The course will emphasize        layer theory, turbulence, separation, Stokes flow,       dynamics (Reynolds decomposition),
teachers as professionals and educational innova-      vorticity dynamics, potential flow and surface           Kolmogorov’s theory, instrumentation, classical
tors. The content of the course will vary depend-      flows. (Prerequisites: Fundamentals of thermo-           turbulent flows—shear layers, jets, wakes, bound-
ing on the interests of the participants. However,     dynamics and mechanics, knowledge of advanced            ary layers—and pipe flow.
topics may include careers in mathematics; mathe-      mathematics, undergraduate courses in fluid              (Prerequisites: Fundamentals of mechanics and
matics in industry; historical perspectives and the    mechanics.)                                              thermodynamics, graduate level course in fluid
motivation of mathematical development; critical                                                                mechanics and knowledge of advanced mathe-
thinking skills; impact of the NCTM curriculum         ME 512. Gas Dynamics                                     matics.)
and evaluation standards; mathematics on the           and Real Gas Effects
national scene, including the roles of MSEB, NSF,      Kinetic theory of gases including equilibrium and        ME 612. Computational Fluid
NCTM, AMS, MAA, AMATYC; mathematics                    nonequilibrium gas properties, macroscopic equa-         Dynamics
reform: then and now; mathematics anxiety; issues      tions, binary and inelastic collisions, chemical         Computational methods for incompressible and
in the teaching of developmental mathematics;          reactions. Equilibrium flows including steady and        compressible viscous flows. Navier Stokes equa-
women and minorities in mathematics; technical         unsteady shock waves, nozzle flow, Prandtl-Meyer         tions in general coordinates and grid generation
writing in mathematics; funding sources for math-      flow, theory of characteristics, effects of head addi-   techniques. Finite volume techniques including
ematics reform; and assessment in mathematics,         tion and friction, linearized compressible flow and      discretization, stability analysis, artificial viscosity,
including the SAT, the AP Calculus Exam and            acoustics. Compressible flows with vibrational,          explicit and implicit methods, flux-vector split-
ideas on alternative forms of assessment; textbooks    chemical or translational nonequilibrium includ-         ting, TVD schemes and multigrid methods. Finite
and other resources in mathematics.                    ing variable transport properties, nozzle flow and       elements. Concepts of vectorization and parallel
                                                       shock waves. (Prerequisites: Background in fluid         computing. Applications are drawn from internal,
MME 592. Project Preparation
                                                       dynamics (incompressible and compressible), ther-        external flows, materials processing. (Prerequisite:
(Part of a 3-course sequence with MME                  modynamics, and basic undergraduate physics and          Fluid dynamics and introductory course in
594 and MME 596)                                       chemistry.)                                              numerical methods.)
2 credits (ISG)
Students will research and develop a mathematical      ME 513. Thermodynamics                                   ME 613. Transport Phenomena
topic or pedagogical technique. The project will       Review of the zeroth, first and second laws of           Conservation laws, with an emphasis on the simi-
typically lead to classroom implementation; how-       thermodynamics and systems control volume.               larities between the different mechanisms for the
ever, a project involving mathematical research at     Applications of the laws to heat engines and their       transport of heat, mass and momentum. Theory
an appropriate level of rigor will also be accept-     implications regarding the properties of materials.      of molecular transport. Diffusion phenomena in
able. Preparation will be completed in conjunction     Equations of state and introduction to chemical          stationary, flowing and unsteady processes. Mass
with at least one faculty member from the              thermodynamics.                                          diffusion in chemically reacting, multiphase and
Mathematical Sciences Department and will                                                                       multicomponent systems. Computational tech-
include exhaustive research on the proposed topic.     ME 515. Computational Methods for                        niques. Selected special topics and applications
The course will result in a detailed proposal that     PDEs in Engineering Science                              may include turbulent convective flows, combus-
will be presented to the MME Project Committee         This course is devoted to the numerical solution         tion and materials processing.
for approval; continuation with the project is con-    of partial differential equations encountered in
tingent upon this approval.                            engineering sciences. Finite difference and finite       Dynamics and Controls
                                                       element methods are introduced and developed in
MME 594. Project Implementation                        a logical progression of complexity. These numeri-       ME 522. Mechanical Vibrations
2 credits (ISG)                                        cal strategies are used to solve actual problems in      Vibration analysis for both discrete and continu-
Students will implement and carry out the project      heat flow, diffusion, wave propagation, vibrations,      ous linear systems. Start with an enhanced review
developed during the project preparation course.       fluid mechanics, hydrology and solid mechanics.          of the fundamentals of single-degree-of-freedom
Periodic contact and/or observations will be made      Weekly computer exercises are required to illus-         vibration analysis. Both Newton-D’Alembert’s
by the project advisor (see MME 592 Project            trate the concepts discussed in class.                   vectorial approach and Lagrangian equations are
Preparation) in order to provide feedback and to                                                                discussed. General properties of related stiffness,
ensure completion of the proposed task. Data for the   ME 516. Heat Transfer                                    mass and damping matrices are addressed. Modal
purpose of evaluation will be collected by the stu-    Review of governing differential equations and           analysis for linear systems is emphasized.
dents throughout the term, when appropriate. If        boundary conditions for heat transfer analysis.          Computational methods in vibration analysis are
the project includes classroom implementation,         Multidimensional and unsteady conduction,                introduced. Applications include vehicles traveling
the experiment will last for the duration of a         including effects of variable material properties.       on a rough surface, multistory buildings subjected
semester.                                              Analytical and numerical solution methods.               to seismic and wind loading, and vibration analysis
                                                       Forced and free convection with laminar and tur-         of bars, beams and plates.


      ME 523. Applied Linear Control                         Lyapunov, input-output and asymptotic methods.            Salient aspects pertaining to the corrosion and
      Modeling of complex systems used in various areas      Design of stabilizing controllers using a variety of      environmental degradation of materials will be
      of engineering. Analytical description of dynamic      methods: linearization, absolute stability, sliding       discussed. This course will provide the background
      physical systems, time and frequency domain rep-       modes, adaptive, and feedback linearization.              for students in any engineering or science major
      resentations. System characteristics such as con-      Applications include control design for robot sys-        for future course and research work in materials.
      trollability, observability and stability. Design of   tems (position and trajectory control), flexible          (Prerequisites: senior or graduate standing in engi-
      feedback controllers using state-space methods         structures (vibration control), spacecraft attitude       neering or science.) Offered each year.
      including pole placement and optimal control.          control, manufacturing systems. Case studies for
                                                             systems with smart actuators/sensors (Piezo, SMA,         ME 532. Continuum Mechanics
      State observers and introduction to Kalman filters.
                                                             Magnetrostrictive), deadzones and hysteresis, etc.        Emphasis on the distinction between general prin-
      Performance limitation of control systems and
                                                             Design of control synthesis is performed using            ciples that apply to all deforming materials and
      trade-offs in control design. Design of control syn-
                                                             Matlab/Simulink. Term projects will focus on              the specific constitutive assumptions that are made
      thesis is performed using Matlab/Simulink. Term
                                                             design, analysis and implementation of current            when modeling material behavior. The course in-
      projects focus on design, analysis and implementa-
                                                             engineering control problems. (Prerequisites:             cludes a brief review of the necessary mathematics
      tion of current engineering control problems.
                                                             Differential equations and fundamentals of linear         and then proceeds to the kinematics of deformable
      (Prerequisites: Differential equation and funda-
                                                             algebra.)                                                 media, the concepts of stress and stress transfor-
      mentals of linear algebra.)
                                                                                                                       mations, and the general balance laws. The
      ME 527. Dynamics                                       ME 624. Random Vibration and                              remainder of the course deals with general consti-
                                                                                                                       tutive theory and constitutive relations for selected
      Basic concepts and general principles of classical     Mechanical Signature Analysis
      kinematics and dynamics of particles, system of                                                                  materials that have relevance to structural, fluid
                                                             Probabilistic methods in dynamics are described,
      particles, and rigid and deformable bodies are pre-                                                              dynamics, materials processing and materials han-
                                                             as they are used to predict systems’ response to
      sented. Particle motion along arbitrary trajectories                                                             dling.
                                                             highly irregular or random loadings, such as that
      is discussed in general coordinate systems. The        of civil engineering structures to earthquakes, of        ME 5325/MTE 525. Advanced
      governing equations of motion are derived by           aircraft structures to turbulent gusts, and of ships
      both Newton-D’Alembert’s vectorial approach and                                                                  Thermodynamics
                                                             and off-shore structures to ocean waves. Applica-         3 credits
      Lagrange-Hamilton’s variational approach. Applica-     tions of random vibration analyses for reliability        Thermodynamics of solutions—phase equilibria—
      tions include central-force orbital motion, binary     predictions and for mechanical signature analysis         Ellingham diagrams, binary and ternary phase dia-
      collisions, motion in noninertial reference frames,    (MSA) will be illustrated, where MSA means on-            grams, reactions between gasses and condensed
      rigid body motion, vibration of continuous sys-        line condition monitoring for an operating                phases, reactions within condensed phases, ther-
      tems and dynamic stability.                            machine or structure by using proper processing           modynamics of surfaces, defects and electrochem-
                                                             of its measured response signal. The course con-
      ME 621. Dynamics and Signal                                                                                      istry. Applications to chemical thermodynamics as
                                                             tains brief introduction into theory of probability       well as heat engines. (Prerequisites: ES 3001, ME
      Analysis                                               and theory of random processes, which makes it
      A laboratory-based course which applies Fourier                                                                  4850 or equivalent.) Offered each year.
      and cepstral signal analysis techniques to mech-
                                                                                                                       ME 533/CE 524. Finite Element
      anical engineering problems. The theory and            Structures and Materials                                  Method and Applications
      application of the Fourier series, Fast Fourier
                                                                                                                       This course serves as an introduction to the basic
      Transform (FFT) and the cepstrum to the analysis       ME 531. Applied Elasticity
                                                                                                                       theory of the finite element method. Topics cov-
      of mechanical and acoustical systems is presented.     This course is intended for students with under-
                                                                                                                       ered include matrix structural analysis variation
      Digital sampling theory, windowing, aliasing, fil-     graduate backgrounds in mechanics of materials.
                                                                                                                       form of differential equations, Ritz and weighted
      tering, noise averaging and deconvolution are          It includes two- and three-dimensional states of
                                                                                                                       residual approximations, and development of the
      discussed. Limitations of and errors in implemen-      stress, linear and nonlinear measures of strain, and
                                                                                                                       discretized domain solution. Techniques are devel-
      tation of these techniques are demonstrated.           generalized Hooke’s Law. Also covered are exact
                                                                                                                       oped in detail for the one- and two-dimensional
      Students will perform weekly experiments in the        solutions for bending and torsion: thick-walled
                                                                                                                       equilibrium problem. Examples focus on elasticity
      Structural Dynamics and Vibration Laboratory,          pressure vessels, rotating disks, stress functions for
                                                                                                                       and heat flow with reference to broader applica-
      which reinforce the theories presented in lectures.    two- and three-dimensional problems and bending
                                                                                                                       tions. Students are supplied microcomputer
      Application will include structures, acoustics,        and torsion of unsymmetric beams.
                                                                                                                       programs and gain experience in solving real prob-
      rotating machinery and cams.
                                                             ME 5310/MTE 510. Principles of                            lems. (Prerequisites: Elementary differential equa-
                                                             Materials Science and Engineering                         tions, solid mechanics and heat flow.)
      ME 622. Advanced Dynamics and
      Vibrations                                             3 credits
                                                                                                                       ME 5330/MTE 530. Crystallography,
      The course presents advanced topics in dynamics and    This course provides a comprehensive review of
                                                             the fundamental principles of materials science
                                                                                                                       Diffraction and Microscopy of
      vibrations of machines and structures. Depending
                                                             and engineering. The classical interplay among            Materials
      of the instructor, the course will include a selec-
                                                             structure-processing-properties-performance in            The fundamentals of crystallography and X-ray
      tion of the following topics: extended discussion
                                                             materials including plastics, metals, ceramics,           diffraction of metals, ceramics and polymers will
      of vibration analysis of linear systems with dis-
                                                             glasses and composites will be emphasized. The            be presented and discussed. The techniques for the
      tributed parameters, an introduction to vibration
                                                             structure in materials ranging from the subatomic         experimental determination of phase fraction and
      of nonlinear systems, numerical methods for vibra-
                                                             to the macroscopic, including nano-, micro- and           phase identification via X-ray diffraction will be
      tion analysis, random vibrations, stability of
                                                             macromolecular structures, will be discussed to           highlighted. The theory and practice of optical
      dynamic systems, flow induced vibrations and
                                                             highlight bonding mechanisms, crystallinity and           and electron microscopy will also be included.
                                                             defect patterns. Representative thermodynamic             Both scanning and transmission electron
      ME 623. Applied Nonlinear Control                      and kinetic aspects such as diffusion, phase dia-         microscopy will be theoretically and experimental-
      Introduction to the analysis and design of non-        grams, nucleation and growth, and TTT diagrams            ly investigated. (Prerequisites: ES 200 or equiva-
      linear control systems. Stability analysis using       will be discussed. Basics of elasticity, plastic defor-   lent, and senior or graduate standing in engineer-
                                                             mation and viscoelasticity will be highlighted.           ing or science.) Offered each year.

                                                                                                 COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

ME 534. Laser Engineering Science                         and discussed. A materials systems approach will       ME 543/MFE 520. Design and
and Applications                                          be used. (Prerequisites: ES 2502 and ME 3023 or        Analysis of Manufacturing Processes
In this course, a unified account of the present-         equivalent, and senior or graduate standing in         The first half of the course covers the axiomatic
day knowledge of lasers and their applications in         engineering or science.) Offered each year.            design method, applied to simultaneous product
varied professional and industrial fields will be         ME 631. Advanced Mechanics of                          and process design for concurrent engineering,
given through a series of in-class lectures and labo-                                                            with the emphasis on process and manufacturing
ratory demonstration. Special attention will be                                                                  tool design. Basic design principles as well as
                                                          This course is a continuation of ME 531.
given to factors that must be evaluated when a                                                                   qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis of
                                                          Depending on the instructor, it will include a
laser system is being devised for a specific applica-                                                            designs are developed. The second half of the
                                                          selection of the following topics: exact solutions
tion. Course coverage will include types of lasers                                                               course addresses methods of engineering analysis
                                                          for three-dimensional problems using vector
and their characteristics, shaping of laser beams,                                                               of manufacturing processes, to support machine
                                                          potentials, Hertz contact solution, energy meth-
measurement of laser beam parameters, transmis-                                                                  tool and process design. Basic types of engineering
                                                          ods, elastic stability, an overview of plates and
sion of laser beams, interaction of laser beams                                                                  analysis are applied to manufacturing situations,
                                                          shells, and an introduction to plasticity and vis-
with materials, mathematical modeling of laser                                                                   including elasticity, plasticity, heat transfer,
                                                          coelasticity theory.
processes, laser processing of materials, fiber-optic                                                            mechanics and cost analysis. Special attention will
applications of lasers, laser metrology and related       ME 632. Dynamics of Composite                          be given to the mechanics of machining (tradi-
topics.                                                   Structures                                             tional, nontraditional and grinding) and the pro-
                                                          The course covers topics related to dynamics of        duction of surfaces. Students, with the advice and
ME 5340/MTE 540. Analytical                                                                                      consent of the professor, select the topic for their
                                                          composite structures, including introduction to
Methods in Materials Engineering                                                                                 term project.
                                                          composite materials, fiber-reinforced composites,
3 credits
                                                          governing equations of motion of composite             ME 544/MFE 530. Computer-
Heat transfer and diffusion kinetics are applied to
                                                          beams, plates and shells, vibration of thick com-
the solution of materials engineering problems.                                                                  Integrated Manufacturing
                                                          posite plates and shell, and response of composite
Mathematical and numerical methods for the                                                                       An overview of computer-integrated manufactur-
                                                          structures due to impact.
solutions to Fourier’s and Pick’s laws for a variety                                                             ing (CIM). As the CIM concept attempts to inte-
of boundary conditions will be presented and dis-         ME 633/CE 526. Advanced Finite                         grate all of the business and engineering functions
cussed. The primary emphasis is given heat treat-         Element Methods                                        of a firm, this course builds on the knowledge of
ment and surface modification processes. Topics to        Second course in the theory of the finite element      computer-aided design, computer-aided manufac-
be covered include solutionizing, quenching, and          method. Topics to be covered include alternate         turing, concurrent engineering, management of
carburization heat treatment. (Prerequisites:             variational methods for formulating the finite         information systems and operations management,
ME 4840 or MTE 510 or equivalent.) Offered                element equations, methods for treating material       to demonstrate the strategic importance of
each year..                                               and geometric nonlinearities, methods for              integration.

ME 5350/MTE 550. Phase                                    transient analysis, plate and shell analysis, and an   ME 545. Computer-Aided Design and
                                                          introduction to the boundary element method.
Transformations in Materials                                                                                     Geometric Modeling
                                                          (Prerequisite: ME 533. Helpful, but not mandato-
3 credits                                                                                                        This course covers topics in computer-aided
                                                          ry to have a background in elasticity, dynamics
This course is intended to provide a fundamental                                                                 geometric design and applications in mechanical
                                                          and vibrations.)
understanding of thermodynamic and kinetic                                                                       engineering. The objectives of the course are to
principles associated with phase transformations.         ME 634. Holographic Numerical                          familiarize the students with complex geometric
The mechanisms of phase transformations will be                                                                  modeling and analytical techniques used in con-
discussed in terms of driving forces to establish a                                                              temporary computer-aided design systems. Topics
                                                          Recent advances in holographic analysis of body
theoretical background for various physical phe-                                                                 to be covered may include complex curve and
                                                          deformations are discussed. Included in the course
nomena. The principles of nucleation and growth                                                                  surface generation, Boolean algebra and solid
                                                          are topics covering sandwich holography, opto-
and spinodal transformations will be described.                                                                  modeling, transformations, computational and
                                                          electronic fringe interpolation technique, theory of
The theoretical analysis of diffusion controlled                                                                 analytic geometry, automatic mesh generation,
                                                          fringe localization, use of projection matrices and
and interface controlled growth will be presented                                                                tool path generation, offsets and intersections of
                                                          the fringe tensor theory of holographic strain
The basic concepts of martensitic transformations                                                                complex shapes, graphics standards and data trans-
                                                          analysis. The application of interactive computer
will be highlighted. Specific examples will include                                                              fer, rendering techniques, parametric design and
                                                          programs for holographic analysis of engineering
solidification, crystallization, precipitation, sinter-                                                          geometric optimization, numerical methods for
                                                          and biological systems will be outlined. Lectures
ing, phase separation and transformation toughen-                                                                geometric analysis and graphics design program-
                                                          are supplemented by laboratory demonstrations
ing. (Prerequisites: MTE 510, ME 4850 or equiv-                                                                  ming. (Prerequisites: calculus, linear algebra, com-
                                                          and experiments. (Prerequisites: Matrix algebra,
alent.) Offered each year.                                                                                       puter programming, and some familiarity with a
                                                          vector calculus and consent of instructor.)
                                                                                                                 CAD system.)
ME 5360/MTE 560. Materials
Performance and Reliability
                                                          Manufacturing and Design                               ME 641. Cam Design
3 credits                                                                                                        Basic and advanced methods of cam design for
                                                          ME 542/MFE 510. Control and
The failure and wear-out mechanisms for a variety                                                                high-speed production machinery and automotive
of materials (metals, ceramics, polymers, compos-
                                                          Monitoring of Manufacturing                            applications will be addressed. Classical as well as
ites and microelectronics) and applications will be       Processes                                              polynomial and spline-based methods will be used
presented and discussed. Multi-axial failure theo-        Covers a broad range of topics centered on control     to design cam contours. Issues of cam manufac-
ries will be discussed. A series of case studies will     and monitoring functions for manufacturing,            turing and vibrations as related to cam dynamic
be used to illustrate the basic failure mechanisms        including process control, feedback systems, data      behavior will be discussed. Practical aspects of cam
of plastic deformation, creep, fracture, fatigue,         collection and analysis, scheduling, machine-          design will be exercised through projects and labo-
wear and corrosion. The methodology and tech-             computer interfacing, and distributed control.         ratory assignments. (Recommended background:
niques for reliability analysis will also be presented    Typical applications are considered with lab work.     Undergraduate level courses in kinematics and


      vibrations. Familiarity with the techniques of         authorities in their fields. All full-time mechanical   PH 511. Classical Mechanics
      dynamic signal analysis [ME 621] would be              engineering students are required to register.          Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulations. Rigid
      helpful.)                                                                                                      body motion. Poisson brackets, Hamilton-Jacobi
                                                             ME 593. Special Topics
                                                                                                                     theory. (Prerequisite: B.S. in physics or equiva-
      Biomechanical Engineering                              Arranged by individual faculty with special exper-
                                                             tise, these courses survey fundamentals in areas
      ME/BE 550. Tissue Engineering                          that are not covered by the regular mechanical
      This biomaterials course focuses on the selection,                                                             PH 514. Quantum Mechanics I
                                                             engineering course offerings. Exact course descrip-     Schrodinger wave equation, potential wells and
      processing, testing and performance of materials       tions are disseminated by the Mechanical Engi-
      used in biomedical applications with special                                                                   barriers, harmonic oscillator, hydrogen atom,
                                                             neering Department well in advance of the offer-        angular momentum and spin. (Prerequisite: B.S.
      emphasis upon tissue engineering. Topics include       ing. (Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.)
      material selection and processing, mechanisms and                                                              in physics or equivalent.)
      kinetics of material degradation, cell-material        ME 598. Directed Research                               PH 515. Quantum Mechanics II
      interactions and interfaces; effect of construct       For M.S. students wishing to gain research experi-      Perturbation theory, scattering theory, Born
      architecture on tissue growth; and transport           ence peripheral to their thesis topic, or for doctor-   approximation, quantum theory of radiation, the
      through engineered tissues. Examples of engineer-      al students wishing to obtain research credit prior     Dirac equation. (Prerequisite: PH 514.)
      ing tissues for replacing cartilage, bone, tendons,    to admission to candidacy.
      ligaments, skin and liver will be presented.                                                                   PH 522. Thermodynamics and
      (Recommended preparation: A first course in bio-       ME 599. Thesis Research                                 Statistical Mechanics
      materials equivalent to ME/BE 4814 and a basic         For master’s students wishing to obtain research        Ensemble theory; canonical, microcanonical and
      understanding of physiology and cell biology.)         credit toward their thesis. (Prerequisite: Consent      grand canonical ensembles. Quantum statistical
                                                             of Thesis Advisor.)                                     mechanics, Bose-Einstein and Fermi-Dirac statis-
      ME/BE 552. Tissue Mechanics                                                                                    tics. (Prerequisite: PH 511.)
      This biomechanics course focuses on advanced           ME 693. Advanced Special Topics
      techniques for the characterization of the struc-      Arranged by individual faculty with special exper-      PH 533. Advanced Electromagnetic
      ture and function of hard and soft tissues, and        tise, these courses cover advanced topics that are
      their relationship to physiological processes.         not covered by the regular mechanical engineering
                                                                                                                     Classical electrodynamics including boundary-
      Applications include tissue injury, wound healing,     course offerings. Exact course descriptions are
                                                                                                                     value problems using Green’s functions. Maxwell’s
      the effect of pathological conditions upon tissue      disseminated by the Mechanical Engineering
                                                                                                                     equations, electromagnetic properties of matter,
      properties and design of medical devices and pros-     Department well in advance of the offering.
                                                                                                                     wave propagation and radiation theory.
      theses. (Recommended preparation: A first course       (Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.)
                                                                                                                     (Prerequisite: B.S. in physics or equivalent.)
      in biomechanics equivalent to ME/BE 4504.)
                                                             ME 698. Predissertation Research
                                                                                                                     PH 542. Modern Optics
      ME/BE 554. Composites with                             Intended for doctoral students wishing to obtain
                                                                                                                     Geometrical optics, scalar diffraction theory,
      Biomedical and Materials Applications                  research credit prior to admission to candidacy.
                                                                                                                     coherence and Fourier optics. Holography and
      Introduction to fiber/particulate reinforced, engi-    (Prerequisite: Consent of Dissertation Advisor.)
                                                                                                                     laser physics.
      neered and biologic materials. This course focuses     ME 699. Dissertation Research
      on the elastic description and application of                                                                  PH 554. Solid-State Physics
                                                             Intended for doctoral students admitted to candi-
      materials that are made up of a combination of                                                                 Phonons and specific heat of solids; electronic
                                                             dacy wishing to obtain research credit toward their
      submaterials, i.e., composites. Emphasis will be                                                               conductivity and band theory of solids; Fermi and
                                                             dissertations. (Prerequisite: Consent of
      placed on the development of constitutive equa-                                                                Bose gases; magnetic interactions. (Prerequisite:
                                                             Dissertation Advisor.)
      tions that define mechanical behavior of a number                                                              PH 514.)
      of applications including: biomaterial, tissue, and
      material science. (Prerequisites: Understanding of     Physics                                                 PH 597. Special Topics
                                                                                                                     Credits as arranged
      stress analysis and basic continuum mechanics.)
                                                             PH 501. Mathematical Methods of                         Titles of recently offered courses include Super-
      ME/BE 558. Biofluids and                               Physics I                                               lattices and Semiconductor Heterostructures,
      Biotransport                                           Vector calculus, special functions, calculus of vari-   Numerical Methods in Physics, Topics in 20th
      The emphasis of this course is on modeling fluid       ations, linear transformation theory, Green’s func-     Century Physics, Excitations and Wave Inter-
      flow within the cardiovascular and pulmonary sys-      tions, complex variables and integral equations.        actions, and Wave Interactions in Crystals.
      tems, and the transport processes that take place      Course may be offered by special arrangement.
                                                                                                                     PH 597P. Special Topics: Photonics
      in these systems. Applications include artificial
      heart valves, atherosclerosis, arterial impedance      PH 502. Mathematical Methods of                         Fiber optics, lasers, light emitting diodes, pho-
                                                             Physics II                                              todetectors, planar optical waveguides, fiber lasers
      matching, clinical diagnosis, respiration, aerosol
                                                             Probability theory, harmonic analysis, integral         and fiber amplifiers. (Prerequisite: a B.S. degree in
      and particle deposition. Depending upon class
                                                             equations and functions of a complex variable.          physics or equivalent.)
      interest, additional topics may include reproduc-
      tive fluids, animal propulsion in air and water, and   Course may be offered by special arrangement.           PH 616. Quantum Mechanics III
      viscoelastic testing.                                                                                          Quantum theory of radiation and introduction to
                                                             PH 503. Group Theory
      (Recommended preparation: A first course in                                                                    quantum field theory. Course may be offered by
                                                             Theory of group representations; point groups and
      biofluids equivalent to ME/BE 4606.)                                                                           special arrangement.(Prerequisite: PH 515.)
                                                             continuous groups of physical interest; applica-
                                                             tions to molecular vibrations, crystal properties,
      Other Activities                                                                                               PH 634. Electrodynamics
                                                             quantum mechanics and particle physics. Course          Classical electron theory, retarded potentials, radi-
      ME 591. Graduate Seminar                               may be offered by special arrangement.                  ation. Course may be offered by special arrange-
      0 credit                                                                                                       ment. (Prerequisite: PH 533.)
      Seminars on current issues related to various areas
      of mechanical engineering are presented by

                                                        COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PH 644. Seminar in the Interaction of
Radiation and Matter
Quantum theory of radiation, interacting systems,
magnetic resonance, laser models and relaxation
phenomena. Course may be offered by special

PH 656. Quantum Theory of Solids
Advanced topics in the quantum theory of solids.
Course may be offered by special
arrangement.(Prerequisite: PH 554.)

Directed Research
A directed and coherent program of research that,
in most cases, will eventually lead to thesis or dis-
sertation research.

M.S. Thesis Research
Each student will work under the supervision of a
member of the department on an experimental or
theoretical problem.

      Academic Policies 8                          Application for Admission                 Branche, G. C. 70                           Computational Methods for PDEs in
      Academic Standards 9                              to Graduate Study 8, 12              Brocard, D. N. 44                              Engineering Science 107
      Acoustic and Ultrasound Engineering 93       Application of Industrial Robotics 101    Brown, C. A. 61, 65, 76                     Computational Methods
                                                   Application Requirements 15               Brown, D. 54                                   of Financial Mathematics 105
      Adams, D. S. 28
                                                   Applications of Calculus 106              Brown, D. C. 49, 61                         Computer and
      Adaptive Space-Time Filtering and
                                                   Applied Elasticity 108                                                                   Communications Networks 45
          Spectral Estimation 94                                                             Buell, E. R. 70
                                                   Applied Linear Control 108                                                            Computer and Communications Networks
      Admission 13                                                                           Building Firesafety I 96
                                                                                                                                            Internship 46, 92, 95
      Advanced Analog Integrated Circuit           Applied Mathematics Program 66            Building Systems 90
                                                                                                                                         Computer Architecture 92
          Design 93                                Applied Nonlinear Control 108             Burnham, N. A. 78, 79
                                                                                                                                         Computer Architecture Laboratory 50
      Advanced Applied Biology 81                  Applied Regression Analysis 104           Business Analysis
                                                                                                                                         Computer Graphics 91
      Advanced Casting Research Center             Applied Statistics Program 66                 for Technological Managers 98
          (ACRC) 64                                                                                                                      Computer Laboratory 43
                                                   Applying to WPI 12                        Cam Design 109
      Advanced Certificate Programs 7                                                                                                    Computer Resources 24
                                                   Aravind, P. K. 78, 79                     Camesano, T. A. 33, 38
      Advanced Computer and Communications                                                                                               Computer Science 47, 90
                                                   Argüello, J. M. 40                        Campus Police 24
          Networks 92, 94                                                                                                                Computer Science Laboratories 47
                                                   Artificial Intelligence 91                Career Development Center 24
      Advanced Cost Estimating Procedures 90                                                                                             Computer Security 95
                                                   Artificial Intelligence in Design 91      Carney, J. F., III 44
      Advanced Cryptography 95                                                                                                           Computer Vision 92
                                                   Audit Rate 17                             Carrington, W. A. 33
      Advanced Design of Reinforced Concrete                                                                                             Computer-Aided Design
                                                   Audit Registration 19                     Catalysis and Reaction Engineering 35
          Structures 87                                                                                                                     and Geometric Modeling 109
                                                   Ault, H. K. 33, 76                        Catalysis and Surface Science
      Advanced Design of Steel Structures 87                                                                                             Computer-Integrated
                                                   Bachelor’s/Master’s Program 8, 21             of Materials 84
      Advanced Distance Learning Network                                                                                                    Manufacturing 101, 109
                                                   Bacterial Adhesion to Biomaterial 30      Catalyst and Reaction Engineering
          (ADLN) 23                                                                                                                      Connolly, V. 70
                                                   Bacterial and Biopolymer Interactions         Laboratory (CREL) 37
      Advanced Dynamics and Vibrations 108                                                                                               Connors, R. E. 40
                                                        in the Aquatic Environment 36        Cellular Biology, Advanced Genetics and
      Advanced Ecological and Evolutionary                                                       81                                      Consortium 9
                                                   Bagshaw, J. C. 28, 34
          Bioscience 81                                                                      Center for Firesafety Studies 55            Constructed Facilities Seminar 90
                                                   Banks, M. C. 59
      Advanced Electromagnetic Theory 110                                                    Center for Heat Treating Excellence         Construction Failures:
                                                   Bar-On, I. 65, 76                                                                        Analysis and Lessons 87
      Advanced Finite Element Methods 87, 109                                                    (CHTE) 64
                                                   Barnett, J. R. 56                                                                     Construction Project Management 42
      Advanced Fire Suppression 96                                                           Center for Holographic Studies and Laser
                                                   Beall, H. 40                                                                          Continuing and Professional Education
      Advanced Foundation Engineering 88                                                         Technology, (CHSLT) 72
                                                   Becker, L. A. 49                                                                         Programs 9
      Advanced Genetics and Cellular Biology 81                                              Center for Industrial Mathematics and
                                                   Bergendahl, J. 44                             Statistics 67                           Continuum Mechanics 108
      Advanced Integrative Bioscience 81
                                                   Berka, L. H. 40                           Center for Inorganic Membrane Studies 38    Contracts and Law for Civil Engineers 89
      Advanced Matrix Analysis 87
                                                   Biederman, R. R. 61, 65, 76               Center for Sensory and Physiologic Signal   Control and Monitoring of Manufacturing
      Advanced Mechanics of Solids 109
                                                   Billiar, K. L. 33                             Processing — C(SP)2 51                     Processes 101, 109
      Advanced Principles of Wastewater
          Treatment 88                             Biochemical Engineering 35, 84            Center for Wireless Information             Controls Laboratory 71
      Advanced Principles of Water Treatment 88    Biochemistry I, II, III 86                    Networking Studi